PRESCRIPTIONS 
AND 
HOW TO USE THEM. 
AN ANATOMICAL AND PHYSIOLOGICAL TREATISE 
ON THE 
HUMAN•BODY 
WITH A PRACTICAL DESCRIPTION OF ITS 
DISEASES 
THEIR SYMPTOMS AND TREATMENT. 
" For life is not to live, but to be well."—MARTIAL. 
Anatomy and Physiology 
by PROF. GEORGE HENGKEL. 
Diseases and their Treatment 
By ORVILLE JUAN PERKINS, M. D. 
VOLUME I. 
Chicago, III. 
HENCKEL & PERKINS, 
265-269 Dearborn St. Entered according to Act of Congress in the year 1891, by 
HENCKEL & PERKINS, 
In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington, D.C. 
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PREFACE. 
While preparing the following pages, we have had constantly in 
view a desire to make the work one which should be of practical 
utility. How well we have succeeded, our readers must judge. 
Hitherto medical works for home use, have devoted more space to 
the description of the remedies used than to the disease treated. 
We have reversed this plan, and given the space usually allotted to 
medicines, to a description of the symptoms and causes, appending as a 
remedy, a properly prepared prescription, which is quadruplicated 
in Vol. III. This we believe a valuable feature. We have also 
recognized the importance of medical advice, and have striven to 
make it clear when to call a physician as well as to describe the 
diseases which are safely treated without one. Knowing that 
nursing is of as great value in appeasing offended nature as 
medicine, we have devoted considerable space to this important 
subject in addition to specific directions given under many diseases. 
Our aim is to educate, and to this end we have endeavored to 
present a comprehensive description of the human body, its organs, 
their functions, with such hygienic instructions as will enable our 
readers to preserve these various organs in the best possible con- 
dition. The public schools have done, and are doing, a grand work 
in the line of physiological instruction, but unfortunately, at the 
time when the adult population were in school this branch was not 
taught. This class—and they are in a large majority—will be 
directly benefited by a thorough study of Part I of these volumes. 
The student who wishes to pursue the subject beyond what is taught 
in the school, is here furnished with an appropriate means for so 
doing. 
We do not anticipate any antagonism from the medical fraternity, 
as the purpose of the true physician is as much to prevent disease as 
to cure it, and we feel satisfied that these pages will meet the 
approval of this class. As to the other, the reader will find our 
opinion of them expressed at various places through these volumes. 
For the former class we have nothing but words of praise; within PREFACE. 
their ranks are the most self-sacrificing, tender-hearted, sympathetic 
members of society. They stand alone among all others, striving 
with might and main to extinguish their own business. They preach 
temperance, virtue and cleanliness, knowing well that when the 
people come to practice these virtues, their occupation will be 
gone. If those engaged in other professions and lines of business, 
gave as much of their labor in charity as doctors do, poverty would 
be a thing of the past. 
Dr. Richardson, a gentleman who stands high in medical ranks, 
says that seventy per cent, of all diseases could be treated without 
calling a physician, provided the people would study their causes, 
symptoms, etc., and the hygienic measures for their prevention. To 
assist in educating the masses to this standard is certainly an object 
worthy the best efforts of the most ambitious. We realize, however, 
that the task is an arduous one; that customs and habits long 
established must be overcome. “Utopia” is a long way off, and 
“ Hygiea” is a most fickle goddess. It is however, desirable that 
we should aim to make the teachings of physiological science the 
precepts of our daily life and conduct. We may not be able to 
reach our ideal, but progress will be advanced by striving to make 
its attainment an object. 
“Modern science and humanity have done a great deal to keep 
off disease, and bring down the average death rate in favored com- 
munities. Why should it not be so? If life is the due harmony 
between internal and external conditions of our being, whatever 
helps the proper adjustment by keeping off external or internal dis- 
turbance, must strengthen or prolong life. In a certain sense all 
nature is our enemy, and earth, air, water, all elements and 
creatures, are watching to find our vulnerable point. Now all true 
science is the triumph of the human spirit over the tyranny of nature, 
and all the sciences and arts of health, all safeguards against 
infection by proper management of water courses and miasmatic 
grounds, all preventive measures against the great contagions that 
ravage the earth, not only save individual lives, but keep evil germs 
out of the human constitution, and act upon the general vitality of 
the race. So, too, all efforts to act wisely upon the springs of con- 
duct and character, to promote the domestic virtues of order and 
purity, the proper care of infant children, the thrift of the laboring 
classes, the due training of youth in a wholesome round of activity 
and recreation, tend to prolong life in the community where the 
efforts are made, and to tell to a certain extent upon the sanity of 
the nation and the race.” CONTENTS. 
PART FIRST. 
ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY. 
In i -iODUCTION XV. 
Chapter I. 
Bone.—Structure—Physical Properties—Periosteum—Marrow— 
Minute Anatomy—Composition. 
The Skeleton.—Classification of Bone in same—Description. ... 32 
Chapter II. 
The Articulations.— Cartilage—Ligaments—Synovial Membrane 
—Description 35 
Chapter III. 
The Skin.—Description—Nails—Hair—Uses of Hair—Perspi- 
ration 45 
Chapter IV. 
The Muscles.— Description — Fasciae — Tendons — Elasticity— 
Tonicity—Sensibility—Irritability 58 
Chapter V. 
The Blood and Bloodvessels.-—Composition—Corpuscles—Constit- 
uents—Heart—Arteries—Capillaries — Veins— Heart Ac- 
tion—Circulation 82 
Chapter VI. 
The Digestive System.—Hunger and Thirst—Alimentation—Food 
—Composition of Food—Digestion—Teeth—Prehension—• 
Mastication—Insalivation — Deglutition—Chymification— 
Intestinal Digestion—Gastric Juice and Observation on the 
Same—Period of Stomach Digestion—Villi—Accessory 
Organs of Digestion—Pancreas—Liver—Spleen 121 
Chapter VII. 
Absorption.—Lacteals—Thoracic Duct—Lymphatics—Skin ... 126 CONTENTS. 
Chapter VIII. 
Respiration. — Voice.—Larynx—Vocal Chords—Trachea — Lungs 
—Inspiration—Expiration—Changes effected during Res- 
piration in Air and Blood—Oxygen 138 
Chapter IX. 
The Urinary Organs.—Kidneys—Bladder—Urine 143 
Chapter X. 
The Nervous System.—Cells—Fibers — Nerve Force—Encepha- 
lon—Medulla Oblongata—Cranial Nerves—Spinal Cord— 
Spinal Nerves—Functions 163 
Chapter XI. 
The Sympathetic Nervous System.—Description—Functions. 168 
Chapter XII. 
The Senses.—Touch—Taste—Smell—Sight—Hearing—Descrip- 
tion 186 
Chapter XIII. 
Hygienic Topics.—Houses—Water Closets—Outhouses—I )isin- 
fection—Water 193 
Chapter XIV. 
Miscellaneous Topics.—Beauty-— Physical Training —Washing 
and Bathing — Amusements —Occupation—Sleep—Dreams 
—Light—Habits—Treating—Opium—Tobacco—Alcohol— 
Life—Death 208 
PART SECOND. 
DISEASES: SYMPTOMS AND TREATMENT. 
Introduction 211 
Chapter I. 
Prescriptions.—Description—Dose Table 215 
Chapter II. 
Diseases.—Definition, Classes, Etc 220 
Chapter III. 
Causes of Diseases.—(Etiology)—Opium—Alcohol — Tobacco— 
Late Hours—Broken Sleep—Errors of Dress—Change of 
Clothing 233 CONTENTS. 
Chapter IV. 
Symptoms and Their Study.—Pulse—Temperature of the Body— 
Howto ta ke Temperature—Tongue 240 
Chapter V. 
Diseases of the Bones and Joints.—Rickets—Felons—Whitlow— 
Sprains—Dislocations—Hip-joint Disease—Curvature of 
the Spine—Clubfoot—Knock Knee—Bow Legs—Flat FWot 
—Wry Neck 248 
Chapter VI. 
Diseases of the Skin and Muscles.—Parasites—Lice—Baldness— 
Dandruff—Corns—Bunions—Ingrown Nails—Chilblains— 
Cold FVet—Burning of Feet—Sweating of Feet—Care of 
Feet—Warts—Barber’s Itch—Pimples—Moth Patches— 
Sunburn — Freckles—Salt Rheum — Hives—Rose Rash— 
Ringworm — Itch — Erysipelas — Muscular Rheumatism- 
Muscular Cramps 276 
Chapter VII. 
Diseases of the Blood and its Vessels.—Nose Bleed—Scrofula— 
Anaemia—Scurvy—Valvular Disease of the Heart—Func- 
tional Disease of the Heart—Neuralgia of the Heart—Ex- 
ophthalmic Goitre—Inflammation of the Heart Sac—Rup- 
ture of the Heart—Varicose Veins—Blood Poisoning 292 
Chapter VIII. 
Diseases of the Digestive Organs.—Canker Sore—Mercurial Sore 
Mouth-—■ Thrush—Aphthae—Sore Mouth—Sore Throat— 
Clergymen’s Sore Throat—Quinsy—Chronic Tonsilitis— 
Mumps—Inflammation of the Stomach — Gastric Fever— 
Sick Headache—Dyspepsia—Diarrhoea— Dysentery—Epi- 
demic Dysentery—Constipation—Intestinal Colic—Hepatic 
Colic—Cholera Morbus—Lead Colic—Peritonitis—Dropsy 
of the Peritoneum—Enlargement of the Spleen — Liver 
Disease—Hobnailed Liver—Jaundice—Functional Affection 
of the Liver 336 
Chapter IX. 
Diseases of the Respiratory Organs.—Cold in the Head—Catarrh 
—Croup—Winter Cough—Whooping Cough—Hiccough— 
Asthma—Bronchitis—Chronic Bronchitis—LaGrippe—Pleu- 
risy—Chronic Pleurisy—Hydrothorax—Inflammation of the 
Lung—Pneumonia—Consumption of the Lung 365 
Chapter X. 
Diseases of the Urinary Organs.—Bright’s Disease—Diabetes— 
Gravel—Incontinence of Urine—Retention of Urine— 
Bloody Urine. 373 CONTENTS. 
Chapter XI. 
Diseases of the Nervous System.—Delirium Tremens—Hydro- 
phobia—St. Vitus Dance—Apoplexy—Sunstroke—Menin- 
gitis— Palsy — Vertigo— Lockjaw—Hysteria—Epilepsy— 
Nervous Headache—Hypochondriasis—Insomnia—Neural- 
gia—Sciatic Neuralgia—Convulsions in Children—Stam- 
mering and Stuttering 400 
Chapter XII. 
General Diseases. —Articular Rheu mat i sm— D i p ht h e r i a—Measles 
—Scarlet Fever—Smal lPox—Chicken Pox—Varioloid— 
Fever — Malaria — Breakdown Fever — Typhoid Fever— 
Asiatic Cholera—Cholera Infantum — Cancer—Worms— 
Tape Worm 432 
Chapter XIII. 
Miscellaneous Diseases.—Diseases of the Fye—Ear—Nose—Boil 
—Carbuncle—Choking—Piles—Chafing—Rupture — Faint- 
ing—Burns and Scalds—Wounds—Frost Bites—Diarrhoea in 
Children—Spice Plaster—Soothing Syrups—-Toothache— 
Cholera Mixture—Fat and Lean 449 
Chapter XIV. 
Poison and its Antidotes—Snake Bites—Insect Bites—Poison- 
ous Plants 457 
Choosing a Physician • 459 
Chapter XV. 
The Nurse and Nursing.—Useful Hints upon the Subject—Sick 
Room Cookery—Peptonized Food—Mosquera’s Beef Meal 
and Cocoa 480 
Chapter XVI. 
Domestic Recipes.—Koumiss—Lime Water—Carbolized Water— 
Carbolized Oil—Camphorated Oil—Mucilage—Ginger- 
Peppermint — Camphor—Lemon—Salves—Ointments—Fo- 
mentations—White Liniment—Poultices—Clysters 487 
Chapter XVII. 
Miscellaneous Toilet Recipes 491 
Useful Recipes 493 
Glossary 500 
Index LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. 
NO. TITLE. PAGE. 
1. Minute Anatomy of Bone 18 
2. Minute Anatomy of Bone 18 
3. Skeleton Fig. i Front View (full page) 21 
4. Skeleton Fig. 2 Side View (full page)- 21 
5. Male Pelvis (adult) (full page) 30 
6 Female Pelvis (adult) (full page) 30 
7. Sectional Views of Skin 37 
8. The Muscular System (full page) 53 
9. Valvular Action of the FIeart 67 
10. The Heart and the Arch of the Aorta 71 
11. Internal Organs (full page) 81 
12. Temporary • Teeth 95 
13. Permanent Teeth 95 
14. Sectional View of Nose, Mouth (full page) Pharynx, 
Larynx, Trachea, (Esophagus 101 
15. Villi m 
16. Trachea and Bronchial Tubes 127 
17. Vertical Section through Kidney 140 
18. The Nervous System (full page) 145 
19. The Sympathetic Nerves (full page) 165 
20. Horizontal Section through Eyebali 175 
21. The Ear 182 
22. Dislocations 246 PART FIRST 
Anatomy and Physiology. 
BY 
PROF. GEORGE HENCKEL. INTRODUCTION. 
HUMAN ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY. 
Anatomy is the science which treats of the structure 
of organic bodies, and Physiology is the study of the phe- 
nomena of living organisms. 
These branches of science make us acquainted with 
the processes incidental to, and characteristic of life. Also 
the conditions, manifestations, changes and results of life, 
including- the mechanism of, and chemical alterations in 
the body, are revealed to mankind, through the researches 
which have been made in the field of these sciences. 
They also teach us all that can be known of the 
living organisms in a state of activity, with the different 
parts performing their appropriate functions, and these, as 
a whole, exhibit the character of individuality and life. 
The entire body is a composite structure, made up of 
many parts, with varied characters and properties, and the 
life of the organism as a whole depends on the combined 
activity of its different parts. 
Therefore, in studying its functions, we must lay aside 
previously formed ideas, simply for the purpose of com- 
parison, and consider the living body as a machine. 
Anatomy and Physiology go hand in hand, and from 
them we may learn : 
The construction of the body, in whole and in part. 
Its mechanism. 
The materials with which it is supplied. 
The chemical changes which take place in its internal 
nutrition. introduction. 
And the phenomena exhibited in every department of 
vital operations. 
The human body is to be used, but when it is misused, 
consequences ensue, which are commonly called Disease. 
In order to ward off, or combat disease, a knowledge 
is necessary of that most wonderful chemico-mechanical 
machine, The Human Body. 
To impart this, is the sole aim of the first part of this 
volume. 
The old Romans had a saying, “ Homo sum ; humani 
nihil a me alienum puto'd meaning “ I am a man, and deem 
nothing that relates to man a matter of indifference to me.” 
If you take this as one of your precepts, you will be a 
better, wiser and healthier member of the human family. CHAPTER I. 
Every civilized human being, babies and imbeciles ex- 
cepted, knows of the legend, that a certain one of our 
ancestors was created out of clay, and for this reason, it 
is perhaps proper in describing the human body, to com- 
mence with that part of it, which partakes of earthy matter, 
to such a wonderful degree in its composition. 
BONE. 
Structure and Physical Properties. This part 
of the human anatomy is a very hard mass, possessing a 
certain degree of toughness, and is not entirely void of 
elasticity. 
In a fresh state, its color is of a pinkish white on the 
outside, and deep red within. On examining a section 
of any animal’s bone, it is seen to be composed of two 
kinds of tissue, one of which is dense and compact in text- 
ure like ivory ; the other consists of slight fibers which 
join and form a latticework-like structure, and is called 
the cancellous tissue. The compact tissue is always on the 
external part of the bone, while the latter, or cancellous 
tissue, forms the internal part. 
Bone during life is permeated by vessels and is in- 
closed in the periosteum. 
The Periosteum, which according to Web- 
ster, “round the bone,1’ is a membrane of fibrous con- 
nective tissue, which closely invests all bones except at 
the articular surfaces or joints. It is in the periosteum 18 
THE MARROW. 
where the bloodvessels are ramified, previous to their 
distribution in the bone. 
The Marrow not only fills up the cylindrical cavities 
of the long bones, but also occupies the spaces of the can- 
cellous tissue. 
The Bloodvessels of bone are very numerous. 
As said before, they are ramified in the periosteum, 
from which membrane they pass into small orifices of the 
compact tissue, running thence through the canals therein, 
and which traverse its substance. 
The Minute Anatomy of the bone structure 
is most easily studied and comprehended by looking 
at the illustrations given here upon that subject, as well 
as the explanatory notes in connection with them. 
Engraving No. 1. 
Engraving No. 2. 
Transverse section of the shaft of the Hu- 
merus. Magnified 350 times. 
a. Haversian canal. />, c, d. Lacunae. 
Longitudinal section from the shaft of the 
Femur. Magnified 100 times. 
a. Haversian canals, b, and c. Lacunae. 
Chemical Composition. Bone consists of an ani- 
mal and an earthy part, intimately connected together CHEMICAL COMPOSITION. 
19 
The animal part of a bone may be obtained by immers- 
ing the bone for a considerable time in diluted hydrochloric 
acid, after which process, the bone comes out exactly the 
same shape as before, but perfectly flexible, so that a long 
bone, for instance the rib of a sheep or hog, can easily be 
tied in a knot. 
The earthy part may be obtained separate by calcina- 
tion, by which the animal matter is completely burnt out. 
After this process, the bone will retain its original form, 
but white in color and very brittle. It also loses by it 
about one-third its original weight, and will easily crumble. 
The earthy matter confers on bone its hardness and 
rigidity, and the animal matter its tenacity. 
The organic constituents of bone forms one-third; the 
inorganic matter two-thirds or 66§ per cent., as seen in the 
following analysis by Berzelius, the Nestor of chemistry. 
Organic Matter, such as gelatine and bloodvessels, 33.30 
Phosphate of Lime, 51.04 
Carbonate of Lime, 11.30 
Fluoride of Calcium, 2 00 
Phosphate of Magnesia, 1.16 
Soda and Chloride of Sodium, 1.20 
Inorganic 
or 
Earthy Matter, 
From the above it will be seen that lime forms over 
62 per cent, of its component parts. 
Some difference, however, exists between the two con- 
stituents of bone, organic and inorganic or earthy matter, 
at different periods of life. In the child the animal matter 
predominates, whereas in aged people the bones contain 
a larger proportion of earthy matter, and the animal matter 
is deficient in quantity and quality. Hence in children it 
is not uncommon to find after an injury to the bones, that 
they become bent or only partially broken, whereas in old 
people the bones are more brittle, and fracture takes place 
more readily. Some of the diseases also to which bones 
are liable, mainly depend upon the disproportion between 
100.00 THE HUMAN SKELETON. 
Explanation of numbers on engraving. 
There are two hundred bones in a human skeleton, divided as 
follows : 
Skull, 22 Bones. 
No. of Each. 
No. 1. Occipital. 1 
“ 2. Parietal 2 
“ 3. Frontal 1 
“ 4. Temporal 2 
“ 5. Nasal 2 
“ 6. Upper Jaw 2 
“ 7. Malar 2 
No. of Each. 
Inferior Maxillary .... i 
Sphenoid. i 
Ethmoid i 
Lachrymal 2 
Palate ......... 2 
Inferior Turbinated 2 
Vomer 1 
22 
No. 8. 
Invisible 
on Engraving. 
Spine, 26 Bones. 
No. 9. Cervical Vertebrae 7 
“ 10. Dorsal Vertebrae 12 
(seven are hidden by sternum.) 
No. ir. Lumbar Vertebrae 5 
“ 12. Sacrum 1 
“ 13. Coccyx 1 
26 
Miscellaneous, 26 Bones. 
No. 14. Hyoid or tongue bone.... x 
“ 15. Sternum i 
No. 16. Ribs.... . 24 
26 
Upper Extremity, 64 Bones. 
No. 17. Clavicle or Collar Bone.. 2 
“ 18 Scapula or Shoulder Blade 2 
*’ 19. Humerus 2 
“ 20. Radius 2 
No. 21. Ulna 2 
“ 22. Carpal or Wrist 16 
“ 23. Metacarpal 10 
“ 24. Phalanges or finger bones.. 23 
64 
Each wrist has eight carpal bones, named as follows: Scaphoid, 
semilunar, cuneiform, pisiform (all in upper row), trapezium, trapezoid, 
os magnum and unciform (in lower row). 
Lower Extremity, 62 Bones. 
No. 25. InnominatefA, Pubes; B, 
pubic arch) 2 
“ 26. Femur or 1 high (A, head; 
B, neck) 2 
“ 27. Fibula 2 
Nc. 28. Tibia 2 
“ 29. Patella, or Knee-pan 2 
“ 30. Tarsal (A, heel bone) .... 14 
“ 31. Metatarsal 10 
“ 32. Phalanges 28 
62 
20 ■ THE SKELETON. 
23 
the two constituents of bone. Thus in the diseases called 
rickets, so common with certain children, the bones become 
bent and curved from the weight of the body upon them. 
This shows plainly that if the bones were constituted 
chemically correct, this curvature and excessive flexibility 
could not take place. 
The aggregation of all the bones in the human body, 
when in their relative position forms a framework, harbor- 
ing in its cavities, and having attached to it the softer 
parts, and constitutes, what is usually called : 
THE SKELETON. 
d'he entire skeleton in the adult consists of two hun- 
dred distinct bones. Their regional classification is as 
follows: 
Spine 26 bones. 
Skull 22 “ 
Tongue bone, Sternum and Ribs 26 “ 
Upper Extremities 64 “ 
Lower Extremities 62 “ 
200 
Special attention is invited to the full page engravings 
of the human skeleton, giving front and side view, together 
with the index of the names of the different bones. 
Bones are divided into four classes, Long, Short, Elat 
and Irregular. 
Long Bones are found in the limbs, where they form 
a system of levers, which have to sustain the weight of the 
trunk and to confer the power of locomotion. The bones 
belonging to this class are the humerus, radius, ulna, femur, 
tibia, fibula, metacarpal, metatarsal and phalanges. The 
clavicle or collar bone also belong to this group. 
Short Bones are found in that part of the body 
where strength and compactness are required, and not much 
motion. To this class belong the carpal, tarsal and some 
of the bones of the skull. 24 
FLAT BONES. 
Flat Bones are those where the principal require- 
ment is either an extensive protection, or the provision of 
broad surfaces for the attachment of muscles, tendons, etc. 
Among the flat bones are counted nearly all the bones of 
the skull, shoulder blade, bones of the pelvis, except the 
backbone part, breast bone and ribs. 
Irregular Bones are those which, owing to their 
shape, are not classed in the foregoing divisions. To these 
belong the different back bone joints or vertebrae, some of 
the bones of the skull and the hyoid or tongue bone. 
The Spine is a flexous and flexible column formed of 
a series of bones, called vertebrce. There are thirty-three 
different bones in this column; they are divided into five 
different classes: 
i. Cervical Vertebrce, or those of the neck, and are 
seven in number. The first or upper bone is called the 
“Atlas,” so named from supporting the globe of the head, 
surely a proper one, as it sustains in some persons quite a 
burden. The second joint is called the “axis,” so named 
because it forms a pivot upon which the head rotates. 
2. Dorsal Vertebrce, or those of the back are twelve 
in number. 
3. Lumbar Vertebrce, or those pertaining to the loin, 
are five in number, and are the largest segments of the 
spine, probably owing to the fact that they have not the 
support of the ribs, like the dorsal vertebrae. 
4 and 5. Sacral and Coccygeal Vertebrce consist at an 
early period of life, of nine separate pieces, which are 
united in the adult, so as to form two bones, five entering 
into the formation of the sacrum and four into that of the 
coccyx bone. The latter is the last joint of the spine and 
is so named because it has the shape of a “cuckoo’s” beak, 
of which the word coccyx is a Greek translation. 
In this connection it is perhaps proper to speak of the 
lateral curvatures in the spine (looking at the back), the 
convexity of which is directed to the right side generally, 
and sometimes to the left, as will be explained. THE SKULL. 
25 
This curvature in the spine has caused many a mother 
moments of terrible anxiety, under the belief that her off- 
spring was about to enter into the battles of life with an 
ill-shaped body. Flowever, no fear need be anticipated, 
for it is only the common course of nature, and is very nicely 
explained by M. Bichat, a celebrated French se’entist, who 
says that it is produced by muscular action, as soon as this 
comes into play by a child. Most persons using the right 
arm in preference to the left, especially in making long 
continued efforts, when the body is curved to the right 
side. In support of this explanation, it has been found 
that in left-handed individuals the lateral curvature is di- 
rected to the left side. 
The Skull. This part of the skeleton surely needs 
more than passing notice, for is it not the harboring place 
of the brain,—the seat of the sensibilities,—the superiority 
of which makes man the ruler of the animal kingdom? 
By studying this expansion of the vertebral column, 
our thoughts must go out in adoration to the Maker for 
the provident care, with which this part was designed to 
withstand contusion ; the dome-like construction protect- 
ing the vital parts contained therein, like a cuirass. 
The skull is usually divided into two parts, namely the 
cranium (a helmet), and the face. The former is com- 
posed of eight, while the latter has fourteen bones. The 
teeth and the chain of bones of hearing ai*e not, however, 
included in this enumeration, and are not classed with the 
bones at all. 
' Occipital i 
Parietal ,. 2 
Frontal i 
Temporal 2 
Sphenoid 1 
Ethmoid 1 
Cranium, eight 
Bones. 
Face, 
Fourteen Bones. 
Nasal 2 
Upper Jaw 2 
Lachrymal 2 26 
SOFT SPOTS OR FONTANELS. 
Malar 2 
Palate 2 
Inferior Turbinated 2 
Vomer 1 
Lower Jaw 1 
22 
Face, 
Fourteen Pones. 
Soft Spots or Fontanels. At the places where the 
seams or sutures are noticed in the cranium, as shown in the 
engraving of the skeleton, openings exist at time of birth. 
The anterior soft spot is usually the largest; the posterior 
about at the center of the scalp, is smaller. The lateral fon- 
tanels are on the sides. The last mentioned two close up 
soon after birth, the posterior in about two months and the 
anterior often remains open during the first and second 
year ; if prolonged however, beyond the latter period, it is 
liable to be persistent throughout life and somewhat in- 
dicative of water head. In very early life the pulsations of 
the brain are perceptible, and are likened to the rising of 
water in a fountain, hence its name—fontanels—fountains. 
Sutures or Seams. When these fontanels become 
closed and ossified, interlocking into one another, they 
form sutures. These sutures remain separate for a con- 
siderable period after complete formation of the skull. 
Between these sutures is a ligament of an elastic nature, 
thus preventing the interposition of blows or jars received 
upon the skull. 
The Hyoid or Lingual Bone supports the tongue 
and gives attachment to its numerous muscles. It is a 
bony arch, shaped like a horseshoe. 
The Thorax or Chest is a bony cartilaginous 
cage, intended to contain and protect the principal organs 
of respiration and circulation. It is conical in shape and 
consists of the sternum in front, a part of the spine behind, 
and the ribs on either side. 
Sternum or Breast Bone is a flat and narrow one, 
situated in the median line of the chest, and consists, in an THE UPPER EXTREMITY. 
27 
adult, of three undivided portions ; the upper part is called 
the manubrium, the middle section the gladiolus, and the 
lower attachment is known as the ensiform. 
The Ribs are elastic arches of bone which form the 
chief part of the thoracic walls. They are twelve in 
number on each side. The first seven are connected 
behind with the spine, and in front with the sternum, 
through the intervention of the costal or rib cartilages. 
These are called true ribs. The remaining five pairs are 
false ribs; of these the first three are connected behind 
with the spine, and in front with the rib cartilages. The 
other two pairs are connected with the spine only, being 
free at the other ends. They are also call eel floating ribs. 
During mediaeval times, when knowledge as to human 
anatomy was only in the possession of a few, the belief 
doubtless originated, and has in many instances been 
transferred to the present generation, that woman, the 
blessed helpmate of man, was the possessor of one more 
rib than the male. This erroneous idea was doubtless 
formed through Biblical lore, so beautifully described in 
the history of creation. 
The extremities, or limbs, are those long jointed 
appendages, which are connected to the trunk at one end 
and free in the rest of their extent. 
THE UPPER EXTREMITY. 
Consists of the arm, fore arm and hand. Its continuity 
is established with the trunk by means of the shoulder, 
which does like service for the upper extremity, as the 
haunch bone in the lower limb. 
The Clavicle or Collar Bone forms the front por- 
tion of the shoulder girdle. It is joined on one side to 
the sternum or breast bone, while on the other it artic- 
ulates with the shoulder blade. It represents a double 
curvature, somewhat resembling the Roman letter “f.” 
The Scapula or Shoulder Blade forms the back 28 
THE LOWER EXTREMITY. 
part of the shoulder. It is a large flat bone, triangular 
in shape. 
The Humerus or Arm Bone is the longest and 
largest bone in the upper extremity. It articulates with 
the shoulder blade at the upper part, and with the two 
bones of the fore arm at the lower end. 
The Forearm, or that portion between the elbow 
and wrist, has two bones. The ulna, so called from its 
forming the elbow, is a long bone placed at the inner side 
of the fore arm and runs parallel with the radius, the 
other bone. Its name implies “ a spoke,” and acts as a 
brace to the ulna, on the outside of which it is situated. 
The radius is hot quite as long and thick as the ulna. 
The Hand. The skeleton of this useful member is 
subdivided into three segments : 
1. The Carpus or wrist hones, eight in number, are 
arranged in two rows, and are named scaphoid, semi- 
lunar, cuneiform, pisiform (forming the upper row). 
Those of the lower are the trapezium, trapezoid, os mag- 
num and unciform. 
2. The Metacarpus, or bones of the palm, are live in 
number, corresponding to the number of fingers and 
thumb in each hand. 
3. The Phalanges or bones of the fingers, are fourteen 
in number in each hand, three for each finger and two in 
thumb. 
THE LOWER EXTREMITY. 
Consists of three segments, the thigh, leg and foot, and 
corresponding to the arm, forearm and hand in the upper 
extremity. It is connected to the trunk through the hip 
bone. 
The Innominate or Nameless Bone, so called, 
from bearing no resemblance to any known object, is a 
large irregular shaped bone, which, with its counterpart 
on opposite side, forms the front and side walls of the 
pelvic cavity. In young people it consists of three sepa- THE PELVIS. 
29 
rate parts, which meet and grow together, as the little 
body develops, and forms a basin-like cavity. Notwith- 
standing the fact that they are firmly united in the adult, 
it is usual to describe this bone as divisible into three 
portions, namely : The ilium, the ischium, and the pubes. 
The ilium is the flank bone, the crest of which can be 
felt inside. The ischium is the hip part, and the pubes 
is the front portion of the pelvis, supporting the external 
organs of generation. 
The Pelvis, named after its resemblance to a basin, 
of which the word is a Latin translation, is the strongest 
constructed cavity in the body. It is composed of four 
bones, viz.: The two innominate bones, the sacrum and 
the coccyx. 
The difference in the male and female pelvis, that is to 
say in adults, is very marked, and best comprehended by 
studying the engravings upon the subject. These draw- 
ings were made from normal and average persons, and 
from them can be plainly seen the larger inlet and outlet 
of the female pelvis. At birth the foetus passes through 
this opening, hence this wise and providential provision. 
The Femur or Thigh Bone is the longest, largest 
and strongest bone in the skeleton, and measures about 
one-fourth of the whole length of the body. It is inter- 
esting surely that the very common ball and socket move- 
ment, so extensively applied nowadays in mechanics, was 
patterned after this joint, inasmuch as the head of the 
femur, forming a ball, and it being inserted into the 
socket of the innominate bone, forms the articulations of 
the upper thigh. Faith in common sense prohibits, at 
this instance, to speak of the intricate and numerous 
movements which can be accomplished thereby. 
At the lower end it is considerably expanded forming 
the upper part of the knee joint, and articulates there 
with the knee pan and tibia. 
The Patella, meaning literally “a small pan” is a flat, Engraving No. 5. 
Male Pelvis, (Adult) 
Engraving No. 6. 
Female Pelvis, (Adult). 
30 THE TIBIA OR SHIN BONE. 
31 
somewhat triangular shaped bone at the front part of the 
knee joint. In youths this bone is more of a cartilaginous 
formation and completes its process of ossification about 
the age of puberty. It articulates with the femur. 
The Tibia or Shin Bone is situated at the front 
and inner part of the leg. At the inner front part this 
bone has no further protection than the skin, in conse- 
quence the frequent and painful injuries to the shins. It 
articulates with the femur, fibula and astralagus. 
The Fibula is situated at the outer side of the leg 
and acts as a brace to the former. It articulates with the 
tibia and astralagus. 
The Foot consists of three different sets of bones. 
i. The Tarsus Bones, seven in number, and are 
named the os calcis, astralagus, cuboid, scaphoid, internal, 
external and middle cuneiform bones. This class of bones 
form the ankle and do like service for the foot, as the 
wrist bones do for the hand. 
The Metatarsal Bones are five in number, correspond- 
ing with the toes in that respect. Each one of these 
bones articulates at one extremity with the first row of 
tarsal bones, and at the other with the phalanges. 
The Phalanges of the foot, both in general arrange- 
ment and number, resemble those of the hand. Like the 
thumb, the great toe has two, while the others have three 
phalanges. 
Dear reader, did you ever concentrate your mind upon 
this wonderful framework described in preceding pages? 
In it, we can see the many, many examples of skill and 
wisdom of the Architect of the Universe. Take the 
skeleton as a whole, and we have before us the fundamen- 
tal principles of a faultless piece of mechanism in which 
every part, may it be ever so small, illustrates some pro- 
found scientific doctrine. As a whole it is perfection, but 
let one part become diseased or destroyed, the aggregation 32 
THE FOOT. 
becomes impaired. Hence the necessity of keeping this 
part of our anatomy in order, we must live in accordance 
with the well defined laws of health. Under these may 
be enumerated the partaking of proper food, which is 
necessary to replace the worn out bone tissues. We must 
perform such labor or exercise as will keep up the elas- 
ticity, nor must we overdo the same to such extent as will 
injure any part of our bony structure. THE ARTICULATIONS. 
33 
CHAPTER II. 
THE ARTICULATIONS. 
The various bones of which the skeleton consists are 
connected together at different parts of their surface, and 
such connection is known as a joint or articulation. 
In joijits, as in the skull, their adjacent margins are 
applied in almost close contact, a thin layer of fibrous 
membrane, the sutural ligament being interposed. Where 
slight movement is required, combined with great 
strength, the bony surfaces are united by tough and elastic 
cartilages, as in the joints of the spine ; but in the movable 
joints, the bones forming the articulation are generally 
expanded for greater convenience of mutual connection, 
covered by cartilage, held together by strong ligaments 
and partially lined by a membrane, which secretes a fluid 
called Synovia, to lubricate the various parts of which the 
synovial membrane is formed. 
The different structures which enter into the formation 
of a joint are bone, cartilage, ligaments and synovial 
membrane. 
Bone constitutes the fundamental elements of all 
joints. 
Cartilage covers the articular surfaces of bone. 
Ligaments are found in nearly all the movable 
articulations, and consist of bands of various forms, serv- 
ing to connect together the articular extremities of bones. 
Ligaments are pliant and flexible so as to allow of the 
most perfect freedom of movement. They are strong, 34 
SYNOVIAL MEMBRANE. 
tough and inextensile, and do not yield under severely 
applied force. 
Synovial Membrane is a thin, delicate membrane, 
of a dense and smooth structure, and surrounds synovial 
capsules and other synovial cavities. This membrane 
secretes : 
Synovia, a transparent, viscid fluid serving to lubricate 
the joints. It resembles in appearance the white of an 
Synovia is more commonly known as joint water. 
Immovable Articulations includes all those in which 
the surfaces of the bones are in almost direct contact, and 
in which there is no appreciable motion. To this class 
belong the interlocking seams or sutures in skull and 
other joints therein, except the lower jaw. 
Mixed Articulations are those connected by car- 
tilages, not separated by synovial membrane and having 
limited motion. The joints between the bones of the 
vertebrse belong to this group. 
Movable Articulations includes by far the greatest 
number of joints in the body, mobility being their dis- 
tinguishing character, and are subdivided into different 
classes. 
1. Gliding Joint, as in the articulation of the collar 
and breast bones. 
2. Ball and Socket Joint allows motions in all direc- 
tions. To these belong hip and shoulder joints. 
3. Hinge Joints; in these, motion is limited in two 
directions, forward and backward. Elbow, ankle and knee 
perform hinge joint movements. 
4. Pivot Joint is articulation by a pivot process, 
turning within a ring around a pivot. As in the articu- 
ation of the atlas upon the axis, and radius upon the ulna. 
5. Condyloid, as in the movements of the wrist joint. 
6. Reciprocal reception are those where articular sur- 
faces inversely convex in one direction and concave in the 
other. Movements in every direction, except axial rota- Movable articulations. 
35 
tion. Best explained by the movement of the second 
joint of the thumb. 
The kinds of movements admissible in joints are 
usually divided into four classes : 
1. Gliding movement is the most simple kind of 
motion that can take place in a joint. It is common to 
all movable joints, and the only movements permitted in 
the wrist and ankle. 
2. Angular movement only occurs between long 
bones. It may take place in four directions: Forward, 
backward, inward and outward. 
3. Circumduction is that limited degree of motion 
which takes place between the head of a bone and its 
articular cavity, and is best seen in the shoulder and hip 
joints. 
4. Rotation is the movement of a bone upon its own 
axis, as in the movement of the head upon the neck. 
Joints perform certain functions as above described, 
but this is not all, for they enable the body to sustain 
greater weight and owing to their flexibility they diminish 
the force of blows and shocks. In their freedom of 
movement, they modify the direction in the action of 
muscular power. In our daily avocations, the joints are 
in constant action and wear out to some extent, like 
machinery. Hence, the difficult movements in persons in 
advanced age, and having behind them a record of great 
activity or the reverse. 36 
THE SKIN. 
CHAPTER III. 
THE SKIN 
And Its Appendages. 
The skin is the principal seat of touch, and serves as 
a covering for the protection of the deeper tissues. It is 
also of much importance as an organ of excretion and 
absorption. It consists principally of layers, which are 
nicely seen in the engraving, which shows a highly mag- 
nified section of same, together with notes, as to the 
different layers, and is self explanatory and a graphic 
object lesson, on this very important organ. 
The skin is divided into two principal layers, which 
can be readily separated ; these are the derma or true skin 
and cutis or scarf skin. The true skin is attached more 
or less closely to the tissues beneath it, in the meshes of 
which fatty deposits are formed. These fatty tissues are 
found beneath nearly all the skin, except under eyelids and 
external portions of the ear, and varies from 1-12 to 1-2 
inch in thickness in different parts of the body. In the 
human being, upon the head and neck small muscles are 
attached closely to the skin, which allow to some extent 
the moving of the skin, as for instance the wrinkling of 
the forehead. Distributed throughout the true skin are 
numerous elastic fibers and nonstriated muscular fibers 
which are held firmly together. These small muscular 
fibers are very abundant about the hair follicles and 
sebaceous elands connected with them, and their arrange- 
o o ment is such, that when they are excited through cold or 
electricity they contract, the follicles are drawn up, pro- 
jecting upon the general surface, and produce the 
appearance known as L‘goose skin." 
the skin. 
37 
Sectional View of the Skin. Magnified 30 times 
Engraving No. 7. 
1. Epidermis or Cuticle. 
2. Derm or Cutis. 
3. Subcutaneous Cellular Tissue. 
4. Rete Mucosum. 
5. Superficial Layer. 
6. Ha;rs. 
7. Hair Follicle, 
8. Hair Bulb. 
9. Sebaceous Glands, 
10. Sweat Glands. 
11. Sweat Ducts. 
12. Sweat Pores. 
13. Fat Cells. 
14. Fibrous Tissue. 
15. Nutrient Artery. 
The true skin is abundantly supplied with blood- 
vessels, terminating in looped capillary plexuses and with 38 
THE SKIN. 
nerves. The termination of these nerves, in the true skin 
is somewhat obscure; even the greatest of researchers in 
the broad field of physiology differ in their opinions. How- 
ever, the theory of Professor Kolliker, a noted German 
histologist, promulgates one, which seems to some extent 
within the limits of human reason. He claims “that in 
the immense majority of instances, the sensitive nerves 
terminate in some way in the hair follicles.” That this is 
a fact to some extent, can be demonstrated by touching 
the hair in the nose or ear of a sleeping person, either 
with a feather or straw, and unless the party is entirely 
void of sensitiveness, you will shortly see how his nerves 
are aroused. 
The greatest of American physiologists, Professor 
Austin Flint, Jr. of New York, does not entirely agree 
with this theory, but asserts positively: “That nerve fibers 
form a network in the deeper tissues of the skin, throwing 
from it, branches to the hair follicles and to the muscular 
fibers of the skin, where they are lost.” 
Unquestionably, both these learned men are right in 
their theories, for we know that when we touch a hair, or 
a part of the skin where no hirsute appendage is located, 
we perceive the act. 
The Epia Tcrmis or external layer of the skin, is a mem- 
brane composed exclusively of cells, containing neither 
bloodvessels, nerves or absorbing vessels. Its external 
surface is marked by exceedingly shallow grooves, which 
correspond to the deep furrows between the nipple-like 
projections (papillae) of the true skin. This portion is subdi- 
vided into two tolerably well defined layers. The internal 
layer is called the rete mucosum, while the external one is 
termed the horny one. The internal layer or rete mu- 
cosum, is composed of a single stratum of prismoidal, 
nucleated cells, containing a certain amount of pigmentary 
matter. 
The last sentence, when read, will doubtless be consid- THE NAILS. 
39 
ered in another than an instructive light. But the dry 
technical phrases are necessary in the explanation why the 
negro is black, or nearly so, why an Indian has the hue of 
a copper teakettle, which has had no scouring in a fort- 
night, and why our cannibal brethren in the islands of the 
Pacific Ocean have a brown color. In fact, why different 
races have different colors. 
These colors are chiefly due to these pigmentary layers, 
which gives the skin these characteristics, as well as the 
peculiarity in the complexion of d;fferent races and different 
individuals. 
In the negro this layer is nearly black, but when the 
epidermis is removed the true skin shows no marked differ- 
ence from that of a white man. 
The cells of the pigmentary layer are from Woo to Woo 
of an inch in length, and from Woo to Woo of an inch in 
their short diameter. The thickness of the rete mucosum 
varies from ttW to tV of an inch. 
The horny layer is composed of numerous strata of 
hard flattened cells, irregularly polygonal in shape. 
The epidermis serves to protect the more delicate 
structure of the true skin and its thickness is proportionate 
to the exposure of the different parts. We find therefore 
that it is much thicker upon the soles of the feet and palms 
of the hands, than in other portions of the body less ex- 
posed. The thickness in the instances mentioned is much 
increased in those who habitually go barefooted, and those 
who are constantly engaged in manual labor. 
The Nails are flattened horny structures, placed upon 
the dorsal surface of the last phalanges of the fingers and 
toes. In the normal state a nail is accurately moulded 
upon the cutis as the epidermis is on other parts. It is im- 
planted by its root into a groove in the skin, and exposing 
the body and free edge. For a closer and more vivid 
description of the nails, the reader is respectfully invited 
to investigate his own, and embrace the opportunity to 
remove the surplus of the free edge. 40 
THE HAIRS. 
Their purpose is doubtless that of protection to the 
termination of the extremities. They may also be classed 
among the weapons nature has kindly provided. 
The Hairs are an appendage to the skin in the shape 
of a very peculiar modification of the epidermis, which 
they resemble as to the component parts. Hairs are found 
on nearly every part of the body, the soles of the feet and 
palms of the hands excepted. They vary very much in 
length, thickness and color in different parts of the body, 
as well as in different races of mankind. Microscopical 
investigation reveals that they present a cylindrical, or 
more or less flattened form. 
The -hairs on a human body are usually divided into 
three varieties. 
i. Long or Soft hairs, are those of the head and face of 
the male adult, around the genital organs, and under the 
armpits. In some males they are also found upon the 
breast. 
2. Short or Stiff hairs are found at the entrance of 
the nostrils, upon the edges of the eyelids and eyebrows. 
3. Short, soft, downy hairs are those on the balance 
of the surface of the body, where the other varieties are 
absent. 
Hairs in their normal condition are very elastic, and 
may be stretched considerably. They are also a very 
strong “fabric,” which depends, however, upon its thick- 
ness. An ordinary hair from the head will bear a weight 
of from six to eight ounces. 
Through friction, hair generates a considerable amount 
of electricity, which is specially the case in cold and dry 
weather. This interesting phenomenon can be nicely dem- 
onstrated by taking a full grown cat upon your lap, in a 
room where the air is dry and cool, and by stroking the 
hair of your pet along the back, commencing at the tail 
and moving toward the head. The light must of course 
be extinguished, and you will soon feel a gentle electric USES OF THE HAIR. 
41 
current through your hand, and see the electric sparks 
spurt from your hairy pet. 
The roots of hair are embedded in follicular openings 
of the skin, differing in the different varieties of hair in the 
depth to which they penetrate. The downy hairs do not 
go very deep, but the thick ones penetrate beyond the true 
skin, and their roots are found in the adipose tissue. 
The root is considerably softer than the projecting 
part, and is a round bulb. 
The Follicles form tubular sheaths in which the hair is 
inclosed and is a part of the skin. Connected with the 
follicles are minute bundles of involuntary muscles, which 
when they contract through any cause, make the hair 
stand in an erect position, or nearly so. 
The Sebaceous Glands are small, sacculated organs, 
lodged in the substance of the skin ; they are found in 
almost all parts of the dermis. Their purpose is the se- 
cretion of a fatty substance, which finds egress through the 
hair follicles. It is through this fatty secretion that the 
hair retains its natural gloss and smoothness. 
Blanching of the hair occurs occasionally, from fright 
and grief, and in remarkably short spaces of time. The 
cause is evidently due to intense mental emotion, but the 
mechanism of this change is not understood. We refrain 
from mentioning the many theories upon this subject, be- 
cause they are not borne out by facts. 
Uses of the Hair. Hair serves an important pur- 
pose in the protection of the general surface, and in 
guarding certain orifices of the body. The hair upon the 
head protects it from the rays of the sun as well as cold. 
While the hair upon the body outside of scalp and beard, 
is not of great amount, it is a very imperfect conductor of 
heat, and serves to a certain degree to maintain the 
warmth of the body. Furthermore, these downy little 
growths moderate friction upon the surface. The eye- 
brows turns the perspiration out of its course, and prevent 42 
PERSPIRATION. 
that saline matter entering the eye. How painful it is 
when we catch a cinder in our eye, nearly everybody has 
experienced, but few, we predict, have thought of the wis- 
dom of the Creator, in preventing this very disagreeable 
sensation by giving us eyelashes. Beards are an adorn- 
ment, and it is only through the command of fashion, or 
the inclination of an individual, that it should be removed 
through the process of shaving. With the removal of 
these hairs, we open to our lungs the free access of dust 
and soot, we rob through the cutting off of the chin beard 
the natural protection for the vocal organs, and by shaving 
on the cheeks, we offer a premium on face and toothache. 
The hair in nose and ears serves similar purposes, 
namely, the prevention of the entrance of dirt and cold air. 
The prevailing idea that long hair denotes strength is 
an erroneous one, for the simple reason that the nutrients 
which caused this growth were deviated from their proper 
channel, to the detriment of other parts. One will almost 
always find beautiful tresses in consumptive ladies. 
In this connection we desire to add our condemnation 
of the indiscriminate use of the many advertised hair tonics 
and dyes; that they are detrimental, every user of them 
is aware, but the persistency with which they are held on 
to, shows little knowledge of the laws of nature. Of 
course there are certain medicaments which will be described 
hereafter, that are free from any deleterious substances, 
but even these should only be resorted to when the symp- 
toms warrant it. 
Perspiration embraces the entire functions of the skin 
as an organ of excretion of both the watery vapors and 
organic matter and carbonic acid. It is from the latter 
that bedchambers become so excessively charged, when 
people close up every hole in their apartment, and thus 
shut off ventilation entirely. As an eliminator of impur- 
ities which the body desires to cast off, the skin performs 
a very important office. Comparatively speaking, how- PERSPIRATION. 
43 
ever, the quantity eliminated by the skin, compared to that 
cast off by the lungs in the form of carbonic acid, and by 
the kidneys in the shape of urea dissolved in water, is very 
small. That this eliminating organ is of the utmost im- 
portance, is simply shown by the fact that if a body is 
covered entirely by an impermeable coating, such as is 
often resorted to by lawless persons in the application of 
“tar and feathers,” death will soon result from the de- 
pression of animal heat of the body incident thereto. 
Sweat Glands and Ducts. The secretory organs in 
perspiration, are the sweat glands. Like other glands 
they serve to withdraw from the blood substances both 
superfluous and at the same time necessary for its exist- 
ence. These glands are found in nearly all parts of the 
body. They consist of simple tubes perforating the skin, 
which are the ducts, while beneath the cutis these tubes 
form in a convoluted coil, rounded or ovoid in shape. 
The length of the ducts varies with the thickness of the 
skin. The little glandular coils vary in size from t1t to -h 
part of an inch, the largest being found under the skin 
of the armpit. These minute glandular bodies are sur- 
rounded by a network of capillary bloodvessels, the con- 
tents of which furnishes the excretory mass. 
The number of these sweat glands in the body is some- 
what astonishing, but varies as to different parts of the 
surface. Prof. Krause of Germany, has found great 
differences in the number of perspiratory openings in 
different portions of the skin, and estimates the number 
in a square inch in certain parts, as follows: 
To the square inch on : 
Forehead 1,258 
Cheeks 548 
Neck . 1,303 
Breast j, 136 
Abdomen 1,136 
Back 4 17 
Arm 1,114 44 
PERSPIRATION. 
Palm 2>736 
Back of Hand 1,490 
Thigh 566 
Sole of Foot 2,685 
Back of Foot 924 
From these figures the learned man before mentioned, 
estimates that the entire number of glands of this kind in 
the whole body is 2,381,248. If a single coil is unraveled, 
it would measure about tV of an inch ; the entire length 
of the secreting tubes is about 2]/2 miles; this distance 
does not include the length of the excretory ducts, or 
pores of the skin. 
The influence under which the nervous system holds 
these sweat glands is somewhat remarkable, and best ex- 
plained by drawing the attention of the reader to himself. 
No doubt he has been scared, or undergone a mental 
emotion to greater or lesser extent, and while under this 
spell, has perceived the cold perspiration upon his brow. 
We say “cold” designedly, for the body was cooled 
through the eliminated moisture, hence, the cold percep- 
tion, and not from the temperature of the sweat. 
In very warm weather perspiration is a great relief, for 
the reason that moisture applied to the body from its own 
fountain, cools the surface and makes oppressive heat 
bearable. 
Quantity of Sweat eliminated is subject to great vari- 
ation, and dependent upon conditions of temperature and 
moisture, exercise, and the quantity and quality of food 
one partakes. Professor Seguin made as late as 1790, 
after the most exhaustive researches, the estimate that at 
an average an adult human body is relieved every twenty- 
four hours of about one pound and fourteen ounces of 
sweat. This estimate has been verified since then by other 
eminent scientists as a correct one. 
Through systematic, violent and prolonged exercise, 
the body eliminates abnormal quantities of sweat, and it is PERSPIRATION. 
45 
for this reason that amateur or professional athletes resort 
to a course of training by which their weight can be re- 
duced, and be relieved of superfluous adipose tissue. 
The exposure of the body to a very high temperature 
has similar effects, as is evidenced by the Turkish or Rus- 
sian baths. Through the cleansing process the pores are 
opened, and through the heat the moisture in the body is 
expanded, and readily eliminated by the open pores. 
Co7nposition of Sweat. Many different ingredients are 
held in suspense in this fluid, and by submitting a correct 
analysis the reader will perceive how it is that he does not 
urinate quite so voluminously when in a free state of per- 
spiration. The composition is about as follows : 
Water 995-573 
Urea (same as in urine) .043 
Alkaline .331 
Chlorides (soluble in water) 3-792 
Alkalines “ “ .261 
1,000.000 
Certain peculiarities in regard to the odor of sweat 
are quite marked, as for instance under the armpits, the 
feet, and around the genitals. That this rather disagree- 
able smell exists in some persons is not entirely due to 
the laxity in bathing, for it is in the nature of the elim- 
inated matter which holds some volatile substances, which 
cause this malodor peculiar to the afflicted individual. 
The frequent ablutions will ameliorate this trouble, but 
not effect a cure. 
Surely this chapter on skin would not be complete un- 
less closed with the old adage, “ Cleanliness is next to 
Godliness.” 46 
THE MUSCLES. 
CHAPTER IV. 
THE MUSCLES. 
The muscles in the human body are organs, which by 
their contraction produce motion. They are made up 
largely of contractile tissue. 
There are two kinds of muscles : 
1. The striated or voluntary muscles, which consti- 
tute the principal part of the flesh, or the so-called lean 
meat, exclusive of the fat. This class are under the 
control of the will, and are made up of great numbers of 
elongated fibers bound together into bundles and inclosed 
in a sheath of connective tissue. Each fiber is also 
inclosed in a delicate membrane called the sarcolemma. 
2. The non-striated are involuntary muscles. They 
constitute a large part of the walls of the intestines and 
stomach (muscular coat) bloodvessels, uterus, bladder, 
iris, hair muscles, and the largest and most important is, 
of course, the heart. The diaphragm or midriff also 
belongs to this class. These involuntary muscles are 
made up of greatly elongated cells, usually grouped in 
bundles or sheets. 
The muscles vary extremely in their form, but no less 
in size. One muscle, the Gastrocnemius, forms the chief 
bulk of the back of the leg. The fibers of the sartorius or 
tailor’s muscle measure nearly two feet in length, whilst 
the stirrup muscle or stapedius of the internal ear weighs 
only one grain, and its fibers are only one-sixth of an inch 
in length. 
O THE FASCbE OR SHEATHS. 
47 
We desire to draw attention to the fact that in well 
nourished persons the bony projections of their frame- 
work of bones are represented by depressions instead of 
projections. The reason for this is, that the bulk of the 
neighboring muscles, which usually arise by small tendons 
form such bony prominences, the tendons giving quickly 
place to large muscular bellies. In very thin persons this 
rule is reversed and the prominences of the skeleton 
are shown. In long sicknesses, where muscles and fat 
are wasted, the bony projections become apparent again 
and lead to bedsores. 
I he names of the different muscles have been derived 
from their situation, from their uses, from their shape, 
from their number of divisions, and from their points of 
attachment. 
The Fasciae or Sheaths are membranes of a dense, 
inelastic, unyielding nature, forming sheaths for the 
muscles and affording them broad surfaces for their 
attachment. 
The muscles are usually arranged according to the 
general division of the body, cranium, face, neck, trunk, 
upper and lower extremities. 
MUSCLES OF THE FACE AND CRANIUM. 
Those of the face and cranium are thirty-three in num- 
ber on each side of the head, which with the occipito- 
frontalis or musculo-fibrous layer, covering the cranium 
from the hind part of the head to the eyebrows, makes 
sixty-seven muscles in all in this part of the body. 
It would not be of interest to the general reader, to 
give a minute description of each and every muscle in this 
region, but hope it will not be amiss to draw attention to 
some of those which we can follow and observe in their 
action on our living fellow beings. The location of the 
occipito-frontalis has been mentioned above ; it forms a 
cushion for the crown of the head, its elastic nature often 48 
MUSCLES OF TIIE FACE AND CRANIUM. 
prevents the contusion of the skull, and owing to its mova- 
bility it is of much use to baldheads, to disturb the hies 
which so often perch on this erroneous sign of frontal 
eminence. The frontal portion of this muscle raises the 
eyebrows and draws the scalp forward through which the 
forehead is thrown into transverse wrinkles. The 
habitual raising of eyebrows by persons having great 
movability of this muscle causes permanent wrinkles and 
many a person hates for this reason the mirror, because it 
discloses lines, which fashion stamps as derogatory to 
beauty. 
It is also instrumental in giving the expression to the 
face in case of surprise. Each eyeball is supplied with four 
small muscles called the recti, one each superior, inferior, 
external and internal. These muscles give free motion in 
the sockets, aided by the oblique muscles of the eyes. 
Thus we are allowed to raise our eyes in adoration and to 
cast them down in shame or to look sidewise for a foe. 
The muscle which performs important functions in 
the nasal organ, was called by the anatomist who first 
drew attention to it, the Levator labii supcrioris alceqiLe 
nasi, surely more name than muscle. The plain English 
of this Latin line means that this muscle will raise the 
upper lip and dilate the nostrils, or “ lifter of the upper 
lip and wing of the nose.” The action of this muscle pro- 
duces a marked influence upon the countenance, and is 
the principal agent in the expression of indignation and 
disgust. 
The Orbicularis Oris, or the muscle surrounding the 
mouth, in its direct action closes the mouth, which, when 
done by persons without incisors, causes the lips to wrinkle. 
Firmness of character is often expressed through this 
muscle. 
I he Buccinator or Trumpet Muscle occupies the in- 
terval between the jaws at the side of the face. It con- 
tracts and depresses the cheeks, so that during the process MUSCLES OF THE NECK. 
49 
of mastication the food is kept under the immediate 
pressure of the teeth. Its name is derived from the 
Latin word “ buccina,” or trumpet, for when the cheeks 
have been previously extended by air this muscle expels 
it from between the lips, as in blowing a horn. 
MUSCLES OF THE NECK. 
The muscles of the neck are quite numerous and 
closely knitted. They are sixty-three in all. Among this 
important group is the tongue, the organ so necessary in 
the many avocations the body performs. 
MUSCLES OF THE TRUNK. 
The muscles of the back are very numerous, sixty-four 
in number, one-half on each side of the spinal column. 
The muscles of the abdomen are six on each side of a 
vertical line through the umbilicus or navel. This line is 
also called the white line or linea alba. This set of 
muscles performs different actions, namely, when they 
constrict the abdominal cavity, in which act they are also 
materially assisted by the diaphragm, the fseces from the 
rectum and the urine from the bladder are evacuated. 
The contents of the stomach are also expelled through the 
process of vomiting by their action. 
The muscles of the breast are only five in number, and 
form mostly the flesh between the ribs and under the 
breast bone. 
The muscles between the ribs, also called intercostal 
muscles, are the main agents in ordinary resp;ration. 
Assisting in this function is also the Diaphragm, which 
signifies a partition wall. It is a thin musculo-fibrous 
division or septum between the abdominal and thoracic 
cavities. This partition wall or diaphragm descends dur- 
ing inspiration and ascends during expiration. 50 
THE MUSCLES OF THE UPPER EXTREMITY. 
THE MUSCLES OF THE UPPER EXTREMITY. 
These are ninety-two in number, one-half on each side. 
This group includes all the muscles of the shoulder and 
form attachment to the chest, arm, forearm and hand. 
Doubtless every one of our readers has heard about 
flexors and extensors, when the subject of conversation is 
upon muscles, and as they appear only in the extremities, 
it is believed to be appropriate to explain the meaning of 
these technical phrases. When you bend your arm at the 
elbow or wrist it is the action of the different flexors, and 
when you straighten the member, the extensors perform 
their duty. The same occurs when the fist is clenched or 
the palm open. 
The Pectoral or breast muscles are the fleshy part 
which extend from the arm pits over a large portion of the 
chest. They are two in number on each side, the small 
and the large, the former underlying the latter. These 
are of much assistance in forced respiration owing to the 
fact that they are connected by their fibers to the lower 
portion of the breast bone. Thence by the contraction of 
these muscles, powerful assistance is given in elevating 
and expanding the chest, thus giving an opportunity for 
the lungs to inflate themselves with air, which is the act 
primarily sought in respiration. 
The Deltoid, named from its resemblance to the Greek 
letter delta, forms the rounded eminence of the shoulder 
and arm. It raises the arm directly from the side, so as 
to bring it at right angles with the trunk ; assisted by the 
pectoral muscle it draws the arm forward as in the act 
of reaching for an object which is at a height equal to 
that of your shoulder 
The Biceps muscle is found at the middle of the arm 
and named so, because it has two heads at its inser- 
tion ; this is the muscle which bulges out when the arm is 
bent and the fist is clenched, and is a part of the anatomy THE MUSCLES OF THE LOWER EXTREMITY. 
51 
in which young and athletic men have much pride, if well 
developed, through healthful and judicious exercise or 
labor. 
THE MUSCLES OF THE LOWER EXTREMITY. 
In each extremity are fifty-one muscles, or 102 in all, 
hence the greatest number in any one group. 
In the arrangement and action of the muscles and 
joints of the lower extremity compared with that of the 
upper, a striking difference becomes apparent. The main 
function of the arm is that of prehension, all the flexors 
are placed anteriorly, and the flexion of all its joints is in 
the same direction. This order of things is different in 
the leg; it being for locomotion and station, the arrange- 
ment of the flexors is one of alteration. Thus the flexors 
of the hip joint are in front, while those of the knee are 
behind; those of the ankle in front; those of the toes 
posteriorly. The joints, of course, are conformable to 
this arrangement. Had the wise Designer of the human 
body been otherwise in his arrangement the polite bow 
or a stoop would be impossible, nor could the fervent 
prayer be offered in the prevailing position of kneeling. 
Outside of this an erect stationary position would at least 
be uncertain, and would need support. 
Among this group, muscles of unusual interest are 
found, and in describing a few of them, by going from the 
hip down, the first attracting attention are the psoas mus- 
cles, or muscles of the loin. In the human subject there 
are two of these on each side of the vertebra, one large 
and one small. They are on the internal portion and 
cannot be felt by touching the outer part. For this defi- 
ciency in satisfying one’s inquisitiveness, these loin muscles 
make up, when they show their location when a person is 
afflicted with lumbago, which is a rheumatism of a neu- 
ralgic character in these parts. The purpose of these two 
pairs of muscles, besides aiding in movements of the body, 52 
THE MUSCLES OF THE LOWER EXTREMTIES. 
is to maintain the erect position of it by supporting the 
spine and pelvis upon the femur, and to assist in raising 
the trunk when the body is in a recumbent position. 
In comparative anatomy, for instance, in that of the 
ox or hog, these parts would be spoken of as beef or pork 
tenderloin. 
The next set of muscles in this group which need a 
few words of description is the Glutceus, of which there are 
three in each thmh. 
1 he Gin teens maximus is the most superficial one, and 
is a very thick, fleshy mass, in stout persons somewhat 
overhanging the thigh, and forms the prominence of the 
nates or buttocks. 
I he Gluteens mcdius and minimus are the other two 
pertaining to this set. Owing to their voluminousness 
they are great supporters of the hip joints and partake 
in numerous movements of the lower extremities. 
The Biceps of the thigh is located in the posterior 
part and is usually called the hamstring muscle. It is 
large and of considerable length, and causes the leg to 
flex upon the thigh. 
Another muscle of much interest is the Sartor ins, the 
longest muscle in the body. Its name is derived from 
the word “Sartor” a tailor, because that industrious trades- 
man assumes a distinct position when seated upon his 
workbench, in which this muscle takes that part which 
permits the folding of the legs. In an average person 
one of these muscles measures about two feet. 
Besides the above, the rectus, vasti and leg muscle, 
form the chief bulk of the thigh, between the nates and 
the knee. 
I he muscles below the knee are also quite numerous, 
and perform many functions, which we can better learn 
from observation on ourselves, than by a description. 
The reader’s attention is however invited to study 
carefully the plate which so graphically explains the situ- Engraving No. 8. 
The Muscular System. THE MUSCULAR SYSTEM. 
(Engraving No. 8.) 
Names of Muscles and Their Action, 
1. Occipito-Frontalis.—Used to raise the eyebrows, wrinkle the 
skin of the forehead, and move the scalp backward and forward. 
2. Orbicularis Palpebrarum.—Closes the eyelids. 
3. Temporalis.—Helps to elevate the lower jaw. 
4. Sterno-clcido-mastoideus.—A pair of muscles which together 
bow the head forward ; one acting by itself is able to turn the head, 
and therefore the chin to the other side. 
5. Masseter.—Helps to elevate the lower jaw, and move it 
forward. 
6. Platysma myoides.—Assists in depressing the angle of the 
mouth. 
7. Trapezius.—When acting together draw the head directly 
backward ; one of them acting alone, inclines the head to the corre- 
sponding side ; the superior part of the trapezius raises the point of 
the shoulder. 
8. Deltoides.—Raises the arm, and aids it in carrying it forward 
and backward. 
9. Biceps.—Act in bending the forearm. 
10. Brachialis anticus.—Same action as last. 
11. Supinator longus.—A flexor of the forearm. 
12. Triceps extensor cubiti.—Antagonistic of Nos. 9 and 10; when 
the forearm is bent, the triceps, by drawing in the extremity of the 
ulna, is able to extend it on the humerus, and thus bring both parts 
of the limb into a right line. 
13. Extensor.—Muscles of wrist. 
14. Extensor—Muscles of thumb. 
15. Pectoralis major.—Conjointly with No. 17, these muscles 
lower the arm when it has been elevated, press the arm closely to the 
side. It will also alone carry the arm along the side and front of the 
chest. 
16. Serratus magnus.—Assists in advancing the shoulder blade 
and elevating the shoulder. 
17. Latissimus dor si.—See 15. 
18. Obliquus exte>nus abdominis. 
19. Rectus abdominis. 
Abdominal muscles supporting 
the abdominal viscera. 
20. Tensor vagince femoris.—Renders the fascia tense and turns 
the limb inward. 
55 56 
THE MUSCULAR SYSTEM. 
21. Glutceus medius. 
22. Glutceus maximus. 
These muscles act alternately on the 
thigh bone and pelvis; the Glutaeus 
medius, by the direction of its fibers, is fitted to draw the thigh bone 
backward while it turns the whole limb outward if it be kept extended. 
23. Biceps flexor cruris.—Assists in bending the leg on the thigh 
and in turning the limb slightly inward and outward. 
24. Vastus externus.—Contributes to extend the leg upon the 
thigh. 
25. Tibialis anticus.—Cooperates with 32 in bending the foot on 
the leg; acting separately, each gives a slight inclination toward the 
corresponding side. 
26. Gastrocnemius.—Along with the soleus (27), this muscle forms 
the calf of the leg ; they jointly draw on the heel bone, lifting it from 
the ground, and cause the foot to represent an inclined plane. 
27. Soleus.—See 26. 
28. Extensor longus digitorum.—Aids in extending the toes, and 
in bending the foot upon the leg. 
29. Peronceus brevis. 
30. Peronceus longus. 
Act together in drawing the foot 
back. 
31. Abductor minimi digiti.—Bends the little toe and separates 
it from the others. 
32. Peronceus tertius.—A flexor of the foot on the leg cooperating 
with 25. 
33. Extensor proprius pollicis.—Extensor of the great toe. 
34. Tendon Achillis.—Formed by junction of tendinous expan- 
sions of 25 and 26, and is the strongest tendon in the body. 
35. Flexor longus digitorum.—Bends the toes toward the soles of 
the foot. 
36. Sartorius.—Bends the leg upon the thigh ; it is the longest 
muscle of the body, and is also known as the “tailor’s” muscle. 
37. Insertion of ligamentum patellce in tibia. 
38. Vastus internus.—Extends the leg upon the thigh. TENDONS. 
57 
ation of the numerous muscles of the human body, and 
learn from it the wonderful movements a person is capable 
of, and how they are performed by the muscles, as servants 
of the mind. 
Tendons. The muscles of the body, except in case 
where their point of attachment is upon a broad surface, 
as the muscles between the ribs, come to a point, and the 
fibers form into tendons of a white, glistening, fibrous 
nature. These tendons, oftener spoken of, as cords or 
sinews, make attachment to the periosteum or ligaments, 
and thus connecting with the bony framework of the body, 
completing thereby in that wonderful chemico-mechanical 
machine—the human body—the numerous object lessons 
as demonstrated in the mechanical arts, by hinges, pulleys, 
rotary apparatus, slides, and in fact any and all contriv- 
ances, requisite in movement and locomotion. The great 
throttle valve for all this machinery is invisible, but we are 
cognizant of its existence. It is the will power. 
Muscles possess certain general properties which are 
not shared in by the other tissues of the body. They are: 
1. Elasticity. The true muscular substance, as de- 
scribed in the beginning of this chapter, does not partake 
so much of this, but it is the sarcolcmma or sheath in- 
closing the muscle corpuscles, which contributes so much 
to this property. Through fatigue the extensibility of the 
elastic portion of the muscles is increased, which phe- 
nomenon is evidenced by the fact, that after extraordinary 
muscular exercise, the muscles are relaxed. This con- 
stitutes fatigue of body, but as soon as new nutriment is 
given, during a period of rest, their contractility is re-es- 
tablished, and with it the property of elasticity. 
2. Tonicity. Under this expression is meant, that 
the muscles, under normal conditions, have an insensible 
and constant tendency to contract, dependent more or less 58 
TENDONS. 
upon the action of the motor nerves. The cause of this 
property can be expressed in one word “phenomenal” 
3. Sensibility. Through this property of the muscles, 
which they possess to such an eminent degree, we are 
enabled to appreciate the power of resistance, immobility, 
and elasticity of substances, that are grasped, or on which 
we tread, or which, owing to their weight, cannot be 
influenced through the exertion of muscular power. In 
regulating the amount of force required for the accom- 
plishment of muscular acts, we are enabled to do so by 
the appreciation of the weight and resistance. Often, after 
long continued muscular efforts, when fatigue of the mus- 
cles interferes in the continuance, the nervous force still 
urges the muscles on; they obey, but the time also arrives 
when the nerves become also fatigued, and when these two 
elements of the body are worn out, exhaustion of body and 
mind ensues. 
Muscles are often thrown into spasms or contractions, 
as in the cramps of cholera, lockjaw, or strychnine poison- 
ing and become very marked. In the beginning of these 
symptoms, the mind remains unclouded, by which the pain 
is increased. 
4. Irritability or contractility. U nder these terms 
is understood, that the muscles are able to perform certain 
peculiar and characteristic functions, if urged by a proper 
stimulus. Or in other words, when an idea originates in 
our brain, which involves movement of the body, the 
nerves receive an impression and carry it to the muscles, 
which are required to participate in the movement. The 
muscle or muscles contract and in doing so, the first step 
in movement is accomplished. As long as life lasts, pro- 
vided the body is still in a normal condition, the muscles 
will always contract in obedience to a proper stimulus 
applied either directly or through the nerves. T1IE BLOOD AND ITS VESSELS. 
59 
CHAPTER V. 
THE BLOOD AND ITS VESSELS. 
What steam is to an engine, blood is to the human or 
animal body. Whenever any of the more important ves- 
sels holding or conducting steam become injured, the 
vapor escapes, the engine stops. Likewise when any of 
the larger bloodvessels in the body become separated, and 
their contents are allowed to escape, the body collapses— 
life becomes extinct. 
But unlike the former, a work of man, it can be 
repaired, even if all the steam has .left its housing. Motion 
can be re-established through water and fuel. Allow, 
however, a certain amount of blood to escape from the 
body, no human can make the repair, for the machinery 
necessary to convert food and drink into blood is beyond 
recuperation. 
Ever since physiology has been recognized as a science, 
the searchers in this field have demonstrated that blood is 
all important, and have shown it to be of the most inti- 
mate connection with the phenomena of animal life. 
Blood exists in an abundance in the normal human 
body, and occupies about one-eighth of the whole by 
weight. As a highly organized fluid of the body, it pro- 
vides material for generation of all parts, excepting none; 
it receives the product of waste and carries it to the proper 
eliminating organs—lungs, kidneys, skin. 
In this difficult labor, or in the functions blood per- 60 
THE BLOOD. 
forms, the uneducated would naturally come to the con- 
clusion that even blood itself wears out and loses its 
nutrient qualities, but nay, in the acts of life blood receives 
food from what we eat, and is regenerated, and becomes 
purified through the air we are allowed to inhale at no cost 
to our pocketbooks, provided we are not too particular 
about the kind. 
As previously remarked, the proportion of blood in the 
human body is about i to 8, which has been actually 
demonstrated by Professors Lehmann and Weber of Ger- 
many, on bodies of decapitated criminals, by first weighing 
them, after decapitation extracting all blood possible, and 
then weighing the remaining tissues. 
The Blood is a somewhat thickish, opaque fluid, of a 
bright red or scarlet color when it flows from the arteries, 
or of a dark red or purple color when it flows from the veins. 
It is viscid and has something like a clammy feeling to the 
touch. When taken into the mouth, it reveals the fact 
that salt or saline matters are among its constituents. It 
is further characterized by a peculiar faint odor, which may 
be developed to be very distinct in blood from the lower 
animals by adding to it a few drops of sulphuric acid, 
through which it assumes the odor peculiar to the animal 
from which it came. In order to become acquainted in 
what manner blood accomplishes such important functions 
in life, it will be necessary to recapitulate the far reaching 
investigations made by eminent scientists, as to what are 
the constituents of blood. While as early as 1661 A. D., 
the celebrated anatomist, Malphighi of Italy (born 1628, 
died 1694), in examining the blood of a hedgehog, with 
the imperfect magnifying glasses at his command, discov- 
ered little floating particles in the blood ; he mistook them 
for globules of fat, but which in reality were the blood cor- 
puscles. These little bodies are held in suspense in a col- 
orless liquor, called the plasma or liquor sanguinis. Of 
these two constituents, blood consists. THE BLOOD. 
61 
Of corpuscles, two varieties are known to exist, the red 
and the whites or leucocytes. The former are by far the most 
abundant, and constitute about one-half of the mass of 
blood. The white corpuscles are in a great minority, and 
their ratio to the red is about i to 4 or 500. Indefinite, 
we acknowledge, but not of sufficient importance to waste 
time in a more accurate investigation. 
Red Corpuscles. From these the blood derives its 
color and opacity. These little bodies are true organized 
structures, containing all the elements requisite for the pur- 
pose. They are more abundant in the blood of the males 
than in that of the females. The form of the corpuscles is 
peculiar, namely : flattened, biconcave circular discs ; their 
thickness varies from one-fourth to one-third of their diam- 
eter. They are also extremely elastic, and though deformed 
through, pressure, will assume immediately their former 
shape as soon as freed. While suspended in the plasma, 
they have a tendency to arrange themselves in rows, like 
a stack of coin. Their average diameter, according to 
Robin, is Wtt of an inch; others claim that it is less, and 
in the neighborhood of Wov of an inch. 
Interesting researches have been made of the different 
sizes of corpuscles in different animals, and from it we 
recapitulate the following: 
Human Blood 3~gVo 
Elephant 2to 
Mouse Tnmr 
Musk Deer of Java Tshsr 
Frog (average) tlW 
From these interesting data it seems to be evident that 
the size of the corpuscle is entirely independent of the size 
of the animal from which it was obtained. 
The number of corpuscles in a given quantity of blood 
is something enormous, and according to the latest and 
most authentic researches made in this matter, by Prof. 
Melassez of France, the number in one cubic millimeter 62 
THE BLOOD. 
(about equal to h of a cubic inch), the number is esti- 
mated at about four millions. 
The principal function of the corpuscles is that of 
carriers of oxygen and carbonic acid. (On this subject 
further remarks will be made when the functions of 
respiration are considered.) This is especially attributed 
to the red corpuscles, and in their affinity for these two 
gases a greater one seems to exist for the oxygen, which 
they carry to all the tissues of the body, and take away 
the carbonic acid, delivering it to the lungs to be elim- 
inated by expiration. 
Of the specific functions of the white corpuscles the 
scientific world seems to be at war, and all the theories 
advanced lack confirmation. 
Of all the chemical researches, there are perhaps no data 
which furnish so much food for thought as an analysis of 
human blood. 
In it we recognize again the food and drink we have 
taken, and find no trace of articles frequently used 
without forming in whole or in part a constituent of 
blood. Hence by a careful perusal we can learn from it 
what we should eat and drink, and especially what we 
should leave untouched. 
The average composition of blood, according to the 
most careful analysis, is as follows: 
Water 902.00 
Albumen 53.00 
Paraglobuline 22.00 
Fibrinogen 3.00 
Fatty matters 2.50 
Nitrogenous matters 4.00 
Organic ingredients 5.00 
Chloride of sodium (common salt) 3.50 
Chloride of potassium 0.35 
Sulphates 0.30 
Phosphates 1.35 63 
THE BLOOD. 
Lime 1.50 
Magnesia 1.50 
1000.00 
Of these substances water predominates, but it holds 
in suspense the excrementitious matters, such as carbonic 
acid in solution, which is eliminated by the lungs and 
skin ; all the constituents of the urine, mainly urea, which 
are carried away through the kidneys. Water also holds in 
suspense, in the proportion of 28 to 1,000, peptone, which 
is used in the economy of the system during digestion. 
Of Albumen in the blood, it is justifiable to remark 
that it takes first rank in nutrition ; it is found in nearly 
all articles of diet in the proportion as is stated in the 
tabulated statement of nutritious qualities of dietary 
substances. 
Paraglobuline exists in the blood in about half the 
quantity as albumen, and is closely allied to it, in its chem- 
ical relations. 
Fibrinogen is also an albuminous substance, only dif- 
fering from the two former slightly in its chemical compo- 
sition. Combined with the former, or if subjected to 
heat, it causes coagulation. 
Fatty matters of the blood are in largest abundance 
soon after digestion of food, rich in oily substances. The 
emulsionized fat finds its way into the blood, and circu- 
lates for a time unchanged. Afterward it gradually dis- 
appears from the circulation, being either deposited in the 
fatty tissues or transformed into other products of assimi- 
lation. 
The Mineral Salts of the blood are principally chloride 
of sodium and potassium, phosphates, sulphates, together 
with lime and magnesium. Of these chloride of sodium, 
otherwise known as common salt, is the most abundant. 
The phosphates are of great importance for their influ- 
ence upon the blood in giving it an alkaline tendency, a 64 
THE BLOOD. 
property which is essential to the functions of nutrition 
and even to the immediate continuance of life, since it 
enables the absorption of carbonic acid by the blood in 
the circulation of the capillaries, and returns it to the lungs 
for elimination. 
Tiresome and technical as it may appear to the reader, 
it is his duty to acquire some knowledge of the composi- 
tion of his blood, in fact in order to enjoy health he must 
inform himself in reference to what is good for him, and 
what is not. Hence, the more detailed description of the 
components of the nutrient fluid, upon which the material 
body subsists. Blood containing a correct proportion of 
the ingredients mentioned can be considered in a state of 
health, and with it the body. When, however, they 
become disproportionate, disease is apt to ensue, hence, it 
is the duty of every one for himself and those dependent 
upon him or her to see to it that food containing the 
required substances for the regeneration of the blood are 
supplied. The discussion of the articles which possess this 
virtue, belongs however to the functions of digestion, and 
the reader is referred to that chapter if he be ignorant of 
a proper dietary list. 
Blood possesses the remarkable property of sponta- 
neous coagulation, a subject which has been under inves- 
tigation since the middle of the seventeenth century. All 
the great and good men, who have given their time and 
knowledge to this subject have come to the conclusion 
that the blood will coagulate, but are unable to establish 
definitely the cause of it. 
Unexplainable as it is, the coagulation of blood is 
taken into advantage in the treatment of wounds and 
diseases, such as the arrest of hemorrhages in cases of 
laceration, cuts and bruises. 
From the foregoing it is hoped the reader has learned 
what blood is and what its general functions are, but in 
order to ascertain how and in what manner this nutrient THE HEART. 
65 
fluid performs its duties we have to take a mental trip of 
its journey through the vessels, and learn this by studying 
the physiological anatomy of the 
HEART, ARTERIES, CAPILLARIES 
AND VEINS. 
The Heart is a hollow muscular organ of a conical 
form somewhat in the shape of a pear, placed between 
the lungs and inclosed in the cavity of the pericardium. 
It is situated nearly in the middle of the thoracic cavity, its 
base in the median line and its apex about three inches to 
the left of the center line of the breast bone, or one inch 
within the line of the left nipple. The prevailing idea 
that the heart is nearly or entirely in the left side of chest is 
an erroneous one. It is by reason of this anatomical mis- 
take that murderers or individuals wishing to commit sui- 
cide, frequently plunge their weapon into the left lung 
without reaching the heart. 
The heart is held in place through its attachment to 
the great bloodvessels, which in turn are connected to the 
posterior wall of the thorax. The apex of the heart is 
free and capable of a certain degree of motion. 
In the matter of weight of the heart a difference exists 
between that of the male and female. In that of the 
former it varies between ten and twelve ounces, while that 
of the latter is between eight and ten ounces. It is how- 
ever, erroneous to assume that the heart of the female is 
the smaller of the two, for it must be borne in mind that 
the average weight of man is more than that of woman, 
and looking at it from this standpoint the heart of woman 
is larger than that of the male, which is further brought to 
light from data furnished by Dr. Gray of London, who 
gives the proportion of the heart to the whole body as 
follows : 
In man i to 169 
In woman 1 to 149 66 
THE HEART. 
The heart is inclosed in a fibrous sack called the 
Pericardium, which signifies “peri" about and “ kardia ’ 
heart, derived from the Greek. This sack also envelopes 
the commencement of the large bloodvessels terminating 
in its substance. The pericardium is lined by a serous 
membrane secreting a fluid which serves as a lubricant 
to the outer surface of the heart. This admits of move- 
ments without any friction. 
The heart is divided into four cavities indicated upon 
its surface by grooves. It has one longitudinal muscular 
partition or septum, separating the right from the left 
heart. Each of these is separated by valves, and in that 
manner the four cavities are formed. 
i. The Right Auricle is a little larger than the left, 
and its walls somewhat thinner. It receives the venous 
blood from all parts of the body through the upper and 
lower venae cavae and empties it through the right auri- 
culo-ventricular opening, which is guarded by the tricus- 
pid valve into : 
2. The Right Ventricle, a cavity of similar dimen- 
sion as the former, holding about three fluid ounces. From 
this receptacle the blood is forced into the lungs through 
the pulmonary arteries for purification purposes, and from 
where it returns imbued with oxygen, through the right 
and left pulmonary veins entering the heart at: 
3. The Left Auricle, which, after receiving the blood 
from the lungs propels it through the left auriculo- 
ventricular opening, presided over by the biscuspid valve 
into : 
4. The Left Ventricle, the walls of which are uni- 
formly much thicker than that of its right namesake, and 
doubtless so constructed that through its muscular action 
the blood is forced throughout the arterial system of the 
body by way of the Aorta or great artery. 
The heart in its capacity as a force pump which feeds 
itself, and as shown on the schematic diagram (Eng. No. THE HEART. 
67 
9), giving an idea of the manner and form the valves close, 
gives much food for study in its phenomenal action. 
Valvular Action of the Heart. 
Engraving No. 9, 
1 Right Auricle 
2. Right Ventricle. 
3. Pulmonary Artery. 
4. Left Pulmonary Veins. 
5. Right Pulmonary Veins. 
6. Left Auricle. 
7. Left Ventricle. 
8. Aorta. 
9. Right auriculo-ventricular opening 
(Tricuspid Valve). 
10. Left auriculo-ventricular opening 
(Biscuspid or Mitral Valve). 
11. Aortic Valve. 
12. Pulmonic Valve. 
In doing so we must follow the flow of the blood as 
it enters the auricles. The dilatation of the cavities of 
the heart is called the diastole, and the contraction is 
named the systole. When these terms are used without 
any prefix, they refer to the actions of the ventricles, 
but they are also applied to the actions of the upper 
cavities, and are then named auricular diastole or systole 
respectively. 
A complete revolution of the heart consists of the 
filling and emptying of all its cavities, during which an 
alternation of repose and activity is experienced. 
Action of the Auricles. These cavities are continu- 
ously receiving blood on the right side from the venous 
system, and on the left side from the lungs by the pul- 
monary veins. This action is however interrupted for a 
very short period during contraction. The flow continues 
until the cavities of the auricles are completely filled, the 68 
THE HEART. 
blood coming in by a steady current, and during the re- 
pose of the heart the blood flows also into the ventricles 
through the auriculo-ventricular openings. When the auri- 
cles have become fully distended and taken in all the blood 
they can hold, they contract quickly with considerable 
power (thus forming an auricular. systole), and force the 
blood into the ventricles, producing a complete diastole of 
these cavities. During this contraction of the auricles the 
blood ceases to flow into them. 
Action of the Ventricles. Immediately after the con- 
traction of the auricles which caused the complete filling 
of the ventricles, these also contract, which is the chief 
action of the heart, and is generally spoken of as the 
systole. As soon as the systole is accomplished the heart 
has a period of repose during which the auricles fill up 
again and from there into the ventricles, until the auricles 
are filled, and another contraction takes place. 
During the contraction of the auricles, the biscuspid and 
tricuspid valves are open, and closed during contraction of 
the ventricles. Thus preventing return of the blood. 
From the foregoing the following deductions of the 
heart’s actions are made. The two auricles contract simul- 
taneously, and the two ventricles do likewise. During 
the contractions of the auricles, the ventricles are dilating, 
and vice versa. 
The sounds of the heart are caused by contraction of 
the ventricles and the valvular action incident thereto, 
its elevation against the sternum, contributes to this mani- 
o 
festation also. 
FREQUENCY OF THE HEART’S ACTION. 
Much importance has always been attached to this, 
as it is indicative of the general condition of the whole 
system. 
The frequency with which the heart beats is modified 
in health to a considerable extent, and is dependent upon THE HEART. 
69 
age, sex, muscular activity, the condition of the digestive 
system, and numerous other causes. This points to the 
fact that the action of the heart is closely allied to the 
various functions of the economy, and readily sympathizes 
with their derangement. Each ventricular contraction is 
followed by an expansion of the arteries readily noticed 
by the touch on one of them, and by it, it is far easier 
to observe the heart’s action, than by exploring that organ 
itself. 
The fulse becomes therefore an exact criterion of the 
action of the heart. The variations as to age and sex 
have been carefully observed by Dr. Guy of London, anti 
we herewith submit the tabulated statement made by him 
of the frequency of the beats of the heart per minute. 
Age. 
Males. 
Females. 
At birth. 
130 
140 
At one year. 
120 
130 
From 2 to 7 years. 
97 
98 
“ 8 “ 14 “ 
84 
94 
“ 14 “ 21 “ 
76 
82 
“ 21 “ 28 “ 
73 
80 
“ 28 “ 35 “ 
70 
78 
“ 35 “ 42 “ 
68 
78 
“ 42 “ 49 “ 
70 
77 
“ 49 “ 56 “ 
67 
76 
“ 56 “ 63 “ 
68 
77 
“ 63 “ 70 “ 
70 
78 
“ 70 “ 77 “ 
67 
81 
“ 77 « 84 
7i 
82 
Influence of Digestion. That the condition of the 
digestive system has a marked influence on the rapidity of 
the pulse and specially so within five or ten minutes after 
a meal, every one can observe on himself and find that 
the pulse has increased from 6 to 12 beats per minute 
over the normal scale. Abstinence from food for a con- 
siderable length of time lias the opposite effect, and 
diminishes the frequency of the pulse from 12 to 15 70 
THE HEART. 
beats. Alcohol and its many allied beverages first 
diminishes and after some little time accelerates the pulse 
and causes variations in the How of the blood, which soon 
impairs its usefulness, if persisted in. Coffee, especially 
s'rong black coffee accelerates the pulse and is often taken 
advantage of for this quality by medical practitioners. Of 
food in general, animal has a tendency to accelerate to a 
greater degree the rapidity of the pulse, than vegetable 
articles of diet. 
Influence of Posture and Muscular Exertion. 1 he 
position of the body has a very marked influence upon the 
rapidity of the pulse. The investigations by Dr. Guy of 
London, are of an interesting character, and may be of 
service to the reader, in the endeavor to lessen the heart’s 
action, on himself or on those whose health is in his keep- 
ing. The difference is due to the position of the body 
alone and in one observation Dr. Guy found that the 
pulse in a standing position was 89 beats; lying down 77; 
hence a difference of 12 beats. This enormous difference 
is due to the muscular effort which is required to keep 
the body in the posture named. 
Dr. Austin Flint, Jr., reports differences as follows: 
1. Erect posture without support and leaning in same 
posture, 12 beats per minute. 
2. Recumbent position fully supported and only par- 
tially so, 14 beats per minute. 
3. Sitting posture, back supported, 80; not supported, 
87; difference 7 beats. 
4. Sitting posture with legs raised at right angles 
with the body, back unsupported, 86; supported 68, 
difference 18 beats. 
Exercise has a strong tendency to accelerate the pulse. 
The Influence of Temperature is so marked, that if a 
body is exposed to extreme heat for a very few minutes 
only, the pulse may be doubled. It may be considerably 
reduced by a cold douche or shower bath. THE HEART. 
71 
The Nervous System has considerable influence upon 
the actions of the heart, notwithstanding that we cannot 
control its movements by the will. The organ itself is 
The Heart and the Arch of the Aorta. 
Engraving No. io. 
void of general sensibility, and was shown to be so, as 
early as Harvey’s time (1578-1658), by this eminent 
anatomist, when he demonstrated before Charles I, by 72 
THE ARTERIES. 
making that monarch touch the heart of Viscount Mont- 
gomery, which had been laid bare by a wound in the 
breast bone. 1 he pain which is often referred to the 
heart is most commonly produced by a simple neuralgia 
of the thoracic wall. 
Notwithstanding this insensibility and in spite of the 
fact that the muscular fibers composing it are contractile, 
the physiological movements of the heart are capable of 
being influenced to a remarkable degree, through the 
nervous system. For do we not know, that emotion, fear, 
anxiety, joy, and numerous other acts emanating from the 
nerve centers, make the heart flutter, beat slower or 
faster? It is also, owing to the facility with which 
the emotions of the mind act upon the heart, that we at- 
tribute to this organ all the sentiments we feel. 
And this is so universal among civilized as well as those 
who are not, that one finds expressions in all languages, 
in sayings and proverbs, which make the heart the source 
of our passions, hence the expressions: a heartless man, 
a hard heart, a good heart, a brave and noble heart, a 
broken heart, to characterize selfishness, goodness, courage, 
generosity and sorrow. 
In the same sense, Vauvenargues has said, “All great 
thoughts come from the heart.” 
In order that the anatomy of the heart and its intimate 
connection with the great bloodvessels be easier compre- 
hended, we invite the reader’s careful study of the engraving 
of that organ, together with the aorta, its arch and other 
arteries and veins in its immediate vicinity. 
The Arteries are cylindrical tubular vessels, which 
serve to convey the blood from both ventricles of the heart 
to every part of the body. These vessels were named 
“arteries,’’ which means “to contain air,” from the belief 
entertained by the ancients that they did so. This errone- 
ous belief was based upon the fact that most of the arteries 
are empty after death. THE ARTERIES. 
73 
The pulmonary or lung artery which arises from the 
right ventricle, carries venous blood directly into the lungs, 
whence it is returned by the pulmonary veins to the left 
auricle. This constitutes the “lesser,” or pulmonic 
circulation. 
The great artery, usually called the aorta, conveys 
arterial blood to the body, whence it is brought back to 
the heart by the veins. This constitutes the “greater,” 
or systemic circulation. 
The distribution of the systemic arteries is like a highly 
ramified tree, the common trunk of which is formed by the 
aorta, which commences at the left ventricle of the heart. 
Arteries are found in all parts of the body, with the excep- 
tion of the hairs, nails, epidermis, cartilage and the cornea. 
The larger trunks occupy usually positions, where they are 
not much exposed to injury. 
Arteries in their distribution communicate freely with 
one another, forming what is called “anastomosis” or 
inosculations. I his is especially the case when great free- 
dom and activity is necessary, as in the brain, the abdo- 
men, the limbs, etc., etc. 
I hese inosculations are of great interest to the surgeon, 
as it is by their enlargement that a collateral circulation is 
established after the application of a ligature to an artery. 
The smaller arteries inosculate more frequently than the 
larger, and between the smallest twigs, these anastomosis 
become so numerous as to constitute a close network which 
pervades nearly every tissue of the body. 
Arteries are dense in structure, of considerable strength, 
highly elastic, and when divided, although empty they pre- 
serve their cylindrical form. 
In studying the location of the arteries the reader is 
urged to impress upon his mind the graphic illustrations 
upon the subject, not only the heart and its closely con- 
nected vessels on preceding page (No. io), but also the 
plate, showing the formation, oxygenation and circulation 74 
THE ARTERIES. 
of the blood throughout the body, in the vessels as shown 
in engraving No. 11. From it also the names and approx- 
imate locations of these vessels can be ascertained. The 
object lesson which can be gained from this plate ought to 
be vividly graven upon the tablet of memory, and then the 
course of the blood through the arteries, as explained in 
next paragraph, will be better understood and appreciated. 
d'he Aorta or Great artery is the main trunk of a 
series of bloodvessels, which, arising from the heart, convey 
the red oxygenated blood to every part of the body for its 
nutrition. This artery commences at the upper part of 
the left ventricle, and after ascending for a short distance, 
as shown in engraving No. io, arches backward and to the 
left side of the vertebral column. In descending it passes 
through the diaphragm into the abdominal cavity, where 
it divides about opposite the fourth lumbar vertebra, 
forming the right and left iliac or flank arteries. 
That part of the aorta before it arches, is called the 
“Ascending,” the next section the “Arch,” after its 
curvature downward till it reaches the diaphragm, the 
“ Descending thoracic ” and from there to its bifurcation the 
“Descending abdominal aorta.” 
From the arch three important branches arise; one on 
the right side, called the innominate artery, is the largest 
branch given from the arch, and after ascending, differing 
in different individuals, divides into the right carotid and 
the right subclavian arteries. The left carotid and the 
left subclavian arteries ascend direct from the arch, the 
former in the middle and the latter on the farthest to the 
right. The two carotid arteries need more than a passing 
notice, for after ascending to about the angle of the jaw, 
each branches into two stems ; one brings the life’s nutrient 
fluid to the brain, the internal, while the other sustains 
the vitality of the face and outer portions of the cranium. 
Shut off the main trunks of these arteries, and the func- THE ARTERIES. 
75 
tions of the seat of our sensibilities cease, and the ex- 
pressions in the Creator’s image become ghastly. 
The two subclavian arteries bring new food for our 
shoulders, arms and hands, which enables them in their 
avocations to pursue labor for gain, to defend us from 
encroachment, and to embrace those who are dear and 
near to us. 
From the abdominal aorta, as soon as it reaches that 
cavity, three branches are given off, on the right, the 
hepatic or liver artery and on left the gastric or stomach, 
and splenic or spleen arteries. A little below this, the 
itpper mesenteric artery leaves the main stem, to carry 
blood to the intestines. A short distance farther down, 
one large branch is thrown off for each kidney, forming 
the renal arteries. Half way between last branches and 
place of bifurcation, the lower mesenteric artery leaves, 
performing like service as the upper. 
Returning to the right and left iliac arteries and follow- 
ing them for a short distance, we find that each separates 
into two branches, the internal iliac carrying blood to the 
pelvis, and the external iliac which descends into the thigh, 
and when there is called the femoral artery, throwing off 
branches for the carrying of sustenance to that part. It 
inclines toward the back part of it a little above the knee. 
It pursues its descending course after dividing and redivid- 
ing in the body of the leg, giving off branches large and 
small, so that every part needing new material for the 
rebuilding of worn out tissue is properly supplied. 
All the arteries appertaining to the systemic circu- 
lation arise from the heart by one stem namely, the aorta, 
which has its largest diameter just as it leaves the heart. 
This trunk and its branches decrease in size in their 
ascent and descent from that organ, proportionate to the 
distance and in conformity to the number of branches 
given, till they reach their extremities, where they become 
so small as not to be visible to the naked eye. 76 
THE CAPILLARIES. 
The Capillaries. The word is derived from the Latin 
“capillus” a hair, but as this does not signify its office, 
a definition as to the functions of this class of bloodves- 
sels becomes apparent. The capillaries are to be regarded 
as commencing at the point where the blood is brought 
near enough to the tissues to enable them to separate 
from the blood the elements necessary for their regener- 
ation, and to give up the products of their decay. With 
the knowledge at present at command of the learned, 
it is impossible to say exactly where the minute arteries 
cease to be merely carriers of blood or where they com- 
mence to deliver new sustenance, and pick up waste 
matter. 
1 he outside diameter of the capillaries is generally as 
small or may even be smaller than the blood corpuscles 
which pass through them. Persons acquainted with the 
use of the microscope can observe this most interesting 
phenomenon in the web of a frog’s foot, and can see that 
the little corpuscles move in a single line and become 
deformed while passing through capillaries which are 
smaller than the corpuscles. 
The capillaries are smallest in the nervous and muscu- 
lar tissues, the retina of the eye and certain places in the 
small intestine called the patches of Peyer, where they 
have a diameter from W<nr to toVo of an inch. In the 
mucous layers of the skin and in the mucous membranes, 
they are from roVo to 2-3V0 of an inch in diameter. The 
largest are found in the glands and bones where they are 
from Woo to jooi of an inch in diameter. The measure- 
ments indicate the outside diameter. 
These capillaries form true networks of nearly uniform 
diameter, and do not grow smaller like the arteries in 
their branches, or become larger like the veins when 
receiving new tributaries. Their mode of inosculation is 
peculiar to these vessels, and the capillary network is rich 
in the tissues as a general rule, in proportion to the THE VEINS. 
77 
activity of their nutrition. The meshes of the capillary 
network in the lungs are very close, but in other parts are 
not so dense and present great variations. 
In the muscles and nerves in which nutrition is very 
active, the supply of blood is much more abundant than in 
other parts like serous membranes, tendons, etc., in con- 
sequence the capillary network is more dense. 
The capillaries commence where the arteries end, and 
terminate at the beginning of the veins and thus form a 
connecting link between the bloodvessels, carrying blood 
from the heart, the arteries, and the vessels, returning it 
to that organ, the veins. They are so dense in nearly 
all parts of the body that it would be difficult to intro- 
duce a cambric needle without wounding one of these 
minute vessels. 
The Veins are the vessels which serve to return the 
blood from the capillaries of the different parts of the 
body to the heart, and in their approach to that organ 
increase in size until at last they form two large trunks of 
all the tributaries from all regions of the body, namely, 
the upper and lower vena cava. This, like in the case 
of the arteries forms the systemic venous circulation. 
The blood from the head is returned by the right and 
left jugular veins, and their tributaries; from the arms by 
the two subclavian veins and their affluents, forming the 
upper vena cava. 
The blood from the lower extremities is gathered by 
the femoral veins and its tributaries, which after they 
ascend into the abdomen, form the external iliac veins. 
The latter two unite with the internal iliac veins, bringing 
blood from the pelvis, and form the common iliac veins, 
right and left. These two veins unite in about the same 
place where the aorta bifurcates and form the lower vena 
cava. This latter trunk in its ascent receives only two 
tributaries direct throughout the abdominal cavity, namely, 
the renal veins, returning the blood from the two kid- INTERNAL ORGANS. 
(Engraving No. 11.) 
Organs of Digestion. 
1. (Esophagus or Gullet. 
2. Stomach. A. cardiac. B. py- 
loric opening. 
3. Duodenum. 
4. Section of Small Intestine. 
5. Caecum. 
6. Ilio-csecal Valve. 
7. Ascending Colon. 
8. Section of Transverse Colon. 
9. Descending Colon. 
10. Sigmoid Flexure. 
11. Rectum. 
12. Liver. C. right lobe. D. left 
lobe. 
13. Gall Bladder. 
14. Bile Duct. 
Accessory Digestive Organs. 
15. Spleen. 
16. Pancreas. 
17. Pancreatic Duct. 
18. Common Duct. (Union). 
Urinary Organs. 
19. Kidneys. 
20. Ureters. 
21. Upper portion of Bladder 
Lower portion removed to 
show rectum. 
Respiratory Organs. 
22. Trachea. Lower portion. 
23. Bronchi. 
24. Lungs. E. upper, F. middle, G. lower, lobes of right lung. H. 
upper, I. lower, lobes of left lung. 
25. Heart. K. right auricle, L. left 
auricle, M. right auricle, N. 
left auricle. 
26. Aorta. 
27. Innominate Artery. 
28. Subclavian Arteries. 
29. Common Carotid Arteries. 
Circulatory Organs. 
30. Renal Arteries. 
31. Coeliac Axis, giving branches 
to Stomach, Liver and Spleen. 
32. Mesenteric Artery, giving 
blood to intestines. 
33. Iliac Arteries. 
34- Left Pulmonary Artery. 
35. Right Pulmonary Artery. 
36. Left Pulmonary Vein. 
37. Right Pulmonary Vein. 
Lesser Circulation. 
38. Upper Vena Cava. 
39. Right Innominate Vein. 
40. Left Innominate Vein. 
41. Subclavian Veins. 
42. Internal Jugular Veins. 
48. Portal Vein (tributaries cut off). This vein gathers all the blood 
from the viscera of digestion. 
43. External Jugular Veins. 
44. Lower Vena Cava. 
45. Hepatic or Liver Vein. 
46. Renal Veins. 
47. Iliac Veins. 
Miscellaneous Organs. 
49. Chyle Receptacle (lower part of thoracic duct). 
50. Thoracic Duct. 
51. Entrance of Thoracic Duct into Subclavian Vein. 
52. Mesenteria, showing Glands and Vessels leading to Thoracic 
Duct. Engraving No, ns Internal Organs. 
79 MECHANISM OF CIRCULATION. 
81 
neys relieved of the urine. The blood returned from the 
digestive apparatus is gathered by the splenic, gastric, 
mesenteric and pancreatic veins which unite in the portal 
vein and deliver the blood into the largest gland of the 
body, the liver, where it becomes relieved of the bile, 
then passes out of that organ by way of the hepatic or 
liver veins into the lower vena cava, just before its pene- 
tration of the diaphragm. The last described collection 
of blood forms what is usually called the portal circula- 
tion. Veins are abundantly supplied with valves which 
facilitate the return of the blood to the heart. 
MECHANISM OF CIRCULATION. 
Dr. Wm. Harvey (England), discovered the circula- 
tion of the blood in 1616, A. D. As early, however, 
as 1553 A. D., Michael Servetus drew attention to the 
pulmonary circulation and embodied his discoveries in a 
theological work, not however, for the promulgation of 
physiological facts, but for the development of a theory 
with regard to the formation of the soul. 
The mechanism of the circulation is as follows: The 
venous blood flowing from all the regions of the body 
arrives by the two venae cavae into the right auricle, and 
from there it flows into the right ventricle, which propels it 
into the pulmonary artery, the ramifications of which are 
distributed in the substance of the lungs. It is in the 
lungs, that the dark venous blood, through the absorption 
of oxygen in the air, becomes red or arterial, and thus modi- 
fied, it returns by the pulmonary veins into the left auricle 
from where it passes into the left ventricle. The con- 
tractions of the left ventricle propel the current of blood 
into the aorta and, thence into the whole of the arterial 
system as far as the capillaries, where the blood leaves its 
nutritive qualities in the tissues of the economy. From 
the capillaries it returns at last to the heart by the veins, 
which were selected as a point of departure of this circular 82 
MECHANISM OF CIRCULATION. 
journey. The heart may therefore be justly compared 
to a forcing pump which feeds itself. 
The blood takes only about thirty seconds to make 
the entire round of circulation, and consequently in 
twenty-four hours a blood corpuscle traverses 2880 times 
the double circulatory circle, which is equal to a speed of 
about seventeen miles an hour, or 408 miles in twenty-four. THE DIGESTIVE SYSTEM. 
83 
CHAPTER VI. 
THE DIGESTIVE SYSTEM. 
One of the inevitable conditions of life, is that in the 
organism of the human body and other animals a constant 
change is taking place, which may be termed a physi- 
ological decay. Even the smallest particles gradually die 
and in turn are replaced by new ones, so that every part 
having all the external appearances and signs of the 
former whole, is after a certain time in reality composed 
of new materials. T his process is necessary, and while it 
may be increased or retarded in its activity, it cannot be 
arrested durinof life. 
I he excrementitious principles which are thus formed 
are produced constantly by the tissues and must be con- 
stantly removed from the organism, otherwise they accu- 
mulate and induce a serious poisoned condition. Ex- 
amples of this are found in those diseases of the 
kidneys, which interefere with the elimination of urea, 
producing uraemic poisoning, and in the diseases of the 
liver, which interfere with the discharge of bile giving 
cause to serious disturbances in the whole system. 
As is evidenced by the amount of matter daily dis- 
charged from the body, the process of disassimilation is a 
very active one. This constant operation necessitates 
appropriation of new matter by the parts in order that a 
proper composition may be maintained therein, and be 
always ready to perform their functions in the economy. 
The blood contains all the principles necessary for 84 
HUNGER AND THIRST. 
the regeneration of the organism. Whereas the physi- 
ological decay of the organism is constantly repaired by 
the blood, the materials which it is constantly losing in 
this recuperative process must be replaced from some 
source out of the body, and this necessitates the ingestion 
of food ; otherwise the great nutritive fluid would become 
impoverished and incapable to perform the multitude of 
functions of its office. 
We partake of food in obedience to a want on the 
part of the system, which is expressed by a sensation 
known as hunger, when it relates to solid or semi-solid 
matters, and thirst when it relates to water. As these 
sensations constitute the first cause of the introduction 
of materials capable of regenerating the blood, their con- 
sideration naturally precedes the study of digestion, the 
process by which these articles of food are prepared for 
absorption and appropriation by the circulating fluid. 
Hunger and Thirst. That peculiar want felt by 
the system, which causes us to partake of nutritive prin- 
ciples, may be properly termed hunger. The first mani- 
festation of it is perhaps best expressed by the term 
appetite, not in the least a disagreeable sensation, and 
one which may be excited by sight, smell, or the recol- 
lection of a savory dish, and not always at times when 
actual need exists for the articles by the system. 
Appetite is influenced by habit, as we all know, that it 
returns about meal times. When food has been placed 
in the stomach the appetite disappears and gives place to a 
sense of satisfaction which accompanies the undisturbed 
and normal action of the digestive organs. In those peo- 
ple who do not even allow themselves proper time to eat, 
and are absorbed in other thoughts, this sense of satis- 
faction is absent and the only change experienced is that 
the desire for food has disappeared. 
In the human family the appetite is usually manifested 
to a marked degree two or three times daily. This rule HUNGER AND THIRST. 
85 
holds good with the adult rather than in childhood, where 
the system needs not only material for the worn out tis- 
sues, but also for growth, food is taken oftener and in rela- 
tively larger quantities than by the adult. Infants should 
take food at least seven or eight times a day (twenty-four 
hours) ; any restriction in this, usually causes great detri- 
ment in a growing child. Parents are morally respon- 
sible for the proper development of their offspring and the 
least they can do is to see that the food the little one 
partakes of is of good quality and unrestricted quantity. 
Temperature subjects theappetite to important modifica- 
tions. In cold climates and during the winter season in 
all climates the desire for food is notably increased and 
taste somewhat modified. Animal food and especially 
fats are more agreeable at that time, and the quantity 
demanded by the system is usually an increased one. 
Mental and physical exercise and occupation when not 
practiced to a point of exhaustion, foster the desire for 
food, and are the best digestive condiments. 
Alcoholic beverages, especially those which are desig- 
nated by the term “ stomach bitters,” have a tendency to 
create an appetite. Before you resort to this unnatural 
expedient give us your attention and take warning that 
it is not a healthy appetite, and if you persist in the prac- 
tice, either in the shape of an “eye opener” in the morn- 
ing or an “appetizer” for dinner or supper you will soon 
find out that you have ruined your digestive apparatus 
and the agreeable sensation of hunger is only a reminis- 
cence. Alcohol is neither food or drink, it cannot be- 
come a component part of the blood, and leaves the body 
in a vapor without having contributed anything to its well 
being. 
It disturbs the functions of the stomach, consequently 
impedes digestion. The use of alcohol in any shape 
leads to abuse, and the latter will take away all desire 
for food. 86 
HUNGER AND THIRST. 
If we do not heed the demands of the system as ex- 
pressed by appetite, the sensation of hunger becomes dis- 
tressing, and manifested by a peculiar and indescribable 
feeling which soon makes itself known by a pain in the 
stomach. This is usually accompanied by pain in the 
head, and a general feeling of distress. The imperative 
demand for food if not soon satisfied, establishes in the 
mind a doubtful idea of existence. The moral and intel- 
lectual feelings if overcome by starvation, give place and 
full play to a purely animal feeling. There is a demand on 
the part of the system that the extremity of hunger and 
thirst must be satisfied if within the range of possibility. 
The numerous instances in which cannibalism has been 
resorted to when starvation was imminent, is sufficient 
evidence of the furious delirium which supervenes after a 
few days of complete abstinence from food. 
Instances of sublime resignation to the terrible agony 
incident to approaching starvation are on record, but these 
are rare in comparison with the examples of frightful ex- 
pedients to satisfy the demands of nature. 
Hunger, as experienced in the normal state, is simply a 
notification that material is needed for the regeneration of 
the blood. That its seat is not in the stomach entirely, is 
proven by the fact that persons suffering from organic 
disease of the stomach have still an appetite, and become 
hungry, which sensations are satisfied in a measure by the 
injection of nutritive substances into the rectum. 
Thirst is a sensation which induces us to partake of 
water. The feeling of thirst, if moderate, is rather indefi- 
nite, and accompanied by a sense of dryness and heat in 
the throat. Habit has thirst very much under its influence, 
as can be easily observed by the difference in desire for 
liquid in different persons. In some, two or three times a 
day suffices, while others have oftener a desire for water. 
Thirst is sensibly influenced by the condition of the atmos- 
phere, as regards moisture, by exercise, and by influences ALIMENTATION. 
87 
which discharge water from the body, particularly the 
process of perspiration. Loss of considerable amount of 
blood, or operations accompanied by excessive haemor- 
rhages, cause thirst. The system has a more imperative 
demand for water than for solids; this substance being 
second to the demand for oxygen. Persons having an 
abundance of solid food, but no water, will not survive 
more than a few days. Water is of the utmost importance 
to the functions of nutrition, and acts as a solvent in re- 
moving from the system such particles as cannot be 
assimilated. 
After total deprivation of water for a considerable time, 
the thirst becomes intense, and almost agonizing; fever en- 
sues, the blood becomes thickened, consequently diminished 
in quantity; the urine is scanty and scalding, and signs of 
inflammation make their appearance. Death takes place 
in a few days, generally preceded by delirium. 
The seat of thirst is instinctively referred to as in the 
mouth and throat, but not necessarily appeased by the 
passing of water over these parts, as it may be effectually 
relieved by the introduction of water into the system by 
other channels. To alleviate thirst, water must be ab- 
sorbed by the system. 
Alimentation is the act or process of affording nutri- 
ment, and under the name of aliment, in its widest 
signification, it is proposed to include all articles composed 
of, or containing elements in a form, which enables them 
to be used for the nourishment of the body under the fol- 
lowing circumstances, as being appropriated by the organ- 
ism ; by their favorable influence upon nutrition, or by 
retarding disassimilation. 
By the definition of aliment, nothing is excluded which 
contributes to nutrition. The air must be considered in 
this light, as well as water and all articles which are com- 
monly called drink. 
The alimentary principles belong to the inorganic, 88 
ALIMENTATION. 
vegetable and animal kingdoms, and are usually divided 
into three classes : 
1. Organic nitrogenized principles. 
2. Organic non-nitrogenized principles. 
3. Inorganic principles. 
To the first class belongs muscaline, which is an albu- 
men,, formed from the albuminous matter of lean flesh by 
the action of dilute acid. 
Albumen, as an article of diet, and as found in the 
animal and vegetable kingdom, is of much importance, 
inasmuch as it constitutes the nutritive principles of the 
blood, and is the substance into which all the principles of 
this class which exist in food are converted before they 
are applied to the nutrition of the tissues. The white of 
eggs is nearly pure albumen. 
Caseine is only found in milk, and constitutes at a cer- 
tain period of life the sole article of food. 
Fibrine is also an albuminous substance, formed from 
the coagulation of blood; to this also belongs the yolk 
of egg. 
00 
Gluten is the highly nutritive substance found in 
grain, especially wheat. The nutritive power of gluten is 
so great and contains so many alimentary principles that 
for experiment’s sake dogs have been fed and were well 
nourished by an exclusive diet, and have lived for an in- 
definite period under it. 
Under the second class belongs sugar, starch and fat. 
They are very important alimentary principles, for the 
reason that they are exclusively concerned in keeping up 
the animal temperature by the oxidation of carbon. 
Sugar may be found both in the animal and vegetable 
kingdoms, and before it is taken into blood is converted 
through the process of digestion into glucose, the chemical 
composition of which is C12 HI4 0,4. 
Starch closely resembles sugar in its chemical compo- 
sition, and is contained in abundance in a great number of ALIMENTATION. 
89 
vegetables, notably wheat, rye, corn, barley, rice, oats, 
potatoes, chestnuts, beans, peas, lentils, tapioca, sweet 
potato and sago. 
Starch is insoluble in water, but when boiled with sev- 
eral times its volume of water the granules swell up, 
become transparent, and fuse together and give it a 
mucilage like consistency. Upon cooling it becomes more 
consistent. This change in starch is called hydration, 
and is interesting as one of the transformations which 
takes place in the process of digestion, when starch is par- 
taken in the uncooked state. The most interesting prop- 
erties of starch are connected with its transformation, 
first into dextrine and finally into glucose. This always 
takes place before starch can be ab orbed into the system. 
Fats from the animal kingdom as well as the vegetable 
realm form important alimentary principles. Before fats 
can be absorbed by the blood they are emulsionized by 
alkaline matters furnished by the body. 
To class three, pre-eminently belongs water, which is 
one of the most important principles of the organism, and 
is found in every tissue and part of the body, excepting 
none. It is introduced with all kinds of foods and is the 
only drink which quenches thirst. It is taken, as a rule, 
in greater or less quantity in the pure state, such as it is, 
for real pure water does not exist in nature. Even rain 
water contains salts, and frequently a little organic matter. 
Chloride of Sodium, is one of the most widely distributed 
saline substances in the animal and vegetable kingdoms. 
It exists in nearly all foods, but not in sufficient quantities 
to satisfy the system ; hence its addition to food as a con- 
diment, and for the peculiar flavor it imparts. It promotes 
secretion of digestive fluids and meets a positive nutritive 
demand upon the system. 
Phosphate of Lime, the bone building substance, is 
also very abundant, and as common a constituent of 
vegetable and animal food as salt. It need not be added 
O 90 
QUANTITY OF FOOD NECESSARY TO NUTRITION. 
to food, as a sufficient quantity is in it for nutritive 
purposes. 
Iron is the coloring matter of the blood. Beyond ihat 
which is found in food none should be taken unless pre- 
scribed by a physician. 
QUANTITY OF FOOD NECESSARY TO 
NUTRITION. 
The old proverb, “ Food and drink keep body and 
soul together,” is a good one, and everybody seems to live in 
accordance with the teachings it conveys. H owever, it does 
not answer the question as to how much and what we shall 
eat, these are circumstances, which we can perceive only 
through the sensations incident to hunger, and the satis- 
faction thereof. We must learn to properly estimate 
these matters. 
In the child the nutriment is mainly used as building 
material for its growing body and to keep up the tempera- 
ture of it. It is therefore in proportion that the little 
body needs nourishment as its growth increases 
If a child weighs at birth, say 63/£ pounds, its average 
daily increase is as follows : 
During first month ounce. 
“ second “ 1 sV “ 
“ third “ I 
“ fourth “ I 
“ fifth “ i “ 
“ sixth “ Vo 
“ seventh “ I 
“ eighth “ 3 
“ ninth “ \ 
“ tenth “ f 
“ eleventh “ ! 
“ twelfth “ \ 
which brings the whole weight of the body after twelve 
months to pounds. Up to the twentieth year the 
weight increases about twenty fold, figuring from birth, 
and remains after that about stationary. QUANTITY OF FOOD NECESSARY TO NUTRITION. 
91 
From this statement it will be perceived that we should 
eat and drink daily such quantities as are needed in 
the economy of the body. Every day which we neglect in 
doing our duty toward our body cannot be made good, and 
consequently the change in the tissues is interfered with. 
A table of nutriments needed at different periods of 
life is herewith submitted, which will give an approximate 
idea of what is necessary to sustain life. 
ALBUMEN. 
FAT. 
SUGAR. 
Child six months old.... 
4 oz. 
li OZ. 
2 OZ. 
(Which is contained in 33 
oz. milk.) 
Child two years old.... 
4oz- 
4 OZ. 
4f oz. 
Child fifteen years old 
2i oz- 
it OZ. 
8 oz. 
Grown man 
L| oz. 
16 oz. 
Grown woman 
2iVoz- 
2 9l 07 
1 ii oz. 
In old age 
2i oz. 
l| oz. 
9i oz. 
together with such salts and other inorganic principles as 
the food after preparation contains, and as much liquid as 
may be demanded by the system. 
This must not be understood however, as a cast iron 
rule as to the quantity of food necessary to maintain the 
system in a proper condition ; for it is evident that it 
must be greatly modified by habit, climate, the condition 
of the muscular system, age, etc. 
Professor Dalton of New York, made some inter- 
esting observations as to the actual amount of food 
required, and we repeat in his own language the results: 
‘ Prom experiments performed while living on an ex- 
clusive diet of bread, fresh meat and butter, with coffee 
and water for drink, we have found that the entire quan- 
tity of food required during twenty-four hours by a man 
in full health, and taking free exercise in the open air, is as 
follows: 
Meat 16 ounces. 
Bread 19 
Butter or fat “ 
Water 52 fl. “ 
“ That is to say, rather less than two and a half 92 
QUANTITY OF FOOD NECESSARY TO NUTRITION. 
pounds of solid food, and rather over three pints of liquid 
food. ’ 
The following tabulated statement, showing the value 
of different aliments, will, it is hoped, be of service in 
selecting judiciously the food required for a proper suste- 
nance of the body. It is averaged and classified under 
five heads: 
TABLE SHOWING COMPOSITION OF DIFFERENT FOODS. 
1 
In ioo Ounces of : 
Albumen 
n 
o 
- 
'TAIN I 
in 
cd 
Sugar forming c 
Elements. c 
S! 
:es. 
U 
<D 
4-> 
Salts. 
FROM THE ANIMAL KINGDOM. 
16.9 
2 7.2 
34.8 
I . O 
Beef, lean 
20.6 
i-5 
76.7 
1 .2 
Veal fat 
18.9 
7 . 4 
72.7 
i-3 
Veal lean 
19.8 
c. 8 
78.8 
0.6 
Mniton, fat 
14.8 
26.4 
47 . Q 
0 . Q 
Mutton, medium 
18. i 
C .8 
76.0 
I . 3 
Fresh Pork, fat 
14. q 
37-3 
47-4 
O . 7 
Fresh Pork, lean 
IQ Q 
6.4 
7 2.6 
I . I 
Venison 
19.8 
2.0 
I .4 
75-8 
l. I 
Rabbit 
23-3 
1.1 
O. 2 
74.2 
I . 2 
Prairie Chicken 
2 s . 
1 • 4 
72.0 
I . 3 
Wild Ducks 
J O 
22.7 
3 •1 
2-3 
70.8 
I. I 
Chicken 
19.0 
5 -° 
I .O 
73-° 
1.0 
Pigeon 
22.1 
1.0 
0.8 
7 3-° 
1.0 
Goose, fat 
I C . Q 
4c. 6 
38.0 
0.3 
Dried Fresh Codfish 
77-9 
o. 36 
1.6 
16.2 
!-5 
Carp German 
20.6 
I . f 
77.0 
1 . 3 
Pike and Pickerel. 
20.1 
0.7 
0.9 
77-5 
0.8 
Haddock 
I 7 . I 
0.4 
81.0 
1.6 
Herring, Salt 
I9.2 
14.7 
i-3 
46.2 
16.8 
Lobster 
13.6 
0.4 
0.2 
72.7 
13.0 
Oysters 
5 -° 
0.4 
2.6 
89.0 
2.4 
Egg (whole) 
12.6 
12.1 
0.6 
73-7 
1.1 
Milk 
3-4 
3-7 
4.8 
87.0 
0.7 
Milk, Condensed 
16.1 
12.1 
38-9 
25-7 
2.6 
Hog Lard 
0.3 
99.0 
o. 7 
Suet ... 
0.4 
98.2 
1.2 
Smoked Ham 
24.0 
86-5 
!-5 
0 
00 
0 
10.1 
Dried Beef 
27.0 
PS-4 
10.6 QUANTITY OF FOOD NECESSARY TO NUTRITION. 
93 
CONTAIN IN OUNCES. 
In ioo Ounces of: 
Albumen. 
C/3 
c3 
Sugar Forming 
Elements. 
U, 
V 
C/3 
m 
FROM THE ANIMAL KINGDOM. 
Rutter 
° • 9 
83.x 
2° . 5 
o. 7 
14.1 
40.0 
16.1 
1.2 
Cheese 
27.6 
1 *3 
Q . O 
2.0 
3.0 
81.4 
0.1 
FROM THE VEGETABLE KINGDOM. 
Wheat Flour 
I . O 
74.0 
69.0 
K2.0 
13.0 
14.0 
39-° 
44.0 
13.0 
13.0 
14.8 
13.0 
15.0 
14.0 
76.0 
87.0 
85 • 0 
0.6 
Rye Flour 
I I .O 
2 .O 
1 -3 
Wheat Rread.... 
6.8 
°. 7 
2.0 
R ye Rread 
6.0 
°-5 
0.4 
48.0 
76.0 
76.2 
83-3 
76.4 
45-4 
54-2 
20.6 
1.3 
Farina 
10.4 
0.5 
Pearl Barley 
7 • 3 
1.2 
1.2 
Cornstarch.. .... 
1 -5 
7.8 
0.4 
Rice 
0.7 
0.8 
Rea ns drier! 
22.8 
2.7 
2.1 
2.6 
Peas dried 
21.0 
2 • 7 
Potatoes Irish .... 
2.6 
0.2 
1.0 
Carrots 
1.0 
0.2 
10.0 
1.0 
Kohlrabi 
7 -° 
0.2 
9.0 
1.2 
Asparagus 
2.1 
°. 3 
3.0 
93-° 
90.4 
84.0 
90.4 
90.1 
90.0 
9°-3 
7-3 
96.0 
95-2 
93-° 
80.5 
88.4 
1.5 
Oyster Plant 
1.0 
0.5 
14.8 
11.8 
1.0 
Celery 
1 • 3 
0.4 
0.8 
Cauliflower 
2 • 5 
0.4 
5 -° 
0.8 
Cabbage, red 
1.8 
0.2 
6.0 
0.8 
Cabbage, white 
2.0 
0.2 
5 .o 
1.2 
Spinach 
3 •2 
0.5 
3 • 3 
2.0 
Pumpkin and Hubbard Squash .... 
Cucumber 
90.0 
1.0 
0.7 
0.1 
0.1 
2-3 
0.6 
0.4 
Melon 
1.1 
0.6 
1.4 
0.6 
Tomato 
1 -3 
°. 3 
4.0 
0.6 
Peas, green 
5.8 
° .5 
11.0 
0.8 
Beans, green 
2.8 
0.1 
7.6 
44.2 
12.6 
0.6 
Mushrooms, dried.... 
23.8 
0.4 
1.2 
i7-5 
83.0 
83.6 
7-1 
Pears .... 
0.3 
Apples 
0.4 
12.9 
0.3 
Crapes 
0.6 
17.1 
11.2 
78.2 
81.2 
0.5 
Plums green . . . . 
0.8 
°. 7 
Plums, dried 
2.6 
o-5 
table 
48.0 
king 
95-5 
73-° 
21.7 
3-2 
29.8 
1.3 
MANUFACTURED ARTICLES (from 
vege 
dom.) 
3.0 
1.5 
24.6 
2-3 
1 ur * 
14.9 
0.7 
49-3 
o-3 
3-7 
Beer, Export 
1 95.0 
1.0 94 
DIGESTION. 
“ Variety is the spice of life,” Surely this old adage 
cannot be better applied than by changing the word “life” 
to “digestion.” The writer does not desire to under- 
estimate the intelligence of the reader by laying down 
rules as to the change in the various foods, but wishes to 
add that monotony in food becomes about as tiresome to 
the appetite as the tune “Marching through Georgia” 
was to the late General Sherman. 
DIGESTION. 
Digestion is the function by which foods introduced 
into the digestive apparatus, are converted into soluble 
and diffusible products, capable of being absorbed by the 
blood. This process is caused by both mechanical and 
chemical means. 
In the chapter upon this important subject, we will 
follow food in a journey through the alimentary canal 
(commencing at mouth and terminating with the rectum), 
and thus learn how and by what means foods are con- 
verted into blood and how the non-assimilable matters are 
discharged from the body through the rectum. 
The process of digestion comprises seven successive 
acts, and an anatomical and physiological description of the 
organs partaking in this process will be made, including 
those which are accessory. 
1. Prehension of Food. Every animal is supplied 
with proper means for this first stage of digestion. Thus 
man makes use of his hand, the elephant of its trunk, the 
cat of its teeth and claws, the horse of his lips, the ox 
of his tongue and the insects of their suckers. 
2. Mastication or Chewing. This process is solely 
performed by the teeth, assisted by the muscles of 
mastication, lips and tongue. 
During life two sets of teeth are furnished to the 
human being, one a temporary set, which are replaced by 
the permanent teeth. DIGESTION. 
95 
The temporary teeth are only twenty in number, ten 
for each jaw, of which four in each jaw are incisors, two 
canine, and four molars. The other molars, which we 
find in adults, have no temporary predecessors. 
The temporary or milk teeth are developed in the 
order as shown in the cut No. 12. 
First or Temporary Teeth. 
Engraving No. 12. 
These teeth appear in the following order: 
1. 6 to 8 months, Incisor. 
2. 7 to 9 months, Incisor. 
3. 16 to 24 months, Canine. 
4- 12 to 15 months, Molar. 
5. 20 to 24 months, Molar. 
Engraving No. 13. 
Permanent Teeth. 96 
DIGESTION. 
The engraving No. 13 shows the development of the 
permanent teeth, which make their appearance as follows: 
1. 8th year, Incisor. 
2. gth year. Incisor. 
3. 11 to 13th year, Canine. 
4. 10th year, Molar. 
5. 11 to 15th year, Molar. 
6. 7th year, Molar 
7. 13 to 16th year, Molar. 
8. iS to 30th year, Molar. 
The last one is also called the “wisdom” tooth. 
Each tooth presents for anatomical description, a 
crown, a neck, and a root or fang-. 
The crown projects above the gums and is covered by 
an enamel, which is by far the hardest structure of the 
body. In color it is white and glistening, and is thickest 
on the grinding surface, and becomes thinner in its layer 
as it approaches the root. By long use of the grinding 
surface this enamel will wear off. 
The roots of the teeth are firmly implanted in the 
cavities for that purpose in the jaws. 
The neck forms the constricted portion between crown 
and root. 
The largest portion of the teeth is composed of a 
peculiar structure called dentine or ivory. In many 
respects it resembles bone, but is much harder, and has 
not in its dentine part any canals. 
In the interior of each tooth is a pulp cavity, which 
contains a collection of bloodvessels and nerve matter, 
held together by longitudinal fibers of white fibrous tissue. 
This is the only portion of the tooth endowed with sen- 
sibility. At the extremity of the root a little opening 
exists, through which the bloodvessels and the nerves 
penetrate. 
When any of the permanent teeth are lost, or become 
worn out or decayed, they are not regenerated. This 
well-known fact, therefore, furnishes us with hygienic laws 
which nobody should defy. Mothers, especially, should 
guard their little ones, and insist upon obedience to 
their commands for the preservation of the teeth. We 
refer to the cracking of nuts, etc., which is liable to digestion. 
97 
chip off parts of the enamel and dentine, thus exposing 
the internal structure. The alternating of hot and cold 
fluids, also, has a tendency to crack the enamel. 
Comparative anatomy of the organs of mastication 
makes it evident that, the human race is designed to live 
on a mixed diet, that is, its food is to be taken from both 
the animal and vegetable kingdoms, notwithstanding the 
fact that experience has shown that man can be nourished 
for an indefinite period on a diet composed exclusively of 
either animal or vegetable principles. 
The human family has teeth which are allied both to 
the carnivorous and herbivorous animals, thus fitting it 
for the mastication of the different foods, and placing 
us among the omnivorous animals. 
In order that digestion may take place in a perfectly 
natural manner, it is necessary that the food, as it is 
received into the stomach, should be first properly macerated 
and thoroughly mixed with the fluids of the mouth, otherwise 
stomach digestion is much prolonged and difficult. Vio- 
lations of this physiological law are a frequent cause of 
dyspepsia. 
Persons losing their teeth, should not hesitate for any 
length of time, to replace them with artificial ones. 
Again referring to comparative anatomy, we know from it, 
that in animals swallowing their food without masticating, 
the stomach digestion is much more prolonged, than in 
the human subject, even when the diet is the same, the 
deduction of which is, that the proper mastication shortens 
the time of digestion. 
3. Insalivation. This stage of digestion is accom- 
plished, like the preceding, in the mouth, and simul- 
taneously with mastication. This process consists of 
soaking and covering the food, bruised by the teeth, with 
a colorless and ropy liquid, the saliva. 
The saliva is secreted in a great measure by three pairs 
of glands, forming an almost continuous series along the 98 
DIGESTION. 
lower jaw. These three glands are the parotid situated 
in front of each ear, the sub-maxillary glands, and the 
sub-lingual glands, concealed under the tongue. These 
three sets of glands, form what is commonly called 
“salivary glands. ” 
The amount of saliva secreted during twenty-four 
hours, in a healthy adult, who is not afflicted with the 
tobacco chewing habit, is a little less than three pounds, 
of which rather more than one-half is secreted during the 
intervals of eating. It should also be borne in mind, 
however, with reference to this and the other digestive 
secretions, that this immense amount of fluid is at no one 
time removed from the blood, but is reabsorbed nearly as 
fast as secreted, and that normally none of it is discharged 
from the organism. It is the removal of saliva from the 
system, incident to chewing tobacco, or other substances 
void of nutrition, that makes these practices injurious to 
health and disgusting to the surroundings. 
The chemical analysis made by Profs. Bidder and 
Schmidt is considered to be a reliable one, and from it we 
learn that saliva is composed as follows: 
Water 995.16 parts. 
Epithelium 1.62 “ 
Soluble Organic Matter 1.34 “ 
Potassium, Phosphates of Soda, 
Lime and Magnesia 1.04 “ 
Chloride of Sodium 0.84 “ 
1000.00 
The active principle of the saliva is the organic matter, 
which was named by Berzelius “ Ptyaline,” and Prof. 
Mealhe, describes it under the name of “animal diastase.’ 
In the normal state, the reaction of saliva is alkaline. 
The functions of saliva are both mechanical and chem 
ical. The first has for its object to assist the mastication 
and deglutition of alimentary matters, acting as a lubri- 
cant, and the second, under the influence of “ptyaline,” digestion. 
99 
transforms starchy foods into a saccharine and soluble 
substance, called “glucose.” Of the rapidity of this 
action, any one can easily convince himself by the simple 
experiment of taking a little cooked starch into the mouth, 
mixing it well with the saliva and testing in the ordinary 
way for sugar. 
The saccharine taste acquired by a piece of bread 
triturated for a certain time in the mouth is due to this 
chemical reaction. 
It has been observed that the saliva has a remarkable 
tendency to entangle bubbles of air in the alimentary mass. 
In mastication a considerable quantity of air is mixed with 
the food, and this undoubtedly facilitates the penetration 
of the gastric juice. It is well known that moist, heavy 
bread, and articles that cannot become impregnated 
in this way with air, are not easily acted upon in the 
stomach. 
4. Deglutition means swallowing, and is the act by 
which solid and liquid articles are forced from the mouth into 
the stomach. The process involves first the passage by a 
voluntary movement of the alimentary mass through the 
isthmus of the fauces into the pharynx; then a rapid con- 
traction of the muscles of the pharynx, by which it is 
forced into the oesophagus ; and finally, a peristaltic action 
of the muscular walls of the oesophagus, extending from 
its opening at the pharnyx to the stomach. 
The first process is purely voluntary, while the other 
two are not, and beyond the control of the will. 
The parts of the anatomy taking part in swallowing, 
are the tongue, the pharynx and the oesophagus. 
The tongue is, as everybody knows, endowed with 
highly important functions connected with mastication, 
and is the chief agent in the first process of deglutition. 
When swallowing the tongue is hollowed in a gutter-like 
form, is elevated from the tip to the base, supported on 
the vault of the mouth, and it directs the macerated and 100 
DIGESTION. 
insalivated particles of food toward the isthmus of the 
gullet, over which they pass. At the same time the 
pharynx is elevated, seizes the food and incloses it in the 
oesophagus, where the muscular contractions of this tube 
carry the mass as far down as the stomach. 
For a more graphic description of the different 
organs which assist in deglutition, the reader is referred to 
engraving No. 14, and the explanatory notes thereon. 
The oesophagus or gullet is a muscular canal, about 
nine inches in length, extending from the pharynx to the 
stomach. It commences between the fifth and sixth cer- 
vical vertebrae, descends along the front of the spine, passes 
through the diaphragm, and entering the abdomen ter- 
minates at the cardiac opening of the stomach opposite 
the ninth dorsal vertebra. It is the narrowest part of the 
alimentary canal, being most contracted at its commence- 
ment, and at the point where it passes through the 
diaphragm. 
During deglutition, speaking, laughing or ill managed 
inspiration are of much danger, for the reason that par- 
ticles of food are liable to enter the windpipe. Such 
accidents excite paroxysms of suffocation, and may cause 
death. When swallowing is properly done, the act closes 
the epiglottis down upon the windpipe. 
It is said that a grape stone caused the death of Ana- 
creon, the great lyric poet of Greece, by penetrating into 
the larynx while he tried to enjoy the juicy fruit and laugh 
at the same time. 
5. Stomach Digestion or Chymijication. As soon as 
the masticated and insalivated food has been swallowed it 
arrives at the stomach, which is the most dilated portion 
of the alimentary canal. Its purpose is a double one, 
namely for a receptacle of food and an organ in which 
certain important digestive processes take place. It is 
situated in the upper left portion of the abdominal cavity 
and is held in place by folds of the oesophagus and the Engraving No. 14. 
Sectional view of the Nose, Mouth, Pharynx, Larynx, Trachea, and (Esophagus. 102 
DIGESTION. 
peritoneum. Its form is not so easily described; the ar- 
ticle it resembles most is the bagpipe, and then only when 
moderately distended. When empty, its walls are col- 
lapsed and in many parts they come in contact with each 
other. Its holding capacity is about five pints. The 
stomach has two openings, the (Esophageal from above, 
and the pylorus, which leads to the intestinal canal. 
In structure, the stomach has three coats ; they are, 
counting from without, the peritoneal, the muscular and 
the mucous. The first is similar to the peritoneum, as its 
name implies. The muscular coat presides over various 
motions of the stomach; in it are embedded the gastric 
nerves and bloodvessels. The mucous coat is doubtless 
the most interesting. The mucous membranes of the 
oesophagus and of the stomach are very different in char- 
acter. The white, hard appearance of the oesophageal 
lining abruptly ceases, in the shape of a sharply defined 
dentated border, and the inner membrane of the stomach 
appears soft and velvety and of a reddish gray color. 
The mucous membrane of the stomach is loosely attached 
to the next tissue, and is thrown into long hardened folds, 
which become effaced when the organ becomes distended. 
The thickness of the mucous membrane varies in different 
parts measuring from W to ds of an inch. 
Throughout the entire extent of the mucous membrane 
of the stomach, Gastric or Peptic Glands are found, 
except around the pyloric orifice and in the right lower 
portion. These glands vary in length according to the 
variations in the thickness of the mucous membrane. 
The object of these glands is the secretion of a fluid 
called Gastric juice, through the chemical action of which, 
important modifications of the food take place. 
Gastric Juice. The case of Alexis St. Martin, is un- 
doubtedly the only instance on record, in which pure 
normal gastric juice has been obtained from the human 
subject, and as the circumstances connected with the case digestion. 
103 
are of much interest, a condensed history of the affair is 
herewith given: 
“Alexis St. Martin, a Canadian voyageur in the service of the 
American Fur Company, eighteen years of age, of good constitution 
and perfectly healthy, was wounded in the left side by the accidental 
discharge of a gun loaded with buckshot. The wound was received 
on the 6th of June, 1822, and the muzzle of the gun was not more 
than a yard distant from the body. The contents of the gun entered 
posteriorly, carrying away integument and muscle from a space the 
size of the hand, with the anterior half of the sixth rib, lacerating the 
lower portion of the left lobe of the lung and diaphragm, and perfo- 
rating the stomach. The patient was seen by Dr. Beaumont within 
half an hour after the accident, when the above facts were noted, and 
an opening into the stomach was discovered, large enough to admit 
the forefinger. Extensive sloughing took place, and for seventeen 
days everything that was swallowed passed out at the wound, and 
nourishment was administered through the rectum. In the spring of 
1824, the wound had cicatrized and the patient had perfectly re- 
covered his health; but in the process of cure, seven pieces of 
cartilage had come away and three or four inches of the sixth rib, and 
about half of the lower edge of the fifth rib, had been removed by 
an operation. The perforation into the stomach was irregularly round 
and about two and a half inches in circumference. This opening was 
closed by a protrusion of the mucous membrane of the stomach in the 
form of a valve, which could readily be depressed by the finger, so as 
to expose the interior of the organ. The valve effectually prevented 
the discharge of the contents of the stomach, which had annoyed the 
patient previous to the winter of 1823-1824. 
“From May, 1825, until August of the same year, St. Martin was 
under the observation of Dr. Beaumont, and submitted to numerous 
experiments. At the end of that time, he returned to Canada, and 
was lost sight of for four years, during which time he married and be- 
came the father of two children, and worked hard to support his 
family, and enjoyed robust health and strength. After that he came 
again under the observation of Dr. Beaumont and continued with him 
in the capacity of a common servant, until March, 1831. After this 
he was under observation from time to time until 1836, all the time 
enjoying perfect health, with good digestion, and having become the 
father of several more children.” 
From this fistulous opening in the stomach of St. 
Martin, Dr. Beaumont withdrew gastric juice and ob- DIGESTION. 
104 
served that its How was greatly increased when alimentary 
substances were introduced into the stomach. 
Dr. Beaumont also established the following facts: 
That gastric juice is one of the most sensitive fluids 
secreted by the system, and that eating or drinking to 
excess, emotions, anger, fear, diminished and sometimes 
entirely suppressed the secretion of it by the stomach. 
At such times the mucous membrane became red and dry, 
and at others it was pale and moist. Drinks were imme- 
diately absorbed, but food remained in the stomach 
undigested for twenty-four hours, and even forty-eight in 
some cases. Therefore, dear reader, take a lesson from 
the researches of this good scientist, and do not eat when 
you are under mental excitement of any kind. Food 
would probably decompose but not digest. 
The stomach is no doubt the organ in which the most 
important part of the digestive process is inaugurated, in- 
asmuch, as by its secretion, the gastric juice, the chemical 
modifications of the food take place. 
Gastric juice is a clear, colorless or faintly amber 
colored fluid of watery consistency and acid reaction. 
Its specific gravity does not vary much from 1009. 
The following is its chemical composition: 
Water 973.062 
Pepsin (ferment) 17.127 
Free hydrochloric acid 3.050 
Chloride of potassium 1 . 125 
Chloride of sodium 2.507 
Chloride of calcium 0.624 
Chloride of ammonium 0.468 
Phosphate of lime 1 . 729 
Phosphate of magnesia o 226 
Phosphate of iron 0.082 
1000.00 
One of the striking physical properties of the gastric 
juice is its acid reaction, by which it is distinguished from digestion. 
105 
all the other digestive secretions and internal fluids of the 
body. This property is dependent on the presence of 
“free hydrochloric acid.” The other characteristic in- 
gredient in the gastric juice is the ferment or pepsin, and 
it is to this that the peculiar digestive properties of the 
gastric juice are due. In reality, this juice is an acidulated 
solution of pepsin. The acid as well as the pepsin must 
be present in order that the secretion may exert its 
digestive power. 
Gastric juice acts during stomachial digestion upon 
meat, free albumen, fibrin, casein and gelatine, and dis- 
solves these articles so they cannot be recognized. Fat 
through the animal heat of the stomach becomes liquefied, 
but the oil globules pass out of the stomach into the intes- 
tines unchanged. 
Sugar, bread (starchy portion) and salts are not influ- 
enced by the gastric juice. 
It has been estimated by Professors Bidder and Schmidt 
that a healthy man secretes, during the period of twenty- 
four hours, approximately fourteen pounds of gastric juice. 
In this connection it must be borne in mind that after the 
fluid has performed its office in digestion, it is immediately 
reabsorbed and but a small quantity exists in the stomach 
at any one time, and might be summarized as follows: 
During digestion the stomach is continually producing 
out of the material furnished by the blood, gastric juice 
which liquefies certain elements of the food and as 
fast as this is accomplished is absorbed again by the 
blood, together with the principles that have been thus 
digested. 
Duration of stomachial digestion is perhaps best shown 
by the table prepared by Dr. Beaumont, made from observ- 
ations by him on St. Martin, and gives the relative digesti- 
bility of a number of alimentary substances, together with 
their mode of preparation. 106 
DIGESTION. 
ARTICLE OF DIET. 
MODE OF PREPARATION 
HR. 
MIN. 
Milk . 
Boiled 
2 
2 
2 
1 
2 
3 
3 
3 
2 
2 
I 
1 
3 
3 
3 
4 
2 
3 
3 
1 
2 
2 
l 3 
3 
3 
3 
3 
4 
3 
3 
3 
4 
4 
3 
5 
3 
3 
3 
4 
4 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
4 
4 
4 
4 
i5 
30 
J5 
3° 
3° 
45 
3° 
30 
30 
3° 
55 
15 
3° 
35 
3° 
3° 
3° 
10 
36 
*5 
3° 
i5 
r5 
15 
15 
3° 
18 
25 
3° 
3° 
45 
3° 
44 
Raw 
44 
u u 
Whipped 
u u 
Roasted 
u a 
Soft boiled 
u u 
Hard boiled 
u a 
Fried 
Baked 
Boiled 
Boiled 
u u u 
Fried 
Broiled 
Fried 
44 
Boiled 
Raw 
u 
Roasted 
44 
Stewed 
Broiled 
Pier mirkintr 
Roasted 
Broiled 
Roasted 
Broiled 
Roasted 
Boiled 
“ with only 
44 
Fried 
Broiled 
u u 
Boiled 
U t« 
Roasted 
Broiled 
(( 4. 
Fried 
Broiled 
Roasted 
Raw 
44 u 44 
Stewc d 
44 u << 
Broiled 
u u u 
Fried 
a << u 
Boiled 
Roasted 
Boiled 
U 44 
Roasted 
44 
Fricasseed 
Boiled 
44 44 
Roasted 
44 
“ wild DIGESTION. 
107 
ARTICLE OF DILI'. 
MODE OF PREPARATION 
HR. 
MIN. 
Soup, Barley 
Boiled 
I 
3° 
“ Bean 
<< 
“ Chicken 
U 
O 
2 
“ Mutton 
U 
o 
2 
“ Oyster ... 
u 
2 
3° 
“ Beef, with vegetables 
u 
4 
4 
i 
“ Marrowbone 
u 
i5 
Pig’s Feet, soused.... 
u 
Tripe, soused 
u 
I 
Brains Animal 
u 
I 
45 
40 
Spinal Marrow 
a 
2 
Liver fresh Beef 
Broiled 
2 
Tendons 
Boiled 
5 
4 
Heart Animal 
Fried 
(larti lacre 
Boiled 
4 
15 
3° 
3° 
nO 
Hash Meat and Vegetable 
Warmed 
2 
Sausage, fresh 
Broiled 
2 
Oelatine 
Boiled 
2 
Cheese old, strong 
Raw 
2 
30 
45 
30 
30 
30 
30 
3° 
3° 
Green Corn and Beans 
Boiled 
O 
2 
Beans pod 
U 
2 
Parsnips 
U 
2 
Potatoes Trish 
Roasted 
2 
6i U 
Baked 
2 
u a 
Boiled 
2 
Cahhagp head 
Raw .... 
2 
“ “ with vinegar 
U 
2 
u u 
Boiled 
4 
Carrots 
3 
2 
J3 
3° 
45 
15 
3° 
3° 
Turnips 
U 
Beets 
u 
2 
Bread Corn 
Baked 
3 
2 
v< Wheat fresh 
U 
apples Sweet mellow 
Raw 
I 
* *• Sour “ 
U 
2 
« “ hard 
u 
2 
5° 
We desire to invite special attention to the fact that 
the foregoing table only shows the duration of the process 
of chymification, that is the time intervening between the 
entrance of food into the stomach, and its passing out of 
the same through the pyloric orihc. While many of the in- 
gredients of the above mentioned articles of food become 
completely liquefied through the action of the gastric juice 
thereon, and are absorbed from the stomach by the system, 
a large percentage of the alimentary substance passes into 108 
DIGESTION. 
the intestine there to be further digested through the 
agency of other fluids, and tnen absorbed. It is a fact that 
intestinal digestion is on a par with that of the stomach 
and should not be under-estimated. 
Various circumstances influence stomach digestion, and 
among these should be counted that gentle exercise, con- 
joined with repose or agreeable and tranquil occupation of 
the mind, is more favorable to digestion than absolute 
rest. Violent exercise or severe mental or physical ex- 
ertion is always undesirable immediately after the inges- 
tion of food, and will retard digestion. The proper thing 
is a short sleep of only a few minutes’ duration, taken in a 
sitting posture. 
The nervous system exercises an enormous influence 
over digestion, and this is specially marked when a person 
after a full meal, is affected by strong mental emotions. 
When all the nutritive elements which can be separated 
through the aid of the gastric juice are withdrawn from the 
alimentary substance, the residue, such as liquefied fat, 
starch, sugar, etc., etc., passes along the digestive canal, 
through the pyloric orifice of the stomach, and enters 
the small intestine, there to undergo the process of 
chylification. 
6. Intestinal Digestion or Chylification. The small 
intestine is a long cylindrical tube, occupying the greater 
part of the abdominal cavity. It must be regarded as one 
of the most important divisions of the digestive system and 
its anatomy, together with that of the liver and pancreas, 
which discharge their secretions into this tube, is indis- 
pensable for the proper comprehension of this stage of 
digestion. In this section we find the final elaboration of 
most of the alimentary principles, and how these are taken 
into the circulating fluid, either direct or through the 
functions of the lymphatic system. 
The mesentery is a serous membrane, and holds by a 
double fold, the entire small intestines extending from the digestion. 
109 
stomach to the ilio-ccecal valve, or commencement of the 
large intestine, to the spinal column. As the peritoneum, 
which lines the cavity of the abdomen, passes from either 
side of the spinal column, it comes together in a double 
fold, just in front of the great bloodvessels along the spine, 
and passing forward splits again into two layers, which 
become continuous with each other, and inclose the intes- 
tine, forming its external coat. The width of the mesen- 
tery is usually from three to four inches, but at the 
commencement and termination of the small intestines 
becomes shorter, thus binding together the adjacent parts. 
While the mesentery keeps the intestine in place, it allows 
a certain amount of motion, so that the tube may become 
convoluted, accommodating itself to the size and form 
of the abdominal cavity. 
To measure the length of the small intestines, owing to 
their distensible nature is very difficult, but it has been 
approximated that it is about twenty feet, while in situ. 
When separated from the mesentery and measured with- 
out stretching, its length has been found about five times 
that of the body. Its diameter is about one and a quarter 
inch. 
While throughout the length of the small intestine no 
marked difference exists, the anatomical and physiological 
peculiarities are sufficient to warrant the division of the 
tube into three portions. 
1. The Duodenum, so named that its length is about 
equal to twelve fingers’ breadth, or from eight to ten 
inches. This part connects on one end with the stomach 
and is considerably wider than the constricted pyloric end 
of the stomach. It is also much wider than the next 
section. 
2. The Jejunum, the second portion and continuation 
of the duodenum. It consists of the upper two-fifths of 
the small intestines. 
3. The Ileum, in structure somewhat narrower and 110 
DIGESTION—VILLI. 
thinner than the former, constitutes the remainder of the 
small intestines. It opens into the caecum, or first section 
of the large intestine. 
The mucous coat or inner lining of the small intestines, 
is somewhat thinner than the lining membrane of the 
stomach. It is thickest in the duodenum, and generally 
diminishes until the ileum is reached. This coat is highly 
vascular, presenting, like the stomach, a great increase in 
the quantity of blood during the process of digestion. In 
appearance it is soft and velvety, and of a red color during 
digestion, and pale pink when inactive. 
The mucous membrane presents for examination the 
following structures contained within it: 
Valvules Conniventes, or valves of Kerkring, are 
foldings of the mucous membrane and submucous tissue. 
Unlike the folds in the stomach, they are permanent, and 
are not obliterated when the intestine is distended. It is 
evident that the food, as it passes along in the intestinal 
tube in obedience to the peristaltic movements, must, by 
insinuating itself beneath the folds and passing over them, 
be exposed to a greater extent of mucous membrane than 
if these valves did not exist. This is about the only defi- 
nite use of the valves that can be reasonably assigned 
to them. 
Villi are minute, highly vascular processes projecting 
from the mucous membrane of the small intestine 
throughout its whole extent, and give to its internal sur- 
face the velvety appearance heretofore mentioned. They 
are largest and most numerous in the duodenum and je- 
junum, and become fewer and smaller in the ileum. Their 
number throughout the small intestine is somewhat 
incredible, it being estimated by Prof. Krause at about 
four millions, while another scientist, Professor Sappey of 
F ranee, estimates their number as upward of ten millions. 
In form they are flattened cylinders or cones, measuring 
from one-thirtieth to one-twentieth inch in length, and 
from tTt to tV in breadth at their base. DIGESTION VILLI. 
111 
In structure the villi are simple elevations of the 
mucous membrane provided with bloodvessels and lac- 
teals, or intestinal lymphatics. Externally is found a single 
layer of long columnar epithelial cells. To better com- 
prehend this minute structure, a highly magnified en- 
graving of a single villi is embodied in this paragraph, 
together with an index of the minute anatomy. 
Engraving No. 15. 
Two Villi, (Magnified.) 
1. Lacteal. 
2. Vein. 
5. Capillaries. 
3- Artery. 
4. Epithelium. 
The presence of lacteals in the villi is well established, 
but the question of their origin therein is a very obscure 
one. The offices of the lacteals, as well as the absorbing 
veins throughout the digestive tract, will be considered 
and elaborated upon under the chapter entitled, “ Ab- 
sorption.” 
The Simple Follicles or crypts of Lieberkuhn, are 
found in considerable numbers over every part of the 
mucous membrane of the small intestine. They secrete a 
fluid known as the intestinal juice. 
The physiological action of intestinal juice, as secreted 
by the simple follicles, is that of transforming starch into 112 
ACCESSORY ORGANS OF DIGESTION—PANCREAS. 
glucose, and as a fluid it aids the process of intestinal 
digestion. 
The Duodenal or Brunners Glands are confined 
to the duodenum and commencement of the jejunum. 
They also secrete a fluid which, however, has not been 
collected in sufficient quantity to establish its nature and 
purpose. . 
The Solitary and Peyer s Glands or Patches have 
one and the same structure, only differing that the 
former are isolated and the latter congregate in patches. 
These glands are usually found in the ileum and always 
opposite to the attachment of the mesentery. 
These glands are also invested with bloodvessels and 
lacteals. The functions of these glands are not suffi- 
ciently demonstrated to warrant an assertion borne out 
by facts. 
ACCESSORY ORGANS OF DIGESTION. 
1. The Pancreas, which is a compound gland anal- 
ogous in its structure to the salivary glands. Its name is 
derived from the Greek, signifying “all flesh.” It is the 
same as what is known in ruminating animals as “sweet 
breads.” The right extremity of the pancreas is curved 
upon itself from above downward, and is embraced by the 
cavity of the duodenum. It is situated transversely 
across the posterior wall of the abdomen behind the 
stomach. Its weight varies from two to four ounces, and 
sometimes as much as six. The anterior surface is cov- 
ered by the peritoneum. This gland secretes a digestive 
fluid known as th & pancreatic juice, the composition of which 
is approximately as follows in 1000 parts : 
Water 9C0 
Organic matters, precipitable by alcohol and 
containing a little lime. (Also known as 
pancreatin) 90 
Carbonate of Soda. 
Chloride of Sodium 
IO ACCESSORY ORGANS OF DIGESTION. 
Chloride of Potassium 
Phosphate of Lime. . 
113 
IO 
IOOO 
Its specific gravity is 1040. 
Pancreatin and trypsine are the essential physiological 
constituents of the pancreatic juice, giving this fluid 
its peculiar digestive properties. Although the fluid itself 
is alkaline, it retains its physiological properties when it 
has been rendered acid by the admixture with gastric 
juice. 
The action of pancreatic juice in digestion is of great 
importance in the digestion of nearly all the alimentary 
principles as they pass out from the stomach. It is the 
only one of the digestive fluids which is capable of form- 
ing a complete and permanent emulsion with fats, and 
thus makes this important article of food assimilable and 
capable of absorption into the blood current. 
The property of converting the starchy elements of 
food is possessed by several of the digestive fluids. 
U nder the consideration of saliva we have stated that it 
is capable of similar virtues, but this transformation is 
arrested when the food enters the stomach. When, how- 
ever, the starchy elements reach the small intestine, its 
digestion is completed by the pancreatic juice. 
Pancreatic ‘juice in conjunction with intestinal juice 
also effects the transformation of sugar into glucose. 
Lastly it takes hold of the undigested albuminous 
substances which may have escaped transformation during 
stomach digestion, and prepares them for absorption. 
The Pancreatic Duct extends from left to rmht trans- 
versely through the substance of the pancreas, leaving the 
right extremity of the gland, descending slightly and forms 
a connection with the common bile duct, which in turn 
descends and enters the duodenum about at its middle. 
It is thus that this important fluid enters into the diges- 
tive tract and fulfills its functions. 114 
ACCESSORY ORGANS OF DIGESTION—LIVER. 
2. The Liver is a glandular organ of large size 
intended mainly for the secretion of the bile, but effecting 
also important changes in certain constituents of the 
blood in their passage through it, a matter which will be 
considered under the functions of this organ. It is situ- 
ated in the right side, what is known as the right epi- 
gastric and hypochondriac regions, and just below the 
diaphragm. When moderately filled with blood it weighs 
about four and a half pounds, and in persons of aver- 
age adipose development its proportion to the weight of 
the body is about as one to thirty-two. 
The liver has five ligaments, four of which are formed 
by folds of the peritoneum, and the fifth, the round liga- 
ment, results from the obliteration of the umbilical vein. 
These ligaments, together with the bloodvessels entering 
and leaving the same, hold the liver in place. 
For general descriptive purpose it suffices to say that 
the liver is divided into the right, by far the greatest, 
and the left lobe; in a closer study it would be divided 
into five, i. e., right, left, square, Spigeli and tail lobes. 
The substance of the liver is made up of innumerable 
lobules of irregular form, about 2h of an inch in diameter. 
The space which separates these lobules is about too of 
an inch thick, and is occupied by the bloodvessels, nerves 
and ramifications of the hepatic duct, all inclosed in a 
fibrous sheath. 
7he Hepatic Artery arises from the abdominal aorta 
and carries arterial blood to the substance of the liver. 
The Portal Vein and its tributaries; being the splenic 
vein from the spleen, the gastric vein from the stomach, 
the upper and lower mesenteric veins from the intestines, 
collecting blood from the organs mentioned, unite in the 
portal, which then delivers the mass of venous blood into 
this gland. 
The Gall Bladder is the reservoir for the bile and 
situated on the under surface of the right lobe of the ACCESSORY ORGANS OF DIGESTION. 
115 
liver, and is a conical, pear shaped membranous sac, about 
four inches in length and one in diameter, holding from 
eight to ten drachms of bile. 
The Bile Ducts are three in number : 
1. The hepatic or liver duct is formed of two trunks of 
nearly equal size within the substance of the liver and 
issues therefrom to join (2) the cystic duct which passes 
downward to the left of the neck of the gall bladder to 
form the (3) common duct, which is the excretory duct 
of both the liver and gall bladder. It is about three 
inches in length, and its diameter is about equal to that 
of a goose quill. In its descent, near its termination it 
is joined by the pancreatic duct and thus enters the duo- 
denum. Cases are however on record where the common 
duct and pancreatic duct had separate entrances into the 
duodenum. 
The Bile as secreted by the liver, and as it comes 
from that organ, is a somewhat ropy fluid, which vis- 
cidity is increased after its storage in the gall bladder. 
Its color varies according to the state of health and may 
be anything between yellowish green to a reddish brown. 
It is semi-transparent in a healthy being. In the carnivora 
it is dark green, and in the herbivora yellowish green. 
The human in his nature of an omnivera, takes the middle 
between these two colors. The specific gravity varies 
between 1020 to 1025. In the fresh state it is inodorous 
but undergoes putrefaction readily from contact with air 
and assumes a sickening odor. The taste is bitter owing 
to the many mineral salts it contains. 
In chemical composition bile is as follows : 
Water 916 
Organic matters, such as Choleate of Soda 
(gmng the bile its alkaline reaction), Cho- 
lesterine, Biliverdine (the pigment from 
which bile has its color), Lecithene, and Fat 75 
Mineral Salts 9 
1000 116 
ACCESSORY ORGANS OF DIGESTION. 
'I'he functions of the liver and its secretions may be 
summed up as follows : 
1. The formation of glycogen (a substance resembling 
starch and transformable into sugar), which contributes to 
the maintenance of animal heat and to the nutrition of the 
blood and tissues, and the development of white blood 
corpuscles. 
2. The destructive change of albuminoid matter, and 
the formation of urea and other nitrogenous products, 
which are subsequently eliminated by the kidneys, these 
chemical changes also contributing to the development of 
animal heat. 
3. The secretion of bile, the greater part of which is 
re-absorbed, assisting in the assimilation of fat and 
peptones, and probably in those chemical changes which 
go on in the liver and portal circulation, while part is 
excrementitious, and in passing along the bowel, stimulates 
peristaltic movement and arrests decomposition. 
Thus we must recognize that the liver is the store- 
house of our fuel food, in the form of glycogen. This is 
converted into sugar, as is required for the wants of the 
organism by a ferment in the liver itself. It is the same 
process as in the plant. The plant digests its stored 
starch as it requires, by converting it into sugar. 
The liver takes from its store glycogen as it requires for 
the wants of the body. By such means a regular supply 
of sugar is furnished to the blood. 
As to the second function of the liver, much has to be 
learned. Its action can be recognized in the destruction 
of waste and surplus albuminoids; we see that urea is 
formed by the liver, not by the kidneys. The liver is 
probably also, a filter allowing certain nutritive matters to 
pass onward, while arresting other matters whose presence 
in the blood is deleterious, as for instance, preventing the 
digestive ferments from reaching the general circulation, 
when these fluids if they reached there, would in all prob- ACCESSORY ORGANS OF DIGESTION SPLEEN. 
117 
ability be distinctly harmful, by disintegrating the blood- 
vessels themselves. From experiments made by Dr. 
Schmidt-Muehlheim and others, it has become evident that 
the normal products of digestion are poisons of no incon- 
siderable power, and if they reach the general circulation 
in large quantities they may produce very alarming, if not 
dangerous symptoms. Hence, it appears that in certain 
conditions, as a consequence of disturbance in the working 
of the liver, the organ is not only ill-fed from the absence 
of normal products of assimilation, but is actually 
poisoned by the presence of products which are positively 
harmful. 
The Spleen is counted among the accessory organs of 
digestion, however not by right of established knowl- 
edge. It is a ductless gland, having no excretory ducts, 
which would lead any products, if it had them, to other 
parts. The spleen is located in the left hypochondriac 
region, next to the cardiac extremity of the stomach. Its 
color is a dark bluish red, soft and friable in consistence. 
In shape it resembles the tongue of a dog. Its length is 
about five inches, and nearly four inches in width, and 
about one inch in thickness. It weighs between six and 
seven ounces. 
It must be of importance in some way to life, notwith- 
standing the fact that people are in existence, in whom 
this gland has been extirpated. The theories advanced as 
to what the functions are, vanish like soap bubbles when 
they are pricked. The human mind must rest upon the 
subject, with the thought that it must be in the body for 
some purpose, because the Divine architect of the soul’s 
abode, made it a component part. 
By the contractions of the muscular coat of the small 
intestine, the alimentary mass is made to pass along the 
canal, sometimes in one and sometimes in another 118 
LARGE INTESTINE. 
direction, the general tendency however, being toward 
the coecum. The partially digested matters which 
pass out of the stomach are prevented from returning to 
it, by the peculiar arrangement of the fibers which con- 
stitute the pyloric muscle. When the food is once in the 
intestine, it is propelled along the canal by peculiar move- 
ments, which have been called peristaltic, when its direction 
is towa d the intestine. These movements are stimulated 
and excited by the passage of food from the stomach. 
During the movements of the alimentary 
through the digestive tract, digestion continues to take 
place aided by the different fluids before named, and 
separates those elements in the food which are destined to 
serve in the recuperation of the blood. Digestion is per- 
haps strongest in the stomach, next the duodenum, 
jejunum, and diminishes in the ileum. Absorption takes 
place throughout the alimentary canal. 
7. Functions of the Large Intestine. The large intes- 
tine, so-called because its diameter is greater than that of 
the rest of the intestinal tract, receives for the most part 
only the indigestible residue of the food, mingled with 
certain of the secretions, which are discharged into the 
small intestine. In the human subject, the processes of 
digestion which take place in this part of the alimentary 
canal are unimportant, and it is probable that hardly any- 
thing but liquid is absorbed by its lining membrane. 
Matters are however, stored up in the large intestine for 
a number of hours, and a certain amount of secretion takes 
place. 
The entire length of the large intestine is from four to 
six feet. Its diameter is greatest at its commencement, 
where it measures, when moderately distended, from two 
and a half to three and a half inches. Passing from the 
caecum, the canal diminishes in caliber gradually and very 
slightly, to where the sigmoid flexure opens into the 
rectum. Beyond this the rectum gradually increases in LARGE INTESTINE. 
119 
diameter, forming a kind of pouch, which abruptly dimin- 
ishes in size near the external opening, to form the anus 
the final termination of the alimentary canal, the com- 
mencement of which is the mouth. 
The general direction of the large intestine is from the 
caecum in the right iliac region to the left iliac, thus en- 
circling the convoluted mass formed by the small intestine, 
in the approximate form of a horseshoe. The first section 
is called the ccecum or blind intestine, and from there to 
the commencement of the rectum it is named the colon. 
This latter part is subdivided into the following sections: 
(1) The ascending colon passes up in the right iliac region 
to the under surface of the liver, where the intestine turns 
nearly at right angle and traverses the abdomen in the 
upper part. This section is called (2) the transverse colon. 
The colon then passes down, forming again a right angle 
and this section is called the desccjiding colon (3). The 
last division is the (4) sigmoid flexure, and is situated in 
the lower left portion of the abdomen. In form it re- 
sembles somewhat the Roman letter “S.” The flexure 
terminates in the (5) rectum. Its name would imply that 
it was straight, which it is not, as it curves in its descent. 
The ccecum, or cul-de-sac as the French call it, presents 
a rounded, dilated cavity, continuous with the colon above, 
and communicating with a transverse slit with the ileum. 
At the lower portion of the caecum is a small cylindrical 
tube, from one to five inches in length, called the appendix 
vermiformis. The uses of this appendix are unknown. 
The most interesting anatomical peculiarity of the 
caecum is the opening by which it receives the contents of 
the small intestine. 
This opening is arranged in the shape of a valve, known 
as the ileo-ccecal valve, and situated in the inner portion 
of the caecum. This valve prevents the return of the ali- 
mentary mass, after it once enters into the large intestine, 
into the ileum. 120 
LARGE INTESTINE. 
The alimentary mass as it enters the large intestine is 
nearly void of nutrient substances, and become fceccs or 
matter to be eliminated. This excrement moves first up 
in the colon, then traverses and descends into the sigmoid 
flexure, which is a place of accumulation. At certain 
tolerably regular intervals the faecal matter is passed into 
the rectum and then almost immediately discharged from 
the body. Under normal conditions the rectum is nearly 
always found empty and contracted. 
In health, expulsion of faecal matter takes place with 
regularity once in every twenty-four hours. This rule is, 
however, very variable, and evacuations may occur twice 
or three times a day, and then only again every other day, 
and still are regarded within the limits of health. 
The condition which immediately precedes the desire 
for defaecation is probably the descent of the contents of 
the sigmoid flexure of the colon into the rectum. 
The foregoing pages describe the anatomical apparatus 
used in digestion and also the many physiological actions, 
which come into play during the process of it. 
The writer feels safe in asserting that the majority of 
diseases can be traced to the disarrangement of the di- 
gestive functions, and if the reader joins him in this theory, 
it must be evident that in order to trace the origin of the 
numerous ailments human flesh is heir to, the normal state 
must be well understood. To assist in forming as compre- 
hensive an idea of the wonderful machinery of digestion, 
we have at much labor and expense prepared a plate (No. 
n), which shows not only how food is transferred into 
blood, the object of digestion, but also how these blood 
building substances are incorporated into the blood mass 
throughout the vascular system. It also gives the topog- 
raphy of the organs of respiration, the functions by which 
the blood becomes nutrient, and that portion which was 
used once is again rejuvenated. 
We cannot urge the reader too much to study this THE SPLEEN. 
121 
plate, and thus become familiar with the names of the 
different organs portrayed thereon, their location and 
relative functions. 
It is an object lesson, which shows at a glance the 
machinery participating in the conversion of food into 
blood, together with how it is delivered into the general 
circulation as described in the next chapter. 122 
ABSORPTION. 
CHAPTER VII. 
ABSORPTION. 
Digestion has two great objects; one is to liquefy 
the different alimentary principles; and the other, the 
transformations by which these principles are rendered 
capable of nourishing the organism. 
The aliments thus acted upon are taken into the blood 
as fast as the requisite changes in their constitution are 
effected, and when once received into the circulation, they 
become part of the great nutritive fluid, supplying the 
waste which the constant generation of the tissues from 
materials furnished by the blood necessarily involves. 
The only exception to this rule is the fat. A small 
portion of this may be passed directly into the blood- 
vessels ; the greater mass of it, however, finds its way into 
the circulation by means of special absorbent vessels, which 
empty into large veins. Fat enters the blood in the con- 
dition of a fine emulsion. 
The process by which the digested materials are taken 
into the blood is absorption, in which two sets of vessels 
are engaged, namely, the bloodvessels and the lacteals. 
Such parts of the food as have been rendered fluid, 
and are capable of forming a homogeneous mixture with 
the blood are absorbed by the bloodvessels. Fat after 
a proper reduction to an emulsion is taken up by the 
lacteals. 
Absorption by the Bloodvessels. It is an estab- 
lished fact that soluble substances can pass through the ABSORPTION BY THE BLOODVESSELS. 
123 
delicate walls of the capillaries and small veins, and that 
absorption actually takes place in the great part by the 
bloodvessels of the alimentary canal. 
The time occupied for the food to pass through the 
mouth and gullet is so brief and the chemical changes it 
undergoes so slight, that the absorption taking place in 
these organs can hardly be taken into consideration. It 
might be proper, however, in this connection, to guard 
smokers not to harbor within the cavity of the mouth the 
smoke of the tobacco, as the condensations in the form of 
nicotine is taken into the system and to the injury thereof. 
The same things hold good in the case of the chewers of 
tobacco, inasmuch as some of the poisons freed during 
mastication of the weed find their way into the circulation, 
by way of absorption, through the mucous membrane. 
The stomach is practically the first organ of ab- 
sorption, and there it takes place with great activity, as 
accomplished by the bloodvessels. The amount of se- 
cretions eliminated by the mucous membrane makes the 
stomach an organ highly vascular, and with its absorbing 
quality is naturally increased. 
All those principles of food which are dissolved by the 
gastric juice are converted into albuminose, as well as 
ingested liquids, and taken up directly by the bloodvessels 
of the stomach. As a general law it may be safely 
assumed that digested matters are in a great part absorbed 
as soon as their transformations in the alimentary canal 
have been accomplished. 
As the food passes down the intestinal canal the mass 
becomes less, owing to the transfer of the nutrient parts 
of the circulation. 
For instance, as the digestion of the albuminoids is 
completed, and they are absorbed, the blood becomes so 
much richer in that constituent, and so on with sugar and 
the fatty emulsions. 
The greatest part of the food is absorbed by the intes- 124 
tinal mucous membrane, and with the alimentary sub- 
stances proper a large quantity of secreted fluid is 
reabsorbed. In the intestines it will be remembered that 
an immense absorbing surface is provided by the arrange- 
ment of the mucous membrane into folds, forming the 
valvulse conniventes, and by the presence of the innumer- 
able villi, which are found throughout the small intestines. 
7 o 
The bloodvessels performing these important functions 
of absorption are the capillaries and minute veins, which 
after uniting with numerous small stems form the gastric, 
upper and lower mesenteric veins, which again unite, and 
with the splenic vein form the portal. The latter con- 
ducts all these collections of blood from the viscera of 
digestion to the liver, there to undergo such process as 
has been already described. 
Absorption by the Lacteals. One of the products 
of intestinal digestion is a white, opaque milky fluid of a 
slightly alkaline taste, and of a peculiar odor. It is known 
under the name chyle. While this product of digestion, in 
which nearly all the fatty substances have been incor- 
porated, passes through the alimentary canal, it necessarily 
comes into contact with the villi, described under the 
chapter of digestion. Within these villi are located the 
lacteals, which imbibe in the chyle and transfer it outside 
the alimentary canal to the mesenteric glands embedded 
within the substance of the mesentery. Myriads of minute 
tubular vessels then carry the chyle to a place known as 
the chyle receptacle (receptaculum chyli), which forms the 
lower part of the thoracic duct. 
The Thoracic Duct conveys the great mass of 
lymph and chyle into the blood. It is the common trunk 
of all the absorbing vessels (veins excepted) of the body. 
It commences in the abdomen by a triangular dilatation, 
the receptacle, which is situated in front of the second 
lumbar vertebra. It ascends along the spinal column to 
the left of the oesophagus. Opposite the seventh cervical 
ABSORPTION BY THE LACTEALS. ABSORPTION OF THE LYMPHATICS. 
125 
vertebra it inclines toward the left, forming an arch, and 
terminates near the junction of the left jugular and the 
subclavian veins. 
Absorption of the Lymphatics. Even when the 
digestive system for want of proper food furnished to it, 
ceases to deliver to the circulation material for the rejuve- 
nation of the blood, the body continues to exist for a time 
by withdrawing from the adipose tissue, muscles and other 
parts, a substance which owing to its watery appearance is 
called Lymph (lympha, water). The last mentioned mat- 
ter is collected throughout the body (hair, nails, teeth, and 
cartilages excepted) by the lymphatic glands and vessels. 
I he latter communicate either with the thoracic duct or 
with other parts of the venous system, and thus the great 
nutritive fluid, the blood, draws upon the stored resources 
of the body when food is not furnished in sufficient quantity 
or proper quality. Of course this living of the body upon 
itself cannot be continued indefinitely, but only so far in 
extreme cases till the body has lost forty per cent, of its 
weight. After that it is not capable of relinquishing suste- 
nance for itself and dissolution would be a natural con- 
sequence. 
By the absorption through the lymphatic vessels of 
the adipose tissue, etc,, stored within hibernating animals 
such as the raccoon, bear, badger, woodchuck, etc., etc., 
during feeding season these creatures are enabled to sub- 
sist upon themselves during the long winter sleep. While 
they awake in a weakened condition from their slumber 
their well rested digestive organs set at once to work to 
lay by another supply for next season's sleep. 
Many overfed persons should draw a lesson from this 
and give their digestive apparatus a long needed rest. 
Absorption from without also takes place in the 
form of liquid through the skin and the mucous membrane 
of the air passages will absorb vapors, medicated for the 
relief of disease and poisonous gases often to the detri- 126 
ABSORPTION FROM WITHOUT. 
ment of the whole system, as is often witnessed in white 
lead works or in the mines where cinnabar is excavated, as 
well as in the reduction works of this ore where the mer- 
cury is extracted from it. RESPIRATION VOICE. 
127 
CHAPTER VIII. 
RESPIRATION—VOICE. 
Engraving No. 16, Trachea and Bronchial Tubes. 
1. Larynx. 
2. Larynx. 
3. Trachea. 
4. Bifurcation of Trachea. 
5. Right Bronchus. 
6. Left Bronchus. 
7. Bronchial division. 
8. Bronchial divivsion. 
9. Bronchial division. 
10. Bronchial division. 
11. Bronchial division. 
12. Ultimate ramification of the Bronchi 
13. Lungs. 
14. Summit of Lungs. 
15- Base of Lungs. 128 
THE LARNYX. 
The different organs participating in the respiratory 
apparatus are the nose, mouth (which will be described 
under the organs of sense), larnyx, trachea, bronchi and 
the lungs. 
The Larnyx besides being the upper part of the air 
passage, is the organ of voice. It is situated between the 
trachea and the base of the tongue at the upper part of 
the neck where it forms a considerable projection in the 
middle line. In persons of average adipose this projec- 
tion can be plainly seen, or at least felt, and is known by 
the name of “Adam’s apple.” The larynx is of a cartila- 
ginous structure, narrow and cylindrical below but broad 
above where it presents the form of a triangular box flat- 
tened behind and at the sides, whilst in front it is bounded 
by a vertical ridge. 
At the posterior upper opening of the respiratory pas- 
sage and forming part of the larynx, is a trapdoor-like 
cartilage, known as the Epiglottis, which is always verti- 
cally upward during respiration, but closes down on the 
opening as soon as food passes from the mouth to the 
oesophagus, thus preventing the entrance of particles of 
alimentary matter into the respiratory passages. 
It is the interior of the larynx which is of much in- 
terest, as there are located the mystic instruments of 
phonation. 
The Vocal Chords. There are two pairs of these, 
the upper or false chords, so called because they are not 
directly concerned in the production of voice. The false 
chords consist of two folds of mucous membrane inclosing 
a delicate fibrous narrow band, called the superior thyro- 
arytenoid ligament. These chords are alro called ventric- 
ular bands. 
The lower or true Vocal Chords are the ones directly 
concerned in the production of sound, and consist of two 
strong fibrous bands covered on their surface by a thin 
layer of mucous membrane. Each chord consists of a THE TRACHEA OR WINDPIPE. 
129 
band of yellow elastic tissue attached in front to the de- 
pressions of the wings of the larynx, and behind to the 
anterior angle of the back part. Thus the upper portion 
of the larynx, with the two true vocal chords as the base, 
and the free edge of the false chords, forms the ventricle 
of the larynx. 
Eight pairs of minute muscles are connected with the 
internal larynx, of which number five pertain to the vocal 
chords and rim of the glottis, while the remaining three 
are connected with the epiglottis, executing the move- 
ments incident to the opening and closing of this organ. 
Those muscles connected with the vocal chords regulate 
the degree of tension. 
The mucous membrane of the larynx is continuous 
above with that lining the mouth and pharynx, and is pro- 
longed through the trachea and bronchi into the lungs. 
The membrane of the larynx is supplied with numerous 
small glands, the openings of which are found in nearly 
every part, and especially numerous upon the epiglottis. 
From these glands the air passage receives its moisture. 
No glands are however, found upon the vocal chords. 
The Trachea or Windpipe is a cartilaginous and 
membranous cylindrical tube somewhat flattened behind, 
and extends from the lower part of the larynx on a level 
with the sixth cervical vertebra down to about opposite 
the fourth or fifth dorsal vertebra. Its total length is 
about four and a half inches, and the diameter varies from 
three-quarters to one inch in different persons. The 
trachea of the male is always of a greater diameter than 
that of the female. The cartilages of the trachea vary from 
sixteen to twenty in number; each forms an imperfect ring 
which surrounds about two-thirds of the cylinder of the 
trachea, being imperfect behind where the tube is com- 
pleted by a fibrous membrane. 
At its lowest extremity the trachea bifurcates and 
forms into the two Bronchi, one for each lung. 130 
THE LUNGS. 
The Right Bronchus, wider, shorter, and more hori- 
zontal in direction than the left, is about an inch in length 
and enters the right lung opposite the fifth dorsal ver- 
tebra. The right pulmonary artery lies below and then in 
front of it. 
The Left Bronchus is smaller, more oblique, and 
longer than the right, being nearly two inches in length. 
It enters the root of the left lung opposite the sixth dorsal 
vertebra, about an inch lower than the right bronchus. It 
passes beneath the arch of the aorta, crosses in front of 
the oesophagus, the thoracic duct and the descending aorta, 
and has the left pulmonary artery lying at first above and 
then in front of it. 
The glands of the trachea and bronchi are found in 
great abundance at the posterior part, and their secretions 
serve to lubricate the inner surface. 
The operations known as Laryngotomy and Trache- 
otomy,, so often read about in public prints, are performed 
in the parts just described, namely, in the larynx and 
trachea respectively. 
The Lungs. Each lung is invested upon its external 
surface by an exceedingly delicate serous membrane, the 
Pleura, which incloses the lung as far as the root, and 
then reflects upon the inner surface of the thorax. Each 
pleura is therefore a short sac, one occupying the right and 
the other the left half of the thorax. The inner surface of 
the pleura is smooth, and moistened by a serous fluid which 
serves as a lubricant in the respiratory movements of 
the lungs. 
The two lungs are the essential organs of respiration, 
one in each of the lateral cavities of the chest, and sep- 
arated from each other by the heart. Each lung is divided 
into lobes, the right into three, and the left into two. The 
right lung is the larger and heavier. For a more definite 
description of the lungs, the reader is referred to plate 
No. ii, on which these organs are truly portrayed (after THE LUNGS PULMONARY ARTERY. 
131 
nature). The weight of the left lung is about twenty 
ounces, and of the right in the neighborhood of twenty- 
two ounces. 
The color of the lungs at birth is a pinkish white; in 
adult life a dark slate color, mottled in patches, and as age 
advances this mottling assumes a black color. This col- 
oring matter consists of carbonaceous substances deposited 
in the areolar tissue near the surface of the lungs. 
The substance of the lungs is of a light, porous, spongy 
texture, floats in water, and is highly elastic. 
In structure, the lungs are composed of an external 
serous coat, a subserous areolar tissue, and the pulmonary 
substance or parenchyma. The latter is composed of 
lobules, which, although closely connected with each other, 
are quite distinct by themselves. Each lobule is composed 
of one of the ramifications of the bronchial tube and its 
terminal air cells, and of the ramifications of the pulmonary 
bloodvessels, lymphatics and nerves, all of these struct- 
ures being connected together by a fibrous tissue. 
The bronchus upon entering the substance of the lungs 
divides and subdivides throughout the entire organ, thus 
permeating the whole of it. 
The air cells are small aerolar recesses, separated from 
each other by thin partitions, and communicating freely 
with the air sacs. Their diameter varies from tt,t to to of 
an inch. 
The Pulmonary Artery conveys the venous blood 
to the lungs; it divides into branches which accompany 
the bronchial tubes, and terminates in a dense capillary 
network upon the walls of the inter-cellular passages and 
air cells. From this network the radicles of the pulmonary 
veins arise; coalescing into larger branches, they accom- 
pany the arteries and return the blood purified by its pas- 
sage through the capillaries to the left auricle of the heart. 
In the lungs the branches of the pulmonary artery are 
usually above and in front of a bronchial tube, the vein 
below. 132 
THE LUNGS THYRID GLANDS. 
The pulmonary capillaries, where the change of venc*-.* 
blood into arterial takes place, form networks which lie 
immediately beneath the mucous membrane, in the walls 
and partitions of the air cells. The capillaries form a 
very minute network, the meshes of which are smaller 
than the vessels themselves. 
The Thyroid Glands are situated at the upper part 
of the windpipe, one on each side. While they have no 
connection whatever with the function of respiration, they 
are usually mentioned in connection therewith, owing to 
their close proximity. The function of these glands is 
unknown. 
The Thymus Gland is situated in front of the trachea, 
a little behind the sternum and rests upon the pericardium. 
It is a temporary organ only, attaining its full size at the 
end of the second year, when it ceases to grow, and grad- 
ually dwindles until at puberty it has almost disappeared. 
Its offices, like the former, are unknown. 
In considering generally the functions of respiration, 
it is but proper to draw attention to the fact that the char- 
acter of the blood are not identical in the three divisions 
of the vascular system—arteries, capillaries, veins. The 
researchers for facts in this respect have eminently well 
succeeded in the investigation which establishes the dif- 
ference between arterial and venous blood, but as to blood 
from the capillaries, owing to the difficulty of obtaining a 
sufficient supply, it has been impossible to establish its 
characteristics. 
While the arterial blood passes through the capillaries, 
it deposits from its substance the nutrients required for the 
tissues, and takes up the decayed matter. Thus modi- 
fied, the blood enters the veins again and is venous in its 
character. Hence the only office of the veins is to carry 
the blood to the right side of the heart, from there to be INSPIRATION EXPIRATION. 
133 
propelled into the lungs, where it loses the vitiating 
material it has collected in the tissues, takes in a fresh 
supply of oxygen, and then returns to the left side of the 
heart, revivified and prepared for furthur nutrition. 
The important principles which are given off by the 
lungs are taken from the blood, and the oxygen which 
disappears from the air is absorbed by the blood, and 
mainly by the corpuscles therein. 
To animal life oxygen is indispensable under all cir- 
cumstances, but this gas is also required for the compara- 
tively mechanical process of circulation. Of equal neces- 
sity is the elimination from the system of the carbonic 
acid, which the blood acquires in the tissues. 
In view of these old established laws of nature, respi- 
ration may be defined as the process by which the various 
tissues and organs receive and appropriate oxygen, and 
give up and expel carbonic acid. This change of gases is 
accomplished through the current of blood, as it comes 
alternately in contact with air and the tissues. 
Respiration is divided into two distinct acts, namely, 
in-piration and expiration; with the former life begins, and 
with the latter it ends. 
Inspiration is accomplished by the elevation of the 
walls of the chest and flattening of the diaphragm. A 
muscular action, explained under the chapter on muscles. 
Through this elevation a vacuum is formed within the 
lungs, causing the entrance of air. 
Expiration is the expulsion of air from the lungs 
accomplished by a simple and comparatively passive 
process, namely, the collapse of the air cells and the con- 
traction of the muscles surrounding the chest. 
It will thus be seen, that the respiratory movements 
are due to the elasticity of the lungs and the expansion 
and contraction of the muscles surrounding the thoracic 
cavity. 
There are different types of respiration: 134 
EXPIRATION ABDOMINAL TYPE. 
1. The Abdominal Type. In which the diaphragm 
and the movement of the abdomen are most prominent. 
This type is mostly seen in children, irrespective of sex. 
2. The Inferior Costal Type, in which the lower 
part of the thorax, from the seventh rib down, is most 
prominent. 
3. The Superior Costal Type is the one where the 
muscles dilate the thorax above the seventh rib, as is so 
frequently seen in women, when wearing low cut dresses, 
and under emotional excitement. 
As will be seen from the following statement, the 
respiratory acts vary much with age, and correspond pro- 
portionately with the frequency of pulse. The observ- 
ations were made by Prof. Ouetelet, and are the average 
from 300 different persons. 
PKR MINUTE. 
At birth 44 respirations. 
At the age of five years 26 “ 
“ “ fifteen to twenty years.. 20 “ 
“ “ twenty to twenty-five yrs. 19 “ 
“ “ thirty years 16 “ 
“ “ fifty years 18 “ 
During sleep the respiration is reduced about twenty 
per cent. 
Coughing and Sneezing are generally involuntary acts, 
produced by irritation of the air tubes or nasal passage. 
Coughing can however, be voluntary. Foreign bodies in 
the air tubes are often expelled by violent coughing. 
Sighing is a prolonged and deep inspiration followed 
by audible expiration. Its purpose is to change the air 
in the lungs more completely. 
Yawning is analogous to the former, and an invol- 
untary act. It is presumed to be a sign of fatigue, but is 
also produced by contagion, or through tiresome re- 
hearsals in company. 
Laughing and Sobbing while expressing different con- 
ditions, are produced by the same mechanism. The 
characteristic sounds produced during these acts, are the CHANGES EFFECTED DURING RESPIRATION. 
135 
result of the short, rapid movement of the diaphragm, ac- 
companied by the contractions of the face muscles, which 
express the signs of hilarity or grief. 
Hiccough is produced by a sudden'convulsive and in- 
voluntary contraction of the diaphragm, accompanied by a 
spasmodic contraction of the glottis. The causes for this 
disagreeable action are due mainly to the rapid ingestion 
of a quantity of dry food, or of effervescing or alcoholic 
drinks. It occurs quite often in disease. 
Capacity of Lungs. The volume of air usually con- 
tained in the lungs, is about two hundred cubic inches. 
This air does not change at every respiratory act; a cer- 
tain portion cannot be expelled by forced expiration. 
This amounts to about 100 cubic inches. In ordinary res- 
piration the above mentioned amount of 200 cubic inches 
is always in the lungs, to which is added approximately 
twenty cubic inches at each inspiration, and a little less 
quantity of vitiated air is given off during expiration. 
In some cases, however, as in blowing or the expression 
of long sentences recourse is had to inflate the lungs to 
their utmost capacity with a:r, which amounts to about 
300 cubic inches in all. When 100 inches of this have 
been expelled, new inspirations are necessary. 
CHANGES EFFECTED DURING RESPI- 
RATION IN AIR AND BLOOD. 
It was not known to the ancients, of what gases air 
was composed, and as the air which entered the lungs was 
always cooler than the expired air, their conclusion was, 
that the function of respiration was the cooling of the 
blood. 
Air. Pure atmospheric air is a mixture of 79 parts of 
nitrogen and 21 parts of oxygen, with the addition of a 
very small quantity of carbonic acid, b loating in the air 
are a number of excessively minute organic bodies, also 
various odorous and other gaseous matters may be 136 
CHANGES EFFECTED DURING RESPIRATION. 
accidentally present and form a constituent part. In res- 
piration however, nitrogen and oxygen are only of 
importance. Good air for breathing should consist of 
four parts of nitrogen and one of oxygen and of a density 
as the Lord has provided upon the surface of the earth. 
When the air is very dense, as in mines, respiration is 
more or less difficult. High mountains are surrounded 
by air which is more rarefied, hence, respiration is increased 
in order to obtain the all important oxygen. We must 
inhale sufficient air to furnish our bodies at an average 
o 
from 1200 to 1500 cubic inches of oxygen per hour. This 
amount is necessary to revivify the blood in our circulation. 
When this air which contains the requisite amount of 
oxygen passes through the lungs, besides losing a propor- 
tion of the oxygen, it undergoes the following changes: 
1. Increase of temperature. 
2. Gain of carbonic acid. 
3. Gain of watery vapor. 
4. Gain of organic matter. 
5. Gain and loss of nitrogen. 
The first you can determine by experimenting upon 
yourself with a thermometer. The carbonic acid is formed 
in the destruction of the tissues, and carried by the veins 
to the lungs to be exhaled. 
The other changes are productions of the tissues and 
blood to be eliminated. 
The Oxygen which disappears from the air in the 
lungs is taken up by the blood in the pulmonary capillaries, 
there to be absorbed by the red corpuscles. 
The color of the blood depends upon the presence or 
absence of oxygen and not on that of carbonic acid. The 
loss of oxygen from the arterial blood in the capillaries 
of the general circulation is due to its transfer from the 
corpuscles to the tissues. Tissues have a greater ab- 
sorbing capacity for oxygen, than the corpuscles them- 
selves, hence give up this gas, when they come in contact. THE LARYNX. 
137 
Of the oxygen brought into the lungs only about one- 
fourth is retained. The amount of carbonic acid exhaled 
is rather smaller than the volume of oxygen absorbed. 
The carbonic acid exhaled by animal respiration tends 
to vitiate the air, and when the atmosphere contains more 
than to of this gas, respiration is altogether impeded. 
Air is already positively unhealthy before this limit is 
reached. 
Asphyxia is the result when the oxygen supply is cut 
off from the lungs, as is seen in suffocation, drowning, or 
the inhalation of air having not a proper proportion of 
oxygen in it. 
The Larynx, in addition to its function in respiration, 
is the special organ for the production of vocal sounds. 
Voice is only formed in expiration, never in inspi- 
ration. The column of outgoing air is set in vibration by 
the glottis, and its resonance modified in the pharynx, 
mouth and nasal passages. Through the tension and 
approximation of the vocal chords, the orifice of the glottis 
is narrowed to a comparatively minute crevice. When 
the vocal chords are relaxed during expiration, nothing 
can be heard but a faint whisper of the air passing through 
the larynx. In the production of a vocal sound the chords 
are made tense and closely applied to each other; and the 
air, driven by forcible expiration through the narrowed 
chink of the glottis, between the vibrating vocal chords, is 
itself thrown into sonorous vibration. The tone, pitch and 
intensity of the sound vary with the conformation of the 
larynx, the tension and approximation of the vocal chords, 
and the force of expiration. 
The narrower the opening and the greater the tension 
of the chords, the more acute the sound ; while a wider 
opening and a lower tension produce a graver note. The 
quality of the sound is also modified by the length of the 
column of air between the glottis and the mouth, the tense 138 
VOICE. 
or relaxed condition of the pharynx and fauces, and the 
dryness or moisture of the mucous membrane. 
The production of a vocal sound takes place, therefore, 
in the larynx; while division of the sound into vowels and 
consonants, words and phrases, is accomplished by the lips, 
tongue, teeth and palate. THE URINARY ORGANS. 
139 
CHAPTER IX. 
THE URINARY ORGANS. 
Of these organs, the kidneys are of the utmost 
importance. 
The Kidneys, two in number, are situated in the 
back part of the abdomen. They are placed in the loins, 
one on each side of the vertebral column, behind the peri- 
toneum, and usually surrounded by a mass of fat. Their 
upper extremity is on a level with the upper border of the 
twelfth dorsal vertebra; their lower extremity on a level with 
the third lumbar vertebra. In form the kidney resembles 
a bean. Their length is about four inches, two and a half 
in breadth, and a little more than one inch in thickness. 
Their weight varies between four and a half and six ounces 
each. The combined weight of the two kidneys in pro- 
portion to the body is about as i to 240. 
Each kidney is connected by means of a tube with the 
bladder; these conductors are called the Ureters, and are 
from sixteen to eighteen inches in length, and have the 
diameter of a goose quill. 
The Bladder is the reservoir for the urine, situated 
in the pelvis, behind the pubes and in front of the rectum 
in the male; the uterus and vagina intervening between 
it and that intestine in the female. An average bladder 
will hold about a pint. 
The tube which leads from the bladder and through 
which evacuation is effected, is the urethra. 
The kidneys as excretory organs, separate from the 
blood certain materials which when dissolved in a quantity 140 
TIIE kidneys. 
of water, also separated from the blood by the kidneys, 
constitute the urine. 
The manner in which the blood is conducted to the kid- 
neys, there to be relieved of the urine and its constituent 
parts, and again returned to the venous system, is perhaps 
best shown on engraving No. 11. 
'Idle kidneys are not instrumental in forming the urine, 
but only in separating it from the blood. 
Vertical Section through Kidney. 
Engraving No. 17. 
1. 
2. 
3- 
4- 
5. Apices of the Pyramids. 
6. Columns. 
7. Pelvis of Kidney. 
8. Upper Extremity of Ureter. 
Pyramids of Malpighi. 
The urine is distinguished from other animal fluids by 
the fact that it represents the product of physiological 
disintegration. Every living being absorbs from without 
nutr.tive materials, which are modified by assimilation and 
converted into the ingredients of its tissues; and at the THE KIDNEYS. 
141 
same time its elements pass into new forms of combination, 
to be expelled as the product of d sintegration. 
Certain substances, therefore, are constantly making 
their appearance in the body, which were not introduced 
with the food, but which have been produced by retrograde 
metamorphosis. They are derived from materials which 
once formed part of the animal tissue, but which have 
become altered by internal transformation, and are no 
longer capable of aiding in the performance of the func- 
tions. The elimination and removal of these materials is 
the process of excretion, and the materials themselves are 
known as excrementitious substances. 
The excrementitious substances are formed for the 
most part in the tissues, from which they are absorbed by 
the blood and conveyed to excretory organs by which they 
are discharged. If their elimination be impeded, their 
accumulation in the system produces disturbances. This 
disturbing influence is especially manifested in its action 
upon the nervous sys'ein, causing abnormal irritability, 
derangement of the senses, and in extreme cases, delirium, 
insensibility and death. 
In the normal condition and in normal quantities the 
excrementitious matters are not poisonous, nor even dele- 
terious ; they are the natural products of functional 
activity, and therefore as essential to the manifestations of 
life as the nutritious material supplied by the food. It is 
only when their elimination is retarded that they interfere 
with the performance of the functions by deranging the 
constitution of the tissues. 
Some of the excrementitious matters produced in the 
body are probably eliminated in small proportion with 
the perspiration or the faeces, and carbonic acid is abun- 
dantly exhaled from the lungs. But the most important 
of all these excrementitious matters are the characteristic 
ingredients in the urine. 
The Urine is therefore solely an excretion. It is a 142 
THE URINE. 
solution of the nitrogenous excrementitious matters of the 
body, and by its abundance and composition it indicates 
the activity of metamorphosis in the nitrogenous ingre- 
dients of the tissues and fluids. It also contains most 
of the mineral salts discharged from the body ; and by 
the water which holds these matters in solution it pre- 
sents a large proportion of the fluids passing through 
the system. Furthermore, accidental or abnormal ingre- 
dients introduced into the blood, are usually eliminated 
by this channel, and appear as temporary ingredients of 
the urine. The formation of urine is of the utmost im- 
portance, and only second to the functions of respiration. 
I he chemical composition of the urine as derived from 
numerous analyses is as follows in 1,000 parts : 
Water 950.00 
Urea 26 20 
Other organic substances 2.02 
Mineral salts 20.78 
1000.00 
Urea is the most important constituent of the urine 
both in character and amount, forming more than one- 
half its solid ingredients and over eighty per cent, of all 
those of an organic nature. The most important fact 
known with regard to the origin of urea is that it is not 
formed in the kidneys but pre-exists in the blood and is 
drained away from the circulating fluid during its pas- 
sage through the kidneys. 
I he daily average quantity of urine discharged in 
healthy male adults between twenty and forty years of 
age is a little over three and a quarter pints. 
I he urine is a clear, amber colored fluid of a watery 
consistency, and distinctly acid reaction. Its specific 
gravity is from 1020 to 1025. 
Through the influence of the nervous system the secre- 
tion of urine is often modified to a considerable degree. 
Fear anger and various violent emotions sometimes pro- THE URINE. 
143 
duce a sudden and copious secretion of urine containing 
a large amount of water, and this phenomenon is often 
observed in cases of hysteria. Intense mental exertion 
produces the same result, and nearly everybody can ob- 
serve that during a few hours of intense and unremitting 
mental labor, a frequent desire arises to urinate. 
It is a well-known fact that young soldiers who are 
endowed with all the bravery imaginable, but who have 
not as yet actually participated in battle, find upon their 
first approach to the enemy’s fire, through the nervous 
influences upon the urinary organs, that involuntarily emis- 
sions of urine have taken place. 
For further information in reference to the urinary 
organs, both male and female, the reader is respectfully 
referred to Volume II, where these parts are still more 
minutely described. THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 
(Engraving No. 18.) 
1. Gray Matter of Cerebrum. 
2. White Matter or Fibers of Cerebrum. 
3. Optic Thalamus. 
4. Corpus Callosum. 
5. Pons Varolii. 
6. Cerebellum or Small Brain (Vertical Section. 
7. Medulla Oblongata (upper portion of Spinal 
Cord.) 
Cranial. 
8. Spinal Cord. 
9. Cervical or Neck Nerves, 8 pairs. 
10. Dorsal Nerves, 12 “ 
n. Lumbar or Loin Nerves, 5 “ 
12. Sacral Nerves, 5 “ 
13. Coccygeal Nerves, 1 “ 
31 “ 
14. Cervical Plexus. 
15. Brachial Plexus. 
16. Phrenic Nerves. 
17. Median Nerves. 
18. Ulnar Nerves. 
20. Sciatic Nerves. 
21. Crural Nerves. 
22. Musculo-cutaneous Nerves. 
23. Musculo-spiro Nerves. 
Spinal. 
144 Engraving No. 18. The Nervous System. 
145 THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 
147 
CHAPTER X. 
THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 
The nervous system is the apparatus of communi- 
cation, by which the various parts of the human body are 
brought into relation with each other, and different organs 
excited to harmonious and alternating action. 
Its effects are produced by an influence transmitted 
from one region to another, stimulating or modifying the 
animal functions according to the requirements of the 
system at large. 
The function of the nervous system is therefore to 
associate the different parts of the body in such a manner 
that stimulus applied to one organ may excite the activity 
of another. 
The instances of this action are almost as numerous as 
the vital phenomena. The light falling upon the retina 
produces contraction of the pupil. Introduction of food 
into the stomach causes a discharge of bile from the gall 
bladder. Alimentary matters in contact with the mucous 
membrane of the intestine excite the peristaltic action of 
the muscular coat. Thus every organ is subservient in 
the manifestation of its activity to influences derived from 
other parts through the nervous system. 
In the nervous system there are two kinds of ana- 
tomical elements, namely : Nerve fibers and nerve cells. 
The nerve fibers are the characteristic constituents of the 
“ white substance,” forming the mass of the nerves and 
their ramifications, the external portion of the spinal 148 
THE NERVE CELLS. 
cord, and much of the internal part of the brain. The 
nerve cells are found in the “gray substance,” which con- 
stitutes the external or convoluted layer of the brain, as 
well as various internal deposits near its base, the central 
portion of the spinal cord, and many small detached 
masses, or ganglia, in different parts of the body. 
The Nerve Cells, as far as is known, are the only 
parts capable, under any circumstances, of generating the 
nerve force, and do not receive impressions in any other 
way than through the nerve fibers. 
The Nerve Fibers act only as conductors, and are 
incapable of generating nerve force. There is no ex- 
ception to this rule. 
Fewr of the anatomical elements present greater vari- 
ations in size and appearance than the nerve fibers. 
Certain fibers found in the course of the nerves between 
the muscles are as large as ysVo of an inch in diameter, 
while others are only ‘2T) oo o of an inch. 
The nerve fibers are channels of communication be- 
tween the nervous centers on the one hand and the exterior 
organs on the other. For this purpose they are endowed 
with a special irritability by which, when excited at one 
end, they transmit the impulse throughout the entire 
length, and produce an effect at the other extremity. 
The nerves distributed to the skin, when excited, produce 
in the brain a corresponding sensation. Those distrib- 
uted to the muscles when excited at their origin by the 
impulse of the will, cause contraction in the muscular 
fibers. It is evident that the fiber serves to communicate 
in some way an action from one extremity to the other ; 
since, if it be divided in any part of its course the com- 
munication ceases, and sensation can no longer be per- 
ceived from impressions made on the skin. 
Owing to the different effects thus produced at their 
extremity, the nerves and nerve fibers are distinguished by 
different names. Those which transmit the stimulus of NERVE FORCE. 
149 
sensation from the surface to the centers are called sensi- 
tive nerves or nerve fibers; those which transmit the 
stimulus of motion from the nervous centers to the 
muscles are called motor nerves or nerve fibers. 
No essential distinction is perceptible in anatomical 
characters between the sensitive and motor nerve fibers, 
only that the motor fibers are of a little larger diameter 
than the sensitive fibers. 
Every collection of grey nerve substance is called a 
nerve center in which nervous impressions are received 
through the sensitive fibers from the periphery, and from 
which a stimulus is sent through the motor fibers to the 
muscles. While the nerve fibers accordingly are organs 
of transmission, the gray substance and its nerve cells are 
an apparatus in which the nervous influence is changed 
from one form to another. 
The nervous center receives the impressions conveyed 
to it, and converts- them into impulses to be transmitted 
elsewhere. How this change is effected in the nerve cells 
is unknown ; but it is evidently essential to the physio- 
logical operation of the nervous system, since neither sen- 
sation nor movement is ever excited in the normal condi- 
tion through the nerve fibers unless they are in communi- 
cation with a nervous center. 
Nerve Force. All acts of life such as the opening 
and closing of the eyelids and mouth ; the perception of 
our surroundings ; the execution of movements as done by 
our muscles ; the listening to others, or the promulgation 
of our thoughts and wishes, originate within the nerve cen- 
ters. These acts are the result of what may be called 
Nerve Force. 
Its production is beyond the comprehension of the 
human mind and is one of the most remarkable of the 
phenomena of life ; and its essence or the exact mechan- 
ism of its generation is one of the problems that thus far 
has eluded the investigations of the scientific world. It 150 
THE ENCEPHALON THE BRAIN. 
is surely the trysting place of body and soul, of matter 
and mind. The human being must rest contented that 
it is so without being able to define this impenetrable 
mystery. A solution, however, will be had when the eyes 
of our soul begin to see, and those of our body are 
closed forever. 
The nervous tissues of the body are comprised in two 
great systems—the cerebro-spinal and the sympathetic, and 
each of these systems consists of a central organ, or series 
of central organs and of nerves. 
The Cerebro-Spinal System of Nerves consists 
of two centers, the spinal cord and the encephalon ; the 
latter may be divided into the cerebrum or brain, the 
cerebellum or small brain ; the pons varolii and the medulla 
oblongata. 
THE ENCEPHALON. 
The Brain is inclosed in a series of membranes. 
The first next to the skull is the Dura Mater. This 
membrane also forms the internal periosteum of the 
cranial bone. The next is the Arachnoid membrane, 
which is extremely thin and delicate, enveloping the brain 
lying between the former and the Pia Mater (nourishing 
mother) which is a highly vascular membrane, and it con- 
sists of minute networks of bloodvessels held together by 
an extremely fine tissue. 
The brain is that portion of the cerebro spinal axis 
which is contained in the cranial cavity, and in the human 
being is heavier than that of all the lower animals except- 
ing the elephant and whale. The brain of the former 
weighs from eight to ten pounds, and that of the whale 
in a specimen seventy-five feet long, weighed rather more 
than five pounds. The average weight of the human 
brain is about forty-nine ounces in the male, and forty- 
four ounces in the female. 
The Cerebrum or large brain in man constitutes the FUNCTIONS OF THE CEREBRUM. 
151 
largest portion of the eucephalon. It is divided into two 
hemispheres, the right and the left. These hemispheres 
are two ovoidal masses, flattened against each other at 
the median line, where they are separated by the great 
longitudinal fissure, and presenting on their lateral sur- 
faces a rounded or hemispherical form, whence their name 
is derived. They consist externally of a layer of gray 
substance from tV to -J of an inch in thickness. 
The white substance of the hemispheres consists 
mainly of nerve fibers. The outer surface of the hem- 
ispheres presents a number of convoluted eminences sep- 
arated from each other by depressions of various depths. 
The outer surface of each convolution, as well as the sides 
and bottom of the depressions; are composed of gray 
matter, which is called the cortical substance. By this 
arrangement the convolutions are adapted to increase the 
amount of gray matter without occupying much addi- 
tional space, while they also afford a greater extent of 
surface for the termination of the white fibers in the gray 
matter. 
In this connection the attention of the reader is drawn 
to the plate exhibiting the cerebro-spinal system of nerves, 
and at a glance a fair comprehension can be gained of 
the relation of the gray substance to the white fibers, and 
also the convolutions as portrayed in a vertical section. 
(Engraving No. 18.) 
Functions of the Cerebrum. The most important 
functions belonging to the hemispheres, as a whole, are 
no doubt connected with the exercise of the intelligence. 
It is this part of the brain which is more developed in 
man as compared with the lower animals, and of all the 
nervous endowments it is the intellectual faculties in 
which he is most distinctly their superior. The cerebrum 
is shown to be in some way the especial organ of the 
mind. 
It is certain that the cerebrum is not directly connected 152 
FUNCTIONS OF THE CEREBRUM. 
with the maintenance of physical life, and is not, even in 
man, essential to its continuance. The hemispheres may 
be completely removed on both sides in fishes, reptiles, 
birds, and even in some mammalians, as the rabbit and 
the rat. In the higher quadrupeds large portions of 
their substance may be destroyed, leaving all the vital 
functions in activity. In man they may suffer extensive 
morbid alterations or mechanical injuries, accompanied 
by loss of substance, without fatal results. 
One of the most marked instances of this kind was 
reported by Dr. Bigelow in the American Journal of 
Medical Sciences, Philadelphia, July, 1850, in which a 
pointed iron bar over one inch in thickness was driven 
through a man’s head by the premature blasting of a rock, 
d'he bar entered the left side of the face near the angle 
o 
of the jaw and passed through the anterior part of the 
cranial cavity, emerging from the frontal bone. The 
patient became delirious within two days of the accident, 
remaining partly delirious for about three weeks. He 
then began to improve, and at the end of two months 
from date of injury was able to walk. At the end of 
sixteen months the wounds were healed, and the patient 
had recovered his general health, though with loss of sight 
in the eye of the injured side. He survived for over 
twelve years, and was able to do work as a hostler, 
coachman and farm laborer, in all of which occupations 
he was employed at various intervals. 
In man the general result of injury or disease of the 
hemispheres is disturbance of the intellectual faculties. 
Among the earliest and most constant of these phe- 
nomena is an impairment of memory. Hence if the loss 
of it is perceived through injury or disease of the cere- 
brum, it must have its seat there. It is likewise so with 
reason and judgment. 
The manifestations of intelligence which are chiefly 
concerned in mental endowments are : MEMORY REASON JUDGMENT. 
153 
1. Memory is the simplest and most essential of facul- 
ties for the performance of intelligent acts. The recol- 
lection of names and of the objects to which they belong, 
is indispensable for even the use of articulate language ; 
and a defective memory often seems the immediate cause 
of the incapacity of idiotic children. Memory is con- 
stantly essential in the ordinary occupations of life, in 
enabling us to retain past impressions as a guide for 
immediate or future acts. 
2. Reason may be considered as the ability to appre- 
ciate the nature of nervous impressions, and to refer them 
to their external source. This is quite different from the 
simple power of perception which may continue unim- 
paired after extensive injury to the hemispheres. The 
mental action excited by an impression on the senses 
transfers our attention from the sensation to its cause ; 
and when this action is prompt and effectual we acquire 
an idea both of the origin of the impression and its signifi- 
cance. The perfection of this quality consists in the cer- 
tainty with which it appreciates the relation between cause 
and effect, and the relative importance of different phe- 
nomena. It is deficient or absent in idiots, and they con- 
sequently cannot avoid dangers or provide for their neces- 
sities. For the same reason it is useless to punish an 
idiot because although he may feel the pa’n inflicted, he 
does not refer it as a consequence to any previous act of 
his own. A similar deficiency in the insane or the weak 
minded produces a want of power to comprehend the im- 
portance and connection of different events. They are 
said to be “ unreasonable,” because they expect results 
which are unlikely to follow from certain causes, and 
because they assume the existence of causes which are not 
indicated by the results. 
3. Judgment is the faculty by which appropriate 
means are selected for the accomplishment of a particular 
end. Its exercise requires the existence of memory and 154 
THE CEREBELLUM. 
reason, which supply the necessary conditions upon which it 
is based, while its own action is one which looks to the future 
rather than the An individual in whom the judg- 
ment is well developed employs, under the guidance of 
experience, means which are adapted to the end in view; 
one who is deficient in this respect resorts to means which 
are insufficient or inappropriate, and is consequently 
unsuccessful. Whether the act performed in this manner 
be a simple mechanical operation, like that of closing a 
window, to exclude the cold, or a complicated plan, in- 
volving many parts, the mental process is the same in 
kind, and differs only in degree; its essential character 
being that it is an intelligent act, based on an under- 
standing. 
It is evident that all such manifestations of intelligence 
are in the nature of reflex action. Their starting point is 
a sensation coming from without, giving rise in the 
nervous system to a series of internal operations, and 
terminating in an intelligent volitional impulse. This is 
reflected from within outward, and thus finally calls into 
action the voluntary muscles. The intermediate process 
between the sensation and the volition may be short and 
simple, or it may be long and complicated, involving the 
continued suggestion of many successive ideas. There 
can be little doubt that in either case, it is accompanied 
by actions of some kind in the grey substance of the cere- 
brum; for if these organs are injured or defective, the 
mental operations are obstructed or disturbed. 
It is also a well established fact, that center of speech 
is located in a well defined and restricted portion of the 
anterior lobes. While these data are exclusively drawn from 
pathology, physiological researches are a unit, that there 
is no point in the brain which is more exactly determined 
than the seat of the faculty of speech. 
The Cerebellum or small brain, is that portion of the 
encephalon which is contained in the inferior occipital FUNCTIONS OF TIIE CEREBELLUM. 
155 
portion of the skull. It is situated beneath the posterior 
lobes of the cerebrum, from which it is separated by the 
tentatorium. In the infant the cerebellum is propor- 
tionately much smaller than in the adult, the relation 
between it and the cerebrum being as between i to 13 in the 
adult and 1 to 26 in the infant. The maximum weight is 
attained between the ages of 25 and 40 years, and 
averages 5 1-2 ounces. 
Like the cerebrum, the cerebellum is divided into two 
hemispheres or lobes. 
The gray matter of the cerebellum is found on the 
surface, and as independent masses in the interior. 
Functions of the Cerebellum. In this connection 
it is proper to state that the definition of the function 
of the cerebellum is one of the points stated by many 
physiological authors as doubtful and unsettled, and this 
is so mainly because some writers have been unable to 
harmonize the experimental facts with cases of diseases or 
injury to the cerebellum in the human subject. From 
experiments made upon living animals, the following con- 
clusions have been arrived at: 
That there is a necessity for harmony of the move- 
ments of the general voluntary system of muscles by 
means of a nerve center. 
That whatever other function the cerebellum may have, 
it acts as the center presiding over equilibrium and gen- 
eral muscular co-ordination. 
The cerebellum has its nervous connections with the 
general muscular system through the posterior white 
columns of the spinal cord, a fact which is capable both of 
anatomical and physiological demonstration. 
If the cerebellum be extirpated there is loss of co or- 
dinating power, and if the posterior white columns of the 
cord be completely divided, destroying the communication 
between the cerebellum and the general system, there is 
also loss of co-ordinating power. 156 
FUNCTIONS OF THE MEDULLA 013 LONG AT A. 
When a small portion only of the cerebellum is re- 
moved, there is slight disturbance of co-ordination, and 
the disordered movements are marked in proportion to 
the extent of the injury to the cerebellum. 
After extirpation of one-half or two-thirds of the cere- 
bellum, the disturbance in co-ordination immediately 
following the operation may disappear, and the animal 
may entirely recover without any regeneration of the 
extirpated nerve substance. This important fact enables 
us to understand how, in certain cases of disease of the 
cerebellum in the human subject, when the disorganization 
of the nerve tissue is slow and gradual, there may never 
be any disorder in the movements. 
The opinion that the cerebellum is the organ of the 
instinct of generation, seems to be a settled fact with a 
good many people. It is hoped however, that a refutation 
of this preposterous idea is unnecessary, as it has been 
proven time and time again, in operation on the lower 
animals, that the entire extirpation of the cerebellum did 
not destroy the instinct of generation. 
The Medulla Oblongata is the upper enlarged part 
of the spinal cord, and extends from the upper border of 
the atlas to the lower border of the pons varolii. 
The Medulla Oblongata, like the spinal cord, consists 
of both grey and white matter; in places, however, the grey 
matter is exposed on its posterior surface. 
Functions of the Medulla Oblongata. The physio- 
logical properties of the medulla are more distinctly 
marked than those of any other part of the brain mass. 
It is in a high degree both sensitive and excitable, 
especially in its posterior portions. 
The most important action of the medulla as a nervous 
center is that connected with respiration. So long as the 
medulla is uninjured, although the cranium be emptied of 
all its nervous centers, respiration goes on without 
essential modification. But if the other parts of the brain THE PONS VALORII. 
157 
be left intact and the medulla be destroyed, in any warm- 
blooded animal, all movements of respiration cease 
instantaneously. 
The circulation still continues for a time, but as the 
blood becomes deficient in oxygen, it is gradually retarded 
and after several minutes comes to an end. 
The medulla is a center from which the whole 
respiratory apparatus derives its stimulus, and in man, 
quadrupeds and birds it is the most important part for the 
immediate preservation of life. 
Deglutition is also under the control of the medulla. 
o 
Mastication of the food, and its transfer by the tongue to 
the entrance of the fauces, are voluntary action-, which 
may be continued or arrested at will. But when the food 
has passed from the mouth to the pharynx the process of 
deglutition, by which it is carried into the stomach is 
reflex and involuntary. 
The medulla is furthermore connected with phonation. 
In the exercise of the voice, however, the preliminary 
actions of intelligence, volition or emotional excitement 
require the co-operation of other parts of the encephalon, 
but the immediate mechanism by which a vocal sound is 
produced has its nervous center in the medulla oblongata. 
The medulla oblongata, in connection with other parts, 
is also the direct source of the movements of the tongue 
and lips. 
Therefore this important part of the encephalon is the 
seat of reflex actions connected with the immediate pres- 
ervation of life, since it maintains the movements by 
which air and food are introduced into the body. It also 
presides over the muscular combinations concerned in the 
voice and articulation, and by this means establishes an 
intelligible communication with the external world. 
The Pons Varolii is the bond of union of the 
various segments of the encephalon, connecting the 
cerebrum above, the medulla oblongata below, and the 158 
THE CRANIAL NERVES. 
cerebellum behind. It is situated above the medulla 
oblongata, below the cerebrum and between the hemis- 
pheres of the cerebellum. 
THE CRANIAL NERVES. 
These consist of twelve pairs, having their origin 
within the substance of the brain, hence the name cranial 
nerves, and are distributed to different parts of the head 
and face. 
The following will show their respective arrangement: 
First pair, or Olfactory nerve is the special nerve of the 
sense of smell. 
Second pair, or Optic nerve is the special nerve of the 
ssnse of sight, and is distributed exclusively to the eyeballs. 
Third pair, or Motor oculi nerve supplies all the mus- 
cles of the orbit, and also sends some filaments to the iris. 
Fourth pair, or Pathetic nerve is the smallest of the 
cranial nerves, and supplies the superior oblique muscles 
of the eye. 
Fifth pair, or Trifacial nerve is the largest of the 
cranial nerves. It is a nerve of common sensation, and of 
motion. It is the great sensitive nerve of the head and 
face, the motor nerve of the muscles of mastication, and 
its tongue branch is probably one of the nerves of the 
special sense of taste. 
Sixth pair, or Abducent nerve supplies the external 
rectus muscle of the eye. 
Seventh pair, or Facial nerve is the motor nerve of all 
the muscles of expression in the face. 
Eighth pair, or Auditory nerve is the special nerve of 
the sense of hearing, being distributed exclusively in 
the ear. 
Ninth pair, or Glosso pharyngeal nerve is distributed, 
as its name implies, to the tongue and pharynx, being the 
nerve of sensation to the mucous membrane of the THE SPINAL CORI). 
159 
pharynx, fauces and tonsils, and a special nerve of taste in 
all the parts of the tongue. 
Tenth pair, or Pneumogastric nerve has a more ex- 
tensive distribution than any other of the cranial nerves, 
passing through the neck and thorax to the upper part of 
the abdomen. It supplies the organs of voice and respi- 
ration with motor and sensory fibers, and the pharynx, 
oesophagus, stomach and heart with motor influences. 
Eleventh pair, or Spinal accessory nerve consists of 
two parts : 
1. The accessory part is principally distributed to the 
pharynx and larynx. 
2. The spinal part is distributed to the muscles of 
the neck. 
Twelfth pair, or Hypoglossal nerve is the motor nerve 
of the tongue. 
THE SPINAL CORD. 
The spinal cord (medulla spinalis) is the cylindrical 
elongated part of the cerebro spinal axis, which is 
contained in the vertebral canal. Its length is usually 
about seventeen or eighteen inches. It occupies in the 
adult the upper two-thirds of the vertebral canal, extending 
from the upper border of the atlas to the lower border of 
the body of the first lumbar vertebra. 
The cord consists of an outer part, composed of medul- 
lated nerve-fibers, which is the white substance, and of a 
central part, the gray matter, both supported in a peculiar 
kind of connective tissue. The cord sends its nerves to 
the muscles and integuments of trunk and limbs, and con- 
sequently acts in a double capacity: First, as a medium 
of communication between the brain and the peripheral 
organs; and secondly, as an independent nervous center, 
with special endowments of its own. 
The membranes which envelope the spinal cord are 
three in number, and identical with those of the brain, of 160 
FUNCTION OF THE SPINAL CORD. 
which they are continuations. The most external is the 
dura mater, a strong, fibrous membrane, which forms a 
loose sheath around the cord. The most internal is the 
pia mater, a cellulo-vascular membrane, which closely in- 
vests the entire surface of the cord. Between the two is 
the arachnoid membrane, an intermediate structure which 
envelopes the cord and is connected to the pia mater by 
slender filaments of connective tissue. 
Function of the Spinal Cord. The general char- 
acter of reflex actions of the spinal cord is that they tend 
unconsciously to the defense or preservation of the body. It 
lias also an important action in regard to attitude and loco- 
motion. Another important function of the spinal cord 
as a nervous center, is its control over the sphincters and 
the muscles of evacuation. While the small intestines, the 
caecum and the colon are supplied exclusively with nerves 
from the sympathetic system, the lower portion of the 
rectum receives branches of the sacral plexus of spinal 
nerves. These latter nerves are voluntary, and thus it 
happens that a desire for stool can be controlled for a time 
by will power. 
The spinal cord, in its character as a nervous center, 
exerts a general protective influence over the body. It 
presides over the involuntary movements of the limbs and 
trunk; it supplies the requisite nervous connection for the 
attitude and locomotion; .and by its control over the 
rectum and bladder, it regulates the accumulation and dis- 
charge of the excrementitious products of the system. 
The spinal cord, as a medium of communication be- 
tween the brain and peripheral organs, exerts a crossed 
action. Sensitive impressions received by the skin on one 
side of the body are conducted through the cord to the 
opposite side of the brain, and motor impulses originating 
on one side of the brain, pass to the nerves and muscles 
on the opposite side of the body. THE SPINAL NERVES. 
161 
THE SPINAL NERVES. 
The Spinal Nerves are so called because they take 
their origin from the spinal cord, and are transmitted 
through the inter-vertebral openings on either side of the 
spinal column. There are thirty-one pairs of spinal 
nerves, which are arranged in the following groups, 
corresponding to the region of the spine through which 
they pass : 
Cervical or Neck 8 pairs. 
Dorsal or Back 12 “ 
Lumbar or Loin 5 “ 
Sacral 5 “ 
Coccygeal 1 “ 
Each spinal nerve arises by two roots, an anterior or 
motor root, and a posterior or sensory root. 
The anterior roots are the smaller of the two, devoid 
of any ganglionic enlargement, and their component 
fibrils are collected into two bundles near the inter-ver- 
tebral opening. 
The posterior roots of the nerves are larger, but the 
individual filaments are finer and more delicate. As 
their component fibrils pass outward toward the aperture 
in the dura mater they coalesce into two bundles, receive 
a tubular sheath from that membrane, and enter the 
ganglion which is developed upon each root. 
At some parts of their course certain branches of the 
nerves reunite, forming networks called plexuses. Thus 
the four upper cervical nerves anastomose and form the 
cervical plexus. From the third and fourth cervical 
nerves arises the phrenic nerve, right and left respectively. 
It is the motor nerve of the diaphragm. 
The branches of the upper four cervical nerves are 
distributed within the muscles of the neck. 
The Brachial Plexus is formed by the union of the 
anterior branches of the four lower cervical and the 162 
THE SPINAL NERVES—MEDIAN NERVE. 
greater part of the first dorsal nerves. This plexus ex- 
tends from the lower part of the side of the neck to the 
axilla. 
The principal branches of nerves descending from the 
brachial plexus into the arm are the ulnar and median 
nerves. The former is placed along the inner or ulnar 
side of the upper limb, and is distributed to the muscles 
and skin of the forearm and hand. Nearly everybody 
has had experience with this nerve, as it is the one which 
passes on the inner side of the so-called “funny bone” 
at elbow. Knocking against this bone causes excruci- 
ating pain, incident by the pressure against this nerve. 
The Mcdim Nerve has received its name from the 
course it takes along the middle of the arm and forearm 
to the hand. It distributes branches to the thumb and 
fingers. 
The Dorsal Nerves are distributed to the muscles of 
the back and between the ribs. 
The last or twelfth dorsal and the first four lumbar 
nerves form the lumbar plexus, which sends nerves to 
ramify upon the muscles and skin of the abdomen and 
lower extremities. 
The last lumbar and four upper sacral nerves form 
the sacral plexus, which distributes nerves to the muscles 
and skin of the hip and lower extremities. 
File principal branch of this plexus is the Great 
•Sciatic Nerve. which supplies nearly the whole of the 
integument of the leg, the muscles of the back of the 
thigh, and those of the leg and foot. It is the largest 
nerve cord in the body, measuring three-quarters of an 
inch in breadth, and is the continuation of the lower 
part of the sacral plexus. It passes out of the pelvis 
through the great sacro-sciatic opening. It descends 
along the back part of the thigh to about its lower third, 
when it divides into two large branches. 
The last of the spinal nerves is the coccygeal. It is TIIE SPINAL NERVES. 
163 
but a delicate filament which terminates in the coccygeal 
regions. 
The manner in which these nerves unite and re- 
unite, giving off branches in all directions, is best com- 
prehended by examining engraving No. 18. This illus- 
tration should be well impressed upon the mind of the 
reader, when studying the wonderful network of nerves, 
which is found permeating throughout the whole system. 
It shows at a glance how the nerves, represented by the 
cords of the engraving, radiate in all directions, and find 
a trysting place in the axis (the brain and spinal cord). 
An illustration of this kind is not only a graphic object 
lesson, but also food for thought, which in a sane person 
must bring adoration for the Creator, and in the skill 
displayed in making the human body a piece of perfect 
mechanism, in which every portion, without exception, is 
under the influence of the nervous system. It is hoped 
that the reader understands that only a small portion of 
the nerve cords are displayed on the engraving. It 
would be beyond human skill to portray on a small sur- 
face all the nerve fibers radiating throughout the body ; 
for do we not perceive the prick of the pin, or does the 
face not become reddened from shame, or white and 
ghastly through anger ? 164 
THE SYMPATHETIC NERVOUS SYSTEM. 
CHAPTER XI. 
THE SYMPATHETIC NERVOUS SYSTEM 
Is composed of a series of ganglia connected together 
by intervening cords, extending on each side of the ver- 
tebral column from the base of the skull to the coccyx; 
and of three plexuses or aggregation of nerves and 
ganglia, situated in front of the spine in the (i) thoracic, 
(2) abdominal and (3) pelvic cavities; also of numerous 
nerve fibers, which supply the viscera of respiration and 
digestion, as well as the muscular coats of the bloodvessels 
with nerves. It is by means of the bloodvessels that the 
sympathetic nerves are distributed to all parts of the body. 
To describe by means of a pen portrayal, and attempt 
to bring before the reader a vivid picture in that manner, 
the complications of the sympathetic nervous system 
would be folly, unless the student’s mind had been 
specially prepared. 
Hence we have concluded to give herewith a repro- 
duction of the engraving, made after dissections by that 
nestor of anatomy, Dr. Henry Gray, F. R. S. London. 
It shows the different ganglia and plexuses in their proper 
position. From its study, and from the description we 
shall give of the functions of the sympathetic nerves, etc., 
named thereon, it is hoped to aid the reader in gaining 
what little knowledge the scientific world has cfiven us 
<-> «_> 
upon this subject. 
Carotid Plexus. The main function of the nerves in 
this plexus is the regulation of the flow of blood to the Engraving No. 19. 
The Sympathetic Nerves. 
165 166 
SOLAR OR EPIGASTRIC PLEXUS. 
brain, and its fibers serve as connecting links between the 
two nervous systems, in this locality. 
Superior, Middle and Inferior Cervical Ganglion. 
These ganglia are united by the sympathetic cord, also act 
as vaso-motor nerves of the bloodvessels entering and 
leaving the cranial cavity and surroundings. These nerves 
communicate freely with adjacent spinal nerves and 
branches of it form the deep and superficial Cardiac 
Plexus, which regulates the actions of the Heart. 
I he Dorsal or Thoracic Ganglia are twelve in num- 
ber and are united by the sympathetic cord. They each 
communicate by two filaments with the spinal nerves. 
This chain of Ganglia gives off branches to the blood-ves- 
sels of the thorax, the respiratory organs, and forms connec- 
tions with the plexuses and ganglia in the lower viscera. 
The Solar or Epigastric Plexus and branches exercise 
their nervous influence upon the following organs: Dia- 
phragm stomach, liver, spleen, kidneys, the testes in the 
male the ovaries in the female, the intestines, the upper 
part of the rectum, abdominal aorta and vena cava. The 
filaments follow the distribution of the bloodvessels 
arising from and tributary to the last mentioned artery 
and vein. This plexus is the largest and most important 
in the system. 
The Lumbar Ganglia is a continuation of the dorsal 
ganglia. It supplies the loin muscles and bloodvessels in 
that vicinity. 
The Aortic Plexus is the special network of nerves 
controlling the important bloodvessels of that name and 
branches thereof. 
Idle Hypogastric or Pelvic Plexus supplies the viscera 
of the pelvis and causes the peculiar phenomena fre- 
quently exhibited by the procreative organs. 
The Sacral Ganglia acts as a connecting chain for the 
foregoing with the sympathetic cord, and gives off 
branches for the bloodvessels in its locality. VASO MOTOR NERVES. 
167 
Vaso Motor Nerves. Inasmuch as the circulation of 
the blood is one of the necessities of material existence, 
it must be apparent that the nerves connected with the 
bloodvessels, and thus regulating the flow of the blood, are 
of the utmost importance. The nerves of the sympathetic 
system performing this function are called the Vaso motor 
nerves. Their filaments and minute plexuses are especially 
associated with the arterial branches which they follow 
throughout their ramifications. The distribution of these 
fine nerve fibers are in the muscular coat of the blood- 
vessels. Under the influence of these fibers the muscular 
elements of the vessels contract, approximating the walls 
of the arteries, and diminishing their caliber. Hence, when 
the blood current in its ever changing stage as to quantity, 
becomes more or less, the walls of the vessels conform to 
its contents. It is in consequence of this, when these 
vaso motor nerves have become paralyzed from the 
injudicious indulgence in alcoholic beverages, that the 
nerves lose control over the bloodvessels, and the nutrient 
fluid is driven through the internal calorification to the 
surface, as is evidenced by a flushed face, bloodshot eyes, 
a muddled brain, and other symptoms of drunkenness. 
This diversion of blood from the internal organs, 
to those of the surface is conformable to the laws of equali- 
zation in temperature. 
We cannot refrain from giving here the summary in 
regard to the sympathetic system, as made by Prof. Austin 
Flint, Jr. He says: 
“According to the latest researches, the filaments of 
the sympathetic, at or near their termination, are con- 
nected with ganglionic cells, not only in the heart and the 
uterus, but in the bloodvessels, lymphatics, coccygeal 
gland, the sub-mucous and the muscular layer of the 
entire alimentary canal, the salivary glands, pancreas, the 
excretory ducts of the liver and pancreas, the larynx, 
trachea, pulmonary tissue, bladder, uterus, the entire gen- 168 
THE SYMPATHETIC NERVOUS SYSTEM. 
erative apparatus, supra renal capsules, thymus, lachyrmal 
canals, ciliary muscles and the iris. In these situations 
nerve cells have been demonstrated by various observers, 
and it is probable that they exist everywhere in con- 
nection with the terminal filaments of this system of 
nerves.” 
The reader should always bear in mind that through 
intimate connection of the cerebro spinal and sympathetic 
systems of nerves, every part of the human body is closely 
united and made one whole. Thus all voluntary acts 
emanating from the central axis are carried by the nerve 
fibers to the organs of locomotion or execution. The 
latter are regulated as to supply of nutriment, secretion, 
etc, by the sympathetic nerves, which are beyond the 
control of the will. 
The gray substance of the nerve mass, is the great 
dictator, and the fibers are the executors. When the latter 
fulfil their instructions, harmony in the wonderful chemico 
mechanical machine exists, everything runs smoothly, and 
life is enjoyment. But if the seat of sensibility is dormant 
from injury or disease, or the executors of the will are im- 
paired, disorganization takes place. Muscles refuse to 
act, respiration is difficult, the blood becomes sluggish, 
digestion impaired, and it is not long till the whole system 
collapses, as if the fire had died under a boiler, the 
machinery stops. Life becomes extinct, and the abode of 
the soul returns to the element from which it was taken. THE SENSES. 
169 
CHAPTER XII. 
THE SENSES. 
Human beings owe their superiority over animals to 
the possession of senses, by which they gain perception 
of external objects. 
Through the senses we receive and impart information 
and they act as channels for all conscious relation with 
our surroundings. The term “sensation” is defined by 
Webster as, “An impression, or the consciousness of an 
impression, made upon the central nervous organ, through 
the medium of sense.” A sensation can also be a purely 
spiritual or psychical affection; agreeable or disagreeable 
feelings occasioned by objects that are not corporeal or 
material. 
The senses are five in number, and each is devoted to 
a particular class of phenomena. 
1. The sense of touch. 
2. The sense of taste. 
3. The sense of smell. 
4. The sense of sight. 
5. The sense of hearing. 
The Sense of Touch is the faculty by which we 
perceive the consistency, surface, temperature and mass of 
objects surrounding us. It is produced by the contact of 
foreign bodies with the sensitive surface of the body. 
This sensibility exists throughout the general skin, and in 
the mucous membrane near the exterior parts of the body. 
The anatomy of the skin and its appendages has been TIIE SENSE OF TOUCH. 
170 
described heretofore, and in perusing this subject the 
reader is referred to engraving No. 7. 
Thus, when any of the external parts of the body come 
in contact with any material object, the sense of touch 
gives us information as to its solidity, shape or form, and 
indifferent or irritating qualities. 
The sense of touch is not equally developed over the 
surface of the body, but certain parts have a suitableness. 
Thus, in man, this sense is best developed in the hands, 
owing to the varied movements the fingers are capable of. 
Of the mucous membranes, which are highly organized to 
perceive touch, are those of the eyelids, the nostrils, inside 
of lips and cheeks, and the anterior two-thirds of the 
tongue. 
The sense of touch is capable of being educated, and is 
almost always extraordinarily developed in persons who 
are deprived of the sense of sight. The blind learn to 
recognize individuals by feeling the face. A remarkable in- 
stance of this 'is quoted in physiological works, of the 
blind sculptor, Giovanni Gonelli, who was said to model 
the most striking likeness entirely by the sense of touch. 
Other instances of this kind are on record. A great many 
blind people are known to have become very proficient in 
botany, simply guided by the sense of touch. It is per- 
haps unnecessary to draw attention to the fact that blind 
persons learn to read with perfect facility, by passing the 
fingers over raised letters, but little larger than the letters 
in an ordinary folio Bible. 
The accessory organs of the skin, especially the hair in 
theear, nose, around the mouth, are very sensitive to touch, 
especially so when it is of a titillating nature. 
Titillation is a sensation familiar with everybody, but 
cannot so easily be described. It is due to delicate im- 
pressions made in unusual situations, and is remarkable 
chiefly on account of the reflex movements which it oc- TIIE SENSE OF TASTE. 
171 
casions. As, for instance, if the soles of the feet be tickled, 
it is almost impossible to avoid movements of the limbs. 
The appreciation of temperature is generally most 
highly developed in parts where the nerves lie nearest the 
surface. 
Pain is produced by mechanical irritation, by excessive 
heat or cold. It only appears when the intensity of the 
impression thus made rises above a certain degree. Thus, 
if the point of a knife or needle is gently brought in con- 
tact with the skin, we perceive only its form and surface. 
If the pressure be increased to such an extent as to wound 
the skin, the perception of the physical properties of the 
knife or needle ceases, and we become conscious of the 
pain inflicted. 
The appreciation of cold and heat is only possible 
within certain limits, and when either is so excessive as to 
produce pain, all accurate conception of the degree of 
temperature is lost. 
The pain incident on coming in contact with a red hot 
piece of iron, or one at a temperature much below freezing 
point of water, is essentially one and the same, and the 
sensation thus produced is not marked by heat or cold, but 
only by the pain it causes. 
The capacity of feeling pain can be reduced or entirely 
abolished by use of anaesthetics, such as ether and chloro- 
form, and under their influence wounds may be dressed 
unaccompanied by any sense of pain. 
The Sense of Taste enables us to appreciate the 
savor of certain substances introduced into the mouth. It 
attains great perfection in epicures. It resides in the mucous 
membrane which invests the surface of the tongue. The 
structure of this membrane is analogous to that of the 
skin, and consists of two layers, the epidermic and dermic 
layers. The papillae or projections of the dermis, visible 
to the naked eye on the tongue, are also the seats of tactile 
and gustatory sensations. 172 
YIIE SENSE OF TASTE. 
The tongue is not the only organ of taste, for the 
whole surface of the mucous membrane lining the back 
of the mouth participates in this function. The sense of 
taste exists, in general terms, in parts supplied by filaments 
from the lingual branch of the fifth and ninth nerves. (See 
the remarks made on these nerves.) 
It is necessary in order that a body should have taste, 
or become sapid, that it be in a state of solution, or be 
reduced to this state by the saliva. 
Of the senses none perhaps is subject to so much vari- 
ation in different individuals, as taste. Some are depraved, 
and others are highly cultivated. These cultivations are 
all acquisitions, as it is well known that persons who live on 
ordinary food and drink have no cravings for the tooth- 
some articles and wines and liquors. Disease modifies it 
to a great extent, and food and drink which we partake of 
in state of health with the utmost relish produces a real 
abhorrence when we are sick. Patients often become 
accustomed to the most disagreeable remedies, and take 
them without repugnance. 
The fatty substances enjoyed by the Esquimaux with 
the greatest gusto find no favor with people in hot climes, 
and likewise the fruits of the tropical regions have no 
charms for the inhabitants of the frigid zones. 
True tastes are quite simple, presenting the qualities 
which are recognized as sweet, acid, saline and bitter. 
The more delicate shades of what are called flavors nearly 
always involve the sense of smell, which in some instances 
is difficult to separate entirely from that of taste. 
When the sense of taste becomes impaired through 
over-cultivation and the partaking of exclusive artistic 
dishes, there is only one remedy, and that is total 
abstinence. The practice of this for a limited period lends 
a delicious flavor to the most simple kind of food. 
In concluding our remarks on the sense of taste, we 
desire to draw once more attention to what a great extent TIIE SENSE OF SMELL. 
173 
taste is acquired, as is evidenced by the use of tobacco, 
so extensively used in civilized countries, without contrib- 
uting to the elevation of civilization. 
The Sense of Smell. Through the distinguishing 
character of the sense of smell we are enabled to per- 
ceive odorous flavors, and to detect odoriferous matters at 
a distance and when concealed from sight. The appre- 
ciation of the quality of gaseous and vaporous substances 
is also the property of the sense of smell, which is dis- 
tinctly localized and confined to the upper portion of the 
nasal passages, where the olfactory or first pair of cranial 
nerves spreads its filaments. The membrane in which 
these nerve fibers are ramified is called the olfactory 
membrane. 
The sense of smell is closely allied to that of taste, 
and specially so in the detection of the quality of food 
before it enters the mouth, and some wag for this reason 
has called the nose the “ Eye of the Stomach.” This is 
further proven when we smell a particularly favorable 
morsel, by the simultaneous action of the salivary glands 
in giving off the ever ready saliva, so needful to the per- 
ception of taste and the proper performance of digestion. 
The perfection of smell is not in direct relation to the 
development of the nasal appendages; it is not the largest 
nose which possesses the most acute smell, for this faculty 
depends specially on the extent of the nasal cavity. To 
the last mentioned peculiarity the dog and the hog are 
indebted for the acuteness of their smell. 
The nose becomes habituated to odors, whether they be 
agreeable or disagreeable. This is specially the case with 
odors emanating from within the body, such as fetid 
breath or the sour gases arising from the stomach. Per- 
sons become so used to these that they are not noticed by 
themselves. 
The laborer in a fertilizer factory or the tanner around 
his vats does not perceive the terrible stench arising there- 174 
THE SENSE OF SIGHT. 
from simply because the olfactory nerves of these people 
have become familiar with the odor. The mechanism of 
smell may be explained as follows : As the odoriferous 
vapors arrive in the upper part of the nasal passage, they 
are probably dissolved in the secretions of the olfactory 
membrane, and thus brought in contact with the nerve 
filaments. Inflammatory disorders interfere with the sense 
of smell, both by altering the secretions of the part and by 
causing- swellings of the mucous membrane and obstruction 
O c> 
of the nasal passage. 
The Sense of Sight. It is with justice that the 
organ of vision, the eye, is often called the mirror of the 
soul, for through it we give such wonderful expressions 
unexplainable in themselves, and also receive through this, 
the most remarkable of all senses, impressions and a 
variety and volume of information from external objects. 
Through the sense of sight we receive impressions of 
light, color and shade in all modifications of intensity and 
combination. Through it are also formed our principal 
ideas of shape, movement and space. 
The Eye receives the impressions of light, whether near 
or remote; it is even capable of discerning the twinkling 
light of the stars of heaven, notwithstanding their immeas- 
urable distance. 
When the immortal blind poet of England, John Mil- 
ton, sang : 
“O loss of sight, of thee I most complain,” 
he surely felt that sight affords the most continuous and 
indispensable aid for all the ordinary occupations of life. 
The Eyeball is contained in the cavity of the orbit. 
In its situation it is securely protected from injury, whilst 
its position is such as to insure the most extensive range 
of sight. It is acted upon by numerous muscles by which 
it is capable of being directed to any part, and is supplied 
by nerves and b'oodvessels. THE SENSE OF SIGHT. 
175 
Thus the apparatus of vision comprises the globe of 
the eye and the accessory organs which serve to protect 
and move it. 
Engraving No. 20. 
1. Cornea 
2. Sclerotic Coat. 
3. Choroid Coat. 
4. Iris. 
5. I'upil. 
6. Aqueous Humor. 
Horizontal Section through Eyeball. (Magnified.) 
7. Retinal Cavity filled with Vitreous 
Humor. 
8. Crystalline Lens. 
9. Retina. 
10. Optic Nerve. 
11. Hyaloid Membrane. 
By studying the engraving which is a horizontal sec- 
tion through the eyeball, it will be seen that the globe of 
the eye is a spherical mass composed of several superposed 
coverings and of solid and fluid refracting media called 
lens and humors. 
The most external is the sclerotic coat or white of the 
eye, receiving its name from its extreme density and hard- 
ness. The word is of Greek origin, and means “hard.” 
The cavity formed by the sclerotic coat is filled with 
fluid and gelatinous material, and on its anterior is pro- 176 
TIIE SENSE OF SIGHT. 
videcl with a transparent portion, the cornea. Posteriorly 
•the eyeball is lined with the filaments of the optic nerve, 
forming upon its inside a nervous expansion called the 
retina. The latter is extremely sensitive to light and 
receives the luminous rays admitted through the cornea. 
The cavity of the eyeball can therefore be justly compared 
to a room with but one window in front where all the 
light enters and strikes the back wall of the apartment. 
The engraving also shows that in addition to the pre- 
viously mentioned parts the eye has a transparent refrac- 
ting apparatus with convex surfaces—this is the crystalline 
lens. The lens concentrates the light at the retina. 
In front of the lens is an arrangement called the iris, 
which regulates the amount of light which shall enter 
the cavity of the retina through its central orifice, the 
pupil. The choroid coat of the eye forms the inner 
lining of the sclerotic and the posterior surface of the 
iris, thus preventing the reflection of the rays of light 
and absorbing it when it once has passed through the 
retina. 
The wonderful invention of photography received its 
first inception from the construction of the eyeball and a 
photographic camera can be favorably compared with the 
organ of vision. The plate sensitized through nitrate of 
silver and other chemical substances forms the retina, and 
receives in a chemico-mechanical way the impression of 
the object in front of it, while the optical glasses of the 
tube perform the offices of the cornea and crystalline lens 
of the eyeball. The blackened inner surface of the pho- 
tographer’s instrument is similar to the choroid coat of the 
eye. 
The cornea derives its name from its horny consistency 
and appearance, and forms the anterior part of the walls of 
the eye. It is a continuation of the sclerotic coat, differ- 
ing in its physical appearance in so much that the cornea 
is colorless and transparent to such an extent that the iris THE SENSE OF SIGHT. 
177 
and pupil are visible through its substance, while the 
sclerotic coat is white and opaque. The cornea is thicker 
at its edges than at the center, the two measurements 
being A and 2V of an inch respectively. 
The choroid coat is a highly vascular and pigmentary 
membrane of a dark color and lines the inner surface of 
the sclerotic; anteriorly it becomes thicker, forming the 
so-called ciliary process which holds the lens in place 
with the aid of the suspensory ligaments. 
The Iris is of different colors in different persons and 
extends across the cavity of the eyeball. It is also at- 
tached to the anterior portion of the choroid. The Iris 
is composed of circular fibers situated near the margin 
of the pupil, which when contracted diminish the orifice 
of the pupil, and when relaxation ensues cause the en- 
largement of the orifice. Interwoven with the circular 
are radiated fibers which form the muscular element of 
the iris, and through which the ciliary nerves act upon it. 
The word “ iris ” means “ rainbow,” and it is with 
truthfulness that this appellation has been made for the 
color is about as varied as that of the welcome vision to 
Noah. 
We have all sorts of eyes in the human family, blue, 
gray, brown and black as a rule, and red in the Albino. 
All these colors depend on the abundance and disposition 
of its pigmentary elements. 
Thus in the people in high latitudes bordering the Arc- 
tic and Antarctic regions where darkness is of greater 
duration than light, we find blue eyes predominating and 
the pigment forming this color, is the proper one in the 
wisdom of the Creator. In the equatorial and adjacent 
regions, north and south thereof, where the rays of the 
sun are strongest, the people have black or dark brown 
eyes, while in the temperate zones the inhabitants have 
a happy medium between the two extremities of color. 
Aqueous and Vitreotts Humors. The eyeball is 178 
THE SENSE OF SIGHT. 
divided into two chambers, an anterior and posterior, the 
iris forming the partition wall. I he anterior apartment 
is filled with a watery transparent fluid called the aqueous 
humor. This fluid serves to maintain the internal tension 
of the eyeball and to allow of changes in the iris and crys- 
taline lens, without effecting external configuration of the 
cornea. The posterior chamber is the larger of the cavity 
of the eyeball. It is filled by a semi-gelatinous substance, 
the vitreous humor, so called from its transparent and 
glassy appearance. Its refractive power is about equal 
to that of water. It distends the greater part of the 
sclerotic, supports posteriorly the retina and anteriorly 
the lens. It also preserves the spheroidal form of the 
eyeball. 
Crystalline Lens. The lens is a transparent, refractive 
body with convex surfaces, front and behind. It is placed 
directly in front of the pupil. It is held in proper balance 
in front by the aqueous humor, and in rear by the vit- 
reous body, and by the processes of the choroid coat, 
above and below. The lens is the strongest refracting 
body in the eyeball, and by it the rays of light are 
brought to a focus upon the retina. 
Retina. This membrane is endowed with the special 
sense of sight, the other structures being accessory, hence 
it may be considered the most essential part of the eye. 
It forms a nearly transparent membrane, composed of 
numerous layers of rods and cones. It is situated between 
the inner surface of the choroid and the outer surface of 
the vitreous humor. The optic. nerve or second pair, of 
which the nervous substance of the retina is a continuation, 
penetrates the eyeball a little internal to and below the 
antero-posterior axis. 
The optic nerve and its fibers are insensible to light, 
notwithstanding the fact that this nerve is capable of trans- 
mitting impressions of light made upon the retina, from it 
to the brain. Hence, the region as above described, where THE SENSE OF SIGHT. 
179 
the optic nerve makes its entrance into the cavity of 
the eyeball, owing to the absence of the retinal substance 
upon its surface, is insensible to the luminous rays, and for 
this reason is called the blind spot. 
The yellow spot of the retina is the point of distinct 
vision, where the image of an object in the direct line of 
light falls upon the retina. It is oval in shape, one-eighth 
of an inch at its longest, and one thirty-sixth of an inch at 
its shortest diameter. This spot is distinguished from the 
remainder of the retina by its yellow color. At the center 
of it is a minute depression, called the fossa centralis. 
Here the retina is reduced to about one-half. The fossa 
centralis is the most sensitive spot on the retina. 
Muscles which Move the Eye. Each eyeball is supplied 
with six distinct muscles ; the names are the (i) external; 
(2) internal; (3) superior; (4) inferior recti; (5) superior 
oblique; (6) inferior oblique muscles. The four first 
named move the eye up and down, right and left, and the 
two oblique muscles hold it in proper balance. 
The orbit, or socket for the eyeballs is formed by the 
union of the bones of the face, lined with a fatty tissue, 
forming the nest of the eyeball. 
The eyelids, upper and lower, enable the eye to shut 
off the rays of light. 
The eyelashes protect the eye from dust and dirt. 
The eyebrows serve to shade the eye from excessive 
light, and protect the lids from perspiration from the 
forehead. 
Situated in the upper and lower eyelids are found the 
Meibomian glands, which secrete an oily fluid, smearing 
the edges of the eyelids and preventing the overflow of 
tears. 
To the right and left respectively of each eyeball, and 
embedded within the cavity of the orbit, are the tear or 
lachrymal glands, which secrete from the blood a thin, 
watery fluid, which bathes constantly the eyeballs. The 180 
THE SENSE OF HEARING. 
fluid is spread over the globe by the movement of the lids 
and eyeballs. The excess of tears under ordinary circum- 
stances is conducted through the tear canal, into the nasal 
passage 
1 he secretion of the lachrymal fluid or tears is readily 
influenced through the nervous system, and when thus 
affected, either through joy, emotion, laughing, coughing, 
sneezing, smelling certain substances, an overflow takes 
place, and the tears run over the cheeks. 
The Sense of Hearing. This sense transforms 
impressions of sound into sensations, and appreciates their 
intensity and their higher or lower notes. 
Sound is produced by speech, reeds, strings, wind 
instruments, awl by concussions of solid, liquid or aerial 
bodies. The impressions thus made upon the ear, the 
organ of hearing, depend on the vibrations excited in the 
atmosphere. 
A simple and very common illustration of this fact is 
afforded by the experiment of striking a bell carefully 
arranged in vacuo. While the stroke and vibrations can 
readily be seen, there is no sound, and if air is gradually 
introduced, sound becomes appreciable. 
Vibrating bodies can be made to per orm and impart 
to the atmosphere oscillations of greater or less amplitude. 
The intensity of sound is in proportion to the amplitude 
of vibrations. If a tuning fork is made to vibrate, the 
sound is at first loud, but the amplitude gradual y dimin- 
ishes, and the sound dies away till it is lost. 
Intensity of sound is diminished by distance, as the 
amplitude of the waves and the velocity of the vibrating 
particles become weaker, the farther we are removed from 
the sound producing the body. 
Sound travels at an enormous rate of speed. The 
intensity of it is, however, immaterial, as the v hisper of 
a human be ngf and the roaring of a cannon will travel at 
an even rate, and differing only in its amplitude or last- THE EAR. 
181 
ing qualities. The velocity of the sound depends entirely 
upon the elasticity of the conducting medium. Thus 
atmospheric air at 32°F. will conduct sound waves at 
the rate of 1,090 feet per second, and water at the tem- 
perature of 6o°F. expedites sound waves 4,708 feet per 
second. Iron or steel wire, and wood running with the 
fibers conduct sound waves nearly four times as rapidly 
as water. Thus it becomes apparent that a minimum 
sound can be transmitted in water or through the mate- 
rials mentioned, a far greater distance than air. The 
cause of this is that the sound wave is not held to- 
gether in air, and loses in volume as it travels along, 
falling short before reaching its objective points. 
The use of metal wires in conducting sound waves, 
with the aid of electric or galvanic current as exemplified 
in the useful, but oftentimes annoying telephone, is too 
well known to the intelligent reader, and it would also be 
out of place in this work to recapitulate the physical laws 
governing this wonderful instrument. 
Sound may be deadened by soft and non-vibrating 
surfaces so well explained by the use of carpets, hang- 
ings, etc., etc. Sound waves may also be collected to 
a focus which explains echoes and the conduction of 
sound through speaking tubes, ear trumpets, etc. These 
are of course artificial apparatus, and we cannot see any 
good reason why they should be used as an illustration 
of the condensation and conduction of sound waves when 
we have on the human body an apparatus par excellence 
for this purpose. 
Idle ear is the organ of hearing, of which the en- 
graving below gives an accurate illustration, which, to- 
gether with its anatomical description, will explain how 
vibrations, may they be produced by whatsoever means, 
are collected by the outer portion of the ear, and con- 
ducted to the seat of the sense of hearing. ddiere 182 
THE EAR. 
these sonorous vibrations are first analyzed, and then 
comprehended. 
It is thus that in conjunction with our other senses 
we commune with our surroundings. 
Engraving No. 21. 
The Ear. 
1. Pinna. 
2. Cavity of Concha. 
3. Auditory Canal. 
4. Angular Projection. 
5. Opening Ear Wax Glands. 
6. Tympanic Membrane. 
7- Incus. 
8. Malleus. 
9. Handle of same. 
10. Tensor Tympanic Muscle. 
11. Tympanic Cavity. 
12. Eustachian Tube. 
13. Superior Semi-circular Canal. 
14. Posterior Semi circular Canal. 
15. External Semi-circular Canal. 
16. Cochlea. 
17. Internal Auditory Canal. 
18. Facial Nerve. 
19. Petrosal Nerve. 
20. Auditory Nerve (vestibular branch). 
2i, Auditory Nerve (cochlear branch). 
The Ear. For convenience of anatomical description, 
this complex apparatus of audition is usually divided into 
three parts. In order to correctly appreciate its physi- 
ology, a brief delineation of the anatomical components 
is necessary. 
1. The External Ear. Reader, look at one in THE EAR. 
183 
nature. Your own conception is better than the minutest 
description. 
That portion which projects from the head is called 
the pinna or auricle. By it the sound waves are gath- 
ered. The outer border of the pinna is called the helix. 
The deep fossa immediately surrounding the auditory 
canal or meatus is called the concha. The small lobe pro- 
jecting and covering the anterior surface of the concha 
is the tragus. The fleshy lower portion is the lobule of 
the ear. 
The muscles of the external ear, while well developed 
and in abundance, cannot be said to be under the control 
of the will, as is the case in some of the lower animals, 
who move with such facility their external ears, to better 
catch the sonorous vibrations. 
1 he Auditory Canal or meatus externus, conducting 
the waves of sound as gathered by the pinna toward the 
internal ear, extends from the concha to the tympanic 
membrane or ear drum, and measures in its tortuous line 
about one and one-quarter inch in length. At its begin- 
ning long, stiff hairs are found, and farther in are the 
ceruminous glands which secrete the ear wax. This wax 
is apparently intended to protect the ear from invasion of, 
and lodging therein, of insects to the majority of which 
ear wax is a deadly poison. 
The office of the external ear as above described is 
solely the collection of sound waves and the conduction 
of same to the ear drum. 
2. The Middle Ear presents a narrow cavity of 
irregular shape between the external ear and the labyrinth, 
and is situated in the substance of the petrous portion 
of the temporal bone. The outer wall of this cavity is 
formed by that important organ called the tympanic mem- 
brane or ear drum. It sets obliquely and at an incline 
of 45 degrees against the auditory canal. In its natural 
position the membrane is drawn inward by its attachment 184 
THE EAR. 
to the malleus in such a way as to present a funnel- 
shaped depression. The roof of the tympanic cavity is 
formed by an exceedingly thin plate of bone. The lloor 
is of like material, but much narrower. Situated within 
this chamber is the “Chain of Bones,” which consist of 
three ossicles, joined to each other by their extremities, 
and form a zigzag line of jointed levers across the cavity 
of the tympanum. These little ossicles receive their 
names from their shape, and are known as malleus, or 
hammer, incus or anvil, and stapes or stirrup. The 
handle of the malleus is adherent to the ear drum, while 
the head of it lies comparatively free within the cavity, 
but held in place by small ligaments which at the other 
extremity are attached to the bony walls. 
The cavity of the tympanum communicates with the 
pharynx through the Eustachian tube. The existence of 
this tube secures an atmospheric pressure, in connection 
with the meatus, on both sides of the tympanum, a con- 
dition necessary for a free vibration under impulses of 
waves of sound. 
From actual observation, and from unquestionable 
testimony in the possession of the reader, it must be 
apparent that the tympanic membrane or ear drum is of 
much importance in audition. Then we all know, that 
when this membrane becomes diseased, perforated, 
destroyed or obstructed through an accumulation of ear 
wax or other substances, the acuteness of hearing becomes 
considerably affected. This is due to the impaired con- 
dition of the vibrating surface for the reception of waves 
of sound, which is the main function of the ear drum. 
The tympanic membrane obeys the laws of consonance 
and vibrates strongly by the influence of sounds in unison 
or in harmony with the fundamental tone. 
The chain of bones or ossicles of the middle ear, in con- 
nection with the muscles therein, have a double office. 
One is that the ear drum may be brought to different TIIE EAR. 
185 
degrees of tension, and the other that the bones of hear- 
ing conduct sounds to the labyrinth. 
3. The Internal Ear, oftener however, called the 
labyrinth, on account of its complicated cavities, is situated 
in the petrous portion of the temporal bone. As shown 
in the engraving it consists of the vestibule, three semi- 
circular canals and the cochlea. 
The vestibule is the central apartment of the labyrinth, 
which communicates through the oval window with the 
tympanic cavity. When in action this aperture is closed 
by the base of the stirrup bone. 
The semi-circular canals are as shown on en^ravin^r 
o o 
No. 21, while the cochlea is that snail shaped spiral 
canal, in nature about 1 1-2 inch long and about T1o of an 
inch in diameter at its commencement, and gradually 
tapering to the point, making in its course a little over 
two and a half turns. 
The interior of the labyrinth is filled with a certain 
quantity of clear watery fluid. That part which is con- 
tained in the vestibule is called endolymph and that in the 
canals and cochlea perilymyh. The purpose of this fluid 
of the internal ear, is to hold in position the delicate 
structures contained therein, and also to conduct the so- 
norous vibrations to the terminal filaments of the auditory 
nerves. 
The Auditory Nerve enters the labyrinth and divides 
into two branches, one for the vestibule and the other for 
the canals and cochlea. 
The distribution of the nerve fibers in the cochlea is of 
the greatest interest; they lie embedded within the minute 
bodies of Corti. They receive the sonorous vibrations 
as they pass along in the liquid, and conduct them to the 
auditory nerve, from whence the sound is transmitted to 
the brain, the origin of the auditory nerve and seat of the 
sense of hearing. 
In summarizing the mechanism of audition, we only 186 
THE EAR. 
desire to briefly recapitulate the functions of the different 
parts of the ear. 
The waves of sound are collected by the outer ap- 
pendages, constituting the external ear, and are conducted 
through the auditory canal to the ear drum. The last 
mentioned organ receives the waves of sound and is 
thrown into vibrations. The tympanic membrane, by in- 
creasing its tension, as previously explained, regulates the 
intensity of sound. While the tympanum is drawn taut 
through the muscles of the middle ear, the chain of bones 
is also made more firm as to its articulation and the inner- 
most of the bones, the stapes, pressed against the liquid of 
the labyrinth. By this continuous bony conductor, the 
sonorous vibrations are brought to the labyrinth, with very 
little loss of intensity. 
The vibrations repeated and somewhat modified by 
the tympanic membrane, are conveyed by the chain of 
bones to the liquid of the labyrinth and by this fluid to 
the terminal nerve filaments of the auditory nerve. 
Sound may also be conducted to the terminal nerve 
fibers, through the bones of the head or teeth, as is shown 
by the simple experiment of placing a tuning fork in 
vibration, in contact with the head or between the teeth. 
The dentaphone, so extensively used by people partially 
deaf from injury to the ear drum, is based upon this 
principle. 
While injury or rupture of the ear drum does not con- 
stitute positive deafness, it diminishes the power of 
hearing. Complete deafness can only be caused by 
paralysis or inactivity of the filaments of the auditory 
nerve itself. HYGIENIC TOPICS. 
187 
CHAPTER XIII. 
HYGIENIC TOPICS. 
HOUSES. 
No family has a right to expect to be in full health unless it has 
been ascertained that the dwelling occupied by it, is, in the strict 
sense of the word, one in which well known rules of sanitation have 
been followed in the selection of the ground, mode of erection, 
dividing its interior, its plumbing, ventilation and general man- 
agement. 
When building or renting a house, see to it that your future 
abode is not on low, damp ground, or which has been lately fdled 
up. Houses built on soil saturated with putrid moisture, or the 
residue of cesspools, are notoriously unhealthy. This is espec- 
ially the case during the summer months, when the ground emits 
deleterious effluvia and poisons the air you inhale, while in the 
house. 
If possible, the building you occupy should be free at least on 
two sides, so that the sun has a chance to throw its invigorating rays 
upon it. Do not fear to open the windows when the great illumin- 
ator is around, and do not dread that your carpet or upholstery will 
be off a shade or two from the prevailing color. Faded carpets and 
furniture are preferable to faded health. 
Crowded tenements and sky-scraping apartment houses, for the 
poor and fashionable respectively, are breeding grounds of disease. 
Avoid them. Windows and doors opening upon a court or narrow 
alley are of not much value, for the reason that the air entering 
from those places is usually more or less contaminated, and has not 
undergone the rejuvenating process, as has air in open streets and 
roadways, where the free current and wind effect a continual change. 
The interior of a dwelling should be so arranged that air under 
all circumstances, and sunlight, if possible, can penetrate into every 
niche and corner, so that when you open front and rear doors or windows a new current of air can sweep through it and fill the house 
with “oxygen,” the quintessence of life. 
The plumbing in a building should be the best, or none at all. 
Every cent saved on plumbing will cost a thousand fold in doctors’ 
and druggists’ bills. See to it, if you have water closets in the 
house, that the traps are in good order; that the sewage leaving the 
building passes through traps, and that sewer gas arising from the 
street conduits are led by separate pipes beyond the roof. Sewer 
gas entering buildings through soil pipes is dangerous to life. 
Ventilate your rooms daily, winter and summer, and especially 
those which are used for sleeping apartments. During night allow 
part of one or two windows to be open without causing a draught, 
so that the air is changed at all times. By doing this you will be 
rewarded upon awakening with a clear head and an invigorated body 
and mind. If you sleep in a closed room where air is debarred you 
will perceive a dullness in the morning which likens to the awak- 
ening from a debauch. 
The ceilings of the heavens are high, surely for a purpose; hence 
follow the example set when erecting a dwelling. 
If cellars are not ventilated they become storehouses for foul air, 
and transfer the same to the living apartments. 
Keep your yards clean, and pay especial attention that your back 
alley is not made a general dumping ground for all the garbage of 
the neighborhood. Do some kicking, so that the scavenger knows 
you are after him. If you live in a place where such matters are not 
attended to by the authorities, have it done or remove the accumu- 
lations of dirt and filth yourself. 
188 
water closets and outhouses. 
WATER CLOSETS AND OUTHOUSES. 
The existence of these receptacles for the deposit of the excre- 
ments of the body is a necessity, but to have them in the building, and 
perhaps ext to the sleeping apartment, is only one of the so-called 
modern improvements, contributing to comfort, health and disease. 
The comfort is too evident and need not be spoken about. As a 
contributor to health, persons using them are not usually subjected 
to draughts, to the exposed parts, as is the case when open vaults 
are used. Thus, among other diseases, sciatic rheumatism is often 
prevented. 
If indoor water closets are however not properly kept so that the 
excrement is instantly carried off and the hopper thoroughly flushed 
or allowed to emit odor, they become hotbeds for the propagation 
of numerous diseases. Dysentery, cholera and other abdominal 
troubles can be traced to filthy and falsely constructed water closets. DISINFECTION. 
189 
Outhouses with open vaults should be emptied at least four times 
a year; these vaults should be constructed of masonry and thoroughly 
cemented so that seepage will not contaminate adjacent wells. 
This is especially necessary in sandy or gravelly ground. 
Outhouses connected direct with sewers are as bad as the “ valley 
of death.” Persons using them inhale not only the effluvia of their 
own excrement, but also the poisonous gases of the sewer. 
The best form of privies where there is no system of waterworks, 
are the “ earth closets” in which the receptacle for the faecal matter 
is portable and can be removed and emptied at places where it is 
beyond harm. Whenever the closet is used the deposit should be 
covered by a small shovel full of road dust or ashes. This will 
deaden all smell. 
In many places where sanitary laws are a mere ornament on the 
statute book, it can be observed how much is often done by the occu- 
pants of a dwelling to render its immediate vicinity unhealthy and a 
breeding ground for disease. Many good housewives, often unin- 
tentionally or through ignorance, throw the slops and accumulations 
of night vessels simply into the back yard. There it accumulates, 
and remains from year to year The organ of smell becomes used 
to it, and the stench is not noticed much. The ensuing putrefaction 
develops vapors which cause disease. 
DISINFECTION. 
In houses of all descriptions and used for all purposes, odors and 
vapors are formed, which if continually inhaled, are injurious to 
health. These vapors and odors hold in suspense bacteria or par- 
ticles, which constitute the seed of numerous diseases. To destroy 
or eliminate these bacteria is the office of disinfection. 
Ventilation, sunlight and the combustion of fuel in open fire- 
places aid greatly, but not sufficiently, in the purification of the air 
and we must be suspicious and resort to further means, to be sure 
that the atmosphere is entirely uncontaminated. Hence the use of 
artificial media, for disinfection is necessary. 
To enumerate all the articles used for disinfectants would fill a 
very large book, in fact one of greater volume, than the good old 
fashioned “family Bible.” 
Exhaled air charged with carbonic acid is best removed by sim- 
ple ventilation. 
Dry air, such as is created in rooms by hot air furnaces, steam 
coils, etc., should be moistened by evaporating water within the 
room. 190 
DISINFECTION. 
Sewer gas, entering rooms through soil pipes, or through defect- 
ive plumbing is best got rid of by opening all windows. 
To purify the air when charged with illuminating gas, or coal 
gas from stoves, open the windows. 
For sewers, outhouses, barns, open drains, kitchen sinks, vaults, 
etc., throw in sufficient copperas (first dissolved) to abate the odor. 
Open vaults can well be regulated by covering the excrements 
with road dust or ashes. 
In sick chambers,especially if just vacated by patients having been 
confined therein with contagious diseases, the burning of roll sul- 
phur is an effective disinfectant. 
Care should be taken how sulphur is used, but if handled in the 
following manner, it is entirely void of danger: 
Place in the room to be disinfected, as near as possible in its cen- 
ter, a few bricks or stones, and on these an old iron pan or tin plate. 
Close all windows and doors tight, ignite the sulphur at one end of 
the stick, place it hurriedly on the receptacle as above described and 
leave the room at once, taking care not to inhale any of the sul- 
phuric fumes. Close the door behind you and allow the fumes to 
penetrate into every part of the room. For this purpose the room 
should be kept closed for at least one or two hours. After that open 
all windows and doors, so that the vapors can escape, and fresh air 
enter. Rest assured that all microbes and germs of disease are 
thoroughly destroyed after this procedure. 
When the sick chamber cannot be thoroughly ventilated and dis- 
infectants have to be resorted to, the numerous chlorides on the 
market can safely be used with good effect. Directions usually ac- 
company these preparations, but one of the best modes to use them, 
is to saturate a cloth in the fluid and to suspend it in the sick room. 
Chamber vessels and bed urinals should always be cleaned with 
water and common washing soda. If sediments have already formed, 
leave hot water with soda in them for awhile, which will dissolve 
and remove the matter. Bedclothes should be thoroughly aired 
and sunned every day. 
The value of carbolic acid as a disinfectant is very much over- 
estimated. It does not destroy odor, but only overpowers it, by 
its own. It has not any destructive powers in its own vapors for 
bacteria when used as a disinfectant. When properly used as a 
remedial agent, its virtues are par excellence. Numerous domestic 
devices are used to disinfect rooms and vessels, such as burning a 
rag or exhibiting the smoke from roasting coffee. By resorting to 
these means you will attain your object, but it is like going from WATER. 
191 
St. Louis to New York via San Francisco. Think for a moment 
when you perceive a bad odor in your room, and you try to quell it 
by burning a rag or some paper, or put some vinegar on a hot shovel, 
surely it will cause as bad, if not a worse smell, than the original 
one. To rid the room of the smoke or vapor of the vinegar respect- 
ively, you will open the windows, secure a new supply of fresh air 
and give the credit for the improved atmosphere to the “ disinfect- 
ant” you employed, and not to the air, where it properly belongs. 
Any minor matter or effluvia, if not the result of contagious dis- 
ease, is best disinfected by means of fresh air and sunlight. 
WATER. 
Pure water consists of Hydrogen and Oxygen (H20) and is 
a colorless, odorless, tasteless, transparent liquid. It is the 
most important solvent in existence. It is in fact an essential 
ingredient in the tissues of all animals and plants; in the 
human body about two-thirds of its weight is water; (70 per cent, 
is perhaps the closest calculation.) It is abundant in the blood and 
secretions to give them fluidity and to enable them to perform their 
functions. It is, as you have learned in preceding pages, that 
through the blood, new substances are introduced into the body and 
old, worn out ingredients discharged. Water is therefore necessary 
for the introduction of solid substances, for the reason that they 
must be liquified before assimilation can take place. The import- 
ance of water in its character as an essential part of the animal 
fluids is therefore evident, especially so, when it is remembered that 
it holds in solution the nutrient substances, which are thereby 
enabled to pass and repass throughout the entire human system. 
The water which thus forms a part of the human body, is derived 
mainly from the outside. It is taken in the form of drink, and is 
also in abundance in the various foods. No article is taken in an 
absolutely dry state; all contain some quantity of water. 
The proper quantity necessary for proper existence,during twenty- 
four hours, in a healthy adult man is about five pints. 
Water after forming part of the animal solids and fluids and tak- 
ing its share in the vital processes is discharged again from the 
body. It makes its exit in various ways, carrying with it and hold- 
ing in solution various substances, of which the body must be re- 
lieved. 
Thus the body discharges by way of the lungs twenty per cent, 
of the amount taken during twenty-four hours. The water leaving 
the body through the lungs is in the form of vapor, carries with it 192 
WATER. 
carbonic acid and other substances which the blood must be re- 
lieved of. Thirty per cent, is carried off by perspiration. The 
balance of fifty per cent, is discharged from the body in the form 
of urine and faeces. In the former, the body is relieved of many 
organic principles which if allowed to accumulate, would cause 
disease. The water discharged with the faeces, acts mainly as a 
lubricant of the semi-solid excrementitious matter. 
An article having such important functions to perform, should 
therefore be selected with the utmost care, before it is decided that 
it is used as an article of drink. 
On the purity of water, the health of animal life is more or less 
dependent, which is especially the case with man. 
In cities where public waterworks have been established, care is 
always taken to select a source of supply which is as pure as it 
can be had, and in quantities to meet all demands. Should, how- 
ever, the least suspicion arise that the water so furnished is contam- 
inated, or holds organic matter in solution or suspense, care should 
bs taken to filter the water through sand or filtering stones, or to at 
least boil it before it is used as the natural beverage. Impure water 
is easily detected by observing whether it possesses the cardinal prin- 
ciples mentioned at the beginning of this paragraph. 
Clear, pure water, free from every substance foreign to it, is not 
found in nature, and can only be gained by distillation. Next to it 
comes rain water, so much used in certain localities. Its apparent 
taste is flat and insipid, owing to the absence therefrom of salts and 
carbonic acid. 
Water containing more than four per cent, of salts in solution is 
already classed among medical agents. 
Hard water is rich in salts; soft water has little or none of these 
ingredients. 
Rain water is pure and healthful, but not to the taste of the ma- 
jority. If it stands in cisterns it is liable to be contaminated from 
neighboring sinks or vaults. 
Spring water is the best, usually of the proper temperature, 
especially when it oozes from sandy or rocky ground. 
Well water is often a wolf in sheep’s clothing, having been con- 
taminated by seepage from cesspools, sinks, privy vaults or manure 
piles. Look out for it, it may be cool, clear and not objectionable 
to the taste. When you have to use well water continuously, it will 
pay in the long run to have a chemical analysis made, to ascertain 
whether it contains substances detrimental to health. If you are WATER. 
193 
the least suspicious as to its character, boil it at all events before 
using it. 
River water is often a good article, and perhaps the next best 
after spring and lake water. If it is known, however, that it receives 
the sewerage of neighboring cities and villages, above from where 
you draw your supply, it is liable to be bad. It had better be boiled 
before using it. 
Water from ponds invariably needs filtering; boiling will hardly 
put it in a fit condition for use. 
Ice Water. When this peculiar American drink is taken into the 
stomach, it has to be stored there for such time until it assumes the 
temperature of the body, at the expense of the rest of the tissues, 
before it can be absorbed and taken up by the blood. It is erroneous 
to think that it slackens thirst, for its chilling effect upon the mucous 
membranes which it passes in its descent to the stomach, and also 
therein, creates a submucous inflammation, which causes further 
demand for cooling drink. You can experiment on yourself, by 
taking a drink of iced water, and in a very short space of time you 
will have a burning desire for another dose. If taken in connection 
with meals, it hinders digestion by chilling the coats of the stomach, 
and interfering with the production of gastric juices. 
Dyspepsia, so prevalent in this country, is in many instances 
traceable to the free indulgence in iced water. 
The less you take of it, the better you will feel. 194 
BEAUTY PHYSICAL TRAINING 
CHAPTER XIV. 
MISCELLANEOUS TOPICS. 
BEAUTY. 
Wordsworth says: “Beauty is the production of a multiplicity 
of symmetrical parts, uniting in a consistent whole.” 
There is no better personification of beauty than can be found in 
the “human form divine,” in its complexity of color, form, sym- 
metry, parts and last but not least, the mind. 
The human model is used by both painters and sculptors, in their 
greater efforts, and many have been immortalized by portraying the 
natural beauty of body and mind, of men and women. 
The ancient Greeks and Romans deified beauty and produced 
images of the human form, both male and female, which to this day 
are preserved in European galleries, and are'considered as repro- 
ductions upon canvas and in stone, of the perfect human form. The 
statues of the Apollo Belvidere and the Venus de Medici are 
standards of beauty in their respective spheres. 
Beauty attracts, homeliness detracts. The former brings ado- 
ration, while the latter lays dormant the passions. Beauty of mind 
and of body do not always go hand in hand, and each has its special 
attraction, while combined they contribute to the limits of happiness. 
Many, however, reach this apex by a congeniality of mind only. 
Beauty is easily developed by physical and moral training. 
A work of this kind should not meddle with matters beyond its 
scope, and for this reason we refrain from speaking on the develop- 
ment of the mind through moral training. 
To attain symmetry and bodily development, exercise, in its 
multitude of ways, must be resorted to. 
Walking. Everybody who can do so should accustom himself 
or herself to practice it. Walking in the open air is of course 
preferable. It increases respiration, circulation, secretion, and 
PHYSICAL TRAINING. WASHING AND BATHING. 
195 
fosters, in consequence, the replacement of decaying tissue with 
new element. In taking this healthful exercise, one should walk 
in the full sense of the word, not dawdle along in a sauntering 
manner. Deep inspirations of air should be taken, chest well 
brought out, head carried erect. In order to occupy the mind 
during a walk, the eyes should be used in taking within the range of 
vision such objects as may be of interest. The staring upon the 
ground breeds melancholia. A good square walk, combined with a 
communion with nature, is a restorative to body and mind. It 
develops the muscles of the lower extremities, and of respiration, 
and imparts a healthy glow to the face. 
Horseback Riding. For those who can afford it, a better exer- 
cise cannot be recommended, as every muscle in the body is brought 
into action, especially when the horse is made to trot. 
Gymnastics of all kinds contribute to beauty and health. Care 
should be taken that the practice with dumb bells, Indian clubs, 
rowing, parallel or horizontal bars is not carried to excess. The 
object of all athletic exercise is to make the muscles and cords 
pliable and elastic, but not to tire them. 
Swimming is not only a healthful exercise, but also an accom- 
plishment, when once acquired, and of much utility. No child, boy 
or girl, should grow up without learning to swim. 
Many good people imagine that there is no need of physical 
training by means of gymnastic exercises, because they are new ideas 
to them and w’ere not in vogue in their youth. Such non-progressive 
people should remember that the avocations of life in their days were 
not made so easy by aid of the many labor saving machines as they 
are now, when steam created by fuel and water does the hard work, 
and brain power guides it. That healthful exercise, combined with 
usefulness in the manipulations of a buck and saw, seems to be one 
of the lost arts. 
A due appreciation of the importance of physical exercise and its 
bearing on the development of the body should be instilled in 
every one. The good results from it can best be judged by glancing 
at those who participate in the many legitimate sports. 
This well meant advice is not only for the young men, but also 
for the girls, than nothing will aid them better in their destiny— 
mothers of homes—than a well developed body. 
It is instinctive with the majority of people to take a good wash 
or bath, and there is perhaps nothing which contributes so much to 
health as cleanliness. 
WASHING AND BATHING. 196 
AMUSEMENT OCCUPATION. 
Washing or bathing the body is as necessary to its existence as 
food and drink. If the skin is allowed to become filthy, its proper 
action as an organ of excretion is interfered with. 
AMUSEMENT'. 
Amusement is recreative if legitimate; hence the theater, when in 
it, one of the grand old plays is given, or a mirth provoking, clean 
and moral comedy is performed, should not be considered as a soul- 
destroying medium. A good hearty laugh, or the shedding of tears, 
in comedy and drama respectively, have often forestalled diseases of 
the mind, and led the channel of thought in directions beneficial to 
the body. Good music either at home, at the church, concert 
halls or under the great heavenly tent contributes much to recreation 
and charms the mind; the oftener you hear or participate in it, the 
better you will be satisfied with yourself and surroundings. 
“ The man that hath no music in himself, 
Nor is not moved with concord of sweet sounds 
Is fit for treason, stratagems and spoils.” 
—Sha kespeare. 
OCCUPATION. 
In choosing the avocations of life, the main participant should 
always be consulted as to his or her predilection. Many a young 
man or woman would have contributed much to their own welfare 
and that of others had they not been interfered with in the selection 
of an occupation. If the natural ability of a young man is in the 
mechanical line, he should not be forced to study for a profession, 
and vice versa. Water will always find its level; so will the talents 
in the human being, if allowed to develop, with the aid of proper 
education. 
Everybody has and needs occupation, even the laggard; (he 
occupies his mind with thoughts and hallucinations which are more 
bother to him than real work would be.) There is an old proverb 
that says, “Who not works, shall not eat.” In this is a principle of 
law, which rules organic life. It holds good in every sphere of 
occupation, whether mental or physical, as in either the different 
organs of the body participate and show their activity. 
It is erroneous to think that while in a state of health if we do not 
use our organs in some sort of avocation, that they will be preserved. 
Take for instance your brain, and not use it at all, and it becomes 
next to corroded; your ideas lose their broadness, nor can you grasp 
the most simple question of the day. It is necessary to keep your SLEEP. 
197 
organ of sensibility in activity, unless you wish to be numbered 
among those who have their thinking done by others. 
If your nerves are subjected to irritation they become blunted. 
The muscles, if not properly used, become soft and waste. A 
lazy man or woman is only half a human being. Through the 
many theories and observations on the laws of heredity, one can 
learn that weak parents produce weak offspring; strong ones as a' 
rule have healthy children. This is not only recognized in the 
human family but even the intelligent stock raiser, who hunts the 
world over for strong progenitors. If, then, these theories are 
adopted and used with good results, why should the human family 
not take heed and avoid laziness and consequent decay of body, 
soul and pocketbook, and thereby contribute to their own misery and 
that of their descendants. 
Labor must not be continuous, but an interchange between work 
and rest. The latter we receive by diverting our minds from our 
occupations to some other channel and through sleep. 
SLEEP. 
In contemplating for a few moments upon this natural and 
healthy, but temporary and periodical modification of the functions 
of the organs of sense as well as those of locomotion and execution, 
few consider that this period occupies about one-third of our exist- 
ence. During healthy sleep we are in a more or less unconscious 
state, and are not under mental control. Our acuteness of mental 
perception is lessened. Repose is a necessity as much as proper 
exercise is for the nutrition of the muscular system. Fatigue can be 
relieved without sleep, but after prolonged and severe mental ex- 
ertion, or after long continued muscular exercise involving the ex- 
penditure of nerve force, sleep becomes an imperative necessity. 
The nervous system can, however, be driven and excited to such ex- 
tent that sleep does not follow. 
The body makes its want for sleep known only after moderate 
activity, in which case sleep is a natural consequence. If the body 
is driven beyond the limit, either mentally or physically, and is 
robbed of needful sleep, insomnia will manifest itself. This is a 
predisposing cause of numerous brain diseases. 
During the early years of life sleep seems to be of great im- 
portance, for the reason that this period is one in which the body 
is more readily developed. The baby does little else but sleep, take 
nourishment and digest it. Adults while in perfect physiological 
condition, need about eight hours of sleep. This rule if it may be 198 
DREAMS. 
called such, is subject to variations and usually each individual learns 
by experience how much sleep is necessary for him in order to keep 
in perfect health. 
Of all things necessary to the human system, nothing incapacitates 
it for mental or muscular effort so much as to be deprived of sleep. 
As far as it is known, the brain is in a condition of absolute 
repose, at least so far as mental operations are concerned. This is 
caused by a diminished supply of blood to the cerebral regions. 
Practical experiments have been made upon the lower animals as 
well as the human, by compression on the carotid arteries, and thus 
lessening the flow of blood to the brain. 
It is also a well-known fact, that after the ingestion of a full meal, 
the person feels drowsy. This is caused from the determination of the 
blood to the digestive organs at the expense of the brain. During 
sleep all the functions except those under the control of the sympa- 
thetic nervous system are diminished in activity. Circulation is 
slower, pulsation not as rapid, and the respiratory movements are not 
so frequent. In regard to digestion, secretion and absorption during 
sleep, little positive information is at hand and physiologists 
have so far failed to demonstrate to a certainty, whether the activity 
of these last mentioned functions is diminished, normal or increased. 
Prolonged exposure to extreme cold induces sleep, and if the 
person loses the power of resistance to somnolence, and the cold be 
not rapidly diminished, death is the inevitable result. 
Quietness in surroundings is favorable to sleep, and to some 
persons a positive necessity, thus we find the inhabitants of the quiet 
rural districts have difficulty in going to sleep in noisy cities. 
Again, the people living in noisy cities, or those who have to get 
their sleep on railway trains, become so used to it that they find 
trouble in going to dreamland, when surrounded by serenity and 
stillness. 
DREAMS. 
During sleep we receive no impressions from the external world. 
Still ideas, many of them preposterous, may be generated during 
sleep in the brain, from impressions which found lodgings in our seat 
of senses while awake. 
“ Sober thought pursued the amusing theme, 
Till fancy colored it and formed a dream.”—Pope. 
Mental operations may take place during sleep, of which we 
have consciousness after awakening, but the recollection of these 
fades rapidly, unless we make a special effort to implant them upon LIGHT HABITS. 
199 
our memory. Socrates compared the remembrance of ordinary 
everyday dreams, with the impressions made by a seal upon a 
running stream. It was made, but vanished with equal rapidity. 
Dreams are mostly due to a disorganized digestion or stored up 
hallucinations in the brain. Others however, argue with a good deal 
of force, that dreams are produced from external impressions during 
sleep and then form perversions in the brain entirely disconnected 
with the impression made. 
Sleep accompanied by dreams is not as refreshing as normal 
sleep, during which our mental machinery is dormant. 
Frequent dreams are no doubt detrimental to a general well 
being, and are when demonstrated through the grinding of the teeth, 
talking, crying, or even getting up and walking around as in som- 
nambulism, signs of nerve irritations, bordering on a pathological 
state. 
LIGHT. 
When man is born, the first perception of existence is through 
light, and with it life of the body begins its existence. 
"O spring to light, auspicious babe, be born.”—Pope. 
Life is closely intermingled with light, and so necessary to our 
existence, that whenever life is extinguished, the material body is 
not obvious to light. Where there is light, there is life, and we can 
perceive our surroundings. 
When we speak of the material light, we can only say that it is a 
force or action in nature by the operation of which upon the organs 
of sight, objects are rendered visible or luminous. Light was formerly 
regarded as consisting of material particles, traversing space, but 
now it is generally understood to consist in the propagation of 
vibrations or undulations in a subtle elastic medium, set in vibratory 
motion by luminous bodies, similarly as the atmosphere is by sonorous 
bodies. This view of the nature of light is known as the undulatory 
or wave theory, while the transmission of material particles, was 
named in honor of its propagator, the “ Newtonian” theory. 
Light travels at an incomprehensible rapidity, its waves getting 
through space at the rate of 192,000 miles per second. 
HABITS. 
Habits in persons may be either natural or acquired, and are in 
both cases generally firmly fixed, and when not combated, are just 
as firmly retained. A good many habits contribute to our moral and 200 
HABITS. 
physical well being; like the habit of a ladylike or gentlemanly 
behavior. Others find much consolation in a retired habit, while 
another class have an acquisition in their make up which has grown 
into a jovial habit, “ Hail fellows well met.” Persons blessed with 
the latter habit, if the exposition of joviality is within correct 
bounds, add much to the enjoyment of life in themselves and others. 
Some habits are costly, some of these do good, while others do not. 
Of good habits we will not speak, for we believe the more we have 
of them, the better for all. But there is a trio, which need a bit of 
ventilation; they are hard rooted, and should be corrected. The 
ban which society has placed on Opium, Treating and Tobacco seems 
to do but little good. They are persisted in, and these articles and 
the debasing fashion so much in vogue as to treating, are rather on 
the increase, to the detriment of the well being of those who practice 
these habits. 
Treating is a habit, which needs condemnation. We refer only 
to the strictly American practice of treating, in the shape of asking 
an acquaintance to step into a drinking place to “have something. ” 
“ Treating” is unknown in any other civilized country, and how 
it has secured such a foothold in this land is unexplainable. 
Through this treating business more full-fledged downright drunkards 
are made than any other avenue. If a man must have strong drink 
and cannot do without it, he should not force others to partake of it, 
under the guise of an overflow of friendship, and thus assist his 
fellow man along the down grade. 
Anti-treating societies would contribute as much toward true 
temperance as total abstinence. 
Opium—Is the great alleviator of bodily pain, and also the great 
destroyer of the human mind and body. As a remedy in the practice 
of medicine it is perhaps one of the most valuable of all the 
therapeutical agents. But the conscientious physician will only use 
it when imperatively necessary. The use of this drug in the shape 
of a soothing syrup, as is used so much to quiet babies, we brand as 
a crime. 
Opium is obtained by incisions made in the capsule of the white 
poppy plant, from which a white fluid flows. After drying on the 
capsule it is removed and this product is the raw opium of commerce. 
In color it is brownish yellow, has a faint smell and a bitter acrid, 
taste. 
Opium is a narcotic poison, producing hallucinations of an inde- 
scribable character, profound sleep and if taken in larger doses 
causes certain death. IIABITS. 
201 
Opium is dispensed in many forms. Laudanum is the fluid 
tincture. Morphia is the alkaloid of opium, and is the chief narcotic 
principle in it. 
The opium or morphine habit is easily acquired, sometimes 
through the physician, but in the majority of cases, the drug is taken 
without medical advice, to relieve real or imaginary pains, and very 
often through curiosity tor find out its effect. 
As a thorough destroyer of body and mind, it has no superior, 
and while not an associate with alcohol is about on a par with it. 
The user makes himself a slave to the drug. Many people shun 
whiskey and its kindred, and look upon these articles with the utmost 
horror, but seem to have no compunction whatever to take their 
regular debauch in opium or morphine. While the effect of alcohol 
is hilarity often accompanied by demonstrations of physical power 
to the detriment and injury of innocent women and children, opium 
tranquilizes the partaker and transfers his mind to the lost garden of 
Eden, only to be deceived upon awakening, that he or she is the sole 
proprietor of a terrible headache and are anxious to return to 
the dream. The craving is established, the mind is weakened, the 
unfortunate has lost all interest in wife, children, friends and others 
who were formerly dear to him, he does not care whether his 
dependents have clothes to wear, or bread to eat, provided his 
insatiable appetite for this seducing drug is satisfied. 
The habit once well established usually continues and well 
authenticated cures are very rare. 
This is so much more reason, to guard against forming a taste 
for opium and morphine. 
Tobacco. The habit of using tobacco among civilized and cer- 
tain uncivilized people is universal, or at least nearly so. It is tol- 
erated to a certain extent and is in a measure the least objection- 
able. 
Tobacco is a poison, as is evidenced by the using of the first pipe 
of tobacco, cigar or a cigarette. The sign of this poisoning is 
acute and shows itself through nausea, vomiting, diarrhoea, weak 
pulse, difficult respiration, dizziness, tendency to swoon and shak- 
ing of the limbs. The poison causing these pathological exhibi- 
tions, is the active principle in tobacco: Nicotine, a poison which 
challenges its brothers and sisters in virulence. The quantity pro- 
duced from one pipe full of tobacco or a cigar may not be sufficient 
to cause death, even if all the nicotine therein were absorbed in the 
system, but it creates within the body a decided necessity, which 
calls for subsequent doses. The venture is then repeated, again and 202 
ALCOHOL. 
again, till, the existence of the poison thus inculcated into the sys- 
tem becomes absolutely requisite. When this stage is reached the 
habit of using tobacco is firmly established. The danger of being 
fatally poisoned by nicotine is less in the user of tobacco than in 
those unaccustomed to the weed. As vaccination is a safeguard 
against small-pox virus, so is the gradual use of tobacco against 
nicotine poison. In contemplating for a few moments, why we 
smoke, chew, or take snuff, the mental machine evolves many 
causes. Some will say, it soothes and tranquilizes the nerves. Yes, 
they are right; other narcotics will do the same, and all at the 
expense of the body, and especially the nerves. Others will say, my 
grandfather lived to be nigh unto ninety years old, and smoked on 
the day of his death. All these reasons are without foundation. 
Then science as well as experience shows that by using tobacco we 
fill our bodies with a poisonous substance. It may affect some more 
and some less, but real good to our health or surroundings cannot be 
found in the use of the weed. The worst form of using tobacco is 
doubtless the smoking of cigarettes, and when a cigarette fiend is 
asked what good it does him, it is usually found that his mind is al- 
ready so far gone that he cannot concentrate it sufficiently to see for 
himself, that by inflating his lungs with the poisonous smoke he 
hastens his journey to the grave. 
ALCOHOL. 
These topics would surely be incomplete, if the reader’s atten- 
tion had not been drawn to the article heading this chapter. While 
we do not desire to enter into the great moral and social question of 
the day connected with the use and abuse of alcohol, the necessity 
must be apparent, that the character of this fluid should be better 
understood. To this end, the mode of manufacture, its constituents, 
its effect on alimentation, respiration and its destructive qualities of 
animal tissue, from a purely physiological point of view, are deemed 
of sufficient interest. It is hoped that the hints thrown out through- 
out this treatise on alcohol will serve as a guidance in the use of the 
article. 
Nearly all people upon the face of the earth, since time immem- 
orial, have had access to alcohol in some form, and have and are 
still using it. Whether this be in order to meet some want occa- 
sionally felt by and peculiar to the human organism, is a question 
upon which physiologists have found it impossible to agree. 
All distilled and fermented liquors and wines contain a greater 
or lesser quantity of alcohol. The whole category of alcoholic ALCOHOL. 
203 
beverages would be as innocent as pure water, were it not for the 
presence in them, of alcohol. 
The percentage of alcohol in the more common, everyday, bever- 
ages varies very much. On it depends however, the intoxicating power 
and as the use of these liquids, especially when excessively indulged 
in, is of a serious nature, its influence upon the human system has 
become an absorbing question in nearly all walks of life. 
PROPORTION OF ALCOHOL IN LIQUORS, ETC. 
1 
ALCOHOL 
NAME. 
U o 
u 
*i 
MADE FROM j 
DEVELOPED 
REMARKS. 
Common beer 
2 
Barley and hops 
Fermentation 
Bitter sweet 
Cider, hard 
5-9 
Apples 
do 
Sour 
Porter 
3-5 
Barley and Hops 
do 
Bitter sweet 
Ale 
6-io 
do 
do 
Acid bitter sour 
Rhine wine 
7-3 
Grapes Nat. 
do 
Acid 
Moselle do 
8 
do 
do 
do 
Elder wine 
8 
Elderberries 
do 
Sweet 
Claret 
9 
Grapes 
do 
Tannic sour 
Gooseberry wine 
12 
Gooseberries 
do 
Sweet 
Champagne 
12-14 
Grapes 
( Bottle ) 
Effervescent sweet acid 
Sherry wine 
17-24 
do 
( h ermentation f 
Port wine 
23 
do 
Fermentation 
Sweet 
Malaga 
17 
do 
do 
do 
Currant wine 
20 
Currants 
do 
do 
Madeira wine 
22-27 
Grapes 
do 
do 
Raisin wine 
25 
Raisins 
do 
do 
Gin 
47-51 
j Rye malt and ( 
l Juniperberries \ 
do 
Distillation 
do 
Juniper burning 
Brandy 
53-55 
Grapes 
do 
Grape flavor pungent 
Rum 
49-53 
Molasses 
do 
Burning 
Irish whiskey 
49-53 
Grain and potatoes 
do 
Smoky 
Scotch do 
50-54 
do 
do 
do 
American do 
48-60 
Corn, wheat, rye 
do 
Burning 
Cologne spirit 
94 
do 
do 
do 
Absolute alcohol 
9960 
do 
do 
do 
It will be noticed from the foregoing tabulated statement,that all 
the stronger beverages are made by the process of distillation. 
Distillation. This process is preceded by allowing the starchy 
substances to transform into saccharine matter, and by adding yeast 
to the mash through which fermentation is produced. While in 
this state the mash is placed in the distilling apparatus, from which 
the alcohol, aided by heat, evaporates. The vapors are conducted 
through a “ worm” which is connected with the kettle, by means of 
which condensation ensues. The product is alcohol in the raw 
state. The presence of water in it, regulates its strength. Redis- 
tillation increases the percentage of alcohol, and rectification elim- 
inates fusel oil. 
Wine is the expressed juice of fruits, such as grapes, currants, 204 
gooseberries, plums, raspberries, etc. When the juice so obtained 
does not contain a sufficient quantity of sugar, an alcoholic fermen- 
tation does not take place, but one which is called an acetic fer- 
mentation (souring), the product being vinegar. The alcohol in 
wine is formed through a natural fermentation, which takes place 
at a temperature not lower than 6o° F. The saccharine matter in the 
juice is transformed into alcohol and carbonic acid. If the latter be 
allowed to escape, the product is known as still wine and if forming 
a part of the wine and being held in confinement within the bottle 
containing the wine, becomes effervescent and sparkling. Cham- 
pagnes belong to this class. 
Cider is the wine of apples. 
Malt Beverages. The process of manufacture of these beverages 
differs from the foregoing, and is somewhat complex. Pure beer, 
ale or porter is nowadays about as scarce an article as can well be 
imagined, and as the brewers keep the mode of making an artificial 
article to themselves, we can only describe the making of malt bev- 
erages as they are supposed to be. 
The grain which is exclusively used for the brewing of pure beer, 
ale or porter, is barley. This is first soaked in water, then piled up, 
so that germination is forced through heat, by which the saccharine 
principles are evolved. The grain in this state is dried in a kiln, 
after which it is ground into a meal. This process constitutes 
malting. 
The requisite amount of ground malt is then placed in a mash 
tub, boiling hot water is added to it, through which the saccharine 
matter is dissolved and held in suspense. The liquid, after being 
drawn off, and which is called wort, is then pumped into a kettle 
where a certain quantity of hops is added to it. This mixture is 
boiled, and the fluid partakes of the bitter flavor of hops. After the 
boiling process the fluid is rapidly cooled and stored in vats, in 
which, through the addition of yeast, fermentation takes place. 
Through fermentation alcohol and carbonic acid generate. When 
the yeast has properly settled the fluid is carefully drawn off and 
placed in large casks to age, a process which improves the quality. 
Of all intoxicating beverages, beer, ale and porter contain the 
least percentage of alcohol. 
Alcohol contains the following constituents : Carbon4, Hydrogen6, 
Oxygen2, and is classed among the non-nitrogenized principles. 
Sugar and fat belong to the same class, and while these are essential 
to proper nutrition and undergo important changes in the organism, 
alcohol is absorbed and taken into the blood but not used in the 
ALCOHOL. ALCOHOL. 
205 
economy. It is discharged from the system unchanged as to its 
constituents. 
Alcohol can be recognized in the expired air after it has been 
taken into the stomach. While its bulk is eliminated from the body 
by the lungs, the skin and kidneys also aid in discharging it. 
Alcohol retards the elimination of carbonic acid, a product which 
is formed in the regeneration of the tissues and must be exhaled in 
proportion to the quantity produced in order to enjoy health. 
Alcohol also diminishes the quantity of urea to be discharged 
from the body. A retention of this substance causes a species of 
blood poisoning. 
Alcohol diminishes the activity of nutrition and weakens the 
assimilative powers of the system to such extent that the proper 
amount of food cannot be taken. In such cases, alcoholic drink is 
then craved for, to supply a self-engendered want. 
Alcohol in its character as an irritant causes inflammation of the 
mucous membranes of the system, hence the various abdominal in- 
flammations so frequent in drunkards. 
Under ordinary circumstances when the wants of the system can 
be adequately supplied with food, alcohol is positively injurious. 
When, however, the quantity of food is insufficient, alcohol may for 
a brief space of time sustain the powers of the body. The effects of 
its continued use, not accompanied by proper articles of diet, shows 
that it cannot take the place of assimilable matter. 
Temporary insufficiency of food, great exhaustion of the nervous 
system and physical collapse may be alleviated temporarily through 
the administration of small doses of alcoholic beverages, and there- 
fore in the strict sense of the word, alcohol under these and various 
other conditions seems to be useful, and it is hardly proper that this 
remedial agent should be utterly condemned. For its legitimate 
purpose, alcohol is an article “ par excellence,” which is liable to 
abuse, and the effects of which on the mind and body when taken 
constantly in excess, are most serious, and must be regarded as 
pathological. 
Alcohol possesses the special characteristic of arresting ferment- 
ation, as is so commonly evidenced in the preservation of specimens. 
The gastric juice of the stomach being one of the strongest fer- 
ments in existence, and necessary to proper digestion, is made 
useless if it comes in contact within the body with alcohol. Its 
active principle, pepsin, is precipitated through the exhibition of 
alcohol, and hence its functions are interrupted if not entirely 
destroyed. 206 
ALCOHOL. 
Albuminous substances, such as the white of an egg, large 
portions of muscular meat, gluten and many other vegetable articies 
of diet containing it, are coagulated by alcohol, not only out of the 
body, but also in it. The albumen becomes permanently altered, 
and cannot again be rendered soluble, even when withdrawn from 
contact with alcohol, but only by means which further modify the 
character of the albuminous substance. 
Alcohol in excessive doses or habitually taken in any form par- 
alyzes the vaso-motor nerves, dilates the bloodvessels and increases 
the pulsation. Its action upon the nerve centers is also paralyzing 
and the cerebellum specially seems to be affected, as is shown by the 
loss of equilibrium in an intoxicated person.. 
Taken in very moderate quantities alcoholic beverages produce a 
certain amount of nervous exaltation, which gradually passes off, 
in proportion to the elimination of it from the system. In some 
individuals the mental faculties are sharpened, while in others they 
are blunted. In large doses the effects are the well known phe- 
nomena of intoxication, delirium, and, in isolated cases, where the 
quantity taken was excessive, it has caused instant death. The 
mental exaltation produced by alcohol is invariably followed by 
reaction and depression, appropriately called “self-inflicted in- 
disposition. ’’ 
While it is true that alcohol, taken in moderate doses, produces 
a genial warmth on the surface of the body, it must be borne in 
mind that it is done at the expense of the internal vital organs, 
from which the blood has been diverted and brought to the surface. 
Therefore the old established theory that a good horn of whisky or 
some hot toddy will fortify a person about to be exposed to the 
inclemencies of the weather must go down as fallacious, if the testi- 
mony of Dr. Hayes, the eminent and scientific Arctic explorer, as 
well as the writings and sayings of Dr. Kane and Gen. Greeley are 
to be taken as truthful. Dr. Hayes reports as follows: 
“ While fresh animal food, and especially fat, is absolutely essential 
to the inhabitants and travelers in Arctic countries, alcohol is, in 
most any shape, not only completely useless, but positively injurious. 
* * Circumstances may occur under which its administration 
seems necessary; such, for instance, as great prostration from long 
continued exposure and exertion, or from getting hurt; but then, it 
should be avoided, if possible, for the succeeding reaction is always 
to be dreaded; and if a place of safety is not near at hand, the im- 
mediate danger is only temporarily guarded against and becomes 
finally greatly augmented by reason of decreased vitality. If given LIFE—DEATH. 
207 
at all, it should be given in very small quantities, frequently repeated, 
and continued until a place of safety is reached. I have known the 
most unpleasant consequences to result from the injudicious use of 
whisky for the purpose of temporary stimulation, and have also 
known strong, able-bodied men to have become utterly incapable of 
resisting cold, in consequence of the long continued use of alcoholic 
drinks. ” 
LIFE. 
Life is the space between generation and death, and the potential 
force by which the organs are started and continued in the per- 
formance of their several and co-operative functions. Life is the 
combination of body and soul! The former is the abode for the latter, 
and the latter the master of the former. Throughout life the body 
must be used, if we live in accordance with the laws of nature, but 
we must not misuse it. If we do, we bear the consequences. 
Through the work of the soul, the body becomes perfect. These are 
conditions to which we must adhere; deviations therefrom cause dis- 
turbances in the body and mind, which not only shorten, but also 
terminate life. 
DEATH. 
Death is the condition to which all organized bodies must ulti- 
mately be reduced, and implies the cessation of all vital phenomena 
without capability of resuscitation. 
Death takes place in various ways. It is of rare occurrence, 
however, that a perfectly physiological death takes place, and just 
as seldom that a strict physiological life is enjoyed. Such lives 
have been led and such deaths have ajso occurred, in which the vital 
forces became exhausted, the active powers gradually deserting each 
organ, the functions of absorption and secretion having been slowly 
arrested, circulation seemingly slower and suspended, the heart 
having ceased to act and death ensued naturally from old age, unac- 
companied by disease, with mental and physical apparatus simply 
worn out from long use. Such is called a physiological death. 
Death of this kind, as long as this tearing asunder of body and soul, is 
one of the laws to which we all have to succumb, might be wished for, 
when our time has arrived, but how often our prayer for such disso- 
lution is granted, is seen, when we observe our fellow beings battle 
with the grim destroyer during sickness. Death occurs instanta- 
neously as in some cases of accident. 
In most instances, however, death is preceded by disease, some 
lingering and incurable, in which cases death is welcome. In many 208 
DEATH. 
cases, and I might say in the majority, when the destroyer of life 
sends his advance in the form of sickness, the dreaded moment may 
be postponed through means furnished by nature, and developed by 
science. Health, the blessing of life, may thus be restored and 
death defied for a time at least. 
This is in a measure the purpose of this work, but how it is done, 
is beyond the field of the writer, but he is able to assure his readers 
that his co-laborer in this treatise has studied the art and science of 
war that must be waged against death, that life may be prolonged, 
made happier, and shorn of the numerous ailments the human body 
is subject to. PART SECOND. 
DISEASES; 
THEIR SYMPTOMS AND TREATMENT. 
BY 
ORVILLE JUAN PERKINS, M. D. 
Graduate of Bellevue Hospital Medical College, JV. Y.; also of The Medical Associ- 
ation of the State of Alabama; Licenciate of the Board of Medical Examiners 
of Illinois; Matriculant of the R. C. of P. Cf S., Ontario, Can. 
“Our remedies oft in ourselves do lie, 
Which we ascribe to Heaven: the fated sky 
Gives us free scope; only doth backward pull 
Our slow designs, when we ourselves are dull.” 
—Shakespeare. INTRODUCTION. 
In the beginning of this chapter we desire to say just a 
word to the readers of this work. It is fair to presume that 
you purchased it for the purpose of better informing your- 
self in reference to the structure of your body, the physio- 
logical laws governing the same, the diseases to which you 
are subject, and the remedies for their relief. 
You cannot succeed in this by the mere purchase. 
You must not only read but study the work. Now is the 
time for this. Do not wait until you or your family are 
sick, but begin immediately. As has been set forth in the 
preface, the aim of this work is as much to prevejit sick- 
ness as to relieve it. See if you cannot obtain from these 
pages, and fix thoroughly in your mind, one fact each day. 
Thus, at the end of the year, you will have accumulated 
three hundred and sixty-five facts. Is not this worth an 
effort ? 
When the work is bought for family use, we advise 
that the parents read it together and exchange ideas by 
talking it over. It is often the case that some member of 
the family has a natural taste for nursing the sick, in which 
event we advise that this natural talent be encouraged and 
developed. 
For the best results follow strictly the rules laid down. 
“ There is no use calling a doctor unless you follow di- 
rections,” is a common saying and a true one. These 
volumes are your physician ; hence follow his directions. 212 
PRESCRIPTIONS. 
CHAPTER I. 
PRESCRIPTIONS. 
A prescription is a written direction for preparing 
medicine, to be taken into the system with a view to 
relieving pain, checking and controlling unhealthy action 
or change in the different tissues, and increasing or dimin- 
ishing the functions of the various organs and parts of the 
body. 
Besides the naming of the remedy or remedies to be 
employed, the prescription usually embodies the direction 
for administering the medicine. 
A prescription may contain a single remedy or more. 
The object of combining remedies is that their action may 
be modified. Thus two medicines of the same nature 
combined form a compound which may resemble the orig- 
inals in its action, or may differ entirely from them. 
Again two or more remedies of an opposing nature 
are combined to produce an action differing from either of 
the originals. 
Medicines in addition to the intended effect very fre- 
quently produce disagreeable symptoms which may be 
moderated or altogether prevented by combination with 
other medicines. Thus the griping or nausea produced 
by some cathartic medicine, may be corrected by the sim- 
ultaneous use of anodynes or aromatics. 
Another, perhaps the most important reason for com- 
bining remedies, is to meet different and co-existing indi- 
cations in the same patient. For example, a person not 
infrequently has debility of the stomach and constipation PRESCRIPTIONS. 
213 
of the bowels, connected with an impoverished condition of 
the blood. To meet these conditions it is requisite that 
the prescription shall contain : i. A remedy to give tone 
to the stomach. 2. One for relief of the constipation. 
3. For improving the morbid state of the blood, combined 
and so arranged as to be taken at the same time. 
The reasons for combining remedies might be multi- 
plied, but the above are quite sufficient to show the im- 
portance of a thorough knowledge of this subject. 
The universal practice in medical works intended for 
home use is to name the remedies which are employed for 
different diseases and leave it for the patient or friends to 
decide as to the manner of preparation and amount to be 
given. This makes these works practically worthless. 
In “Prescriptions and How to Use Them'd we have 
obviated this by furnishing in a separate volume quad- 
ruplicates of the prescriptions made under each disease, 
ready to be taken to the drugstore for preparation. 
The same prescription will, in some instances, be used 
for different diseases. When this occurs, the direction 
should be followed given under the disease for which the 
remedy is wanted. 
The aim of the conscientious practitioner of medicine, 
since the days of Hippocrates, whether actuated by phi- 
lanthropic or selfish motives, has been to succeed. In 
order to accomplish this he must be able to relieve pain 
and disease. This requires remedies. To obtain these 
the kingdoms of nature have been searched. Geology, 
botany and chemistry have each contributed their share, 
and out of the abundance many medicines have been dis- 
covered which are both safe and reliable. Of those that 
have “been tried and not found wanting” we shall choose 
for this work, and in so doing shall not confine ourselves 
to any school system or “ pathy ” of medicine, but advise 
such remedies as we know from experience to be worthy 
of the name. 214 
Among the list are some much older than the writer, 
while others are the result of modern investigation. 
These prescriptions have been gathered from different 
sources. Some of them were favorites of our illustrious 
preceptor. Many were obtained while attending lectures 
at Toronto University and Bellevue Hospital Medical 
College, Nt-w York, while others were taken from medical 
journals, both American and foreign. The others are 
original with the writer. 
Thus it wiil be seen that the collection embraces, not 
the opinion of one mind, but many, and covers investi- 
gations in this line extending into the last century. 
Many of these prescriptions are considered “standard ” 
by the profession, which makes this first publication of 
them valuable. 
We wish in this connection to anticipate any charge 
our brethren may make as to “unprofessional conduct” in 
giving prescriptions at less than “One-half of a Cent each, 
where the “fee bill” makes the price from fifty cents to 
$1.50, by stating that we are wholesaling knowledge, while 
they are only retailing it—a difference of over forty-nine 
cents in favor of the consumer, and one which we believe 
will be appreciated not only for the few dollars it will 
save, but from the hours of suffering that will be pre- 
vented by the timely use of these remedies. 
“A stitch in time saves nine,” is not more applicable to 
any other line of action than in the treatment of disease. 
A prompt application of a very small quantity of water 
will extinguish a fire, which, if left to itself, becomes a 
conflagration that the best drilled fire department, with all 
its improvements for fighting fire, is unable to control. 
The dose named in the following pages is intended for 
a grown person unless otherwise mentioned. The fol- 
lowing will be found serviceable as a guide for determining 
the dose for children : 
PRESCRIPTIONS. For a child one year old or under the 
dose should be 2V that of an adult. 
Two to five years old tV “ “ “ 
Five to eigfit years old 1 “ “ “ 
Nine to twelve years old I “ “ “ 
Thirteen to sixteen years old x/2 “ “ “ 
Seventeen to twenty years old I “ “ “ 
At twenty-one years old the adult dose. 
After sixty years the dose should be gradually dimin. 
ished as age advances. 
PRESCRIPTIONS. 
215 216 
DISEASE. 
CHAPTER II. 
DISEASE. 
In commencing the study of disease we wish our read- 
ers to divest their minds of any idea if they entertain such, 
that diseases or their treatment are in any way con- 
nected with the supernatural. 
Disease is the result of rational causes and cures 
wrought by medicines are natural operations. 
The human race is very prone to believe in the 
miraculous, and this characteristic has been taken ad- 
vantage of by the unscrupulous charlatan in all ages 
to palm off on the public many shams. In no line 
perhaps, has this been carried to so great an extent as 
in the treatment of disease. In ancient times and in 
certain uncivilized countries at present, diseases were 
treated by enchantment and incantations, and the prep- 
arations of “healing potions” were surrounded by the 
greatest mystery. Universal knowledge in the form of 
free schools is fast dispelling these erroneous ideas and at 
present only in exceptional localities, can men or women 
long maintain a reputation as physicians on such grounds 
as being born “a seventh son “a twin “the son of a 
great man “of Indian or Hindoo ancestors,” or other 
fallacious claims. 
Common sense, quickened and improved by perception 
and observation, combined with a knowledge of anatomy 
and physiology, are the requisites for successfully studying 
diseases and their treatment. DISEASE. 
217 
There is no such thing as “luck” in the practice of 
medicine more than in other avocations, and a remedy 
prepared behind a curtain or within a darkened closet has 
no more potency than if compounded in the most public 
place. 
We regret that there are many at the present day 
affixing “M. D.” to their names, who encourage the belief 
that the “art of healing’’ is inborn, and shroud their acts 
and remedies with as great mystery as possible. 
Dear reader, you can rest assured that it is all for a 
purpose, and that purpose is the concealing of gross igno- 
rance. Shun these pretenders as the Arab does the 
deadly simoon. 
Disease is defined only by comparing it with health, 
from which it is a departure. 
Disease is the absence or deficiency of health, but this 
calls up at once the question, “What is health ?” 
Health may be defined as a state in which all the tis- 
sues, fluids and organs of the body have their healthy 
properties and perform all their functions completely and 
harmoniously. This perfection of health never actually 
exists. An examination of the healthiest person would 
reveal, though it might be slight, variations from the 
above standard, consequently we express gradation of 
health by adjectives, as good, excellent, etc., on one hand, 
and poor, miserable, etc., on the other. Thus it is seen 
that health and disease are imperceptibly merged to- 
gether. Dr. Chomel defines disease as “a noticeable dis- 
order affecting more or less of the constituent parts of the 
living organism, as regards either their material constitu- 
tion or the exercise of their functions 
Disease is divided into two types, viz.: Functional and 
Organic. 
A functional disease is one of which the symptoms do 
not indicate any appreciable change of structure, while an 
organic disease is attended with morbid changes in the 218 
DISEASE. 
structure of an organ, or in the composition of its lluids. 
For example, palpitation of the heart and torpidity of the 
liver are functional diseases, while enlargement (Hyper- 
trophy) of the heart, and hardening (Induration) of the 
liver are organic. 
Acute diseases are attended with symptoms of some 
degree of severity, and come speedily to a crisis: 
Chronic diseases are inveterate or progress slowly. 
Acute diseases often become chronic and vice versa. 
Epidemic diseases are such as occasionally infest a 
community more or less generally at the same time, and 
which are apt to recur at uncertain intervals or which 
appear successively or simultaneously in various regions. 
LaGrippe, which has prevailed so extensively during the 
last two winters, is a noticeable example of an epidemic 
disease. 
A disease is said to be endemic, when it is especially pre- 
valent in any particular locality. Thus if LaGrippe only 
appeared in one town or city, it would then be endemic. 
Contagious diseases are those which are communicable 
from one person to another, requiring actual contact, and 
resulting from inoculation by a palpable morbid product 
or virus. 
Infectious diseases do not require contact fur communi- 
cation, but are transmitted by poisonous exhalations 
diffused through the air. 
A disease may be contagious and not infectious, for 
example, syphilis; or both contagious and infectious, as in 
small-pox; or infectious but not contagious, for example, 
whooping cough. 
Hereditary diseases are such as are transmitted from 
ancestor or parent to descendant or offspring. They may 
exist at birth, or may become developed at a subsequent 
period of life. 
Congenital diseases are those born with the individual, 
<3 
as hernia, club foot, etc. DISEASE. 
219 
Specific diseases are the result of a definite poison, which 
reproduces its kind and nothing else, as syphilis, hydro- 
phobia, etc. 
Malignant diseases are those which are of a highly 
dangerous and intractable character, and the symptoms 
are generally severe from the commencement. Many dis- 
eases from the intensity of the symptoms are termed 
malignant, for example, “Malignant typhoid fever,” “ma- 
lignant scarlet fever,” etc. Some physicians use this term 
to denote cancerous affections. 
If we search the history of diseases, we find their 
existence is almost co-eval with that of man. The num- 
ber of diseases which are recognized as in active operation, 
exceeds two hundred and fifty, without including a large 
number which belong properly to surgery. 
Continuing the investigation of the history, we learn 
how distinct the groupings of the phenomena have con- 
tinued in relation to time, and how remarkably fixed from 
age to age, they have retained their integrity of type ; few 
becoming actually lost, and few springing forth as abso- 
lutely new. Many well defined maladies are of rarer 
occurrence at some periods than at others, still they appear, 
and ihough in isolated form, they are unchanged in dis- 
tinguishing characteristics. 
The disease known as “Ague,” formerly so very com- 
mon throughout the Northern States that the physicians of 
fifty or sixty years ago looked upon it as one of the most 
ordinary disorders, is now so rare that the writer, in fifteen 
years’ practice in a State once noted for its ague, did not 
meet a single case. At a later period, however, while in 
Alabama, he met it under the name of “The Chills,” and 
found it accompanied by the same symptoms so graph- 
ically depicted by the old physicians of his native State. 
Malignant typhus fever of to-day, was at one time 
known as “the black death;” the great plague of Athens 
was neither more nor less than a terrible visitation of what 220 
DISEASE. 
is now known as malignant scarlet fever. Small-pox is the 
same, when unchecked by the immortal Jenner’s discovery, 
as when Rhazes described it in the ninth century. Galen 
and Hippocrates were acquainted with cancer, and described 
it as the same intractable, painful, fatal malady, as that 
of the present day. 
Consumption (phthisis pulmonalis), which so many 
eminent men of the day are endeavoring to combat, was 
most vividly described by Caelius Aurelianus. As early 
as the first century, Celsus gave the signs of inflammation 
that are used to the present day for recognizing it, viz., 
redness, szvelling, heat and pain. 
In brief, the more thoroughly we investigate this inter- 
esting subject, the surer is the conviction that throughout 
the known period of human existence, not one new disease 
has been added, not one withdrawn, neither have they 
changed. Inflammation of the lung tissues, whether called 
lung fever, pneumonia or pneumonitis, gives rise to the 
same symptoms as it did at the time when Moses was 
rocked by the waves of the Nile; and what is true of this, 
is also of other diseases. CAUSES OF DISEASE. 
221 
CHAPTER III. 
CAUSES OF DISEASE. 
(etiology.) 
“ Whatever is capable of deranging either the functions 
or any part of the structure of the human body, must be 
ranked amongst the causes of disease. It is not surprising, 
therefore, considering the numberless variety of circum- 
stances to which man is exposed, that the causes are very 
numerous.” 
There are many classifications of the causes of diseases 
adopted by medical writers. We shall, however, use for 
this work what seems to us the most simple and easily 
comprehended : Uncontrollable and Controllable. 
Uncontrollable causes are of external origin, and in- 
clude variations of season, of electrical tension, of temper- 
ature, of atmospheric pressure, of winds, of moisture, and 
of the chemical constitution of the atmosphere. They 
include also lightning stroke and sun stroke. It is needless 
to enlarge upon these atmospheric changes, as causing 
disease; that they do is a fact well known to every intel- 
ligent observer. They are uncontrollable, and the best 
that can be expected is that their action be modified by 
proper hygienic regulations, as suitable clothing, avoiding 
unnecessary exposure, keeping the system in tone to 
resist sudden changes, etc. 
Controllable causes are of greater interest, as they are 
in the direct line of prevention of disease. The term 
“Induced disease” is applied to the class produced by 
controllable causes and is certainly very appropriate. 222 
CAUSES OF DISEASE. 
Controllable causes, are numerous, and can be arranged 
under four heads: 
1. Excessive and prolonged labor, physical or mental, 
undue excitement, as in fear, anger, grief and hatred. 
2. Substances taken into the body which change its 
structure. These as a rule are luxuries. If we define a 
luxury as what is not necessary, but simply enjoyable, 
there is no exception to this rule. 
The agents specially included under this head are alco- 
hol, tobacco and narcotics. 
3. Habits which are incident to communities, and 
include the foolish practice of following fashion in dress, 
construction of buildings, etc., irregularity of living and 
insufficient sleep. 
4. Marriage of persons with diseased organisms to 
those with healthy, the result being that hereditary affec- 
tions flow on in an uninterrupted current. 
Of the numerous controllable causes we shall only 
notice in this connection, a few of the most palpable. 
The others will be mentioned under the disease or diseases 
to which they give rise. 
ALCOHOL. 
Of diseases induced and controllable, those arising from 
the use of alcohol are, perhaps, the most numerous and 
fatal. 
When we consider that next to water alcoholic fluid is 
most used as a beverage by a large portion of the popu- 
lation of all civilized countries, to condemn its use and 
place it amongst the potent causes of fatal disease, seems 
like a satire upon the boasted intelligence and civil- 
ization of the nineteenth century. As a writer of prac- 
tical facts for the masses, we should consider ourselves 
neglectful of our duty did we not condemn its use in most 
emphatic terms, knowing, as every physician must, that 
many fatal diseases can be assigned to no other origin 
than the use of alcohol. CAUSES OF DISEASE. 
223 
If physiological laws be carefully studied, no place for 
alcohol, as a necessity, can be found. Contemplate its 
action on living function as profoundly as we may, no 
force to living matter, and no new matter for the con- 
struction of organized tissue are discovered. In whatever 
direction we turn our attention to determine the value of 
alcohol to man, beyond the sphere of its value as a drug, 
we see nothing but a void. 
In the study of the persistent effects of alcohol, we see 
nothing but disease and death, both physical and mental. 
It matters not in what form it enters the system, whether 
as cider, beer, wine or diluted alcohol, its effect is the 
same, and to say that this man only drinks cider, that man 
only drinks wine, while a third drinks brandy, is merely to 
say, when the apology is unclothed, that all drink the 
same danger. 
Alcohol is a universal intoxicant, the effect produced 
being common to all animals. Man with his superior intel- 
ligence and reason, however, is the only one that persists 
in its use till a train of morbid conditions follow, which 
are unequaled by any other arising from a single cause, a 
fact which very few individuals would credit, were the 
knowledge gained otherwise than by personal observation. 
“O, that men should put an enemy in their mouths, to steal away 
their brains! that we should with joy, revel, pleasure and applause, 
transform ourselves into beasts!”—Shakespeare. 
If the evils of alcohol were made to extend equally to 
animals lower than man, the result would be most disas- 
trous, as in a very short time none of them would be 
tamable, workable or eatable. 
The first action of alcohol upon the system is that 
of vascular and nervous excitement. In other words, 
through its effects upon the nervous system, over-action of 
the heart is produced. Two eminent investigators—Dr. 
Parker and Count Wallowicz—experimented upon a 
young and healthy adult man to determine the actual 
increase in the heart’s action from the use of alcohol. 224 
CAUSES OF DISEASE. 
They counted the beats of the heart at regular intervals 
for six days, the subject being allowed nothing but water 
to drink ; then for a like period they gave from one to 
six fluid ounces of alcohol in twenty-four hours, the food, 
clothing and surroundings in every other respect being the 
same. The average number of beats during the six days 
water was taken was 106,000. The average for the time 
alcohol was given was 127,000, or an increase of 21,000 
beats in twenty-four hours, a little more than one-fifth. 
The lowest estimate of daily work done by the heart is 
equal to lifting 122 tons, one foot ; thus the daily excess 
of work from the use of six ounces of alcohol is equal to 
lifting twenty-four tons one foot. Little wonder is it that 
the heart should flag after such overwork, and still less the 
cause of wonder that the brain and muscles, which depend 
upon the heart for their blood supply, should require the 
rest of long sleep for renovation. While the heart is thus 
working under alcoholic stimulation, the circulation of dis- 
tant parts is quickened, and the vessels distended. This is 
noticed in the early stage and is spoken of as the “flush 
produced by wine.” This increase of blood is not con- 
fined to the skin, but extends to the various organs, 
brain, liver, kidneys, etc. This constitutes the stage of 
excitement. 
If the action of the alcohol be carried to the second 
stage the functions of the small brain and spinal cord are 
affected. Just how this takes place is not yet known, but 
the change in the functions is well marked and consists of 
loss of power and co-ordination of muscular movement. 
The nerve stimulus is enfeebled. The muscles of the lower 
lip fail first, and next those of the lower limbs. 
There is usually vomiting in this stage, especially in 
young subjects. 
If the influence of this narcotic be continued still 
further, the cerebrum or large brain becomes implicated. 
“These are the centers of thought and volition, and as CAUSES OF DISEASE. 
225 
they become unbalanced and thrown into chaos, the mind 
loses equilibrium, and the rational part of the nature of 
man gives way before the emotional, passional, or mere 
organic centers. The reason now is off duty, or is fooling 
with duty, and all the mere animal instincts and senti- 
ments are laid atrociously bare. The coward shows up 
more craven, the braggart more braggart, the bold more 
bold, the cruel more cruel, the ignorant more ignorant, 
the untruthful more untruthful, the carnal more carnal. 
“In vino veritas" expresses faithfully, indeed even to 
physiological accuracy, the true conditions. The emo- 
tional faculties are all in wild disorder ; foolish sentimen- 
tality extending often to tears, grotesque and meaningless 
laughter, absurd promises and asseverations, inane threats 
or childish prediction impel the tongue until at last there 
is a failure of the senses, distortion of the objective reali- 
ties of life, obscurity, insensibility, sleep and utter muscu- 
lar prostration.” 
Following immediately is the last stage which is that 
of coma or true apoplexy, a condition in which the subject 
is said to be “dead drunk,” a not inapplicable term , mus- 
cular power gone, will power gone, senses all gone, dead ; 
only two nerve centers remain true to duty, the center 
that calls into play the respiratory action and the center 
which stimulates the heart; thus kind nature prevents self- 
destruction. 
At the very first there is an increase of temperature of 
the surface of the body at the expense of the vital organs. 
This soon declines, and from hour to hour through the 
various stages the animal heat gradually falls. 
These are the immediate effects of drinking alcoholic 
liquors, and if relinquished after the one indulgence no 
very great harm would result, but if continued for a con- 
siderable length of time, it is capable of producing a 
chronic injury to the brain and mind. 
By impairing the functions of the former it brings on 226 
TOBACCO. 
the shaking paralysis of delirium tremens ; by an action 
on the mind it causes strange hallucinations, as noted in 
the latter part of the second stage, and the habitual 
despondency which characterizes that disorder. Habitual 
drinking of alcoholic beverages gives rise to a chronic 
inflammation of the liver, called cirrhosis, which is suc- 
ceeded by dropsy. Its effects enter directly into the caus- 
ation of many other affections such as degeneration of the 
heart and bloodvessels, fatty liver, epilepsy, muscular 
tremor, inflammation of the stomach, various dyspeptic 
disorders, Bright’s disease and diabetes. Indirectly the 
habitual use of alcohol favors the production of nearly all 
diseases by lessening the power of resisting their cause, 
and it contributes to their fatality by impairing the ability 
to tolerate and overcome them. 
Perhaps the most lamentable and most to be regretted 
result of the habitual use of alcohol is its hereditary 
transmission. 
Of the many inscrutable designs of nature none is 
more manifest than this, that physical vice like physical 
virtue and physical features descend in line. Not one of 
the transmitted wrongs, physical or mental, which are 
passed to those yet unborn, is more certain than those 
which are inflicted by alcohol. Many specific diseases 
engendered by it in the parent, are too often stamped in 
the child ; while the propensity to its use descends also, 
making the evil interest compound in its terrible totality. 
We have already taken more of the reader’s time in deal- 
ing with this single cause of disease than we first intended 
—and the hundredth part is not told—but have no 
apology, as we consider no subject in our whole national 
life is worthier of serious thought. 
TOBACCO. 
In the list of luxuries tobacco as a cause of disease 
may be ranked next to alcohol. The diseases arising from TOBACCO. 
227 
its use are functional and with few exceptions, are rapidly 
recovered from, if the habit be abandoned. The question 
is often asked the physician, which is most injurious, 
chewing or smoking tobacco? We reply, chewing is bad, 
smoking is worse. This opinion is formed from the 
effects produced. Looked at with a view to cleanliness, 
the above observation would have to be reversed. A 
careful chemical examination of tobacco smoke has been 
made by different investigators and is found to be com- 
posed of water in the form of vapor, carbon or soot, 
ammonia, (also in vapor), carbonic acid gas, and nicotine. 
The nicotine contains a bitter principle which gives it the 
dark brown color. These different agents act in various 
ways upon the body. The water may be set down as 
harmless, the carbon acts as a mechanical irritant, and 
discolors the bronchial secretions and the teeth. The 
ammonia causes the biting or smarting of the tongue, and 
also the dryness of the mouth and throat. It also acts 
upon the blood, tending to make it more watery; carbonic 
acid produces headache, sleepiness and lassitude. 
The effect of nicotine is to produce tremor, palpitation 
of the heart and paralysis. The unpleasant odor of the 
breath of smokers is also due to nicotine. 
It would lead to unnecessary detail to enter into the 
various stages and degrees of action of tobacco upon the 
body, and consequently we shall sum them up briefly, 
referring our readers to the more elaborate work for 
minuteness of detail. As smoking is more common, we 
shall give its effects rather than that of chewing. Smok- 
ing acts, (i) upon the blood causing undue fluidity, and 
change in size and shape of the red corpuscles; (2) upon 
the stomach giving rise to debility of this organ; (3) upon 
the mucous membrane of the mouth and throat producing 
soreness of the tonsils, redness and dryness of the mem- 
brane, and sponginess of the gums; (4) upon the heart; 
resulting in weakness of this organ and irregular action, 228 
TOBACCO. 
(5) upon the lining surface of the bronchi and lungs, pro- 
longing any irritation that may be present, and causing 
cough; (6) upon the organs of sense, causing when exces- 
sively used, dilation of the pupil of the eye and confusion 
of vision, inability to define sounds clearly, the occurrence 
of sharp ringing sounds in the ear; (7) upon the brain, 
impairing the activity of that organ. 
These effects are severe even on those who have 
attained manhood, but in the young the habit of smoking 
causes impairment of growth, premature manhood, and 
physical decay. 
The other injurious substances that are included under 
controllable causes and against which we particularly wish 
to caution our readers, are opium and its compounds,— 
morphine, Dover’s powder, laudanum, etc., chloroform, 
chloral hydrate, ether, chlorodyne, cocaine, absinthe. 
These are most excellent remedial agents when so used, 
but taken as luxuries, are capable of working great harm 
to both mind and body. There is not only the immediate 
danger which results from an over dose of these drugs, 
but the use soon becomes abuse, a habit is formed, which 
becomes so firmly fixed upon the individual that only 
those of exceptionally strong will-power ever free them- 
selves from the baneful influence. 
These substances all act either directly or indirectly 
upon the nervous system, and enter into the causation 
of a large number of disorders to which this system is 
subject.. 
Morally it makes no difference whether an individual 
is intoxicated from the use of opium, chloral, alcohol or 
other narcotics, and when society puts its condemnation 
upon all with an equal degree of severity, a step in 
advance will have been taken toward suppressing the use 
of these agents. LATE HOURS AND BROKEN SLEEP. 
229 
LATE HOURS AND BROKEN SLEEP. 
Insufficient and broken sleep is an active agent in the 
production of diseases. To specify any one disease orig- 
inating from irregular sleep would be very difficult; there 
are, however, certain impairments resulting from this 
habit, which very greatly depress vitality, and thereby 
invite an attack of disease. The importance of sleep to 
the human economy cannot be over-estimated; it is of 
more consequence even than food. Every act performed 
requires the expenditure of a certain amount of vital 
force, and this is repaired during sleep only. One who is 
accustomed to regular and sufficient sleep feels quickly 
the symptoms if deprived for a single night only, of 
“Tired nature’s sweet restorer, balmy sleep.”—Young. 
There is a feverish feebleness and a hazy condition of 
mind, accompanied by increased nerve susceptibility which 
if not painful is at least disagreeable. It requires two or 
three nights of good sleep to restore the natural state of 
mental and physical strength. Those who are habitually 
broken of their sleep do not notice such marked symptoms 
from the loss of a single night’s rest. Thus we often hear 
persons remark that they can do with four or five hours’ 
sleep, and it matters not how late they go to bed, they 
always arise at the same hour. We hear youth also 
exulting in their power to forego sleep, and that they 
“won’t go home till morning,” as if some great virtue of 
courage or wisdom were conveyed in the declaration. 
These people are sowing the wind and will reap the 
whirlwind in shattered nervous systems, weakened mental 
and physical activity, faded cheeks, sunken eyes, and pre- 
mature old age. Sleep is the greatest gift of the 
Heavenly Father. Irritability of temper, peevishness, 
uneasiness, insanity, a weary mind or body, languor and 
prostration, hypochondria, headache, neuralgia, broken 
spirit, sorrow, are all ameliorated, and some cured by: 230 
ERRORS OF DRESS AS A CAUSE OF DISEASE. 
“Sleep, that knits up the raveled sleeve of care, 
The death of each day’s life, sore labor’s bath, 
Balm of hurt minds, great nature's second course, 
Chief nourisher in life’s feast.’’—Shakespeare. 
It is observed by every practitioner of medicine, that 
those who sleep irregularly are most easily affected by 
direct causes of disease and are less amenable to means 
of cure, while those who take full and regular sleep 
recover most readily from sickness. The observation of 
this truth gave rise at one period in the history of 
medicine, to the theory that sleep was the natural cure of 
all diseases. It is certainly a great aid, and without it 
remedies would be of no avail. “Sleep reduces fever, 
quickens nutrition, increases elimination, soothes pain, and 
encourages healing of wounded surfaces. Whoever is 
first to discover the unknown cause of natural sleep, and 
the mode by which it may be commanded by art for the 
service of mankind, will be the greatest healer who has up 
to this age helped to make medicine immortal.” 
ERRORS OF DRESS AS A CAUSE OF DESEASE. 
Woman’s dress furnishes a valuable topic for the 
preacher, satirist and physician. That errors in this 
direction are a prolific source of indirect cause of disease 
is a fact which cannot reasonably be denied, but the whole- 
sale denunciation of woman’s attire, as is often done, 
results in very little good. The corset and manner of 
supporting the clothing are the subjects which have re- 
ceived most attention. The writer for a number of years 
took special pains to inquire into these subjects, and found 
the almost universal opinion of the sex to be in favor of a 
properly fitting corset. That it gives support to the 
muscles of the back, is undeniable. The wider diffusion 
of physiological knowledge has nearly done away with 
tight lacing, the principal objection to the corset. 
Another thing that is doing much to stop this silly and ERRORS OF DRESS AS A CAUSE OF DISEASE. 
231 
pernicious habit, is the existing sentiment of the male 
population. The ladies are fast learning that a waist 
which resembles a wasp is not the ideal of the opposite 
sex. That each wishes to appear to the best advantage 
in the eyes of the other is undeniable, and we trust that 
women will place their seal of disapproval upon many of 
the existing vices of the male sex with like beneficial 
results. 
As to whether the clothing should be supported by the 
hips or shoulders, we advise that the weight be divided 
between the two; the shoulders being allowed to do the 
minor part of the work. We realize that this is not in 
accordance with the prevailing opinion of either the ma- 
jority of medical men or the dress reform agitators. A 
moment’s reflection in regard to the shape of women’s hips 
and the mechanical construction of the skeleton, will show 
that the weight of the skirts is better borne from the hips 
than the shoulders. If the skirts are supported by the 
shoulders it adds to the weight resting upon the spinal 
column, which explains why women so often remark that 
they cannot wear their clothing supported from the shoul- 
ders, as it causes backache. The working woman whose 
garments perhaps weigh not to exceed a couple of pounds, 
and is supported from the shoulders and hips equally, 
places her arms akimbo when she stops to rest. Why ? 
To take a part of the weight off the spinal column. 
As before stated, a combination of the two points of 
support will give the greatest ease. Many of the corsets 
made at the present time have this idea incorporated in 
their construction, and instead of being detrimental, are, 
when properly fitted, a decided advantage to the wearer. 
Errors of dress are not limited to the one sex; many 
youth and young men are in the habit of binding up their 
clothing by means of a belt tightened firmly above the 
hips. The effect of this is identical with tight lacing. 
The pressure of a tight cravat, collar or shirtband, works 232 
ERRORS FROM CHANGE OF CLOTHING. 
great injury, as it retards the free flow of blood to and from 
the brain. Evils of a tight or badly fitting shoe or boot 
will be referred to further on in this work. 
ERRORS FROM CHANGE OE CLOTHING. 
In so variable a climate as that of most parts of the 
United States, many dangers spring from change of attire 
at different seasons; the latter part of autumn and early 
spring are the times of greatest danger. During the 
former period, light clothing is worn unconsciously too 
long; a sudden fall of temperature that causes excess of 
moisture, robs the half protected body of its heat; the 
surface bloodvessels are contracted and the blood is driven 
to the internal organs and lining membrane of the air pas- 
sages and alimentary canal, bladder, etc. This is rapidly 
followed by reaction with increase of temperature, and a 
cold exists which manifests itself in one individual by a 
cough, another by diarrhoea, and a third by an inflam- 
mation of the lungs or peritoneum. The same morbid 
conditions are apt to result from discarding winter clothing 
too early in the spring, before settled weather has been 
fully established. Another error of dress is the wearing of 
socks, stockings and flannels which contain poisonous col- 
oring principles. The chief poisonous dyes are the red 
and yellow coraline, substances derived from aniline; this 
coloring principle is extremely active as a local poison, 
causing an eruption of the skin of minute round pimples, 
red in color, and slightly raised. In severe cases the 
pimples fill with water, and if ruptured, form a superficial 
sore. This disease is readily cured by discarding the dyed 
flannel. Garments worn next to the skin should contain 
no coloring matter whatever. Those made from natural 
wool are preferable. 
We have in a brief manner noticed some of the most 
active causes of disease which are directly under the control CAUSES OF DISEASE. 
233 
of every person, so far as they pertain to that particular 
individual. None of these causes add to our happiness, 
to our mental or physical good. Why then risk health by 
indulging in any of them? No fear need be entertained 
of any physical or mental harm from abstaining from them. 
If you wish to keep the mind and body i 1 perfect health, 
strive to hold the passions in subservience to the reasoning- 
faculties ; this rule applies to every passion, whether it be 
born of an unnatural appetite, or engendered by personal 
pride and fostered by public opinion; whether innate or 
acquired. While exercising control of the passions, do 
not suppress such as are ennobling, as they are promoters 
of health, happiness and long life; but the destructive 
passions of anger, hate, fear, jealousy and grief, induce 
disorders of both mind and body. 234 
SYMPTOMS AND T1IEIR STUDY. 
CHAPTER IV. 
SYMPTOMS AND THEIR STUDY. 
Having learned something of the nature and causes of 
disease, vve are now prepared to proceed a step further and 
study the phenomena occurring in their course. These 
are called symptoms. Any change occurring in the body 
or its functions which indicates a deviation from the line 
of health, can be classified as a symptom. Thus change 
in shape, size or color of any portion of the body, observed 
by touch or sight; inability to make natural movements of 
a part; increasing or decreasing of the heart’s action, as 
indicated by the pulse; elevation or depression of the 
body’s temperature, as shown by the thermometer, are 
symptoms pointing to a diseased condition of some nature. 
In speaking of “ the symptoms” of a disease, is meant 
the morbid phenomena occurring in connection with that 
disease. The same symptom is often present in a large 
number of cases; for example, cough, headache, increase 
in temperature; there are, however, certain variations in 
different affections which give these and other symptoms 
distinguishing features. Thus a loud and barking cough, 
occurring with croup, could not be mistaken for that of 
pleurisy, which is suppressed, and of a hacking nature; 
neither would the headache of indigestion (sick headache) 
be taken for that occurring in the course of spinal dis- 
orders. One is located in the front, the other in the back 
part of the head. The distinguishing symptoms will be 
given in connection with the different diseases further along THE PULSE. 
235 
in the work. We wish, however, in this connection to 
notice a few of the imoortant things to be observed in 
i o 
every case, viz., pulse, temperature and tongue. 
THE PULSE. 
The pulse is produced by the contraction of the heart, 
forcing the arterial blood to the extremities. Each im- 
o 
pulse of this organ gives a forward movement to the blood, 
and owing to the alternate contraction and relaxation of 
the heart the blood is impelled toward the extremities in 
wave-like movements. If the finger be placed over an 
artery whiUi lies near the surface, a sensation is expe- 
rienced at every beat of the heart, as though the vessels 
were striking against it. This beating is known as the 
pulse, and is an accurate measure of the heart's action, 
both as to force and frequency. (See Chap. V., page 68). 
Heart, Arteries, Capillaries and Veins.) The radial 
artery, for conve ience, is usually selected for “ taking ” 
the pulse. This requires a little practice, but can be 
learned in a short time, and we advise the reader to begin 
at once by counting, first his own pulse, and then that of 
a friend, comparing one with the other until he or she 
becomes familiar with the procedure. A watch with a 
second hand is all that is necessary. Begin first and count 
the beats for a minute, then for one-half and one-quarter 
of this period, and by comparing the results it is easy to 
see whether a mistake has been made or not. An error 
likely to occur with beginners is counting the watch ticks 
rather than the pulse beats. To avoid this do not look at 
the watch only to get the point from which to begin to 
count, and when the beats reach the number you think 
they should for the period you are counting, again glance 
at the watch to see if time is up. An interesting and 
instructive exercise is comparing the frequency of the 
pulse in persons of different ages ; also difference in the 
same individual when occupying different positions, as in 236 
TEMPERATURE OF THE BODY. 
standing, sitting or reclining. In feeling the pulse three 
fingers should be used. By frequency of pulse is meant 
the number of beats in a given period of time ; quickness 
relates to the rapidity of the pulse wave, or in other words, 
the time required for the blood to pass bene . th the finger. 
The pulse may be frequent, but not quick, and vice versa. 
Regularity refers to the time occurring between suc- 
cessive beats. A regular pulse is generally considered a 
favorable sign. An intermittent pulse is one in which a 
pulsation is occasionally omitted. It sometimes occurs in 
persons in apparent good health, and under such circum- 
stances has no great significance. The same can be said of 
it when present in dyspepsia, as it occasionally is. Oc- 
curring, however, in the course of acute disease, it is an 
unfavorable sign, especially in pneumonia or articular 
rheumatism. 
As to conditions influencing the pulse, number of 
beats at different ages, etc., the reader is referred to Part 
First of this volume. 
TEMPERATURE OF THE BODY. 
A knowledge of the temperature of the body is the 
most valuable aid in the study of disease. In order to 
ascertain this a fever thermometer is indispensable, and we 
advise our readers to procure one, which can be done at 
most any druggist’s at a nominal price. The sensation 
communicated to the hand placed on the skin to ascertain 
the heat of the body, is extremely unreliable. A cold 
surface is often accompanied by high temperature, and 
vice versa, or the patient even may complain of coldness 
when the thermometer indicates increase of heat or the 
reverse. 
Before detailing the variations of temperature in 
disease it is necessary to learn the standard of health. If 
the temperature were ascertained at the vital centers it 
wou’.d be found to be ioo degrees Fahr. This, of TEMPERATURE OF THE BODY. 
237 
course, is impossible, and the standard fixed upon from 
a large number of observations taken in the axilla is 98.5 
degrees. In persons under fifteen years this would be 
increased to about 99 degrees. The normal temperature 
is raised by active exercise and by external heat. It is 
diminished by exposure to cold, by severe mental ex- 
ertion, and cold bathing. A safe rule to follow in ref- 
erence to whether disease is indicated by the temperature 
or not may be thus stated : A rise above 99.5 degrees F. 
or a depression below 97.5 degrees is a sure sign of some 
kind of disease, if the change be persistent. 
Fever is always attended by a rise in temperature. 
The increase to 100 degrees or 101 degrees only, signifies 
a mild attack. A constant temperature of 105 degrees 
implies severity of disease ; a rise of 106 degrees to 107 
degrees denotes danger, and a fatal termination may be 
expected if the thermometer shows a rise to 109 or 110 
degrees. In rare cases this latter high temperature may 
be present without a fatal termination, but in such 
instances it continues for only a short time and its occur- 
rence is not easily explained. We sum up what is gen- 
erally agreed upon by saying that as long as the tem- 
perature continues above the healthy standard the disease 
is not ended, no matter what the other symptoms may 
be. Whenever convalescence is about to be established, 
a regular fall of temperature will be noted ; a progressive 
increase of heat from day to day denotes a corresponding 
increase in severity of the disease. 
In making observations the morning temperature of 
one day should be compared with that of the preceding 
morning. The same rule should be followed in reference 
to the evening temperature, otherwise a mistaken opinion 
may be formed. This remark is particularly applicable 
to cases of typhoid fever. (In typhoid fever there is 
always an increase in heat from morning to evening, and 
a decrease from midnight to sunrise). In convalescence 238 
HOW TO TAKE THE TEMPERATURE—THE TONGUE. 
a rise in temperature indicates a probable relapse or the 
commencement of some other affection ; during the 
progress of fever, or in acute disease, a sudden and 
marked rise of temperature, insufficient to denote im- 
pending death, is evidence that some serious complication 
is about to occur. The temperature is less liable to fall 
below the normal standard, and has less significance. 
7 O 
HOW TO TAKE THE TEMPERATURE. 
File axilla is the most convenient place ; the instru- 
ment should be slightly warmed by the hand till it gets 
up to about 94 degrees, “the register” having been pre- 
viously shaken down, and then the bulb placed deep 
within the axilla, and the arm folded across the chest. 
With children it may be necessary to hold the arm in 
this position. The instrument should remain in this sit- 
uation ten minutes, and care should be taken that no 
portion of the clothing is between it and the patient’s 
skin. Eurther remarks in reference to temperature will 
be made as the different diseases are described and treated. 
THE TONGUE. 
The general indications afforded by the tongue are 
most important, since it not only sympathizes with dif- 
ferent parts of the alimentary canal and the organs con- 
nected with it, but more or less with the whole system. 
The mode of protruding the tongue should be observed, 
as it furnishes valuable information at times. 
If there is inability to protrude this organ, or it is 
done slowly, or when the organ trembles much in the 
attempt, there is either great prostration or some ex- 
hausting nervous disorder or cerebral disease. In the 
early stages of typhoid and typhus fever the tongue is trem- 
ulous. In chorea (St. Vitus dance) the tongue is sud- 
denly protruded, and as rapidly withdrawn. 
Dryness and moisture are conditions of the tongue THE TONGUE. 
239 
which should be carefully noted. Dryness indicates a 
general tendency to diminished secretions. It is most 
common in continued fever, in inflammation of the ab- 
dominal organs and serous membranes. When the tongue, 
after having been furred, becomes dry, rough and dark 
colored, a state of dangerous prostration is indicated with 
contamination of the blood. Moisture of the tongue is a 
favorable symptom, especially when it follows a dry, 
furred condition. The moisture first appears at the edges, 
and gradually extends. This change is usually followed 
by improvement of all the symptoms. 
The color of the tongue should be noticed. In anae- 
mia, after loss of blood, any affections of the spleen, 
and most chronic disorders, the tongue is pale. In 
inflammation of the palate, tonsils and throat, the tongue 
is red; in gastric and bilious fever and severe dyspepsia 
the redness is limited to the tip and edges. But of all 
the conditions of this member the most valuable is that 
known as furred. This condition is present in inflam- 
mation, in irritation of the mucous membrane, in diseases 
of the brain and its membranes, in all varieties of fever, 
and in almost all acute and dangerous diseases. It is not, 
however, always a sign of disease, as some persons habitu- 
ally have a coated tongue especially on rising in the morning. 
When the fur is white, thick, moist and uniform, it usually 
indicates an active state of fever, without inflammation 
or malignant tendency ; when of a yellow hue, there is 
generally disordered action of the liver, with retention of 
bile in the blood. Sometimes the red, swollen papillae 
project through the coating, giving the tongue a peculiar 
appearance ; this is well seen in scarlet fever, and as the 
fur clears away, the papillae are more distinct and give the 
organ a strawberry appearance. Much is learned from 
the manner in which a coated tongue begins to clean. 
Thus when the fur slowly retires from the tips and edges, 
thinning gradually as it retires, it is a sign that conva- 240 
THE TONGUE. 
licence will be rapid and permanent ; when it separates 
in flakes and patches beginning in the center or toward 
the root of the organ, leaving the surface underneath red 
and shining, the convalescence is apt to be tedious and 
interrupted. And lastly, when the crust is rapidly re- 
moved, and the exposed surface has a raw appearance, or 
glossy, or fissured, or dark colored, the termination is 
very likely to be fatal. DISEASES OF THE BONES AND JOINTS RICKETS. 
241 
CHAPTER V. 
DISEASES OF THE BONES AND JOINTS. 
RICKETS. {Rachitis). 
Rickets is a disease of early childhood, occurring 
usually before the age of ten, and is the most common of 
the “ diathetic” affections. It is due to mal-nutrition of 
the body, arising from improper feeding, either from a 
lack of knowledge as to proper foods, or from an inability 
to obtain the same, as a result of which the bones are not 
supplied with the proper component parts, the vegetable 
matter being largely in excess. This condition leads to 
bending of the bones from their natural position, and in 
time to permanent deformity. 
Symptoms.—Profuse perspiration of the head during 
the night, a desire to throw off the bedclothes and tender- 
ness of the general surface, are the early symptoms point- 
ing to this disease. These with general weakness of the 
whole body accompanied by a weakened or impaired 
digestion, an unnatural bending of one or more joints, 
makes a plain case of rickets. 
This disease is curable if taken in time and even after 
it has progressed to a considerable extent, the child if 
properly cared for, will “grow out of it.” 
Treatment.—Consists of an abundance of fresh air 
and sunshine, a plain, nutritious diet. Milk is of the first 
importance and next to it is beef tea. 
The child should be kept as much as possible in a 242 
FELON OR WHITLOW. 
reclining position, and neither standing or sitting should 
be allowed for any length of time. 
As the general health and powers improve, more exer- 
cise may be allowed, but not to the extent of producing 
fatigue. 
The bowels should be kept open, but not purged. 
Mechanical treatment of course calls for the aid of a quali- 
fied surgeon. 
In addition to above treatment, give the following as 
directed: 
No. 1. 
$ 
Phosphorus gr. i. 
HUeum Sdmygdalao dulcis. ... fl 3 vii ss. 
Sum SdcacicL 3 iij. 
Sdquae Shisi fl 3 X ss. 
M.-Sig.:—3j three times a day. 
Cod liver oil is an excellent tonic in this disease and 
can be given by commencing with five drops at first, after 
feeding, and increasing one drop each day until a tea- 
spoonful or more is taken three or four times a day. 
FELON OR WHITLOW. 
A Felon or Whitlow is an inflammation of the fingers 
or toes, and generally situated at the last phalanx ; the seat 
of inflammation being in the membrane (periosteum) next 
to and surrounding the bone. 
Note.—It often happens, that a prescription is given for the relief of diseases, 
which utterly fails. This, in the majority of instances, is due to the medicines used 
in compounding it. To those likely to be adulterated, or improperly prepared, we 
have appended T. I). & Co., meaning Parke, Davis & Company. We have prescribed 
the preparations put up by these manufacturing pharmacists for the past fifteen years, 
and always found them reliable; and would advise our readers to ask their druggist to 
use the preparations as indicated. If the remedy prescribed is not kept in stock by 
the druggist, a request on the part of the purchaser to have it ordered will insure its 
being kept in the future. FELON OR WHITLOW. 
243 
Its probable cause is a bruise, which accounts for the 
fingers being attacked much oftener than the toes. 
Attention is first called to this injury by a sharp prick- 
ing pain, not unlike that from getting a sliver or brier in 
the finger, in fact patients are often loth to believe that 
it is anything more. 
In twenty-four to forty-eight hours the pain becomes 
intense, and is of a throbbing character. About this time 
usually (not always), a little pus-like fluid forms at the 
point where the pricking sensation was first felt. This 
has a tendency to confirm the theory that the trouble is 
caused by getting a sliver in the finger. The escape of 
the fluid, however, gives no relief, nor is any obtained until 
the pus formed beneath the periosteum is given an exit. 
I his should not be delayed as there is danger of the bone 
becoming diseased with a consequent loss of a part or 
the whole finger, or even the entire hand. 
Treatment. Upon first suspicion of a felon, bind 
the finger firmly with a narrow tape one-eighth inch wide, 
commencing at the end of the finger and continuing to 
the joint next above the painful point. Let this bandage 
remain until the throbbing becomes unbearable, then re- 
move quickly and rest the finger for a few minutes and 
again rebandage as before, only a little more firmly, and 
again release and again rebind, continuing the treatment 
for one hour, at the end of which the finger will be 
reduced about one-third its usual size, and if you have 
“taken time by the forelock,” your felon will be cured. 
If, however, at the end of twenty-four hours the pain 
still continues, apply a poultice made from salt thoroughly 
dried over a hot stove, finely shaved Castile soap and 
Venice turpentine, one teaspoonful of each ; mix thor- 
oughly and apply, changing every twelve hours. Upon 
the fifth day visit your medical adviser and have a free 
incision made to the bone, after which apply the linseed 
meal poultice recommended in the back of this book. 244 
SPRAINS. 
It would also be advisable for you to take sufficient 
Epsom salts to move the bowels freely and follow with a 
general tonic, as prescribed in : 
No. 2. 
B 
(jtuiniae Sulph 3 ss. 
Mcid Kydrocldor. dil. 3 ij. 
S'r. fl 3 j. 
$1. Sxt. dVucis Worn. &. P To. ,j. “ 3 ss. 
Syrup Simp. q. s. ad. u | iv. 
M.-Sig.:—3j three times a day before meals. 
SPRAINS. 
Under this head we shall speak only of the joints in 
which this injury occurs most often. The word sprain is 
indefinite and gives but little idea of the extent of the 
injury, as it is applied to cases where the ligaments are 
only stretched, as well as to those where complete lac- 
eration takes place. Sprains occur in nearly all joints to 
a greater or less degree, but the most common locations 
are the back, knee and ankle. 
It is unnecessary to give the symptoms of this disease, 
as any one so unfortunate as to be afflicted with it will 
be able to recognize it without a description. 
Treatment.—In all cases of sprains, in whatever loca- 
tion, rest, with hot applications, is essential, the patient 
being allowed to assume such position as gives the great- 
est ease. In sprains of the back, after twenty-four to 
forty-eight hours, apply to the afflicted part the plaster 
prescribed in 
No. 3. 
B 
Smplastrum 0pii et JSeMadonnae. 
Sig.: —Apply to the part, as directed. 
In sprains of the back, where much swelling occurs, DISLOCATIONS. 
245 
it will be advisable to call the family physician, as the 
swelling may be caused by extravasation of blood. 
Sprains of the Ankle require further notice, as it often 
happens that an apparently trivial injury of this joint 
proves to be a most serious matter. The justly cele- 
brated Dr. Lewis A. Sayre of New York, is in the habit 
of speaking of patients suffering from this injury as “ being 
so unfortunate as not to break their leg,” believing a 
sprained ankle, if neglected or unskillfully treated, to be 
far worse than a broken bone, which would necessitate 
keeping the bed for a few weeks. A number of cases 
have come under the notice of the writer where a slight 
o 
twisting of this joint, considered as “not worth minding,” 
resulted in months of suffering, and in one case of loss of 
the part. 
Treatment. Rest, perfect and uninterrupted, is of the 
greatest importance. If the part is painful in the least 
or swollen, place the foot in a deep vessel nearly filled 
with water at the temperature of 70 degrees F.; then 
gradually add boiling water as long as it can be borne, 
keeping it at this high temperature for half to three- 
quarters of an hour. Then remove and bandage mod- 
erately firm. This hot water bath should be repeated 
four to six times in twenty-four hours, until pain and 
swelling are gone. The foot when not in the bath 
should be kept elevated. This treatment, if thoroughly 
followed, may save you many times the price of this work, 
and better far, days or even weeks of suffering, and pos- 
sibly the loss of a valued member. 
DISLOCATIONS. 
(putting out of joint.) 
Presuming that the reader has studied the illustrations 
and description of bones and joints, given in Part First of 
this volume, and has become familiar with the manner in 
which bones are bound together by the ligaments, to form 246 
DISLOCATIONS. 
joints, it will not be necessary to enter into a description 
of either again. 
By a dislocation is meant a displacement of one of the 
bones of which the joint is composed, from its natural 
situation. The accompanying illustration will very ma- 
terially aid the reader to an understanding of this term. 
Engraving No. 22. 
At the left shoulder and right elbow, the bones are 
seen to be “out of joint.” The changed appearance of 
the injured joint is very noticeable, when compared with 
the corresponding one of the opposite side. 
Symptoms.—Loss of motion, change of appearance, 
pain in the joint, increased by attempting to move the 
parts, are the symptoms that will indicate a probable dis- 
location, and furnish abundant grounds for the immediate 
calling of the surgeon. Until the doctor comes, endeavor 
o o 
to relieve the patient’s suffering, by supporting the injured HIP-JOINT DISEASE. 
247 
parts. Remove the clothing by cutting or ripping the seams. 
Apply cold water to prevent inflammation. The doctor 
when he arrives will need material for bandages, and it will 
be well to have these at hand, that no time may be lost. 
Material somewhat worn is better than new. A cotton 
sheet is about the best, and is always obtainable. Do not 
tear it, but wait and have the doctor show you how to do 
it, as a bandage that would be of proper width in one 
case might not do at all in another. Have a needle and 
thread where it is convenient, also some pieces of thin 
boards for splints. After the doctor arrives be prepared 
to render such assistance as may be required, remembering 
that the diagnosis of dislocations is not always easy, 
especially in fleshy persons, neither is the returning of 
the disjointed bone to its proper place. The latter pro- 
cedure may call for the administration of an anaesthetic, 
such as chloroform or ether. 
A strict compliance in every detail of after treatment 
as laid down by the surgeon should be observed, and the 
patient and friends can rest assured that in a very short 
time the joint will be as useful as ever. 
HIP-JOINT DISEASE. 
This is an inflammatory disease affecting the ligaments, 
membranes and bones of the hip joints. 
Most cases occur before the age of twelve years. It is 
a serious affection, though curable, and its treatment 
should be intrusted only to a qualified surgeon. If a child 
receives a hurt upon the hip followed by pain and limping ; 
if pain is caused at this joint by standing or walking; if 
there is any swelling or spasms of the muscles in the 
locality, we most earnestly urge that you seek advice as to 
the cause. Hip-joint disease may occur as late in life as 
forty years, or above. 248 
CURVATURE OF TIIE SITNE CLUBFOOT. 
CURVATURE OF THE SPINE. 
This deformity may be either lateral or angular. The 
former is due to the ligaments and muscles which maintain 
the spinal column in its erect position, becoming relaxed. 
The latter is caused by softening of the bones of the spinal 
column. 
Lateral curvature is more common, and is found in 
girls from ten to twenty years of age. Enervating, lux- 
urious habits and sedentary occupations are causes which 
lead to this deformity. 
Angular curvature, known as “Pott’s” disease, con- 
sists in a curving backward and upward of the spinal 
column, producing the deformity known as “hunchback.” 
The treatment of spinal curvature belongs to the do- 
main of surgery. 
CLUBFOOT. 
Clubfoot is a deformity of the foot in which it is 
changed from its natural position, and may be turned 
either out or in; or the heel may be drawn up so the toes 
only reach the ground, or the reverse. 
Combinations of these four forms may exist; for ex- 
ample, the foot may be turned out and the heel drawn up. 
Clubfoot is often hereditary. It may be congenital or 
acquired, and attacks males more frequently than females; 
especially is this true when it is hereditary. 
Chib foot is cured by mechanical appliances. About 
fifty per cent, first require an operation to divide the con- 
tracted tendons. These operations are without danger, 
but call for a skilled operator. 
KNOCK KNEE, BOW LEGS, FLAT FOOT 
AND WRY NECK. 
These belong like clubfoot, to the painless deformities. 
The terms are self-explanatory, and as that treatment 
belongs to surgery, we will not enter into its description. DISEASES OF THE SKIN AND MUSCLES. 
249 
CHAPTER VI. 
DISEASES OF THE SKIN AND MUSCLES. 
PARASITES. 
Without entering into a description of the different 
parasites that affect the skin, producing eruptions of 
various kinds, we wish to speak briefly of the very disgust- 
ing and annoying little pests that make different portions 
of the surface of the human body their home, not by the 
“right of discovery” but by right of having so done from 
earliest historical records. (Exodus viii: 17-18). 
The democratic ideas of this country, which permit 
the indiscriminate massing together of all classes in street 
car and railroad coach, make it possible for the most 
fastidious to possess for a limited time, a variable number 
of these loathsome and odious insects. 
LICE. ( Pediculi ) 
Receive their names from the locality upon which they 
are found, as pediculus capitis or head louse, pediculus 
pubis, pubic or crab louse, which attaches itself to the hair 
around the pubis and anus and sometimes -extends to the 
arm pits and breast. Pediculus corporis. Body louse 
found oftener in the clothes than upon the body. The 
head louse is most common. 
For body lice use (No. 4) for a wash for the body, 
and in addition dust the clothes with insect powder, and 
lay aside for a few days. 
Lice are easily gotten rid of by care and cleanliness, 250 
BALDNESS. 
avoiding tne sources of transmission, and in the thorough 
application of the following to the parts attacked: 
No. 4. 
T* 
SAcidum Voarbolwum ? j. 
Tdyuae 7losa& o ss. 
M.-Sig.:—Apply with a stiff brush upon retiring. 
BALDNESS. (Alopecia). 
If the reader has not done so already we advise that 
he read and study carefully what has been written, in Part 
I, of this volume, in reference to “ The Hair." From it 
will be learned, that the hair follicles and sebaceous glands 
are important in keeping the hair in its natural condition. 
If for any reason the hair follicle becomes diseased, the 
hair falls out. 
If the follicles are not entirely destroyed, a fine woolly 
growth is produced instead of the natural hair, which en- 
courages the person to believe that in a short time he will 
be rejuvenated by a luxuriant hirsute growth; especially 
is this true if just previous to its appearance a generous 
application of some highly lauded “restorer” has been 
made. Such hopes are fallacious. The most common 
cause of baldness is a hereditary predisposition. This 
is more likely to show itself in the male than the female 
branches of the family. 
Excessive brain work, over-anxiety, sexual excesses, 
early and fervent adoration are not causes of baldness as 
is shown from the fact that many profoundly educated 
persons, and also those of dissipated habits have luxuriant 
growths of hair, while on the other hand many persons, 
who neither think seriously or are burdened with care, lose 
their hair early in life. 
The wearing of heavy, ill-ventilated hats is next to 
heredity, the most frequent cause of baldness. This 
explains why men are oftener bald than women. The DANDRUFF. 
251 
beard never falls out for the reason that it gets an 
abundance of air and sunlight. If the hair bulbs are 
destroyed there is no possible way of developing new 
ones, and baldness arising from such a cause is incurable. 
When the hair begins falling out, and if the bulbs are 
not destroyed, much benefit will come from the use of the 
following: 
No. 5. 
(jtuiniae Sulpfi j)j. 
Mycerina fl. z j. 
Sfinct. “ 3 j. 
STctnolin “ 3j. 
Spt. Jtyrciae “ =ij. 
Sxt. 31. yfaborcmdi (P. &. & ($o.') .... “ 3 ss. 
d€qua,e Posae “ 
M.-Sig.:—To be well shaken and applied three times a week with a stiff brush. 
The hair often falls out after many acute diseases, 
such as typhus and typhoid fever, pneumonia, etc., and 
also during the puerperal state; all that is required in this 
case is clipping off the ends of the hair, washing the head 
two or three times a week with cologne, and after it is dry 
apply well down to the roots of the hair a little plain 
cosmoline or castor oil. 
DANDRUFF (Or Dandriff) 
This is a diseased condition of the scalp which gives 
rise to the formation of scales or particles, which are 
thrown off, giving great annoyance from the unsightly 
appearance it causes. 
Treatment. Do not use a fine comb or in any other 
way irritate the scalp. Brush the hair daily using a soft 
brush: sage leaves, 1 ounce; pulv. borax, 1-4 ounce. Place 
the sage in a tin porcelain vessel and pour over it 1 pint 
boiling soft water, and allow to simmer thirty minutes, 
strain, and add the borax when cold, then add 1 ounce 252 
CORNS, 
alcohol, and sufficient water to make 2 pints. After 
using the above, brush the hair dry and apply Prescription 
No. 6. 
In this connection we wish to caution the readers of 
this book as to the injuries often arising from the use of 
“hair dyes” and “hair restorers.” Almost invariably they 
are compounds of inert materials, sold under a high 
sounding name, or active poisons which, when absorbed by 
the pores of the scalp, cause headache, eruptions of the 
scalp, ringing in the ears, and weakened sight. This is 
also true, though not to so large an extent, as to advertised 
“hair pomade,” “unctions,” etc. 
Nothing is of so great importance in promoting the 
growth of the hair as a thorough cleansing of the scalp 
once a fortnight with soft water, and thoroughly drying 
with a towel, and at least every month having one-half to 
three-quarters of an inch clipped from the ends. The 
hair should be so arranged for the night as to permit the 
air circulating through it freely. The more the hair 1-, 
brushed and gently combed the better. If for any reason 
the hair becomes unnaturally dry or crisp the prescription 
given below, No. 6, will be found a most elegant 
application. 
No. 6. 
n 
(ileum, Tlicini {pastor 0il); best.... fl. 3 ij. 
Spts. Cologne {95%) “ 3 xiv. 
M.-Sig.:—Apply as a dressing. 
CORNS. 
Corns occur either upon the hands or feet, and consist 
of thickened skin, the result of interrupted pressure. When 
upon the feet they are produced by ill-fitting boots, and 
upon the hands by irritation from handling tools. 
“Soft” corns are located between the toes. They are BUNIONS. 
253 
more painful than the “hard” corns, and are more rapid in 
their growth, due probably, to a greater moisture. 
Treatment. Removing of the cause will in all cases 
effect a cure if commenced early. This applies to soft as 
well as hard corns. 
Well fitting boots, neither too small nor too large, 
are of first consideration. If the corn is of long standing, 
purchase of your druggist ten grains salicylic acid and 
mix thoroughly with a teaspoonful of fresh lard. Apply 
upon retiring, on muslin, of this salve a piece the size of 
a large pea, holding it in place by means of a well-fitting 
bandage. Wipe off in the morning, and cover lightly 
with cotton wool. Repeat this next evening, and upon 
the third soak the foot for thirty minutes in warm water. 
The corn can then be removed by gradually inserting 
the edge of a knife between it and the true skin until 
loosened, and then lift out with pincers or thumb and 
fincrer. 
o 
For soft corns, remove the pressure by inserting be- 
tween the toes any soft material wool direct from the 
sheep is recommended as being best—and dust the corn 
with the following : 
No. 7. 
5 
Xinci 0xidum .... gr. x. 
Jlorphia $ulph , “ j. 
M.-Sig.—Use externally as directed. 
In a short time this will become dry, and then treat- 
ment for “hard” corn can be used for its removal. 
BUNIONS 
Are usually situated at the second joint of the great or 
third of the little toe, and are caused from long continued 
pressure, producing a bursa. 
Bunions are more likely to occur from tight boots 
than corns. Shoes with narrow toes are especially liable 254 
INGROWN TOE-NAILS. 
to cause bunions, as by drawing the toes together their 
axes is correspondingly changed from its natural line. 
The bursa is first formed as a protection to the com- 
pressed joint, and if we heed the warning and remove 
the cause very little harm results. If not, we suffer the 
penalty in sleepless nights, and in extreme cases in the 
loss of a useful joint. 
Treatment. This is one of the cases where the old 
adage “ Prevention is better than cure” is particularly 
applicable. A shoe as wide as the foot should be worn at 
all times. 
If the bunion is red and painful, apply cold water 
dressing until inflammation subsides, then paint the part 
sparingly with 
No. 8. 
Spinet. Todi. comp fl. = ss. 
Potass. J'odidurn gi. v 
M.-Sis;.:—Use externally as directed. 
INGROWN TOE-NAIL. 
This very painful affection is due more to the soft 
parts being pressed upon the nail than from any ingrowing 
of it. 
Treatment. The first thing is to remove the external 
pressure. Cut the nail first straight across well down to 
the quick, then a V shaped notch in the center. Do not 
cut the nail at the sides. To draw the tender part away 
from the nail, take a strip of adhesive plaster one-third 
inch wide, and four to six inches long. Fix one end 
firmly to the skin near to the inflamed part, then carry it 
down and under the toe holding it taut, then up on the 
opposite side and attach it to the upper surface of the 
foot, holding it in situation by placing two or three narrow 
strips of plaster across it at right angles. If properly 
applied this will give relief, and in a few weeks effect a CHILBLAINS. 
255 
cure. Apply to the tender point, No. 8, and keep covered 
with a little cotton wool. 
CHILBLAINS. 
These are local inflammations which occur upon the 
hands and feet, and occasionally upon the different parts 
of the face, as the cheeks, nose and ears. 
The cause of chilblains is a sudden change of temper- 
ature, either from cold to heat, or vice versa. Persons 
with feeble circulation are more liable to chilblains than 
those with robust health. The cause in females is often the 
circular elastic used for supporting the hose ; by retarding 
the circulation it predisposes to an attack of this affection. 
Chilblain varies from a mild inflammation of the skin 
attended with redness, tenderness, and a mild itching, to 
a more severe inflammation, with blisters and intense 
burning. If the blisters are broken ulceration may follow. 
The irritation is always increased toward evening, or 
from external warmth of either fire or bedclothes. Cli- 
matic changes often increase the itching. 
Treatment. If the clothing in any manner interferes 
with the circulation correct the evil; if debilitated “run 
down” the prescription below (No. 9) taken four to six 
weeks, will be very beneficial. 
No. 9. 
If err i cit. at Strych 3 11 j. 
tyinum- album fl. 3 iv. 
Sin at. daulthariaa “ 3 j. 
Syrup Simp. q. s.ad. u ? vj. 
M.-Sig.:—3j three times a day after meals. 
As a local application use White Liniment (see do- 
mestic recipes) or paint the parts with Compound Tr. 
Iodine, using a camel’s hair brush. 
If there are no abrasions of the skin, No. 10 applied 256 
COLD FEET. 
with a soft brush is a most excellent and soothing rem- 
edy. The aconite can be left out if the skin is broken, 
and scratch it from the prescription before taking to the 
druggist. 
No. IO. 
ft 
S£in. belladonnas fl. 3 ij. 
a Sdconiti (br. /%.) “ 3 j. 
Sdcid 9t>arbolicum q x. 
<Wollodium z j. 
M.-Sig.:—Use externally as directed. 
The covering for the feet should be warm and loose. 
A tight boot or shoe is detrimental in the extreme. 
COLD FEET. 
Many persons suffer from cold feet, not from exposure, 
but various causes easily avoided, if properly understood. 
Women are by far the greatest sufferers in this respect. 
It is quite a common thing for the physician to hear 
them remark, “My feet are always cold, doctor, and it 
don’t seem to make any difference how much I warm 
them or what I wear, either.” A careful inquiry will, in 
the majority of these cases, show the cause to be due to 
the arrangement of the clothing. Any mode of dressing 
that interferes with the free circulation of the blood has a 
tendency to produce this condition. It is fair to presume 
that the reader is sufficiently familiar with the circulation 
of the blood—so graphically described in the chapter on 
Circulation—to understand the above statement. The 
blood carried by the arteries to the extremities, and re- 
turned by the veins to the center of the body, is easily 
influenced by mechanical interference, such as a too 
closely fitting corset, an elastic garter, a shoe one or two 
sizes smaller than the foot, and more particularly is it 
harmful if there is any cording at the ankle. Enfeebled COLD FEET, 
257 
circulation arising from causes other than mechanical ob- 
struction, also cause cold feet. 
Treatment. From what has been written as to the 
causes of this condition, the treatment evidently is to in- 
crease the amonnt of blood in the extremities. Wear 
nothing that will in any way obstruct the flow of blood 
to or from the feet. Strengthen the circulation by using 
No. 11, which is as follows : 
No. II. 
5 
Strychnia Sulph. crys gr. ss. 
Sflcohol fl. 3 ij. 
Sfinct. Sherri Mur “ 3 iij. 
Syrup Simp. cp. s. ad. “ z iv. 
M. By dissolving the Strychnia in the Alcohol, and then add the other ingredients. 
Sig.:—Ij three times a day before meals. 
As you value your health do not go to bed with cold 
feet as a sleepless night is sure to ensue, followed in 
the morning by a headache and an acidulous temper, 
which will add nothing to the happiness of yourself or 
friends. 
As an external application for cold feet, nothing is 
equal to cold water. In the morning immerse the feet 
in a basin of cold water for a few seconds only, Rub dry 
with a coarse towel and afterward use a flesh brush 
briskly, not only on the feet, but entire lower extremities; 
and wear only stockings made of wool. Care should be 
taken that the stockings are thoroughly aired before 
putting them on. At night before retiring remove stock- 
ings and warm the feet for some considerable time by 
holding the bottoms to the fire and then apply cold water 
as described for morning treatment. If you enjoy dancing, 
a waltz of five to ten minutes in your bare feet, letting 
them slide upon the carpet, will put the blood in circu- 
lation and increase the chances of a good night’s sleep. 258 
CARE OF THE FEET. 
BURNING OF THE FEET. 
Is as annoying as cold feet though not as common, nor 
is it as likely to lead to ill-health. Placing the feet for 
a few minutes in water as hot as can be borne often re- 
lieves this affection. 
SWEATING OF THE FEET. 
This may be relieved in mild cases by bathing the 
feet upon going to bed in equal parts of water and cider 
vinegar and allowing them to dry without wiping. In 
very bad cases use (No. 12) which has long been in use 
in the German army. 
No. 12. 
3 
Sdcid Salicylicum grs. vj. 
Starch “ xx. 
$inely Powdered Soapstone “ CLXxiv. 
M.-Sig.:—Use externally as directed. 
This should be sifted outside, and in the stockings. 
CARE OF THE FEET. 
It will be understood from what has already been 
written as to the causes of the numerous ailments of the 
feet, that the care of them is of more than ordinary inter- 
est. It has been seen that in a majority of these ailments 
the cause is traceable, directly or indirectly, to the manner 
of dressing the feet. No better proof of this is required 
than the fact that among the half civilized nations that 
wear little or nothing upon the feet, corns, bunions, in- 
grown toe nails, etc., are unknown. The importance of a 
properly developed foot is appreciated by every breeder 
or owner of a horse, and if about to purchase one of these 
noble animals he exercises the greatest care in examining 
its feet to see that they are in proper condition ; the fit of 
the shoe is scrutinized, and everything bearing upon this 
important member is inquired into, while, possibly, his WARTS. 
259 
children’s shoes interest him only as to whether they will 
prove serviceable or not, and he usually selects a pair a 
size or two too large in order to get full value for his 
money. The other extreme is to purchase shoes very 
much too small, that the feet may look “stylish.” One is 
equally as bad as the other, and both tend to destroy the 
beauty and usefulness of the foot, and in place of natural 
ease and grace the movement becomes stiff and awkward. 
At no time should a shoe be worn that is narrower 
than the foot either at the heel or ball. A shoe too short 
works equal harm as the narrow. The shoe should be of 
such size as to give comfort, and at the same time fit the 
foot properly. 
It does not need a knowledge of anatomy to convince 
the shallowest thinker of the sex which worship the idol of 
fashion that the foot is forced into a wholly unnatural 
position, and distorted by the heel being raised and the 
body made to rest on the ball of the toes, and we will not 
question the reader’s intelligence by entering into a 
description of the many evils this silly practice engenders. 
Shoes made from materials that are impervious to air are 
harmful, as the moisture that is constantly being given off 
from the feet, is prevented from escaping, producing a 
condition incompatible with health or comfort. The 
advice, “Keep the feet warm and dry and the head cool," 
is as valuable as it is old. 
WARTS. 
If the skin be examined with a magnifying or reading 
glasi numerous little elevations are noticed. These are 
the papillae of the skin. If several of these papillae are 
elongated and their covering thickened, it forms a wart. 
The cause of warts is unknown, and their disappearance is 
often equally puzzling. From this arises the many charms 
for removing them, such as selling them, throwing salt in 
the fire over the left shoulder, rubbing the wart with split 260 
barber’s itch. 
beans picked in the new of the moon, etc. Warts, from 
their great number and size, require treatment for their 
removal. For this purchase two cents’ worth of chromic 
acid and apply by introducing a glass rod into the acid and 
touching each wart. Two or three applications, at inter- 
vals of as many days, will be sufficient. Castor oil 
applied daily for two or three weeks will effectually 
remove them. This last mentioned remedy is a sure cure 
for warts on the horse. 
BARBER’S ITCH (Sycosis). 
This is an inflammation of the hair follicles of the 
beard terminating in the formation of pus. The skin 
about the beard also becomes red and swollen. 
This disease occurs only in males and those of adult 
age, and oftenest in those who have a tolerably thick 
beard. Dull razors, irritating soaps seem to act as exciting 
causes, but the real cause of the disease is unknown. 
Symptoms ajid Causes. The first symptoms are feelings 
of heat and stiffness, soon followed by little red elevations 
between the hairs of the beard ; these fill with watery fluid. 
After a time a yellowish fluid is noticed in the elevations, 
always having a hair in its center. These little elevations, 
or nodules, on the second day burst, and the contents form 
into a crust of a brownish color. 
As the disease advances the nodules, at first scattering, 
increase in number till the crust covers the entire surface 
in the vicinity of the attack. The appearance at the time 
somewhat resembles a fig, hence the medical name sycosis, 
from the Greek, meaning fig. Under the most skillful 
treatment this disease often continues for years, and when 
cured leaves a red glistening surface, devoid of beard, 
which resembles a scar. 
Treatment. Before retiring smear the affected surface 
thickly with either plain cosmoline or vaseline; over this 
place a linen cloth well covered with the same, and outside PIMPLES. 
261 
of the cloth oiled paper, or better oiled silk, and hold all 
in place by means of a four-tailed bandage. In the morn- 
ing wash off, using any good shaving soap ; after the crusts 
are all removed, shave. After shaving, any nodules that 
may appear should be opened, using a sharp knife or 
needle. This should be repeated—shaving and all—every 
other night. During the interval between shaving, anoint 
the face with (No. 13), rubbing in well. 
No. 13. 
$ 
<§ulpliur 3 j to 3 ij, 
0leum 71oscl& gtt-v- 
yfiosmoline | j. 
M.-Sig.:—Use locally as directed 
PIMPLES. (Acne.) 
Acne is of two varieties, viz., acne vulgaris and acne 
rosacea. The follicles often become obstructed by tha 
sebaceous matter hardening, thus forming what is known 
as a comedo. The accumulation of dirt and dust in the 
opening of the follicles forms what is vulgarly called 
“black heads.” When the sebaceous matter thus accumu- 
lated is pressed out it has a fusiform appearance, due to 
the shape of the opening through which it passes. The 
form in connection with the blackheads (dirt) has misled 
many to believing the sebaceous matter was a species of 
worm or larva. 
Acne consists of an inflammation of the obstructed 
follicle, forming comedones, and constitutes acne vulgaris, 
or “face pimples.’’ 
In a majority of cases, such inflammation continues 
until pus is formed, though it may stop short of this. 
Very few persons ever escape entirely from acne vul- 
garis ; the time intervening between childhood and man- 
hood or womanhood, is the period of usual attack. It 
never attacks children, and it is very unusual for acne 262 
PIMPLES. 
vulgaris to continue into advanced age. It attacks males 
oftener, yet many a young woman has had to regret an 
attack of it, at a time when she was desirous of making 
her debut in fashionable society. 
Cause. From the fact that this disease occurs with 
greatest frequency at the age of puberty, it is not unrea- 
sonable to suppose it is in some way connected with the 
changes taking place in the sexual system. There are, 
however, no good reasons to ascribe its cause to mastur- 
bation, sexual excess, or excessive chastity. Acne vulgaris 
occurs independent of any blood disorder, and the taking 
of "blood purifiers” will do no good, and possibly harm. 
The seat of the disease is the face, back and shoulders, 
upper part of chest, arms and buttocks. It appears most 
often upon the face. 
Treatment. Upon retiring rub each pimple with No. 
14, washing off in the morning, using soft water to which 
has been added a little pure castile soap, and wipe dry and 
apply mild bay rum. 
No. 14. 
Pydrarg. Sdmmon 3 ss. 
Gleum Posae ■ gtt. v. 
osmoline | ss. 
M.-Ft. unguentum et sig.:—Apply externally as directed. 
If the above does not prove satisfactory, we advise a 
trial of the following: 
No. 15. 
k 
Kuile de 'tfiade 3 ss. 
Sddipvs Preparat 3]*. 
Acne rosacea appears only upon the face, the sebaceous 
glands of the nose being the usual ones attacked, though 
the disease may extend to the forehead and cheeks, and in 
M.-et ft. unguentum. Sig.:—Apply night and morning—'■'•Tilbury Fox," London. MOTH PATCHES. 
263 
severe cases the whole face is involved. The inflammation 
in acne rosacea is of a chronic form, and does not terminate 
by pus formation. The nodules are larger than in acne 
vulgaris, and the color more like copper. This disease is 
very common among persons who drink wine and brandy, 
and constitutes the “ rum blossom.’’ Acne rosacea is not 
confined to those who tipple, and to infer that a person 
was intemperate because afflicted by this disease would be 
an unjustifiable conclusion. 
Many women during the climacteric period are troubled 
with acne rosacea even though they never touch spirituous 
liquors. This is very embarrassing to them from the pre- 
vailing opinion that the disease is the result of habitual 
wine drinking. 
Treatment, As soon as the disease makes its appear- 
ance, all alcoholic drinks must be discontinued, not ex- 
cepting even cider. The writer has seen several typical 
cases of this disease, the evident cause being hard cider 
drinking. If any derangement of menstruation exists it 
must be corrected. As an external application use No. 16. 
No. 16. 
SulpA. Sublim 3 ij ss. 
S4cid. S'annic 3 j ss. 
\dng. Petrolii | iij. 
M.-et ft. unguentum. Sig.:—Apply to the afflicted part upon retiring. 
—“G. H. Fox," London. 
MOTH PATCHES. (Chloasma.) 
This disease, known also as “liver moth,” is one of 
frequent occurrence. It consists of yellowish-brown 
patches on the forehead, chin, temples and lower parts of 
the cheeks. It is extremely rare in men. It is attended 
with no pain or other disagreeable symptoms, and other 
than its disfiguring the looks, is of little importance. 
There is hardly any disease, excepting it be of a serious 264 
SUNBURN. 
nature, which women dread more than “ moth patches.” 
This is doubtless due to the long continuance of the 
disease, and the many ineffectual remedies. 
Causes. These are very little understood. Many 
physicians ascribe the cause to inactivity of the liver; this 
we think is incorrect. The disease occurring, as it often 
does during pregnancy and disappearing after parturition, 
would, it seems, point to the generative organs as the 
location of the cause. 
Treatment. Any trouble of either ovaries or uterus, 
must be corrected, as the case may warrant. See diseases 
of the Ovaries and Uterus, in Vol. II. 
As an external application, use (No. 17,) which should 
be applied to the patches at bedtime. 
No. 17. 
>fiismuthi subnitras . 
Kgdrarg. 64mmoniat, 
aa. 3 j. 
Wng. PetrolU j • 
In the morning wash off, using soft soap or tincture of 
green soap; if the latter is used, apply to the discolored 
portion with a piece of sponge, rubbing moderately and 
immediately bathe with soft water and apply a little plain 
cosmoline. In a few days the discoloration will begin to 
disappear, and in the course of a fortnight will have nearly, 
if not quite, disappeared. Unless the disease affecting the 
internal organs be removed, it will be necessary to continue 
this ointment, otherwise the “patch” soon returns again. 
M.-Ft. unguentum et sig.:—Use externally as directed. 
SUNBURN. 
Ladies who sunburn easily can prevent it by washing 
the face with the juice of a fresh lemon, and allowing it to 
dry before going out. If sunburned, smear the face with 
cold cream made after the formula given under “ Miscel- 
laneous Toilet Recipes;” this will subdue the swelling. If FRECKLES. 
265 
this is not at hand, use fresh sweet cream. The discol- 
oration disappears in a few days. If, however, you desire 
to hasten the process, you can do so by using No. 18. 
No. 18. 
Kydrarg. ¥0Jilorid Voor gr. j. 
Smulston cf Sdlmonds fl. z ij. 
M.-Sig.:—Apply externally, using a soft rag or sponge. 
FRECKLES. 
These little blemishes, due to an over-production of 
pigment in the skin, can hardly be called a disease. They 
are, however, a very undesirable possession, and many 
persons, especially those with blonde complexions, are 
greatly annoyed by them. Why the coloring matter is 
deposited in spots is not understood, or why the sun’s rays 
should produce this result; therefore a cure cannot be 
expected. The affection can, however, be relieved by the 
use of remedies that cause a temporary disappearance of 
the freckles; for this use: 
No. 19. 
n 
Sdcid. Sdacti 
fflycerina 
aa. fl. 1 ss. 
M.-et sig.—Apply night and morning with a sponge. 
If a more active remedy is required, use the following: 
No. 20. 
$ 
Sdcid. Salicylicum grs. xxx. 
Spiritus Jiyrciae fl. |lj. 
M.-Sig.:—Apply night and morning, using a soft rag or sponge. 
Another method of removing freckles is by the appli- 
cation of pure carbolic acid, and is done by stretching the 
skin with the thumb and finger of the left hand and 
touching each freckle with a glass rod dipped into the 266 
SALT RIIEUM OR TETTER. 
acid and allowing it to dry ; this causes a whitish-yellow 
spot that peels off in from .two to four days, leaving the 
skin natural in color. 
SALT RHEUM OR TETTER. {Eczema). 
This is the most common of all skin diseases, and 
consists of an eruption of small vesicles closely crowded 
together. These when ruptured discharge a watery fluid 
which soon dries and forms a yellowish crust. The dis- 
charge is characteristic of the disease, and a piece of linen 
wet with it becomes, when dry, stiff as though starched. 
There are a number of species of this disease. When 
the vesicles are minute and unattended by inflammation, 
it is named eczema simplex. If accompanied with heat 
and swelling, and redness, denoting inflammation, it is 
called eczema rubrum. When the eruption affects the 
scalp it is called eczema capitis. If produced by the rays 
of the sun, eczema Solaris. There are other forms of this 
disease, but they are so rare that they need not be 
mentioned. 
Causes. These consist of local irritation, in some 
cases; in others, the cause seems to be connected with 
the digestive or menstrual functions, while in many cases 
there is no doubt the disease is hereditary. 
Symptoms. Itching, with an irresistible desire to 
scratch; numerous vesicles, discharging watery fluid, 
which forms a crust; the discharge acting upon linen as 
before described, are the symptoms that characterize this 
disease. 
Treatment. The causes of eczema being so different, 
it must follow that the treatment will vary greatly. A 
combination of local and constitutional remedies will suc- 
ceed oftenest. 
As an internal remedy cod liver oil is of first importance, 
commencing with a few drops, and gradually increasing 
the dose to one or two teaspoonsful, according to age, HIVES, OR NETTLE-RASH. 
267 
three times a day. As an external application No. 21 is 
one of the best : 
No. 21. 
9 
JCydrarg. <Sdrnmon 3 88. 
Petr0hi (carbolized) z j. 
M.-Ft. unguentum. Sig.:—Apply externally as directed. 
This should be rubbed over the affected surface, using 
the finger. Leave the crusts or scabs on as long as they 
will remain. If the skin looks red when the crust falls 
off the disease is not well, and the ointment should be 
applied again. In eczema of the head and face of chil- 
dren when the discharge is quite plentiful, do not dry 
up too rapidly, as it may affect the digestion, or cause 
catarrh of the air passages. 
If the disease does not rapidly improve under the 
above treatment, it will be advisable for the patient to 
see a dermatologist. 
HIVES, OR NETTLE-RASH. (Urticaria.) 
This is a non-contagious affection in which the eruption 
consists of prominent patches, usually red, Occasionally 
white, irregular in shape, and of uncertain duration. The 
eruption is accompanied by heat, burning, and intense 
itching. 
Urticaria has two forms, acute and chronic, the latter 
being very rare ; both varieties attack persons of all ages. 
Causes. This disease is due to some derangement of 
the organs of digestion, often arising from some particular 
article of diet; some individuals suffer from an attack of 
the eruption after the use of strawberries ; others cannot 
eat shell fish. The strange part is that food which never 
fails to produce an attack in one person, has not the 
slightest effect upon others. 
Treat7nent. Lime water made as directed under 268 
ROSE RASH OR FALSE MEASLES. 
domestic receipts will relieve the burning and itching, and 
in twenty-four to forty-eight hours effect a cure. This 
should be used both internally and externally. Take a 
teaspoonful every two to four hours and bathe the erup- 
tion frequently with the same. If this is not at hand, 
rub the surface with buckwheat flour, olive oil, or vase- 
line to allay the itching. Avoid such articles of diet as 
are known to cause the disease. 
ROSE RASH, OR FALSE MEASLES. {Roseola) 
This affection is of little importance, except that it 
is sometimes confounded with measles and scarlet fever. 
It commences with constitutional disturbance of vary- 
ing severity, denoted by fever, headache, loss of appetite, 
and general ill-feeling; the eruption appears in thirty-six 
to forty-eight hours, and is rose red in color and appears 
irregularly on different parts of the body ; is not raised 
above the adjacent surface. There is no soreness of the 
throat as in scarlet fever, or affection of the air passages 
as in measles. The rash continues from two to five days, 
gradually getting duller. One attack of roseola does not 
prevent a recurrence of the disease. There are no serious 
results following this affection. 
Treatment. A mild cathartic is all that is required. 
RINGWORM. (Tinea Tonsurans'). 
This is a chronic contagious affection confined to the 
scalp, and is recognized from the hairs having the appear- 
ance as if nibbled off, and are dry and brittle. The dis- 
eased part is round, and covered with a scaly eruption. 
Cause. The disease is due to a vegetable parasite. 
Treatment. Rub the affected surface with oleate of 
copper, first clipping the hair. 
If this should not effect a cure apply thoroughly over 
the diseased part, and for a short distance around, tur- 
pentine rubbed in well with the finger; after five minutes itch. 
269 
wash off with carbolic soap and afterward with hot water ; 
then paint with No. 22, using a camel’s hair brush : 
No. 22. 
h 
Jr. Jodi 3 ss. 
Potass. Jodi grs. viij. 
Sdqua dist. cf,.s. ad. fl. z j. 
M.-Sijt.:—Apply externally as directed 
This application is to be made twice a day for five 
days, and then once a day for five to eight days. Ten to 
fifteen days suffice for the worst cases. 
Another form of ringworm attacking the body is called 
Tinea circenata. It occurs in circular patches that are red 
in color and have a scaly eruption ; it is attended with 
itching. 
Treatment. Same as ringworm of the head 
ITCH. {Scabies.) 
Itch is due to the presence of an animal parasite, 
acarus scabiei. It is contagious,—requiring contact for 
its transmission. 
The eruption is of a vesicular character presenting a 
number of watery heads, distinctly separated from one 
another, and attended with violent itching. Close observ- 
ation of the eruption reveals little furrows extending from 
it, in the end of which the parasite lies, and can be seen, 
by means, of a magnifying glass, as a little white speck. 
Under sufficient magnifying power the acarus resembles 
somewhat, the tortoise. 
The furrows mentioned before are peculiar to scabies, 
and when present settle all doubts as to the disease. The 
head and face are the only parts of the body which are 
not attacked by scabies. The most frequent locations are 
between the fingers, wrists, fore part of the arms and 
belly, named in the order of greatest frequency. The 270 
st. Anthony’s fire, or erysipelas. 
exception to this is in children, when the disease is often 
upon the feet and buttocks. There is no febrile dis- 
turbance. The itching is not limited to the seat of the 
eruption, and is worse when the patient becomes warm. 
Treatment. Scabies never gets well of itself, but is 
easily cured, hence the saying, “It is no disgrace to have 
the itch but it is to keep it.” The following (No. 23) 
rubbed over the entire body twice a day will cure in ten 
to fifteen days: 
No. 23. 
Sulphur Sublim 3 ij. 
fiaham. Peruvianum ? j. 
Pntyri Petrolii z iij. 
M.-Sig.:—Use as directed. 
A warm bath should be taken every third night, apply- 
ing the ointment after, and retire. 
ST. ANTHONY’S FIRE, OR ERYSIPELAS. 
This is an inflammatory affection of the skin, due to 
blood poison of a specific nature, and varies in intensity 
from a diffused inflammation of the skin, to an inflam- 
mation of the cellular tissues, or the two combined. “It is 
characterized by the affected parts becoming of a shining 
deep red color, hot, painful and swollen. It attacks all 
parts of the body, but the integumenti of the face and 
head are the most common seats of ideopathic erysipelas, 
—that which arises from internal causes,—while traumatic 
erysipelas—that which follows wounds—may occur on any 
part.” It is both infectious and contagious. 
The local symptoms are preceded by constitutional 
disturbance, beginning with a chill and accompanied by 
fever, nausea, and sometimes vomiting. If in addition to 
these symptoms there is swelling and tenderness of the 
glands of the neck and throat, an attack of erysipelas may st. Anthony’s fire, or erysipelas. 
271 
be safely predicted, even before local symptoms appear. 
The pulse is increased in frequency, and the tongue is 
coated; bowels may be constipated or relaxed. Usually 
about forty-eight hours after the chill, a slight redness 
appears upon some part of the skin, quite frequently the 
side of the nose; this deepens in color and spreads rapidly. 
The redness disappears upon pressure but returns 
quickly. After three or four days from the appearance of 
the redness it begins to fade, and is followed by peeling 
of the skin. The average duration of this disease is 
twelve to fifteen days. Simple erysipelas, or that which 
attacks the skin only, is not a serious disease, but the 
deep seated, phlegmonous, is on the contrary, a very grave 
affection. The latter is accompanied with great swelling, 
and the formation of pus. The inflammation sometimes 
extends to the brain or its membranes, causing delirium 
and coma. 
Treatinent. The bowels should be acted upon first by 
giving one compound cathartic pill, followed in six hours 
with a dose of epsom salts, varying from a teaspoonful to 
a tablespoonful, according to requirements; the patient 
will be the best judge as to the amount, the object being 
to get a free movement without purging. After this give 
two grains of quinine every three hours. 
Local Treatment. Elevate the affected part and apply 
cloths rung from cold buttermilk, changing often. Food 
should be nourishing, such as milk, beef and mutton 
soups. Give plenty of fresh air, but protect the patient 
from drafts. This treatment will be sufficient for simple 
erysipelas. 
Phlegmonous Plrysipelas requires the attention of a 
skilled practitioner. If for any reason it is impossible to 
obtain such, follow directions for treating the simple form 
and in addition give No. 24 every three hours, alternating 
with the quinine : 272 
st. Anthony’s fire, or erysipelas. 
No. 24. 
Sr. Sherri mur A- 3 hj. 
Mycerina ■ .*... “ I ss. 
Pdqua q.. s. ad. u z ij. 
As a local application, instead of the cold buttermilk 
apply warm linseed meal poultices, changing every hour. 
If any quieting medicine is required, give No. 25, a table- 
spoonful every two to four hours, as is necessary to 
produce rest: 
M.-Sig:—3j every three hours. 
No. 25. 
3 
Chloral Kydrat « 3 j. 
Potass. Prom 3 ij. 
Syrup Simp II. | j. 
'94q,ua, q.s. ad. 11 z iv. 
M.-Sig.:--3 iv every two to four hours, as required 
Three to four ounces of pure milk, or its equivalent, 
should be given every three hours, five or ten minutes 
after the quinine. 
If erysipelas is epidemic in the locality, it is certainly 
safe to prepare for an attack, by moving the bowels with 
one or two compound cathartic pills, and following with 
three grains of quinine three times a day for a week. 
This will not prevent an attack, but will put the system in 
condition, so the disease will, in all probability, run a 
mild course. Individuals addicted to the use of stim- 
ulants are more liable to erysipelas than others. When 
epidemic it is very apt to attack wounds. 
Persons with wounds or sores upon their hands should 
use extreme caution in handling patients with this 
affection. All clothes used as dressing should be burned 
or disinfected. 
The conscientious physician will not perform oper- 
ations or attend a woman in confinement, while treating MUSCULAR RHEUMATISM. 
273 
erysipelas, without thoroughly disinfecting his person and 
clothing. 
MUSCULAR RHEUMATISM. 
This term is used to denote a condition of the muscles 
characterized by pain and tenderness. It is, however, 
more nearly allied to neuralgia than rheumatism. The 
disease develops gradually. The pain, which at first is 
slight, becomes more or less severe. If the muscles in- 
volved are kept at rest, the pain is very little. Any 
movement, on the other hand, which causes contraction 
of the affected parts, produces excruciating pain. This 
leads the patient to avoid, as much as possible, move- 
ments of the muscles affected. The pain often changes 
from one muscle, or set of muscles, to others. There is 
no redness or swelling of the parts as in articular rheu- 
matism. There is no fever or other constitutional dis- 
turbance in this disease. The appetite is usually unim- 
paired. The disease may be aaite or chronic. In the 
latter form it is not unusual to experience pain only when 
movements are first made after a period of rest, which 
soon disappear if the movement be continued. The 
acute form continues from a few hours to a week; the 
chronic, indefinitely. The chronic form of this affection 
constitutes the disease known as the “ rheumatis ” or 
“rheumatics” in common parlance. 
The muscles of all parts of the body are subject to 
attacks of this disease, and names corresponding to the 
affected location are used to thus designate it. If the 
muscles of the neck are involved, with inability to rotate 
the head (stiff neck) it is named rheumatic torticollis; 
when the loin muscles are affected, lumbago. This form 
is very apt to become chronic. 
Pleurodynia is the name used to denote rheumatism of 
the thoracic muscles. In this situation the disease may be 274 
MUSCULAR RHEUMATISM. 
mistaken for acute pleurisy. If there is very little or no 
fever and no cough, the latter can safely be excluded. 
Treatment. In whatever location muscular rheumatism 
occurs, the treatment is essentially the same. In the 
acute form bathe the parts thoroughly with 
No. 26. 
¥01 dor of arm ill, 80. 
aSdconiti 
Sr. 0pii . . . 
aa. tl. 3 iv. 
S£in. Tampb. comp. q. s. ad .... u ? ij. 
M.-Ft. linimentum. Sig :—Use as directed. 
The affected muscles should rest in the position most 
favorable to avoid contraction. Another very excellent 
application for this affection is oil of wintergreen, rubbed 
in well. If it is necessary to give any quieting medicine, 
get ten grains Dover s powder and divide into three equal 
parts, giving a powder every one, two or three hours, as 
is required to allay the pain. When the pain is not 
severe enough to confine the patient to the house, a very 
excellent treatment is the application of an “ aconite and 
belladonna ” plaster, and when this has been worn a week 
or ten days, remove and apply in the same place a 
warming plaster made of “pitch and cantharides." 
Treatment of chronic muscular rheumatism is very 
unsatisfactory. Take a blister made from the Spanish fly 
the size of a quarter dollar, apply to the affected muscles 
for about four hours, or till a superficial blister is pro- 
duced ; then remove a short space and cause another 
blister to form, continuing this until three to six (ac- 
cording to extent of tenderness) of these little bl sters 
are produced. As soon as the plaster is removed cover 
each blister with cosmoline applied on old cotton cloth. 
In three days’ time apply a fresh plaster to spot No. 1, 
and continue in rotation as before. If a thorough irri- 
tation was produced the first time, it will not be neces- MUSCULAR CRAMPS. 
275 
sary to leave the blister on so long a time. This treat- 
ment is a little tedious, but very successful. Rubbing 
the affected part for one-quarter to one-half hour with 
No. 26 will relieve. As an internal remedy, three grains 
of quinine, taken four times a day for a week, will be 
found efficacious. It is a good plan to employ the ex- 
ternal and internal treatment at the same time. Persons 
subject to this affection should avoid exposure of the 
body to currents of air, especially during sleep, or when 
the body is perspiring. Flannels should be worn at all 
seasons of the year. A daily sponge bath, and only suf- 
ficient clothing to insure comfort, will lessen the chances 
of an attack. 
MUSCULAR CRAMPS. 
Painful muscular contraction often occurs without any 
obvious cause. Such contraction is known as cramp. 
This may occur in any of the muscles, but those of the 
lower extremities are generally the seat of this affection. 
Coughing or sneezing sometimes produces cramp of the 
muscles of the abdomen. As a remedy for cramp of the 
lower limbs, Dr. Bardiley of England, recommends sleeping 
in a bed the head of which is ten to twelve inches higher 
than the foot. This is usually successful. Cramp of the 
bottom of the feet can be arrested by pressing them 
against a flat surface or standing on them for a few 
minutes. 
Involuntary jerking of the head, raising the shoulders, 
twitching of the muscles of the face, producing grimaces, 
are due to muscular spasm or cramp, and are largely under 
the control of the will. The origin of these, in many 
cases, is mimicry, which becomes a confirmed and irre- 
mediable habit. Children should be dissuaded from prac- 
tices which lead to the forming of these undesirable 
habits. 
Writer s Cramp is a spasmodic affection of the muscles 276 
MUSCULAR CRAMPS. 
used in writing, and is caused by over-exercise of the 
affected parts. If writing is attempted, by one laboring 
under this disorder, the muscles of the forefinger and 
thumb become either rigid or contract spasmodically, 
causing inability to guide the pen. Persons who use the 
needle constantly are sometimes affected in a similar man- 
ner. A curious fact in connecffon with this disease, is 
that the hand can be used in performing any other act 
without experiencing any difficulty. A cure is effected 
by rest, if commenced in timx Writer’s cramp can be 
often cured by using a penholder, one and a half inches in 
diameter, and seven to eight inches long, the upper end 
being “loaded” with a half ounce of lead. 
Alternate contraction or relaxation of the muscles in 
rapid succession, produces unnatural movements in dif- 
ferent parts of the body. This is noticed in advanced age 
in the tremulousness of the upper extremities, and the 
lateral motion of the head during waking hours. The 
trembling of old age is incurable. It sometimes ex- 
tends to the lower extremities. Shaking palsy is the name 
applied to this affection. A very similar condition to the 
above, occurs in early and middle life as a result of any 
cause that depresses the nervous system, such as the abuse 
of stimulants, opium, chloral and sexual excess. If the 
cause is relinquished before going too far, the system will 
recuperate. DISEASES OF TIIE BLOOD. 
277 
CHAPTER VII. 
DISEASES OF THE BLOOD AND 
ITS VESSELS. 
NOSH BLEED. (Epis taxis.) 
Bleeding at the nose frequently occurs, and in the 
majority of instances requires no treatment. A moderate 
discharge of blood from this organ is followed by a sense 
of relief, if pressure or a feeling of fullness exists in the 
head. No doubt serious results to the brain are often 
prevented by a discharge of blood from the nose, as the 
over-distended vessels of that organ are thus temporarily 
relieved. In a majority of cases it is beneficial, but may 
be so persistent as to call for measures of relief. 
Treatment. The patient should be placed in a cool 
room, the head be kept raised, and cloths wet with cold 
water should be held upon the forehead and nape of the 
neck. Press with the thumb and finger upon the sides 
of the nose just below the angle of the eye, with on : hand, 
and with the other hand press the upper jaw on each side, 
just external to the wings of the nose. This cuts off the 
supply of blood to the nose, and if continued for some 
considerable length of time, will check the bleeding. 
With a little experience, the beating of the arteries can be 
felt on each side in these locations. We advise the reader 
to endeavor to thus locate them, either upon his own face 
or that of a friend. Another very successful method of 
arresting bleeding from the nose, is to take a lump of 
cotton, tie a thread around it and push gently up into the 278 
SCROFULA. 
nose beyond the bleeding point. This can be determined 
by the blood running from the nose, as the flow will at 
first be stopped, but when the cotton is pushed beyond 
the bleeding point, will again commence; then with the 
thread draw the cotton down until it covers the bleeding 
point; a clot is soon formed and bleeding arrested. In 
twelve to twenty-four hours the cotton can be removed. 
This plan can be used in stopping nose bleed in the horse. 
Nose bleed occurring frequently, may indicate an im- 
poverished condition of the blood (anaemia) and calls for 
remedies internally. This is usually indicated by the 
patient looking pale, the membrane lining the eyelids is 
also paler than in health. 
No. 27 should be taken for six to eight weeks and the 
food should be nourishing, such as milk, eggs, lean beef, 
mutton, etc. 
No. 27. 
J&erri mur 3 iij. 
Strychnia# Sulph. cryst gr. 1 
Syrup d/olutani. q. s. ad. fl. 3 iv. 
M.-Sig.:—3j three times a day before meals. 
SCROFULA. 
This term is used to designate a chronic constitutional 
disease, the symptoms of which are, enlargement of the 
lymphatic glands, particularly of the neck, and a tendency 
to development of inflammation of the skin, mucous mem- 
brane and bones. The powers of resistance to disease 
and recovering from the same, are greatly diminished. 
The enlargement of the glands occurs chiefly in children 
after the period of infancy, and may continue for months 
or even years, without softening, and finally disappear by 
being absorbed. If not absorbed the enlarged glands 
become slightly inflamed and pus is formed which is dis- 
charged spontaneously if not freed by lancing. ANAEMIA. 
279 
Children of scrofulous constitutions are not more liable 
than others to affections of the lungs in after years. 
That children are born scrofulous is questionable. It 
would rather seem to us from the fact that the disease 
does not appear until sometime after birth, that it is due 
to ill-conditioned hygienic surroundings, or to some 
defect of nutrition, or the two combined. 
A condition resembling, if not identical with, scrofula 
is often observed in children whose parents are related 
by consanguineous ties. 
Treatment. If for any reason, scrofula is feared, the 
child should be fed from birth, with a view to furnishing 
all the elements required by the system. Nothing is 
equal to mother’s milk for this during the first year. As 
soon as the child is able to take food, it should be 
supplied in variety and quantity to meet every demand, 
milk, bread, potatoes, oatmeal, beef tea, etc. These 
combined with an abundance of pure air and sunshine, 
will do more than all the medicine in the materia med ca. 
Cod liver oil, if borne by the stomach, is the best remedy. 
Give as directed under treatment of rickets. 
ANEMIA. 
Anaemia is a term used to indicate a less normal quantity 
of the red corpuscles in the blood. The term is also used 
by physicians to denote an insufficient supply of arterial 
blood to any organ. Thu-, “anaemia of the brain,” or 
“lungs,” would indicate that these organs were not sup- 
plied with the usual amount of blood, and when used in 
the latter sense is the reverse of hypercemia. 
In this place we shall consider anaemia as a diseased 
condition of the blood, as defined at first. If a quantity of 
blood, say one-third, were drawn from the veins of a 
healthy person and the amount replaced by water, it would 
constitute a typical case of anaemia. 
If the deficiency of red g'obules be produced,—as is 280 
ANEMIA. 
not uncommon,—by any diseased condition of the system, 
a case of anaemia just as truly exists as in the former 
instance. The reader will understand that the blood need 
not be impoverished to a given per cent, in order that this 
affection be present, as the degree of impoverishment 
varies. 
This affection is of frequent occurrence, and has an 
important relation to many diseases. The symptoms of 
anaemia are pallor of the surface, especially of the upper 
lip and lobes of the ears. 
The mucous membrane of the eyelids and lips is also 
lessened in color ; the gums bleed easily. Persons suffering 
with anaemia are unable to endure cold, and are very liable 
to cold hands and feet; the pulse is weak; any exertion 
causes the heart to beat more rapidly; “shortness of 
breath” is experienced from slight exercise, such as as- 
cending stairs. Physical or mental acts require more than 
ordinary effort, and are soon followed by fatigue; an irri- 
table temper is not uncommon, and much anxiety respecting 
the health is expressed by the patient; in place of the 
natural buoyancy and energy, a feeling of lassitude and 
indolence is present. Palpitation is frequent, which leads 
to the belief that organic disease of the heart exists; neu- 
ralgia in various situations is a prominent symptom. 
Anaemia may be present in individuals who have an unu- 
sual amount of color in health without very much pallor 
being observed. The urine is usually light in color. 
Causes. Loss of blood as a result of hemorrhage from 
wounds or from the lungs, flooding, and the like ; deficient 
nourishment, the blood being insufficient in quantity or 
quality; prolonged expenditure of the elements of the 
blood from which the red corpuscles are formed, as in 
lactation and frequent child-bearing, are obvious causes of 
anaemia when it exists independently of the disease with 
which it is associated. 
At or near the age of puberty anaemia is apt to occur AN/EMIA. 
281 
in females without any appreciable cause, and is then 
known by the name chlorosis. The cause is, without doubt, 
the derangement of the assimilative functions dependent 
upon the changes taking place in the generative organs at 
this period. In these cases there is a great perversion of 
the appetite, and it is not unusual for the patient to crave 
indigestible substances, such as chalk, slate, tea grounds, 
etc. Lead and mercury, when introduced into the blood, 
and continued any length of time, cause anaemia. 
Treatment. The first point in the treatment of this 
affection, is to ascertain the cause and remove it. The 
next object is to restore the blood to its natural condition. 
This is best done by a nourishing diet; lean meat, milk, 
eggs, wheat bread, etc., in connection with out-door ex- 
ercise, which stimulates and strengthens digestion and 
assimilation. No. 28 is known as Blaud’s Pill, and has a 
reputation for the cure of ancemia and chlorosis, which 
extends into nearly every country having a written 
language. 
No. 28. 
W 
dderri Sulph. pulv.. , 
Potass. Tarb. puras. 
aa. 1 ss. 
J'ragacantha q. s. 
These pills should be taken one three times a day, 
to begin with, and every third day increase the dose by 
one pill until three pills are taken three times a day. 
This should be continued until the prescription has been 
fdled three times. If there is any aversion to pills, take 
M.-Ft. Pil. No. xcvi. Sig.:—Take as directed. 
No. 29. 
Kyctrarg. ffichloncli gr. j. 
Sodae Sdrseriiat grs. iij. 
Strychniae Sulph gr. .j. 
fyinum dderri -Sdmarum fl. | xvj. 
M.-Sig.—3 ij in water after meals. 282 
These remedies will prove sufficient unless the disease 
be associated with other affections of an incurable nature. 
SCURVY. 
SCURVY. 
Scorbutus. 
This is a diseased condition of the blood, produced by 
an insufficient supply of foods containing certain nutritive 
principles required by the system, in order that a healthy 
standard may be maintained. These principles are con- 
tained in vegetable food, hence the disease is frequent in 
those individuals who subsist for any considerable time, 
either from choice or necessity, on an exclusive meat diet. 
Symptoms. The appetite fails, followed by a sense of 
languor and an indifference, or even dread as to physical 
or mental exertion. There is great pallor of the surface. 
The most characteristic symptom of this affection is 
swelling of the gums, and the readiness with v/hich they 
bleed on pressure ; the gums are unnaturally red. Fetor 
of the breath is a prominent symptom. The ankles are 
often swollen, and the patient complains of pain in the 
loins and lower extremities. Palpitation is occasioned by 
slight exertion. The urine is high colored ; the pulse is 
slower than in health, but is increased in frequency from 
exertion. 
The above symptoms, in connection with the fact that 
generally a greater or less number of persons become 
affected under circumstances corresponding to those men- 
tioned as causing the disease, make the diagnosis compar- 
atively easy. If recognized in time, and carefully treated 
a recovery most always occurs. 
Treatment. It will be understood from what has 
already been written, that scurvy is preventive by dietetic 
measures, and one likely to be subject to circumstances 
causing the disease, should provide suitable means for 
intercepting it. 
Lemon juice, raw potatoes, pickles, onions, raw cab- 
bage, sauer kraut, green apples, green corn, are the articles VALVULAR DISEASE OF TIIE HEART. 
283 
possessing the greatest remedial and preventive prop- 
erties, and are named in the order of their comparative 
value. In administering these articles care should be 
exercised that the digestive functions are not disordered. 
To prevent this the patient should be allowed as a part of 
each meal, meat, eggs, milk, etc. (No. 30) should be 
given, a teaspoonful before each meal: 
No. 30. 
$ 
@uinia& Sulph „ 3 SS. 
Sr. Voapsici gtts. X. 
S'r. Serri mur 3 ij- 
£dq,ua& dist. y.s. ad (< 3 iv. 
M.-Sig.: —3j three times a day before meals. 
VALVULAR DISEASE OF THE HEART. 
From the anatomical description of the heart, given in 
Part P'irst, it will be learned that it has four sets of valves, 
formed mainly by folds of the lining membrane (endo- 
cardium) of this organ. The office of these valves is—as 
in hydraulics—to permit the flow of blood in one direction 
and prevent it in the opposite. These valves from various 
causes become impaired, and then valvular or organic 
disease of the heart is said to exist. These affections 
(lesions) are recognized by the physician by characteristic 
sounds called murmurs. It is not within the scope of this 
work,—as before stated in the introductory,—to consider 
at length incurable diseases, and for this reason we shall 
not attempt to instruct our readers how to recognize 
“heart murmurs.” It would not be of material benefit 
to them were they able to do so, as the affection is 
irremediable. 
It is often the case that serious results follow valvular 
lesions of the heart, but in a large majority of instances 
no considerable inconvenience is experienced. Probably 
not twenty-five per cent, of those having this affection are 284 
VALVULAR DISEASE OF THE HEART. 
ever cognizant of the fact, and those who are go about 
their daily avocations with very little annoyance therefrom. 
The writer has had a valvular affection of the heart for 
more than twenty-five years, and is happy to state that at 
no time within his remembrance has he been in better 
health than at present. We make this statement in order 
to emphasize the point, that valvular disease of the heart 
is not so grave an affection as is generally believed. It is 
a matter of regret that there are medical practitioners so 
unscrupulous and dishonest, as to encourage the belief 
that a valvular difficulty of the heart is next door to death. 
They spare no effort to convey the impression that the 
affection is of the most serious nature, and if they succeed 
—as they often do—in making their patients believe this, 
then with equal zeal endeavor to persuade them that an 
infallible remedy is at hand, and they are the only pos- 
sessors of the priceless discovery. We ad vase our readers 
to have nothing to do with such pretenders. The man, 
that unknown relieves you of your pocketbook, or its con- 
tents, while you sleep the sleep of the just, is a gentleman 
beside such unprincipled charlatans. If you suspect that 
you have an affection of this nature, consult a specialist of 
known ability and honesty, and do not begrudge his fee, if 
he tells you that your case does not call for medicines, but 
merely an exercise of the judgment in reference to those 
things that have an undue influence upon the heart’s 
action. If you know that you have “heart disease,” and 
wish something to steady and regulate the action of this 
organ, you can get nothing better than (No. 31) which 
should be taken in teaspoonful doses every four, six or 
eight hours, as is required to give relief. 
No. 31. 
31. Sxt. Sdily of the, fyalley (P. W. & Pol). fl. 3 ij. 
Syrup Simp “ 3 vj. 
Sdqua q. s. ad. “ c ij. 
M.-Sig.:—3j every 4, 6, or 8 hours, as required. FUNCTIONAL DISEASE OF THE HEART. 
285 
This, with proper hygienic treatment, consisting of a 
well-regulated diet, moderate exercise in the open air, a 
proper amount of sleep and abstinence from all excesses, 
will in a majority of cases give relief. 
FUNCTIONAL DISEASE OF THE HEART. 
A large per cent, of heart disorders come under this 
head, and are usually spoken of as “ sympathetic affections.” 
In this connection, we wish to explain that “palpitation 
of the heart" is not a disease, but a symptom. It occurs 
in both organic and functional diseases of the heart, and 
varies much in character and intensity ; at times consisting 
of a mere fluttering, and in other instances of a violent 
action of the heart, attended with excruciating pain and a 
sense of suffocation. Palpitation is the chief symptom of 
functional disorders of the heart, and usually occurs in 
paroxysms, which are variable as regards frequency of 
occurrence and duration. 
Palpitation occurring in paroxysms, the action at other 
times being regular; the attack occurring oftener at night 
than in the daytime; the patient being able to take mus- 
cular exercise without inducing an attack; the paroxysms 
coming on without any apparent cause; are the points 
which render it very probable that the difficulty is func- 
tional rather than organic. As a rule patients in functional 
heart difficulty are apprehensive as to their condition, 
often expressing fear of sudden death. This is the ex- 
ception in organic affections. 
Cause.—Functional disease of the heart is common in 
certain nervous conditions, as hysteria, and spinal irri- 
tation ; it is also a result of sexual excess and masturbation; 
anaemia is a frequent cause. Mechanical interference with 
the heart’s action—as in tight lacing, a distended stomach 
or colon, is a common cause. A not infrequent cause is 
the excessive use of tobacco, tea or coffee. 
Treatment.—Look for the cause, and if found, remove 286 
NEURALGIA, OR SPASMS OF THE HEART. 
it; if arising from anaemia, the measures recommended 
under treatment of that affection will be appropriate; if 
from indigestion—a very frequent cause—the diet must 
be regulated, especially must all articles known not to 
agree with the stomach be discarded ; all excesses must be 
avoided. If from tobacco, tea, etc., their use must be 
abandoned, or very much moderated. 
As a temporary relief from palpitation, the inhalation 
of spirits of camphor or ammonia, often gives relief. Pdf- 
teen to thirty drops of the aromatic spirits of ammo7iia in 
half a wine glass of water is also good, or Hoffman's 
anodyne, one-half to one teaspoonful in sweetened water, 
gives relief. If paroxysms occur often, wear over the 
region of the heart a belladonna plaster. 
Idle danger from functional disorders of the heart is 
extremely small, and never leads to organic affections. 
NEURALGIA OR SPASMS OF THE 
HEART. (A ngina pectoris.) 
This affection properly belongs with nervous diseases, 
but inasmuch as the pain is located in the region of the 
heart, and is closely connected with disorder of this organ, 
we shall consider it in this place. 
This disease is characterized by sudden and acute 
excruciating pain in the region of the heart. The pain is 
tearing or lacerating in character, and radiates in different 
directions, especially toward the left shoulder and arm— 
and sometimes both—and occasionally extends to the fore- 
arm or back. 
Paroxysms differ greatly, not only in regard to severity 
but as to their duration and frequency of occurrence also. 
The attack is attended usually—not always—with diffi- 
culty of breathing, and a sense of impending danger ; 
there is cold, clammy perspiration, and great anxiety of 
countenance. The patient remains quiet, dreading to 
move for fear of increasing the pain ; the surface is gener- EXOPHTHALMIC GOITRE. 
287 
ally pallid, occasionally the opposite. The disease usually 
occurs in connection with organic affection of the heart, 
but may occur independently of such difficulty. 
Treatment.—During the paroxysms treatment should 
be with a view to giving relief. A mustard plaster placed 
over the heart is a good external application ; while this 
is being prepared, rub the chest in the region of the pain 
briskly with the palm of the hand. A teaspoonful of 
brandy or whiskey, taken clear, will often give relief. 
The inhaling of ammonia or camphor is beneficial in some 
cases. The aromatic spirits of ammonia, 20 to 30 drops 
in a tablespoonful of water, is also useful. If it is known 
that the paroxysms continue for any considerable length of 
time it is best to give 15 to 20 drops of the deodorized 
tincture of opium as soon as the attack begins. Persons 
subject to attacks of angina pectoris should carry with 
them on all occasions the remedy which they have found 
by experience to give relief quickest. 
The treatment to prevent the attacks should be left to 
the medical attendant. Everything which tends to pro- 
voke an attack should be avoided, such as active exercise, 
mental excitement, over-eating, and the abuse of stim- 
ulants. Angina pectoris is a grave affection, but for- 
tunately is of rare occurrence. 
EXOPHTHALMIC GOITRE. 
This affection is peculiar, and once seen will always 
thereafter be readily recognized. The striking peculiarity 
is the protrusion of both eyeballs. This is often to such 
extent that the whites of the eyes are largely exposed. 
In connection with the above special feature there is en- 
largement of the thyroid glands and an increased action of 
the heart. There is more or less short-sightedness, but 
no pain in the eyes. There is invariable anaemia present. 
The disease is of rare occurrence. The causes are 288 
INFLAMMATION OF THE HEART SAC. 
unknown, but undoubtedly are closely connected with the 
functional nervous disorders. 
Treatment.—Should be placed in the hands of an 
experienced medical man. 
INFLAMMATION OF THE HEART SAC. 
(Pericarditis.) 
Pericarditis is an inflammation of the sac (pericardium) 
surrounding- the heart. The result of inflammation of this 
membrane, as with all others which are of a serious char- 
acter, is the effusion of liquid from the internal surface of 
the sac. The accumulation of fluid within the pericar- 
dium interferes with the movements of the heart, and 
endangers life to a more or less degree, corresponding to 
the amount of liquid thus effused. 
Causes.—This disease may arise from mechanical inju- 
ries, but is usually the result of a contaminated state of 
the blood, produced by other diseases, notably articular 
rheumatism, Bright’s disease, scarlet fever, and some 
others. The affection is developed in connection with 
articular rheumatism oftener than in any other, occurring 
in about one case out of six. 
The diagnosis of pericarditis is made from physical 
signs, and should be left to the family physician, as should 
also the treatment. Inflammation of the lining membrane 
of the cavities of the heart is called endocarditis. It 
occurs in the left side oftener than the right, and from 
this and the fact that the disease attacks the valvular 
apparatus more frequently than the general tract of the 
membrane, is explained why the mitral valves are diseased 
oftener than those of the opposite side of the heart. 
This affection generally occurs in connection with 
articular rheumatism, though it may appear independent 
of other diseases. The danger in endocarditis is small, 
being in this particular a remarkable contrast to pericar- RUPTURE OF THE HEART. 
289 
ditis. As regards diagnosis and treatment, we repeat the 
advice given under the affection just previous to this. 
RUPTURE OF THE HEART. 
The question is frequently asked the physician, Does 
the heart ever rupture ? It is understood, of course, that 
the question refers to spontaneous rupture, and not to 
the bursting of the heart resulting from mechanical force. 
A healthy heart never ruptures, no matter how great 
the strain. On the other hand if the heart be diseased it 
may burst from over-action or strains of other kind. 
The most common cause of rupture of the heart is 
jatty degeneration, a condition of the muscular fibers, 
destroying their powers of resistance. 
VARICOSE VEINS. 
This term is applied to enlarged tortuous veins oc- 
curring upon the surface of the lower extremities. This 
condition is recognized from the enlargement, which is 
soon increased if a bandage be placed between it and the 
heart. An early symptom of the disease is aching of the 
limbs on standing or after exercise. After this affection 
has existed for some length of time the bluish color pecu- 
liar to veins will make the diagnosis plain. 
Causes.—The affection is due to an impeded circulation. 
Treatment.—In the early stage this disease is very 
amenable to treatment, but later on it is one of the most 
obstinate, and while relief is certain a cure is the exception. 
Nothing equals a well fitting elastic stocking for vari- 
cose veins. The recumbent position should be main- 
tained for three or four days previous to measuring the 
leg for a stocking. 
BLOOD POISONING. 
By this term is meant a condition of the blood which 
has been produced by morbid materials getting into it, 290 
BLOOD POISONING. 
either by way of the veins or absorbent vessels (lymphatics). 
If an individual is affected by a wound and it becomes 
unhealthy (does not heal, or is not kept cleansed) the 
decaying tissue is apt to be taken up by the veins 
returning from it to the heart, and in a short time the 
blood of the entire system is contaminated. The same 
may occur in certain diseases accompanied by local inflam- 
mation, as in diphtheria, deep-seated erysipelas. The 
fever sometimes following confinement (puerperal fever) 
is another example of this condition, and is due to the 
absorption of putrid inflammatory products. Blood pois- 
oning when followed or resulting from local inflammation, 
as in the last named instances, is called septiccemia, and 
when following wounds, pymnia. In the latter case ab- 
scesses are likely to form in other parts of the body, as 
the lungs, liver, kidneys, etc. The severity of the attack 
of this affection is in proportion to the amount of morbid 
matter absorbed. A small wound may, however, be the 
starting point of severe blood poisoning. 
Symptoms.—Chills of more or less severity, sudden 
changes in temperature, profuse sweating attended by 
great depression occurring in the course of other af- 
fections, as above described, most positively indicate blood 
poisoning. 
If an internal organ is involved in this disease, the 
result is most always fatal. On the contrary, if the skin 
or extremities are attacked, recovery may be expected. 
When blood poisoning follows wounds resulting from 
injury or operat'on, it can be predicted previous to the 
symptoms above enumerated from the appearance of the 
wound, which changes in appearance ; the surface becomes 
glazed or possibly assumes sloughing action ; the dis- 
charge bloody and foetid ; the skin around the wound 
becomes red, or may acquire a peculiar dusky leaden 
appearance which is characteristic of this affection. If 
the brain be attacked there will be delirium of a low, mut- BLOOD POISONING. 
291 
tering kind; profound sleep from which it is hard to 
arouse the patient; in rare cases the delirium is of the 
acute form. The affection may terminate fatally in two 
or three days after the first appearance. Bad cases 
usually terminate during the second week ; some go on 
much longer. The longer a patient lives the greater the 
chances of final recovery. 
Treatment.—Both as a preventive and a remedial 
measure, fresh air stands first and cleanliness next. These 
agents, in connection with a nutritious diet, very much 
diminish the chances of an attack and greatly increase the 
probabilities of recovery if the disease has commenced. 
Milk is the best food, and may be combined with egg, 
and in occasional cases it may be necessary to combine 
stimulants with it. This, however, should be with caution, 
and the amount regulated by the wants of the individual. 
When the patient is addicted to the use of alcohol, it will 
be much more likely to be called for than in those who 
have not the habit. 
Diarrhoea occurring in the course of this affection, 
should not be checked too suddenly, as it seems to be an 
effort of nature to carry the poison out of the system. We 
do not advise our readers to treat the disease without the 
aid of a physician, but have endeavored to make it possible 
for them to recognize it. Blood poisoning occurs occa- 
sionally in the course of unimportant wounds or sores. In 
these cases it may be the medical attendant—if called at 
all—does not deem it necessary to make visits only at 
long intervals, and the disease may have gotten a thorough 
hold of the patient before any great thought is given to 
the matter. The writer was once called to attend a gen 
tleman suffering—so the messenger said— with rheuma- 
tism. Upon arrival at the bedside, instead of rheumatism, 
he found symptoms of blood-poisoning of unusual severity. 
The patient had a carbuncle upon the nape of the neck, 
which the friends considered unimportant, and its exist- 292 
ence became known only through seeking a cause for the 
symptoms which were at first unexplainable. The patient 
died within forty-eight hours from the time we first saw 
him. He had had soreness of the joints with chills and 
profuse sweating for several days before calling medical 
attendance. There is every reason to believe that this 
sad result could have been avoided had the friends pos- 
sessed the knowledge of diseases and their symptoms, 
which it is possible for every intelligent person to gain. 
BLOOD POISONING. CANKER SORE. 
293 
CHAPTER VIII. 
DISEASES OF THE DIGESTIVE 
ORGANS. 
CANKER SORE. (Follicular Ulcer of the Month.) 
This term is used to designate a small sore of the 
mouth, caused by the stoppage, swelling and ulceration of 
the mucous glands, which are very numerous on the inner 
surface of the lips. It will not be necessary to enter into 
a description of this affection, as there are very few indi- 
viduals but have suffered from it more or less. It is very 
liable to occur in some females at the menstrual period, 
during pregnancy and lactation. The remote cause is 
some disturbance of digestion. 
Treatment.—For the stomach, take 
No. 32. 
R 
Quiniae Sulph 3 ss. 
Sr. VBapsici fl. 3 ij. 
Sr. dVucis Worn “ 3 ij. 
Sr. TdJiei u | ss. 
Syrup Simp. q. s. ad “ z iv. 
For a local application use fifty per cent, nitrate of 
silver pencil, which can be procured at the drugstore. If 
this is not obtainable, use full strength. Sharpen the end 
of the pencil and apply lightly to the bottom of the ulcer. 
This treatment is rather painful, but as it lasts but a 
minute, and is very effectual, the reader will not regret 
M.-Sig.:—3 j three times a day before meals. 294 
MERCURIAL SORE THROAT. 
using it. For children 10 to 20 grains of powdered 
chlorate of potassa to an ounce of water can be used as a 
wash. 
MERCURIAL SORE MOUTH. (Pty >alisni.) 
This is more commonly known as calomel sore mouth. 
The affection is of rare occurrence at the present day as 
compared with a quarter of a century ago. In certain 
localities, however, where malarious diseases are prevalent 
(notably the Southern and Southwestern States), it is still 
the practice to give calomel, and this form of sore mouth 
is met with. 
The symptoms as given in the U. S. D., “Are a cop- 
pery taste in the mouth, a slight soreness of the gums, 
and an unpleasant sensation in the sockets of the teeth 
when the jaws are firmly closed. Shortly afterward the 
gums begin to swell, a line of whitish matter is seen along 
their edges, and the breath is infected with a peculiar and 
very disagreeable smell called the mercurial fetor. The 
saliva at the same time begins to flow, and if the affection 
proceeds the gums, tongue, throat and face become much 
swollen ; ulcerations attack the lining membrane of the 
mouth and fauces; the jaws become excessively painful; 
the tongue is coated with a thick, whitish fur, and saliva 
flows in streams from the mouth.” 
Treatment.—Use for a wash and internally No. 33, by 
taking a tablespoonful every four hours, and using suf- 
ficient of the same to wet the gums and mouth thoroughly, 
No. 33. 
B 
Potcissa 9%hlorat 3 iil. 
Mqua fl. | viij. 
M.-Ft. solution. Sig.:—Use as directed. 
Excessive secretions of saliva occur from other causes 
than the action of mercurial compounds upon the system. THRUSH. 
295 
These causes are not always apparent, but without doubt 
the majority of cases are dependent upon a diseased 
stomach, or to irritation in some other portion of the 
body, as in gastric ulcer, worms in the intestines, etc. In 
severe cases the quantity of saliva secreted is so great that 
the patient is obliged to spit constantly, the escaping fluid 
amounting to six or eight pints in twenty-four hours. 
Treatment.—The disease upon which excessive secre- 
tion depends should be remedied. As a temporary relief, 
use a wash of strong sage tea to which has been added a 
piece of alum about one-half inch square to a teacupful of 
the tea. 
THRUSH. 
Thrush is clue to a parasitic plant which grows upon 
the mucous membrane of the mouth. It occurs mostly in 
children during the first weeks of life.. Very rarely this 
affection attacks adults, and only in exhausting diseases a 
short time before death. The first indication of thrush 
in children is the evident pain in nursing. If the mouth 
be examined whitish points will be found on the inner 
surface of the lips, roof of the mouth, and tongue. In 
severe cases a cheesy miss is found in the positions men- 
tioned. This accumulation is easily removed at first, but 
as the disease advances it is more <irmly attached. 
Treatment.—If the baby’s mouth be washed twice 
daily with No. 34 there will be very little danger of thrush 
making its appearance : 
No. 34. 
Sodii Kyposulphis grs. ij. 
ddyua fl. l ij. 
The utmost gentleness must be used in washing the 
baby’s mouth, or more harm than good will result. Only 
the very softest linen rag should be used, and the same 
M.-Ft. solution. Sig —Use as directed. 296 
APHTPLE. 
piece but once. It is better that it should not be done 
than done roughly. 
APHTHA. 
This disease very closely resembles the one last 
treated; it occurs somewhat later, the most frequent time 
being the period of “cutting” the temporary teeth. The 
location in the mouth is the same as in thrush, viz., roof 
of mouth, anterior portion of tongue and inner surface of 
lips. 
The mucous membrane surrounding the spots is of a 
deeper red. This is not noticed in thrush. If the deposit 
is removed, the surface underneath is not ulcerated, which 
will make it plain that the affection is not diphtheritic 
ulceration. A day or so previous to the appearance of 
aphtha there will be more or less fever, restlessness, loss 
of appetite, and indications of sore mouth. 
Treatment.—Take Turkish rhubarb root, and grate 
one teaspoonful, place in a cup and pour over it four table- 
spoonfuls of boiling water, cover, and allow to simmer for 
thirty minutes, strain and give a teaspoonful, to which has 
been added one drop of essence of peppermint and a little 
sugar, every hour until the bowels are evacuated, then 
give (No. 35), a teaspoonful four times a day. 
No. 35. 
Potass. VeMoras 3 ijss. 
£4qua fl. z iv. 
M.-Ft. sol. et sig.:—3 j four times a day. 
This affection may last for weeks, but is not dangerous 
of itself. 
SORE MOUTH. 
Under this head we wish to treat of certain affections 
of the mouth which frequently occur, especially during 
the summer and fall months, but cannot properly be SORE THROAT. 
297 
classed under any of the diseases. In the condition to 
which we refer, there is more or less inflammation of the 
mucous membrane lining this cavity and covering the 
tongue, indicated by tenderness, pain caused by chewing 
or swallowing, and a deep red color of the affected part. 
The symptoms are very similar to that caused by taking 
into the mouth scalding liquid. The cause of this 
affection is not always clear. In many instances, however, 
it is due to some particular article of diet, more commonly 
from the fruits or vegetables, and in certain cases the 
disorder seems due to the article of which the individual 
is fondest. 
A plausible explanation of this is that too great a 
quantity is eaten, and as a result digestion is impaired 
which in turn gives rise to the affection of the mouth. 
Treatment.—The diet must be regulated, and to cor- 
rect the stomach difficulty, take No. 32 as directed under 
canker sore mouth. As a local application, use No. 36. 
No. 36. 
u 
Tulv. Sdlum 3 i j. 
Povj'd £xt.. Hydrastis can. (T. W. & Wo.') 3 iv. 
d/yrnph. S4dorata {pWhotc pond lily root.) 3 ij. 
M.-Sig.:—Use as directed. 
This can be applied dry to the affected part, or by 
adding a teacupful of boiling water to one-half tea- 
spoonful of the powder, and allow to stand in a warm place 
for thirty minutes. 
SORE THROAT. (Pharyngitis). 
This affection, is an inflammation and is indicated by 
the same series of symptoms as in other localities, viz., 
swelling, heat, redness, and pain. Pharyngitis may be 
acute or chronic. 
In the acute stage it constitutes one form of what is 
commonly spoken of as “a cold.” There is pain in 298 
clergyman’s sore throat. 
swallowing, and the patient is annoyed by a constant 
desire to swallow. The inflammation extends more or 
less over the surface of the throat and into the back 
part of the nose. The reddened mucous membrane is at 
first dry, but in twenty-four to forty-eight hours is covered 
with secretion which causes hawking and spitting. In 
about half the cases there is coughing, and from its 
character, is referred to as “coming from the throat.” 
Treatment.—The bowels should first be freely acted 
upon by using either Seidlitz powders or epsom salts, then 
take two grains of quinine every three hours for three to 
four days and then four times a day for an equal length 
of time. Use as a gargle four times a day 
No. 37. 
Potass. 'WKloras 3 iv. 
Sr. Serve mur fl. 3 j. 
Mycerina “ 3 jss. 
Sdyua y. s. ad a | iv. 
M.-Sig.:—Use as a gargle. 
CLERGYMAN’S SORE THROAT. 
Chronic Pharyngitis. 
This affection, known as clergyman’s sore throat, is 
extremely common, existing in various degrees of intensity 
and from its occurring frequently amongst the clergy, it 
has been named as above. It, however, does not occur 
oftener in this profession than in other callings. Public 
speakers and singers who suffer from this disease are apt 
to be apprehensive lest it may incapacitate them from 
appearing in public. There is little danger of this, as the 
use of the voice does not cause the affection. The 
disease is most frequent in individuals who are employed 
in vocations which keep them within doors, and require 
close application, with little or no recreation. clergyman’s sore throat. 
299 
Symptoms of dyspepsia frequently are present; palpi- 
tation is not uncommon; the injudicious use of wraps for 
the neck and throat is an exciting cause. The wearing of 
a neck wrap one day and leaving it home the next, is a 
bad practice, unless you desire to use the prescriptions 
accompanying this volume in a much shorter period of 
time than is intended by the writer. The protection for 
the neck and throat should be adequate, but of such 
weight and material, that it is adapted to everyday use 
during the season it is required. This advice is intended 
for both males and females. 
Treatment.—It must be borne in mind that this is a 
chronic affection, and necessarily treatment must be per- 
sistent. Hygienic regulations, as regards exercise, ven- 
tilation, diet and recreation, should receive proper at- 
tention. As a gargle use No. 38, night and morning. 
No. 38. 
Potass. Promide z j. 
SS. S.v. Zf/ydras. VSan. (non=alco.) P. Sj. P VSo. fl. | j. 
Sdqua dist. q. s. ad “ z xvj. 
M.-Sig:—Use one tablespoonful night and morning as a gargle. 
In addition to this, take internally of No. 39, a tea- 
spoonful in soft water three times a day for two months. 
No. 39. 
T* 
Sr. Suaiacv Sim. 
Sir. TubeSas. . . . 
Syrup Senegas... 
Syrup Simp.... 
aa. fl. 1 j. 
If this treatment is followed closely for two to three 
months we have no fear that the reader will regret the 
purchase of this volume. 
M.-Sig.:—3 j in soft water three times a day. 300 
QUINSY. 
QUINSY. ( Tonsillitis.) 
Acute tonsillitis is known as quinsy, and is characterized 
by rapid swelling of one or both tonsils, attended with 
pain and redness. There is difficulty in swallowing, which 
is very painful. By pressing down the tongue the swollen 
tonsil can be readily seen. If both tonsils are affected, 
the throat appears to be closed. There is more or less 
fever, and the skin is hot and dry. Many persons in early 
life seem to be subjected to attacks of tonsillitis. 
Causes.—Exposure to cold and getting the feet wet, 
are causes to which an attack of this affection is often 
attributable. In many cases the cause is not obvious. 
Treatment.—Act freely upon the bowels by using 
either castor oil, epsom salts or compound cathartic pills. 
As soon as the bowels move, give full doses of quinine 
every three hours. By a full dose, is meant the maxi- 
mum number of grains for the age of the patient. 
For local treatment, apply with a swab No. 40. 
Care should be taken that the application is made well 
down into the throat; adults can often make the appli- 
cation themselves better than an attendant. A deep 
inspiration should always be made before introducing 
medicine into the throat, as expiration will be the next 
respiratory act, and any material which does not adhere 
to the parts, is carried out, rather than into the lungs. In 
children, who are too young to follow directions, advantage 
should be taken of this point and apply the remedy imme- 
diately after the inspiratory act. Advantage should also 
be taken of the act of “gagging,” and push the swab well 
into the throat, giving it a movement from side to side. 
No. 40. 
Totassa 3 j. 
Sr. SPerri mur fl. 3 j. 
Mycerincu q. s. ad u 1 j- 
M.-Sig.:— Use as directed. CHRONIC TONSILLITIS. 
301 
Warm fomentations to the outside of the throat are 
beneficial; mustard plaster applied till the surface is red- 
dened is about the best. Individuals who are apt to be 
attacked by this affection, can often prevent it by using 
(No. 40), just as soon as the first indications are noticed, 
and by wrapping the throat in a cloth wet with cold water, 
over which are placed other layers of dry cloths. 
In children, where there is much fever with heat of the 
head, No. 41 should be used as directed. 
No. 41. 
Sr. Sdconiti gtts. V. 
Sdqna pura tf. z iv. 
M.-Sig.:—3 j every fifteen to twenty minutes to allay fever. 
CHRONIC TONSILLITIS 
Is a chronic enlargement of the tonsils. This is frequently 
present in children as well as adults, who live in localities 
where there is much malaria. It is quite frequently the 
case that enlargement of acute tonsilitis remains. 
This affection can be recognized if the enlargement is 
to any extent, by the peculiar nasal twang in speaking, 
and the distressing snoring during sleep. 
Treatment.—Apply twice a day to the enlarged tonsils 
No. 42. 
Potass. Prom... 3 j. 
S'inct. Serri mur fl.3 ij. 
fflycerinu ‘ ‘ z j. 
M.-Sig.:—Use as directed. 
Internally, the treatment must be in the line of tonics. 
If the patient is anaemic, the remedies advised when treat- 
ing of it should be used. Emulsion of cod liver oil is very 
applicable to cases when there is cough. Iodine should be 
put into a perforated box, and kept standing in the sleep- 302 
MUMPS. 
ing room. The gradual evaporation of the iodine has a 
beneficial effect. Alternating with cod liver oil, No. 43 
should be given. 
No. 43. 
Quiniae, Sulph 3 SS. 
Sxt. Slycyr. fluid fl.| j. 
Syrup Simp u z iv. 
If the tonsils appear white and hard, the hopes of 
curing them by medication have disappeared, and a sur- 
geon should then be consulted as to having them removed. 
M.-Sig.:—1) three times a day before meals. 
MUMPS. (Pa rotiditis.) 
Mumps is an inflammation of one or both parotid 
glands, due to a specific poison which is communicable by 
contagion. The affection most always occurs as an epi- 
demic, and usually in the autumn or spring. 
It generally commences with a chill, or chilly sensation, 
followed by slight fever, headache, and loss of appetite. In 
about thirty-six hours, as a rule, swelling of the parotid 
gland begins, in which the surrounding parts partake; 
there is soreness to the touch, pain, especially in chewing, 
which extends into the ear. There is little or no redness 
of the skin. If both sides are affected, there is usually 
one or two days intervening between the two attacks. 
Persons between eighteen and thirty years of age are 
most susceptible to the disease ; males are attacked oftener 
than females. There is no danger of the inflammation 
extending to other localities. The mammary glands in 
females and testes in males, occasionally begin to swell 
about the time the inflammation leaves the parotid glands, 
which leads to the belief that the disease has left one 
gland to attack another. This is incorrect. The swelling 
of the glands is due to the same internal morbid condition 
which gave rise to the enlargement of the parotid gland. INFLAMMATION OF THE STOMACH. 
303 
Treatment.—The patient should remain indoors ; diet 
should be light and easily digested; the swollen parts kept 
wrapped in flannel or cotton wool. As a soothing remedy, 
if desired, bathe parts with No. 26. 
d'he common idea that “ taking cold ” is a serious 
matter is erroneous ; the disease ends in four to eight days 
without any bad results. 
INFLAMMATION OF THE STOMACH. 
(Gastritis.) 
Acute inflammation of the stomach is an extremely 
rare affection excepting when produced from taking irri- 
tating substances into the stomach, such as carbolic acid, 
aquafortis, oxalic acid, etc. 
It is generally known whether such substances have 
been introduced into the stomach, therefore it is not 
necessary to give the symptoms here, as they will be men- 
tioned at length under poisons. The drinking of a large 
quantity of cold water has caused the disease, as has also 
over-eating of highly seasoned food, common forms of 
intemperance, but which do not entail to the sufferer and 
his friends as great public censure as alcoholic intem- 
perance. Insulted nature, however, is no respecter of 
persons, and gastritis, from whatever cause, is attended 
with the same serious results. This disease is apt to 
follow a debauch, and prove fatal. 
Symptoms.—There is intense burning pain in the 
stomach, attended with nausea and vomiting. The 
pain is increased by inspiration, vomiting is produced if 
food is taken into the stomach, many cases not even tol- 
erating water. Thirst, however, is great. There is 
marked tenderness over the region of the stomach. The 
pulse is increased in frequency. The temperature is mod- 
erately raised. The countenance is anxious and haggard. 
The extremities are cold, and in many cases hiccough 304 
GASTRIC FEVER. 
occurs. Death may occur in twenty-four hours or after 
the lapse of several days, the result depending upon 
the extent of injury caused by the irritating substance 
swallowed. 
Treatment. — If caused from swallowing any irritating 
substance the treatment should be followed given in 
chapter on poisons. If resulting from a debauch the 
patient should be kept in bed, and efforts made to arrest 
vomiting. Ice cold milk and lime water, in teaspoonful 
doses, given at short intervals, is very beneficial. To 
arrest vomiting when following a debauch, nothing is 
better than the one drop doses of Fowler’s solution. 
GASTRIC FEVER. 
This term is used to indicate a febrile action resulting 
from a mild inflammation of the mucous membrane of the 
stomach. It is also called erroneously catarrh or catarrhal 
inflammation of the stomach. 
The symptoms vary according to intensity of the 
inflammation. The appetite is impaired, eating is followed 
by more or less distress of the stomach, flatulence, and 
belching of gas. Thirst is a prominent symptom. The 
tongue is furred. As a rule, constipation exists. There is 
pain in the head and fever. 
The above symptoms are those present in a mild case, 
lasting two to five days, and usually caused from partaking 
too largely of highly seasoned food, and requiring as 
treatment complete abstinence for twenty-four hours, and 
for a few days thereafter a limited amount of milk with 
limewater and farinaceous articles. In cases of greater 
severity, the symptoms noted above are intensified, and 
the affection continues from one to three weeks, and may 
become chronic. These severe cases mostly occur in 
persons who habitually indulge in the free use of alcoholic 
drinks, a prolonged debauch preceding the attack. 
Treatment.—The patient should be kept in bed ; cold SICK HEADACHE. 
305 
applied to the head, and mustard to the skin over the 
stomach. To allay the pain and arrest vomiting, give 
No. 44 in a teaspoonful of milk every three to four hours. 
No. 44. 
k 
Jjtsmuthi subcarb 3 j. 
Morphias Sulph gr. j. 
To allay the thirst small pieces of ice may be swal- 
lowed or held in the mouth till melted. After twenty-four 
to forty-eight hours of abstinence from food, take equal 
parts of limewater and fresh milk, and begin with tea- 
spoonful doses every hour, and if well borne by the 
stomach increase gradually to two tablespoonsful, and then 
lengthen the time of giving to two hours. In beginning 
with other articles of diet the quantity should be small at 
the first. 
M.-et div. into pulv. No. xii. Sig.—One powder every three to four hours as required. 
SICK HEADACHE. 
Sick Headache, bilious headache, acute dyspepsia, are 
names indicating the same affection. Sympathetic head- 
ache is a term that defines more closely the nature of the 
pain than either of the above. We shall, however, use 
the name sick headache, as the disease is more generally 
known by it than any other. There is hardly any disease 
in the list of human ailments which is more universal 
or has caused more suffering than this. It is never fatal, 
and for this reason does not receive from medical men 
the attention that it otherwise would. Individuals suf- 
fering from this affection, in many instances, receive but 
little sympathy. The friends see them pass through oft- 
repeated attacks, until it becomes quite common to refer 
to the indisposition as “ nothing but the sick headache,” 
a remark which if it reaches the sufferer’s ears, is very 
apt to cause a wish which it is hoped the Recording 
Anofel will not make minute of. 306 
SICK HEADACHE. 
Symptoms.—There is always pain in the head, located 
in the frontal region, the point of greatest severity being 
just above the eyes. The pain is frequently confined to 
one side of the head. The time and manner of the attack 
varies with different individuals, but the majority of those 
who may be considered subject to the disease are pros- 
trated by the affection at times when least expected, and 
under most inopportune circumstances. If the headache 
comes on in the waking hours, the first indication—and 
one that the individual learns to recognize as prophetic of 
an attack—is a sensation of the eyes described variously 
as “blurring,” “flickering of the eyes,” “ floating of dark 
or bright spots in front of the eyes,” etc. 
Pain soon begins, which is increased by light, and in 
many cases by noise ; a sense of cold and chilliness is felt 
about the scalp and face ; the hands and feet are cold ; the 
pain increases in severity, and soon nausea commences. 
These symptoms continue—varying in intensity in dif- 
ferent attacks—from a few hours to a day or two. If 
vomiting occurs, the pain often disappears as if by magic. 
This is not always true, still there are very few cases but 
are relieved to a greater or less degree. Many patients 
are greatly relieved by sleep, though it be only a few 
minutes’ duration. The tongue is furred; the urine is 
high colored, and increased in quantity. The vomited 
matter in addition to the food, consists of a viscid mucus. 
Causes.—If the sympathetic symptom of nerves is 
studied, it will be learned that an intimate communication 
exists between the stomach and brain, and explains why 
the head aches in this affection, which is properly a dis- 
ease of the stomach. The condition of the stomach, 
which gives rise to the pain in the head, is not in all cases 
the same. It may be caused by inactivity of this organ, 
or the opposite. We have observed that persons who are 
disposed to attacks of sick headache invariably suffer from 
constipation. SICK HEADACHE. 
307 
The majority of cases are, without doubt, dependent 
upon a weakened digestion, which in turn is due to causes 
that are somewhat different in each individual, hence rem- 
edies which are effectual in some cases, are almost value- 
less in others. 
Treatment.—This must be with a view to relieving the 
attack when present, and to prevent a recurrence. At the 
very first indication of an attack it may often be avoided 
by the use of certain agents. The following have all been 
tried and are successful in a majority of cases : A cup of 
hot water; strong black or reci pepper tea, using ten to 
twenty whole berries of the former and a few grains of the 
latter to a cup of boiling water, and drinking as soon as 
cool enough; fifteen to twenty-five drops of aromatic 
spirits of ammonia in a wine glass of water; peppermint 
and water; the juice of an orange. After the pain has 
commenced the treatment should be confined to measures 
of relief. 
The room should be darkened, mustard applied to the 
pit of the stomach and back of the neck, warm appli- 
cations to the extremities, and give one drop of tincture 
nux vomica in a teaspoonful of water every fifteen minutes 
until six or eight drops have been taken. If the headache 
comes on soon after a meal, No. 45 will be of much benefit. 
No. 45. 
V 
Pepsin (Wor dial. (P. W. id To.). . . fl. | iij. 
Sig.:~One or two teaspoonfuls after each meal as may be required. 
In early life an emetic is almost sure to relieve, and 
inasmuch as children vomit with less retching than adults, 
it is advised that means be employed to procure a thorough 
evacuation of the stomach. A cup of tepid water, salt and 
water, or mustard and water, tickling the fauces, can be 
used with success. Twenty grains of ipecac mixed in a 
half cup of water, will in most cases cause free vomiting 308 
DYSPEPSIA. 
(see vomiting). To prevent recurrence of sick headache, 
it is necessary to look well to all measures which tend to 
tone up the digestive system, such as exercise in the open 
air, frequent and regular bathing, a restricted diet—all 
articles of food that are known to disagree with the 
stomach must be interdicted—regularity as to time of eat- 
ing is of the greatest importance; the hour for retiring 
should be fixed and persevered in. Late hours and sup- 
pers are bad for any one, but especially so for those sub- 
ject to sick headache. 
The bowels must be regular, or all means for preventing 
this affection will be futile. For remedies to relieve con- 
stipation, see remarks under that head. 
DYSPEPSIA. 
Dyspepsia is the name applied to functional disorder of 
the stomach, and means literally difficult digestion. Indi- 
gestion is used to indicate the same morbid condition. 
The affection may be either chronic or acute. 
In order to better understand this subject, the reader 
should first become familiar with the physiology of diges- 
tion in all its various parts, so thoroughly described in 
Part First of this volume. From it will be learned that 
the act of digestion is not confined to the stomach, as was 
supposed at one time, but continues throughout nearly the 
entire length of the alimentary canal; if we make absorp- 
tion a part of, or accessory to the act, we may say the 
whole. 
Acute dyspepsia is popularly known as a bilious attack ; 
a term which is objectionable, as it implies that the attack 
is connected with liver disturbance, an inference not borne 
out by facts. The causes of acute dyspepsia, “ are over- 
repletion of the stomach, the eating of indigestible articles 
of food, or an arrest of digestion by strong emotions, 
fatigue or other causes.” 
The symptoms are weight, fullness or pain in the region DYSPEPSIA. 
309 
of the stomach, accompanied by nausea, and sometimes 
vomiting, a general ill-feeling and a slight febrile action. 
These symptoms are followed by loss of appetite, coated 
tongue, an unpleasant taste of the mouth, and in some 
individuals looseness of the bowels, oftener constipation. 
The liquid vomited often contains bile. This no doubt 
has led to the belief that the disease was due to a surplus 
of this secretion. A moment’s study of engraving No. 11 
will show that the bile is emptied into the digestive tract 
some little distance below the stomach, consequently 
cannot be present in it, except as it is forced there by the 
act of vomiting. 
Treatment.—Persons subject to attacks of this disorder 
are apt to fall into the habit of taking large doses of 
cathartic medicine. This is not necessary. One com- 
pound cathartic pill at night followed in the morning by a 
Seidlitz powder, or a little epsom salts is sufficient. After 
a mild evacuation, a couple grains of quinine, three times 
a day, for a short time, with regulated diet, are all the 
measures of treatment required. 
Chronic Dyspepsia, or Indigestion.—Though never 
proving fatal, chronic indigestion is one of the most 
annoying diseases that humanity is subjected to. Of it, 
Carlyle wrote, “The accursed hag, dyspepsia, had got me 
bitted and bridled, and was ever striving to make my 
living, waking day a thing of ghastly nightmares.” 
Digestion is properly a process of solution requiring 
previous disintegration; hence it follows that indigestion is 
due either to imperfect disintegration or defective solvent 
power. Imperfect disintegration is mainly caused by insuf- 
ficient mastication. This defect lies either in the practice of 
eating hurriedly, or bad teeth; the former is to be con- 
demned without extenuating circumstances; the latter 
should be remedied by a visit to a first class dentist. 
Bad teeth not only forbid perfect mastication, but the 
pain incident thereto, often causes the food to be 310 
DYSPEPSIA. 
bottled, even when the individuals know full well they 
will suffer for it. 
Imperfect solvent action may result from impairment 
in the saliva, the gastric juice, or the pancreatic secretion. 
These defects must be met by the administration of 
remedies for increasing the flow of these secretions, or 
adding to their solvent powers. 
Symptoms.—Idle prominent symptoms of dyspepsia, 
are regurgitation, cardialgia, tympanitis and vomiting. 
Regurgitation, raising or “spitting up” portions of the 
food, is a common symptom in dyspepsia. The regurgi- 
tated liquid is usually sour, and is often flavored by the 
articles of food which have been eaten. For this 
condition we advise 
No. 46. 
5 
Spinet. 9$blumbae fl. § j. 
S4cfua q>. s. ad. “ iv. 
M.-Sig.:—3 j before each meal. 
And immediately after meals take of No. 45 as 
prescribed. 
When the liquid is clear, or nearly so, saltish or 
brackish, sometimes acid, and the regurgitation occurring 
when the stomach is empty, usually in the morning, it is 
called water-brash, and for which, take 
No. 47. 
$ 
IJismuthi subcarb 3 iv. 
Sig.:—One powder in a tablespoonful of water or milk three times a day before meals. 
Div. into pulv. No. xxiv. 
Cardialgia signifies pain at the portion of the stomach 
nearest the heart. It is of a burning character, shooting 
into the chest and up the oesophagus to the throat; this 
condition is vulgarly known as heart burn, and for its 
relief, take DYSPEPSIA. 
311 
No. 48. 
Ti 
Sind, d&ntianae. 
Spts. Sdm. tSdr.. . 
aa. fl. | j. 
Sdqua (f. s. ad. “ | iv. 
M.-Sig.:—3j one hour after meals. 
Tympanitis.—By this term is meant the accumulation 
of gas, either within the stomach or small intestines. A 
simple remedy for the relief of this is fifteen drop doses 
of essence of peppermint, in a little sweetened water; if this 
does not correct the trouble, use prescription No. 49, 
taking one pill before each meal: 
No. 49. 
5 
Pulv. Sxt. SVucis Worn. (T. W. P To.) . grs. lj. 
“ fthei “ xij. 
a Jpecae “ vj. 
u Capsid “ ij- 
M.-et div. in pilulae No. xij. 
When the food is vomited unchanged, or only partly 
so, it indicates that the gastric juice is deficient, and calls 
for a remedy to supply the want. No. 45 will be found 
a very efficient remedy for this condition. Limewater 
and milk, in the proportions of one of the former to three 
of the latter, is an excellent remedy for vomiting in dys- 
pepsia, when there is great acidity of the vomited matter. 
We have endeavored to meet the various conditions of 
indigestion by different prescriptions. It will be under- 
stood, without demonstration, that an attempt to meet all 
these conditions by the same prescription would be the 
height of folly. The same is true in reference to pre- 
scribing a line of diet; there are no rules suited to all 
case's. Individual experience is the best guide for select- 
ing food for this affection; one thing we have often 
noticed, if a person expects that an article will prove 312 
DYSPEPSIA. 
hurtful, it is much more likely to do so; and helps to ex- 
plain why the individual who is always watching the effects 
of different foods upon himself, sooner or later suffers from 
indigestion. In most cases, animal food is best digested, 
especially old and tender meats, plainly but well cooked. 
Pastry, rich puddings and sweetmeats are to be eaten 
sparingly, or discarded; ripe fruits in moderation, are use- 
ful. A very good rule for dyspeptics to follow is, aim to 
eat like persons in health and give the matter no further 
thought. Regularity in meals is an important point. 
More than three meals a day is sometimes advisable, and 
the amount of food taken should be regulated by the 
judgment, rather than the appetite. The latter is not to 
be relied upon in dyspepsia, as it is sometimes craving, 
thus leading the patient to over-indulgence or it may be 
the opposite, and not sufficient nourishment is taken to 
supply the demands of the system. Of the two errors it 
is better to eat too much than not enough. A mod- 
erate quantity of liquid only should be taken at meals. 
A cup of hot water, either with or without “the trim- 
mings,” is perhaps the best. A few grains of capsicum 
added to the boiling water makes it acceptable to many 
individuals who object to the plain water. Alcoholic 
drinks are positively injurious; the degree of harm is in 
proportion to the per cent, of alcohol they contain. 
(See article on Alcohol, Part I.) Exercise should be 
taken in the open air, but if taken simply as exercise, 
will do very little good. It should be combined with 
some occupation that tends to keep the mind of the 
patient from his or her disorder. Change of occupation 
is often advisable. Traveling, especially when the mind 
is diverted with a succession of novel scenes, is highly 
useful. Nothing in the line of medicine will be of so 
great benefit to the dyspeptic as agreeable company 
during and after meals. DIARRHCEA. 
313 
DIARRHCEA. 
The term diarrhoea is used to denote unnatural fre- 
quency of the movements of the bowels. It occurs as a 
symptom of certain structural lesions, such as those inci- 
dent to tuberculosis of the intestines, and the ulceration of 
typhoid fever. Occurring independent of such conditions, 
it is a functional disease, and may be either acute or 
chronic. 
As an acute affection it affects persons of both sexes 
and all ages, occurs at all seasons of the year, but most 
frequently in warm weather. This is probably due to the 
large proportion of fruit and vegetables in the food during 
this season, and to the effects of heat in weakening 
digestion. 
Causes. - Diarrhoea, when functional, is mainly due to 
defective digestion and over-indulgence at the table. 
Many individuals are sure to suffer from diarrhoea after 
eating certain articles of diet, which others partake of with 
impunity, Strong mental emotions may give rise to 
diarrhoea, many persons being attacked during a wind or 
thunderstorm. Instances have been recorded when the 
receipt of bad news has precipitated an attack of this 
affection. The effects of fright in producing sudden 
attacks of this disease are well known. 
Treatment.—If diarrhoea is due to errors of digestion, 
the remedies prescribed under dyspepsia should be used ; 
if from over-eating, a mild cathartic, such as rhubarb, a 
seidlitz powder, or epsom salts, should be given in suffi- 
cient quantities to act mildly upon the bowels. The first 
named is probably best adapted to most cases, and may 
be given in powder, tincture or fluid extract. The action 
of this drug can be told by the evacuations becoming more 
yellow. After the bowels have been acted upon, a dose 
or two of cholera mixture (see prescriptions, Vol. Ill) 
may be all that is required. If the diarrhoea continues, and 314 
DIARRHCEA. 
there is any pain, No. 50 should be taken in teaspoonful 
doses every two, four or six hours. 
No. 50. 
3'inct. 0pii dcodorata fl. | ss. 
tl Tlhci “ | ss. 
a VEatechu comp. (3. S. A).. . u ? j. 
(Sleum Sassafras gtts. xx. 
3inct. Sdavandulae comp. q. s. ad... fl. | iv. 
M.-Sig :—3 j every two, four, or six hours as required.—ltDr. Lomis." 
Diarrhoea is often unyielding to astringent remedies. 
In this instance we advise the giving of quinine in two 
grain doses for a week or ten days. When the move- 
ments emit an offensive odor the following is of great 
benefit : 
No. 51 . 
I* 
3'inct. flhoi 
a 0pii dcodorata. 
aa. 11. 3 iv. 
3ism at hi subcarb 3 iv. 
Sdcid Carbolic (para) 3 SS. 
3'inct. Sdavcndulac fi. 3 j. 
Syrup Simp. a. s. ad. “ ? iv. 
M.-Sig.:— Shake thoroughly, and give 3 j every two, four or six hours, as required. 
In administering medicine for diarrhoea it should be 
borne in mind not to check too rapidly. A good plan is 
to give a couple of doses every two hours, then wait. If 
the bowels do not move at the end of two hours, the 
remedies can be withheld till they do, and then give as 
required. 
In this disease, when the pain is at or near the um- 
bilicus, and quite constant, five drops of tincture nux vom- 
ica to a teacup of water, and of this a teaspoonful to be 
given every fifteen minutes, often gives excellent results. 
It should be continued for a couple of days. In chronic 
diarrhoea nothing will be found better than DYSENTERY. 
315 
No. 52. 
1* 
73ismut hi subcarl) ,, 3 iv. 
Morphia Sulph gr. j. 
M.-et div. in pulv. No. xvj. Sig.:—Take one powder night and morning. 
The diet must be carefully regulated. Care should be 
taken that the water drank is pure. Iced drinks must be 
taken with extreme caution. Daily sponging of the body 
with cold water during extreme heat will act as a pre- 
ventive of diarrhoea. This remark is especially applicable 
to children, and to those of enfeebled constitution. Diar- 
rhoea dependent upon structural lesion will be treated 
under the diseases in which it occurs. 
DYSENTERY. 
By dysentery is meant an inflammation of the large 
intestines, attended with mucus and bloody dejections. 
There are two forms of this disease, sporadic and 
epidemic. 
Sporadic dysentery generally begins with ordinary 
diarrhoea; that is, the evacuations are more or less com- 
posed of faecal- matter. Dysentery may properly be said 
to be present when the dejections are composed of mucus 
and water, streaked with blood. The amount passed at 
each act of defecation is generally small, but the act is 
frequently repeated, slight evacuation often taking place 
every hour or two, and sometimes after intervals of a few 
moments only. The evacuations are usually preceded 
by griping or colic pains. There is generally more or 
less desire to strain—tenesmus. These are the chief 
sources of suffering. The pulse, as a rule, is not much 
changed, and only in exceptional cases is there fever. 
The tongue may be coated or remain natural. Thirst is 
a prominent symptom. The duration of the disease is 
from four to twenty days. 
Causes.—Climate seems to have a close relation to 316 
DYSENTERY. 
the cause of this affection, as it is vastly more frequent 
in tropical than in cold or temperate climates. The 
disease sometimes occurs in cold weather, and is doubtless 
then due to impurities in the drinking water. 
Treatment.—Unless the bowels have been well re- 
lieved, the first thing is to administer sufficient castor oil, 
cpsom or rochelle salts, to produce a free movement, 
whichever can be best taken by the patient. This should 
be followed by an enema of starch, into which has been 
stirred thirty drops tincture opium (laudanum). If for 
any reason this cannot be administered, use No. 53, intro- 
ducing a suppository well up into the rectum, and repeat 
every four to six hours as required, to control the pain 
and evacuations. 
No. 53. 
B 
Jiorphiae S’ulph grs. vj. 
9oosmoline “ Lxiv. 
White Wax “ xx. 
0leum 3'heobromae “ xc. 
M.-et ft. suppos. No. xij. Sig.:—-Use as directed. 
If these are not retained, the following, pill, No. 54, 
should be taken every four hours, until relief is obtained. 
No. 54. 
B 
Tulv. @pii grs. xx. 
(! T&esinae “ xxx 
a Mcaciae “ xx. 
Mquco q. s. 
M.-et div. in pilulae xxv. Sig.:—One pill every four hours until relieved. 
The diet should be restricted to milk and beef soup, 
prepared from “ Mosquera's Beef Meal!' Small pieces of 
ice can be swallowed or held in the mouth to allay thirst. 
If there is prostration, heat should be applied to the 
extremities, and stimulants given in the form of hot 
milk. This disease rarely proves fatal. EPIDEMIC DYSENTERY. 
317 
EPIDEMIC DYSENTERY. 
Epidemic dysentery does not differ essentially from 
sporadic, excepting that it occurs in epidemic form, and is 
more liable to be attended with bloody evacuations; hence 
the term bloody flux, which is sometimes applied to it. 
Different epidemics vary greatly as regards gravity. 
In sporadic dysentery, the inflammation and ulceration 
are confined mainly to the rectum. In the epidemic form, 
it often extends over a larger portion of the large intestine ; 
the ulceration is deeper, hence the greater amount of 
blood. Dejections containing blood denote gravity of the 
disease. Cases, however, are recorded as terminating 
fatally in which this symptom was entirely wanting. In 
severe cases there is great prostration, indicated by the 
pulse becoming weak and frequent, the extremities cold. 
Causes.—The cause of epidemic dysentery is not as 
yet definitely known. It is without doubt, external to the 
body. The disease is not contagious, and the successive 
occurrence of cases among members of one family or com- 
munity, is accounted for by the fact that the persons 
attacked, are alike exposed to the special cause; and it is 
from such source the disease is contracted rather than 
from each other. 
Treatment.—In mild cases the treatment given under 
sporadic dysentery, will be sufficient. If there is much 
blood in the evacuations, attended with coldness of the 
surface, the patient must be put to bed and external 
warmth applied in the form of hot irons, bottles of hot 
water, etc. A tablespoonful of brandy with water or milk 
should be given, and repeated every hour or two. If 
brandy is not at "hand, give whisky ; only the purest of 
either should be given. The toleration of alcoholic stim- 
ulants in this disease is frequ ntly wonderful, patients 
taking without excitation of the circulation, quantities 
which in health would produce profound intoxication. 
The same is true in reference to the toleration of opium 318 
EPIDEMIC DYSENTERY. 
preparations. The suppositories No. 53, are an excel- 
lent remedy in epidemic dysentery, and may be used every 
two to four hours, to arrest the movements and allay pain. 
Should these not be retained, procure the following No. 
55, and give a teaspoonful every two hours until four 
doses have been taken. Then give at longer intervals as 
may be required to relieve the pain and control the 
movements. 
No. 55. 
h 
cMorphiae dulph grs. ij. 
3'inct. 7lhei fl. § j. 
Sdqucu 97innamomi q. s. ad. u 3 ij. 
M.-Sig:—Z j every two hours until four doses are given, then at longer intervals as directed. 
Quinine should be given in two grain doses four times 
a day, from the beginning of the disease till convalescence 
is established. From what has already been written, 
it will be understood that the object in treatment is to 
arrest the discharge of blood and serous fluid, and the 
reader must be guided by the indications. If the patient 
is going to stool every ten to fifteen minutes, as is some- 
times the case, No. 55 could be given every thirty minutes 
till four doses have been taken ; or if two doses accomplish 
the object, stop there and then give as required ; on the 
other hand, if the movements are two to four hours apart, 
a very good plan is to give after each evacuation. Diet 
must be strengthening, and nothing is better than pure 
milk, and next Mosquera’s beef meal, broth and tea. 
We wish again to call attention to the necessity of 
keeping the patient warm—mustard plasters to the feet 
and calves of the legs, and left on just long enough to 
cause redness—is effective for this. If the blood is kept 
at the surface, the hemorrhage from the bowels will be 
easier controlled. Cold water and ice can be given ad lib- 
itum. If the patient craves any special article of diet, give 
it in moderation ; we do not mean by this a moderate wish CONSTIPATION. 
319 
or desire, but an actual craving. Epidemic dysentery 
without complications will not prove fatal often if properly 
treated, and treatment is commenced in time. 
CONSTIPATION. 
Constipation denotes an inactive state of the bowels, 
the evacuations being deficient in number. Costiveness is 
often used in the same sense, but properly means an in- 
sufficiency in quantity, the number of dejections being 
normal. This is not a serious disease of itself, but is very 
important as leading to other ailments. The frequency of 
the evacuations will vary with the age and mode of living; 
children at the breast evacuate the bowels several times a 
day, adults once, and old people and those of sedentary 
habits, move rarely; some persons have habitually two or 
three evacuations daily, and on the other hand, some have 
an evacuation regularly every second or third day without 
any of the inconveniences of constipation. Experience, 
however, shows that one free evacuation from the bowels, 
is the rule of health. 
Constipation gives rise to various morbid effects, such 
as feeling of weight and pressure in the rectum, abdominal 
distension, flatulence and colic pains. Piles are often 
attributed to this affection. It also gives rise to pain in 
the head, dullness of the mind, flushing of the face, palpi- 
tation, and general ill feeling. From the violent straining 
efforts required in constipation, hemorrhage into the brain 
and rupture (hernia) have resulted. 
Causes.—Weakness of the muscular coat of the large 
intestines or the abdominal muscles, may give rise to this 
disorder. Habit probably has more to do with this con- 
dition than any other one cause. Children and many 
adults consider the act of defecation an annoyance to be 
escaped, and the desire is resisted, or the mind being pre- 
occupied, the call is unheeded, and the act is postponed 
until at length the sensibility no longer gives notice of 320 
CONSTIPATION. 
fecal accumulation. The result of this unheeding of 
nature is, the accumulation goes on, till the rectum and 
other portions of the large intestines become distended 
and paralysis follows. Deficiency of bile in some cases is 
no doubt a cause. The eating of food which leaves no 
residue contributes to constipation, as do any and all 
circumstances that tend to lessen the fluids of the body, 
as abundant perspiration or diuresis. 
Treatment.—From what has been written as to the 
cause of this disease, the treatment seems clearly in- 
dicated. Children should be taught early in life to at- 
tend regularly and promptly to the desire to evacuate the 
bowels. The habit will in a short time become fixed, and 
will be the means of preventing much indisposition. If 
constipation exists, it is advisable to commence with the 
simplest remedies. A glass of pure water taken before 
breakfast is often sufficient. This may be taken either 
cold or hot, as the patient prefers. Graham or brown 
bread once or twice a day, will relieve many cases; a 
baked apple with brown sugar for breakfast is excellent; 
the eating of a fig with each meal, or a few prunes or 
other fruit, will benefit many cases, and not a few will be 
entirely cured. More obstinate cases will require more 
active remedies. No. 56 taken in dessertspoonful doses, 
night and morning, will be found very effective as well as 
an elegant preparation, readily taken by children and 
others who find ordinary remedies nauseating. 
No. 56. 
Mascara, Cordial [P. &. P To.). . fl. z xij. 
Sig.:—Take as directed. 
If taking the above once a day will produce a free 
evacuation, this is all that is required; on the other hand, 
if necessary, take three times a day. The following pill, 
originating with the late Dr. Palmer of Michigan Uni- 
versity, has proven very efficacious: CONSTIPATION. 
321 
No. 57. 
Fulv. Sx. rS4lo&. Soc. (a m. f» ».) 
a u f£yoscyami; a u 
aa* 3 j* 
u u Jpecac; u a 
u u £/Vucis fyomicae-j a u 
aa. grs. xij. 
M.-et ft. pilulae No. cxx. Sig.—Dose, one to three pills at bedtime. 
It is best to commence these pills, one at bed-time and 
if it does not prove sufficient, take next night two. If 
two do not succeed in producing the desired effect, in- 
crease the dose to three, or even four. After the required 
dose is determined, continue for a week or ten days, then 
leave off one pill, and after another like period, again 
lessen the dose. If one pill, or even a half, succeeds in 
causing an evacuation the following morning, it is all that 
is required. The use of a syringe to produce an evacu- 
ation in constipation, is not advisable, and should be 
resorted to only in extreme cases, and discontinued as 
soon as the bowel is toned up by the above remedies. 
Medicines to purge the bowels should not be used, as they 
only tend to weaken, instead of strengthening the already 
distended and partly paralyzed bowel. 
The most important part of the treatment of consti- 
pation, is the adoption of a rule to solicit an evacuation at 
the same hour daily. The time of day most convenient 
should be selected, and reasonable time devoted to this 
function. This should be considered in the light of a 
duty, not to be omitted a single day except from most 
urgent causes. While endeavoring to establish a certain 
hour for this function, do not neglect or postpone the call 
to defecate, when it occurs, either after or before the time 
for the habitual performance of the act. If this plan were 
early taught and carried out in health, habitual consti- 
pation would be as rare as it is now frequent. This 
applies with greater force to the training of girls, most of 
whom become affected by the disease and suffer from it 322 
INTESTINAL COLIC. 
all their lives. The old Scotch physician’s advice is ex- 
tremely applicable as a closing remark to this very 
important subject: “Keep your mind easy and your booels 
open, and ye’re sure to do week” 
INTESTINAL COLIC. 
Colic really means a painful spasmodic affection of the 
colon, but it is used to signify any pain occurring in 
paroxysms, and of a griping character. To make the term 
more definite, the anatomical part affected is usually 
named in connection, thus hepatic colic, nephritic colic 
and intestinal colic. 
Causes.—Intestinal colic is generally due to the local 
action of articles of diet, and may result from excess in 
quantity, or the indigestible quality of the food. An 
attack of colic is produced in some persons by certain 
articles of diet, in consequence of an idiosyncrasy which 
is inexplicable. In these cases it does not seem to 
matter how little ( f the article is eaten, the colic is 
sure to follow; notably amongst these articles are honey 
and shell fish. 
Symptoms.—Intestinal colic is characterized by par- 
oxyms of pain, usually in the region of the umbilicus. 
This varies much in severity in different cases. The 
patient bends forward, draws the knees upward and twists 
about in various directions, often crying and groaning 
aloud. This continues for a few moments and then 
either ceases or is very much abated, to return again in 
a short time. An attack lasting for a short time and 
ending in one or more free evacuations from the bowels, 
is so common as to be familiar to every one. 
Treatment.—In mild attacks, some aromatic stimulant 
is quite sufficient, such as mint, anise, ginger, etc. Chlo- 
roform may be given in ten to fifteen drop doses, and 
repeated every fifteen to twenty minutes till three or 
four doses are given. A dose or two of the cholera HEPATIC COLIC. 
323 
mixture, given under domestic prescriptions will relieve 
most cases. Warm applications should be made to the 
abdomen and extremities. If these remedies do not 
relieve, give No. 58 every half hour, till the four are 
taken. 
No. 58. 
n 
Jlorphiae Sulplv gr. j. 
Pulv. Pepsinum purum {P. W. & cPo.) grs. iv. 
]3ismuth% Suhnit „ . u xij. 
M.-et div. in pulv. No. iv. Sig.:—One powder every half hour to relieve pain. 
In many instances one powder of the above will 
suffice. We advise, however, trying the other remedies 
first. If the bowels do not move in twelve hours after 
the pain ceases, give sufficient epsom salts to produce a 
free evacuation. The diet should be light for a few 
days following the attack. Intestinal colic, although an 
extremely painful disease, rarely if ever proves fatal. 
HEPATIC COLIC 
Is caused by the passing of a gall-stone through the duct 
leading from the gall-bladder to the intestines. 
Gall-stones (biliary calculi) form in the gall-bladder 
from the constituents of the bile, being mainly composed 
of cholesterine and the salts of lime. They vary much in 
size and also in the number contained in the gall-bladder; 
as high as two thousand have been found after death, 
and two or three hundred are not uncommon. They 
are not present in all individuals, and generally their 
existence is not suspected until they occasion, by their 
passage toward the intestines, paroxysms of hepatic colic. 
The time occupied in passage of a gall-stone, and the 
suffering, will depend on its size and irregularity of shape. 
Symptoms.—The pain in this disease is suddenly de- 
veloped and is continuous, that is, it is not attended with 324 
CHOLERA MORBUS. 
intervals of rest. In other words, the pain continues 
from the time the calculi enters the duct till it leaves it. 
The attack is often violent, causing the patient to writhe 
and try different positions, hoping thereby to obtain relief. 
Vomiting occurs in nearly all cases, and is repeated more 
or less frequently. The pulse is weak, but not increased 
in frequency; the face is pallid, denoting great suffering; 
chilly sensations sometimes occur. After a variable time, 
depending, of course, on the period occupied by the pas- 
sage of the stone into the intestine, the pain as suddenly 
ceases as it began. If the attack continues for any 
length of time, the urine will be dark in color from the 
presence of bile. 
Treatment.—From the symptoms it will be understood 
that it cannot be expected to entirely relieve the pain of 
hepatic colic, consequently the remedies must be with a 
view to ameliorating it. For this twenty-drop doses of 
tincture opii (laudanum) may be given every half hour 
until three or four doses are administered. If convenient 
to a physician, we advise that he be called in, as he will 
be able to relieve the patient more quickly by injecting 
morphine hypodermically. Warm fomentations should 
be applied to the seat of pain. For the vomiting equal 
parts of limewater and milk may be given. For the 
remedies to prevent the further formation of gall-stones, 
the family physician should be consulted. Nephritic colic 
will be treated under diseases of the urinary organs. 
CHOLERA MORBUS. (Sporadic Cholera.) 
This is a functional disease of the stomach and intes- 
tines, commencing with vomiting, which is speedily fol- 
lowed by purging. These two symptoms, occurring in 
quick succession, and recurring either simultaneously or 
in close alternation, constitute the prominent distinctive 
symptomatic features of this affection. The evacuations 
from the bowels and stomach are generally abundant at LEAD COLIC. 
325 
first, and largely composed of alimentary and faecal mat- 
ters ; afterward liquid is vomited which is acrid, causing a 
scalding sensation in the throat. In like manner the 
dejections become liquid, giving rise to a burning sen- 
sation at the anus. The acts of purging are preceded 
and accompanied by colic pains, which are temporarily 
relieved by a free movement of the bowels. There is 
usually dryness of the throat and intense thirst; the pulse 
is more or less accelerated and feeble ; temperature is 
changed ; skin is cool, and frequently bathed in clammy 
sweat. The symptoms may continue for several hours 
and then gradually diminish, leaving the patient much 
weakened, but from which a rapid recovery follows. 
Causes.—Sporadic cholera, in the majority of cases, is 
due to indigestion resulting from the use of improperly 
cooked food, under or over-ripe fruit, etc. In many cases 
the cause is not easily determined. 
Treatment.—Take every half hour a teaspoonful dose 
of the cholera mixture before referred to. (Prescription 
in Vol. III.) This is an affection in which the hypodermic 
administration of medicine is highly beneficial, as there is 
no possibility of its being vomited, and further, its prompt 
action prevents much suffering. The patient must not be 
allowed to drink, as it only helps to prolong the attack. 
To relieve the thirst small pieces of ice may be held in the 
mouth. 
Limewater and milk in equal proportions may be 
given in tablespoonful doses to allay the thirst. If there 
is much prostration whisky or brandy may be combined 
with the last two articles in the proportions of a tea- 
spoonful of the stimulant to a tablespoonful of the other 
two. As before stated, this disease rarely proves fatal. 
LEAD COLIC. 
Painter’s colic, plumber’s colic, Devonshire colic, dry 
bellyache, are names which have been applied to this dis- 
ease at different times and places. 326 
LEAD COLIC. 
Symptoms.—As in other forms of colic, pain is the 
prominent symptom. In this complaint it is at first com- 
paratively slight, but gradually increases until it becomes 
intense. The pain is non-spasmodic, and generally located 
at or near the umbilicus, shooting into the back, genital 
organs and in other directions. The bowels are consti- 
pated; the exception to this rule is rare. The urine is 
scanty. The pulse is slower than in health, and irregular. 
There is pallor of the countenance, and a peculiar blue or 
slate discoloration of the gums at their junction with the 
teeth, which is distinctively characteristic of this disease. 
“Wrist drop ” may not always be present. 
Causes.—The disease is due to the introduction of 
lead into the system in sufficient quantities to give rise to 
its morbid effect, to which is applied the term “ plumbism.” 
The modes in which lead may be introduced into the system 
are numerous; it may take place through the lungs, 
stomach, mucous membrane or skin. 
Painters, plumbers and compositors, are subject to this 
complaint. Drinking of liquids of any kind which have 
been stored in receptacles lined with lead, or even drawn 
through lead pipes or faucets, are prolific sources of the 
disease. Hair dyes and cosmetics are another source. 
Treatment.— To relieve the pain apply to the abdomen 
a thin woolen cloth, seven to eight inches square, saturated 
with No. 59, and cover over entirely with oiled paper, and 
outside of this a couple of thicknesses of cotton cloth and 
hold all in place by a bandage pinned at the back. 
No. 59. 
Sr. 
(Made from P. D. & Co.’s normal liquid.) 
Chloroform 
Mycervnci 
aa. fl. i j. 
M.-Sig.: — Apply externally as directed. Shake well before using. 
A warm bath is also very efficacious in relieving the 
pain of this disease, and also is advantageous in removing PERITONITIS. 
327 
the poison from the system. As an internal remedy for 
the elimination of the lead, nothing will be found better 
than the following, which was first used by Dr. Melsens, 
an eminent French physician. 
No. 60. 
Potass. Jodidi 3 ijss. 
S'inct. Sentianae comp. 
u 'ardam. comp. . 
aa. fl. 3 ss. 
Sdqua q. s. ad. fb z iv. 
M.-Sig.:—3j three times a day after meals. 
After taking the prescription for a week at the above 
dose, gradually increase till two teaspoonfuls are taken, 
and continue for three or four weeks. While taking the 
<!!> 
above No. 60, it is advisable to use sufficient epsom or 
Rochelle salts twice a week to produce a free evacuation 
—best taken early in the morning. 
PERITONITIS. 
The peritoneum is a serous membrane lining the ab- 
dominal cavity, and inclosing the intestines. Inflammation 
of this membrane constitutes the disease under consid- 
eration, and is commonly - though incorrectly — spoken of 
as inflammation of the bowels. Peritonitis may be either 
acute or chronic. If limited to a small portion of the 
membrane, it is then called circumscribed or partial 
peritonitis. 
Symptoms. — Acute general peritonitis is usually de- 
veloped rapidly. The pain, which somewhat resembles 
that of colic, commences at a particular point and ex- 
tends over the entire abdomen. A deep inspiration, 
sneezing and coughing, increases the pain. If pressure be 
made over the abdomen, especially at the point where the 
pain commenced, the suffering is greatly increased; this 
symptom is nearly always present. The patient usually 328 
PERITONITIS. 
lies with the knees drawn up in order to lessen the tension 
of the abdominal muscles. The abdomen is distended 
and tense to a great degree; constipation generally exists, 
but there are exceptions to the rule; vomiting is present 
in a large majority of cases; thirst is a prominent symp- 
tom; the tongue is coated and dry, the dryness increasing 
as the disease progresses ; the pulse is frequent, numbering 
120 to 130; below the first number would be considered 
favorable. Temperature varies from 101 degrees to 104 
degrees, the last named denoting gravity. The counte- 
nance is haggard and anxious. 
Causes.—Peritonitis seldom occurs except as a compli- 
cation to other affections. Perforation of the intestines is 
the most frequent cause. This accident occasionally hap- 
pens in the course of typhoid fever and in tuberculosis, 
attended with ulceration of the intestines. Peritonitis is 
frequently caused by getting articles such as cherry pits, 
seeds, etc., into the vermiform appendix. Inflammation 
results from this accident which rapidly spreads to the 
peritoneum. Several examples of this kind have fallen 
under the writer’s observation. 
Treatment.—If a physician can be called, do not 
attempt to treat the disease without assistance. If for any 
reason one cannot be secured, give the following (No. 61) 
in teaspoonful doses every two hours. 
No. 61. 
B 
0leum Terebinth, fl. 3 j. 
Sf'luid 0pium (T. to. P To.) “ 3 vj. 
tMucil. Sdcac “ |iv. 
M.-Sig.:—3 j every two hours. 
A poultice of linseed meal, large enough to cover the 
whole abdomen, should be applied as hot as the patient 
can bear it, and changed every hour. No attempt should be 
made to produce evacuation of the bowels. If they do not DROPSY OF THE PERITONEUM. 
329 
move for a week or ten days, no anxiety need be felt. 
The diet should be nourishing and of such nature as to be 
principally absorbed by the stomach. Beef tea made from 
Mosquera’s Beef Meal and Beef Cocoa, will meet this 
indication most admirably. 
Uncomplicated, the prospect of recovery is good; if 
arrising from perforation or resulting from sphacelation, 
due to an irritating body in the vermiform appendix, the 
chances for recovery are small. The average duration of 
fatal cases is about six days. Convalescence is slow, and 
great care is necessary during this period to prevent the 
patient from eating any food which will in any way cause 
a relapse. The diet during convalescence should be 
largely in a liquid form, milk, milk and eggs, beef tea, 
soups, etc. 
DROPSY OF THE PERITONEUM. 
{Hydro-Peritoneum.) 
An accumulation of watery fluid within the peritoneal 
cavity is known as hydro-peritoneum. The term acites is 
applied to denote the same condition. 
Dropsy properly is only a symptom or effect of disease. 
In the large majority of instances, when it occurs in this 
locality it proceeds from a diseased condition seated in the 
liver. 
Symptoms.—Enlargement of the abdomen is usually 
the first symptom that attracts attention. In about half of 
the cases swelling of the feet and ankles occur previous to 
the appearance of the dropsy of the abdomen. There is 
great emaciation and pallor, the former condition being 
extremely noticeable in the upper part of the body. 
There is no fever. The pulse is increased in frequency, 
and feeble. The urine is scanty and generally darker in 
color. 
Treatment.—Should be with a view to removing the 
effused liquids. This can be better done by the skin and 330 
ENLARGEMENT OF TIIE SPLEEN. 
bowels than by the kidneys. Hot air or water baths may 
be given two or three times a week, depending upon the 
strength of the patient. To act upon the bowels give : 
No. 62. 
1* 
Tulv. Xingiberis grs. xxx 
u falapae “ XL. 
Totassa Titartras u lxxx. 
M.-et div. in pulv. No. 4. Sig.:—One powder every other night. 
Liquids of all kinds should be restricted. A physician 
should be consulted for remedies to relieve the diseased 
condition upon which the dropsy depends. Permanent 
recovery from this affection is the exception rather than 
the rule. 
ENLARGEMENT OF THE SPLEEN. 
This condition is commonly known as ague cake, prob- 
ably from the fact that enlargement of this organ occurs 
most frequently in connection with ague and intermittent 
fever. 
Symptoms.—This disease is attended with very little 
or no pain or tenderness on pressure. If the enlargement 
is great a sense of weight is felt in the region of the 
spleen. Occasionally it can be noticed from the distension 
of the side. 
Treatment.—The cause and resulting consequence of 
this affection are so little understood that the treatment 
must be in reference to each individual case. I his must 
be left to the medical attendant No very serious results 
need be anticipated from this complaint, as it is well 
known that the spleen can be removed from inferior 
animals without the destruction of life, or any serious 
injury to health. There is reason to believe that the same 
might be done to man. To deny to this organ any 
functions, however, is to credit ourselves with knowledge 
superior to Him who made man after His own image. SEA SICKNESS. 
331 
SEA SICKNESS. 
With a very little caution sea sickness can be escaped, 
provided the individual possesses a moderate degree of 
good health. Many people go aboard ship expecting to 
be sick, and they are seldom disappointed. The real 
trouble in this disease is in the brain and spinal column, 
and not in the stomach ; and if the nausea is escaped until 
the nerve centers become accustomed to the motion of the 
boat, there is very little danger of its occurrence. The 
second night previous to starting on your voyage take 
one compound cathartic pill, and sufficient epsom salts 
the following morning to secure a free evacuation. The 
diet should be light from this time until after starting. 
Make up your mind to be well, and as soon as under way 
take five grains of bromide of sodium in a wineglassful 
of water, and renew the dose whenever you feel the 
slightest symptoms of nausea. Some effervescent salts 
should be taken every morning before breakfast. Keep 
on deck as much as possible ; dress too warmly rather 
than the opposite, and walk the deck at least one hour 
daily, rain or shine ; avoid over-eating ; endeavor to have 
your meals regularly, and aim to cheer your fellow pas- 
sengers. By this you will forget yourself, which is the 
most valued prescription we know of for the prevention 
or cure of sea sickness. 
LIVER DISEASE. 
The liver is facile princcps among the organs of the 
body, both as regards its size and the importance of its 
functions. That it is subject to numerous diseases, both 
organic and functional, is a well established fact. That 
it is greatly maligned is not less easily proven. Unqual- 
ified practitioners are in the habit of making this organ 
the “ scapegoat ” for their ignorance. When an indispo- 
sition is not understood by them it is “the liver”; if rem- 332 
HOB-NAILED OR GIN LIVER JAUNDICE 
edies prove inactive, “the liver” is blamed ; if the cause 
of a pain or ache cannot be discovered, it is again “ the 
liver.’’ This constant and indiscriminate charging the 
liver with causing innumerable disorders, has led the 
masses to look upon this organ as a useless part of their 
anatomy, which they would be better rid of. By falsely 
educating people as to the cause of their complaints, 
has created a market for “liver invigorators” and “patent 
cholagogues” unrivaled only by the supply. The Al- 
mighty makes no mistakes, and in creating the liver, the 
principal organ of the body, it was not intended it should 
be constantly at variance with the system as regards the 
laws of health. Neither is it. The diseases known to 
actually affect this organ are quite sufficient without 
adding any supposed or imaginary disorders. 
HOB-NAILED OR GIN LIVER. {Cirrhosis 
of the Liver.) 
This is a condition of the liver characterized by the 
organ presenting a yellowish-orange color, somewhat re- 
duced in size,—the left lobe sometimes entirely gone, the 
surface as a rule being covered with little projections. 
This condition is incurable. It gives rise to hydro- 
peritoneum, and is caused by the habitual use of alco- 
holic stimulants for a long period. The disease rarely 
occurs before the age of thirty, in the majority of cases 
the age exceeds fifty years. 
JAUNDICE. {Icterus.) 
This term denotes the presence of bile in the system 
in sufficient quantity to give to the conjunctiva and to the 
skin a more or less yellowish color. Jaundice is not a 
disease of itself, but merely a symptom, and generally 
points to some liver affection. It occurs also in remittent 
and relapsing fever. As has been shown in Part I the 
bile passes to the intestines by the “ biliary duct,” where FUNCTIONAL AFFECTIONS OF THE LIVER. 
333 
it acts in a beneficial manner in the process of digestion. 
If through any means this flow is impaired, the bile is 
re-absorbed and taken up by the blood and carried 
through the whole system, giving rise to the jaundiced 
appearance. A very moderate absorption of the bile may 
take place, and will be treated under functional liver 
trouble. If this condition is at all marked a physician 
should be consulted. 
FUNCTIONAL AFFECTIONS OF THE 
LIVER. 
These might with propriety be included with the dis- 
eases relating to stomach disorders, so closely are they 
connected with each other by cause and effect. 
In addition to the secretion of bile and formation of 
liver sugar (glycogen), the liver has another important 
function, viz., taking from the blood as it circulates 
through this organ deleterious substances contained 
therein, and destroying them. During this destructive 
process (which is chemical) animal heat is produced, and 
if the amount of material to be burned (destroyed) is not 
in excess, there is no unusual result noticed, the act being 
purely physiological. If on the other hand the quantity 
of food taken prove excessive, or the quality be such that 
it is not digested and assimilated, then too great an 
amount of materials is sent to the liver for destruction, 
and the outcome is a liver “disturbance.’1 The attack is 
the “surfeit” of the older medical writers; in other 
words, the individual eats more than is good for him or 
her. This condition occurs more frequently in childhood 
than in adult age ; the latter profit by experience and 
avoid the causes of this disturbance. Would it not be 
wise to extend the knowledge thus learned to the inexpe- 
rienced by teaching them not to follow the palate regard- 
less of the wants of the body? These attacks in children 
are accompanied by high fever, to the great discomfort of 334 
FUNCTIONAL AFFECTIONS OE THE LIVER. 
the child, the dismay of its parents, and the benefit of the 
family doctor. Not infrequently a child is out with the 
nurse or mother for an afternoon, or perhaps to a child’s 
party, and eats too much of the “good things” in which 
all little ones delight, and the night following is restless, 
perhaps wakeful. The ever watchful mother visits the 
little one to find it “just burning up with fever,” and the 
first thing thought of is that some contagious disease has 
been contracted, and the doctor is sent for at once. The 
doctor arrives, and is informed that “Jennie” or “ Willie,” 
as it may be, was out the day previous where there were 
other children, and fears are entertained that she or he 
has taken “scarlatina,” diphtheria, or something of the 
kind. The doctor feels the pulse, looks wise, writes a 
prescription, assures the parents that there is no danger, 
informs them that he will call again the following day, 
and hopes to find the patient better. By the next day 
the liver has burned up the extra amount of refuse and 
is ready to resume the “ even tenor ” of its way. Doctors 
are human, and it can hardly be expected that they will 
destroy so good an opportunity for increasing their repu- 
tation (which is stock in trade) by explaining the cause of 
this seemingly severe attack. They should not, however, 
make the case worse than it really is. The writer has 
known several instances where the physician (?) called to 
attend similar attacks as the one described above, pro- 
nounced typhoid fever, scarlatina or diphtheria, as suited 
his purpose best, and then claimed it was his great skill 
that “ broke up ” the disease. Hanging is too good for 
such charlatans. If it be remembered that all contagious 
o 
diseases have a stage of incubation, the shortest being 
forty-eight hours, the fear that the child under the cir- 
cumstances described has any contagious disease, will be 
avoided. Instead of sending for the doctor in this attack 
we advise that a teaspoonful of tincture of riuLbarb in 
the same amount of sweetened peppermint water be FUNCTIONAL AFFECTIONS OF THE LIVER. 
335 
given the child, and then use prescription No. 41. To 
another similar amount of water add 10 grains bromide 
of potassa, and give teaspoonful doses of each, every 
fifteen minutes alternating. This brings each remedy 
every half hour. If the child vomits or the bowels act 
freely, the symptoms will likely abate in a few hours. 
If the head is at all warm, apply cloths wrung from cold 
water. Care should be exercised that the child does not 
again partake of the article which gave rise to the indis- 
position, at least in quantities to injure. In older persons 
this liver disturbance is slower, and is spoken of as 
“ torpid liver.” There is headache, a foul tongue, with a 
bitter taste in the mouth, and a loss of all appetite ; the 
latter, by leading to the rejection of all food, permits the 
system recovering itself; the surplus material is burned 
up, forming into urea, and thus the system clears itself 
by starvation. It is nature’s plan of striking a balance 
sheet, and as such should be respected. Just the oppo- 
site of torpidity may occur, and in such instances is not 
referred to the livver. In either case there is more or less 
disturbance of the alimentary tract, either a constipation 
or diarrhoea. A restricted diet for a few days is usually 
all that is required. Persons liable to liver disturbances 
should exercise care in eating lean meats, especially dark 
meats, eggs, rich cake and pastry; alcoholic beverages 
of all kinds should be eschewed. If it is thought necessary 
to stimulate the liver, the following, No. 63—recommended 
by Dr. Fothergill of London, England,—will be found 
very efficacious. 
No. 63. 
H 
Sodii Sulphas | j. 
£4qua q. s. to dissolve. 
S4cid. Sulph. arorn gtts. xj. 
M.-Sig.:—Take one-half upon retiring, and balance in the morning, if required, 
to cause a free evacuation. 336 
FUNCTIONAL AFFECTIONS OF THE LIVER. 
For chronic torpidity of the liver, indicated by a gen- 
eral dull feeling, more or less headache, loss of appetite 
and yellowish coating on the tongue, take No. 64, tea- 
spoonful three times a day before eating. 
No. 64. 
B 
Mcid. dVitro. fdydrochlor. did. 3 yj. 
S4(fuco 'purcb tf. s. ad. -fl. e iv. 
M.-Sig.:—3j three times a day before meals. 
If the bowels should be constipated, take No. 63, tea- 
spoonful doses night and morning. DISEASES OF THE RESPIRATORY ORGANS. 
337 
CHAPTER IX. 
DISEASES OF THE RESPIRATORY 
ORGANS. 
COLD IN THE HEAD. (Coryza, nasal catarrh.) 
The predisposition to cold in the head varies greatly 
in different individuals. Feeble, delicate adults and chil- 
dren are more liable to attacks than individuals who are 
robust. 
Symptoms.—The symptoms of acute nasal catarrh are 
pretty generally known, as most individuals have had 
personal experience of them, therefore they need but brief 
notice here. The first thing the patient notices is a feeling 
of dryness, and of more or less obstruction in one or both 
nostrils; there is a prickly sensation within the nostrils, 
which is followed by sneezing. The dryness is soon fol- 
lowed by a discharge from the nostrils of a watery liquid, 
nearly colorless, of a saltish taste. The sense of smell and 
taste are perverted, the tone of the voice is nasal. In 
about half the cases there is pain in the forehead, some- 
times the air passages are implicated, then there is hoarse- 
ness. If the disease extends to the Eustachian tubes, 
pain or a roaring in the ears is induced, and occasionally 
temporary hardness of hearing. 
These local symptoms are generally accompanied by 
more or less febrile symptoms. On the second or third 
day the secretion becomes less profuse and grows thicker, 
and of a yellowish color. The disease terminates in re- 
covery on the fifth to the eighth day. 338 
COLD IN THE HEAD. 
Causes.—Nasal catarrh is usually attributed to “ taking 
cold.” This is not true, though most cases depend upon 
exposure to cold, and particularly exposures of the feet. 
Local irritants enter largely into the causes of this disease. 
The most common of these are hot air, dust, acrid gases, 
snuffing tobacco by those unaccustomed to it. Coryza is 
a symptom also of other diseases and will receive attention 
as such in its proper place. This disease is not contagious, 
but at times is epidemic. 
Treatment.—Various methods for “breaking up” a 
cold have been recommended, but none of them are infal- 
lible. A thorough perspiration is perhaps the surest, but 
is objectionable unless proper precaution is taken to prevent 
an addition to the already existing complaint. We advise 
as treatment adapted to most cases, the following: At 
first symptoms of coryza, take five grains quinine, and 
upon going to bed take a hot foot bath, following with No. 
65 at one dose, after getting into bed. 
No. 65. 
Sr. 6pii gtts. xv. 
Tin. Jpeccuc “ xxx. 
Sr. Ttapsici “ V. 
SSqua q. s. ad . § j. 
M.-Sig.:—Take at one dose as directed 
The following morning a sponge bath with tepid water 
should be given, followed by a brisk rubbing with a coarse 
towel or flesh brush. The second night upon retiring, 
take one compound cathartic pill and repeat in the morning 
if necessary; quinine should be taken for a couple of days 
after this—two grains four times a day. The patient 
should remain indoors for a couple of days. Care should 
be exercised to get rid of acute nasal catarrh as quickly as 
possible, or it may become'chronic. 
Chronie catarrh is a very obstinate disease; it is this COLD IN THE HEAD. 
339 
form that is meant usually when “catarrh” is spoken or 
w itten of. In chronic catarrh, the lining membrane of 
the nasal passages becomes thickened from the existing 
inflammation, and causes a permanent narrowing of them. 
In this way the secretion is retained for a varying period 
within these passages, and becomes more or less decom- 
posed. This gives rise to fetid odor of the breath of 
individuals suffering from this affection. The secretion 
which is expelled by blowing the nose, or drawn into the 
throat and then hawked up, varies in quantity and appear- 
ance ; sometimes it is like pus ; it may be semi-liquid or in 
crusts. 
Treatment.— The treatment of catarrh is very unsatis- 
factory with most practitioners, consequently large amounts 
of “patent cures” are taken by those who are so unfor- 
tunate as to be afflicted with this disease. 
If it be remembered that this is a chronic affection - and 
consequently cure is necessarily slow—it will be easier to 
persist in the treatment until beneficial results follow. No 
one should expect to be cured of chronic catarrh in less than 
four to six months’ continuous treatment. The general 
health should be looked after; if there seems to be any 
scrofulous condition or ulceration, No. 66 should be taken 
three times a day—teaspoonful doses. 
No. 66. 
Calcium Sodidi grs. xvj. 
Syrup Sri folium comp. fl. z viij. 
M.-Sig.:—Z j three times a day. 
As a local application, use night and morning No. 67, 
first cleansing the nasal passages by using warm water ; 
sage tea, made by steeping one ounce of best sage leaves 
in one-half gallon of soft water, straining—or better, filter 
through paper—this can be used with the nasal douche. 
An effort should be made to get the remedy not only 340 
CROUP. 
into the front of the nose, but the posterior portion as 
well. If a small quantity should be swallowed, no harm 
will result. In addition to the remedies, hygienic measures 
in reference to air, sunlight, exercise, diet and bathing 
must not be neglected. 
No. 67. 
B 
Sodii ISicarb. 
Sodii 73or as. . 
aa. 3 ij. 
Vic. Carbolic (pur a) 3 ss. 
Mycarina fl. c iij. 
rVlqua dist “ oij. 
M.-Sig.:-Use a wineglassful as directed. 
CROUP. 
Croup is an inflammation of the mucous membrane 
of the larynx. There are two forms of this disease, 
viz, trite and false. 
True croup is known as membraneous or diphtheritic 
croup, and is a very grave disease. 
False croup is of more frequent occurrence than true, 
but is a less serious affection. 
Croup occurs mostly between the ages of two and 
seven years. If a child is cross and peevish, is hoarse 
and has a croupous cough, the throat should be examined 
and if found swollen and spotted here and there with 
small firm, white patches, it is advisable to send for your 
family physician. If, on the other hand, there are no 
patches, no anxiety need be felt. 
It is not at all rare to see a child, who has been cough- 
ing a little during the day, and been hoarse without feeling 
ill, wake up suddenly in the night with great difficulty of 
breathing, and a loud barking cough. The child often 
throws himself about the bed, or springs up, clutches 
anxiously at the throat. The attack occurs nearly always 
during sleep and is better as soon as the child vomits, but CROUP. 
341 
recurs again almost as soon as he falls asleep. These are 
symptoms pointing to false croup, and have caused many 
a young mother great anxiety, while waiting for the 
medical attendant to arrive. If, as before stated, there 
are no patches visible in the throat, it will not be neces- 
sary to send for a physician. Apply cloths wrung from hot 
water, to the throat, and give a teaspoonful of wine of 
ipecac, which may be repeated every twenty minutes till 
vomiting occurs. 
Children that are predisposed to false croup, should 
be habituated to the causes of the disease, rather than to 
enervate them by a systematic over-protection, which 
tends to increase the liability to attacks. In bad weather, 
let them be warmly clad but do not over-wrap the neck; 
keep their feet dry; and let them out-of-doors every day. 
Washing the throat and face in cold water can not be rec- 
ommended too highly. Let the application be thorough, 
and rub dry afterward. Knowing that a child is subject 
to attacks of false croup will help to determine the point 
whether the disease is it, or true croup. In false croup 
there is no, or very slight, fever. In true, it is always 
present, as can be determined by the thermometer. 
The treatment given for false croup will do no harm 
should the attack prove to be true croup, and will relieve 
the child until the physician arrives. For cough and 
hoarseness, with tendency to croup, No. 68 should be 
given two, three or four hours apart, owing to the severity 
of the symptoms. 
No. 68. 
Sdmmonii <Warh grs. viij, 
rSdmmonii 9ohlor u xij. 
Sx. Eucalyptus ff/uiduru (/4dd. dddol) 4. 3 i ss. 
Syrup Sdcaciac “ | SS. 
Syrup (Wild Cherry q. s. ad. u ~ ij. 
M.-Sig.—3 j in milk or water every two, three or four hours.—"Col. and Clin. Rec' 342 
WINTER COUGH. 
WINTER COUGH. 
Under this term we wish to include the large number 
of affections of the throat, larynx and bronchi, which gives 
rise to cough, and are not sufficiently well defined by symp- 
toms, to place them in the list of named diseases of the 
respiratory tract. Cough is the principal symptom, and it 
is this the patient seeks relief from. 
The temperature of most portions of the United States 
is liable to sudden variations, which are accompanied by 
great variation in the humidity of the atmosphere. These 
changes belong with the uncontrollable causes of disease, 
and the best that can be done is to guard the system as 
well as possible against them. The aim should be to 
maintain the body at all hours and seasons, but especially, 
during the hours of sleep, at an equable temperature. 
Probably seventy per cent, of the living rooms during the 
winter season, are kept at a too high temperature. When- 
ever an individual goes out from a room thus over-heated, 
it has an identical effect to that of sudden climatic change. 
As a result of these causes, a large number of indi- 
viduals suffer more or less, from catarrhal conditions of 
the air passages during the winter and early spring 
months. 
No. 69 will benefit most cases, arising from causes as 
indicated above. It contains the medicinal principles of 
white pine and wild cherry bark, blood-root and balm of 
Gilead buds, with other ingredients, and may be safely 
given to persons of all ages. 
No. 69. 
Pdnodyna Pine &xpe>ctorant {P. W. & (d>o). fl. z iy. 
If the tongue is coated, take two grains of quinine 
three times a day. The bowels if constipated, must be 
regulated as directed under constipation. 
Sig.—3 j three to six times a day. WHOOPING COUGH. 
343 
WHOOPING COUGH. (Pertussis). 
Whooping cough belongs among the diseases of chil- 
dren, although it occasionally occurs after childhood, and 
may at all ages. 
The name of the affection is derived from the charac- 
teristic sound produced in inspiration, during a paroxysm 
of coughing. 
Symptoms.—The first symptoms are those of coryza 
and bronchitis; the cough soon becomes more violent than 
that of ordinary bronchitis. There is more or less fever. 
The cough increases in severity, and soon becomes dis- 
tinctly paroxysmal; the distinguishing feature of the dis- 
ease is, the occurrence of the cough in paroxysms. 
The time from the beginning of the affection until the 
whoop and paroxysmal cough are established, varies from 
two or three days to as many weeks. The paroxysm con- 
sists of a series of expiratory acts following each other so 
rapidly, that the patient is unable to take an inspiration 
between them. The number of these efforts which thus 
follow without inspiration, vary from five or six to twenty, 
the number depending upon the severity of the paroxysm. 
A long and labored inspiration then takes place, giving 
rise to the whoop referred to above. These alternate 
acts of coughing and whooping are repeated until the 
paroxysm ends. 
During the attack the face is congested, the tears flow 
abundantly, and frequently vomiting takes place. In 
severe cases bleeding from the nose occurs, and in excep- 
tional instances, from the eyes and ears. Paroxysms occur 
in greater number during the night than daytime. Phys- 
ical exertion, mental excitement and crying, are apt to 
bring on an attack of coughing. At the beginning of the 
second stage, or when the paroxysms are fully established, 
the fever disappears. Whooping-cough may exist without 
the characteristic whoop being present; this, however, is 
rare. A little ulcer under the tongue on or at the side of 344 
WHOOPING COUGH. 
the frcenum lingua is a positive sign of whooping-cough. 
It is not always present. 
Causes.—Whooping-cough belongs to the infectious 
diseases, the miasm (bacteria) being generated in the 
bodies of those affected with it. As a rule, individuals are 
liable to one attack only, but exceptionally the disease is 
experienced more than once. The period of incubation is 
from one to two weeks; the duration of the disease is 
from six weeks to as many months. The greatest danger 
is when the disease occurs before one year of age, and the 
danger diminishes as the age increases. The largest 
number of cases occur between one and five years. 
Treatment.—For the cough give No. 70 in teaspoonful 
doses, four to six hours. 
No. 70. 
R 
Potass. Prom 3 ij. 
9ohbral Hydrat 3 j. 
'Syrup Wild Cherry ( P.&. C Idol).. fl. | j. 
Sdqua q. s. ad u ~ ij. 
M.-Sig.—3 j every four to six hours as directed. 
The above is for a child one year old ; the dose can be 
increased or diminished as required to suit the age; for 
older children it is advisable to give the same quantity, but 
give oftener. In addition to the prescription above for 
the cough, give No. 71, in teaspoonful doses four times 
a day. 
No. 71. 
R 
@uinia& Sulph grs. xxxij. 
Slixir of i£icoricc; (aromatic) ... if. ? ij. 
(P. D. & Co.) 
Sdqua qs. ad “ | iv. 
M.-Sig.—3 j four times a day. 
Hygienic measures form an important part of the HICCOUGH. 
345 
treatment. The diet should be nutritious, and it is better 
given in solid than liquid form, as it is less likely to be 
vomited. 
Food should be taken often, and as soon after a par- 
oxysm as convenient. If there are no complications, the 
patient should be kept out-of-doors, the more the better. 
The patient’s room should be kept well ventilated, and 
care taken that the temperature is kept at about 65 degrees 
Fahr. In view of the fact that age lessens the danger 
from whooping-cough, it is advisable to keep children 
from contracting it if possible. 
HICCOUGH. (Singultus.) 
Hiccough is produced by a rapid spasmodic contraction 
of the diaphragm, accompanied by an inspiratory act and 
closure of the glottis, so that further entrance of the air 
is prevented. The striking of the column of air upon the 
closed glottis produces a sound, or hiccough. It is pro- 
duced in infants, young children and aged people, by slight 
irritation of the stomach or duodenum, by swallowing too 
hastily, by mental emotions as crying or laughing ; uterine 
irritation also often gives rise to it in hysterical or preg- 
nant women ; inflammation of the liver or diaphragm or 
cardiac orifice of the stomach will cause it; lastly, it is 
common toward the fatal termination of many acute dis- 
eases, when it forms an important—because unfavorable 
—symptom. Hiccough accompanying intoxication, is 
due to the irritation of the stomach and duodenum by the 
ingested liquor. 
Treatment.—Hiccough is cured by numerous simple 
practices. One, which is always at hand, consists in mak- 
ing rapid and deep inspirations, alternating with 'very slow 
and deep expirations ; another is to press the index fingers 
firmly into the ears, at the same time drink a few sips of 
water, the cup being held to the lips by anorher person ; 
fifteen to twenty drops of vinegar to a teaspoonful of 346 
ASTHMA. 
sugar, eaten slowly, is a favorite remedy with the writer. 
When hiccough occurs in connection with serious diseases, 
it may be necessary to have the medical attendant pre- 
scribe for it. 
ASTHMA. 
Asthma may be defined as consisting of paroxysmal 
attacks of dyspnoea, accompanied with a wheezing sound 
of respirations. These attacks vary much in duration and 
severity. 
A fit of asthma may commence without warning, or it 
may be preceded by various digestive, or nervous, or other 
disturbances. Patients who are subject to this disease, are 
often able to predict an attack hours before its occurrence. 
The majority of attacks come on during the latter part of 
the night or early morning. The paroxysm is charac- 
terized by laborious efforts of breathing. There is a 
painful sense of the want of air, the inspiratory act being 
performed with more or less spasmodic effort, and the 
expiratory act is prolonged, and accomplished with a 
wheezing sound. The patient cannot lie down, and sits 
with the elbows resting on some solid support, to facilitate 
the action of the respiratory muscles ; the head is thrown 
backward, the mouth open and gasping with each inspi- 
ration. The patient suffering from a severe paroxysm, 
presents a most pitiable sight; to one unfamiliar with the 
disease death seems imminent. The paroxysm is usually 
followed by cough and expectoration, which may be 
streaked with blood. 
The attacks recur with varying intervals, both as 
regards duration and regularity. Some persons expe- 
rience an attack after the interval of a week, others annu- 
ally, and it may occur winter or summer. Examples of the 
latter are cases of so called hay asthma. The respirations 
are not increased, but may be less in number than in 
health ; the pulse is feeble and somewhat increased in 
frequency. asthma. 
347 
Causes.—The cause of asthma is obscure. Still there 
is little doubt that the primary cause has its seat in the 
nervous system, and so influences the system that it is 
easily affected by certain agencies. The exciting causes 
are equally obscure in many instances. There are, how- 
ever, many of these well known. 
A striking example of an exciting case is the ema- 
nations of new mown hay, many persons suffering from 
asthma whenever exposed to this cause. The term hay 
asthma or hay fever, however, is applied to cases oc- 
curring exclusively during the summer season, although 
the exciting cause may not have proceeded from hay. 
Fhe pollen of ragweed (ambrosia artemisuefoli) is an 
active and exciting cause in many localities. 
Hay fever seems to be rapidly increasing for a few 
years past, judging from the large number of persons who 
find it necessary to visit annually localities exempt from 
the influence producing it. It is a question if many of 
these cases are not as much dependent upon a desire to 
be fashionable as the emanations from hay or ragweed. 
It may seem very improbable, but every physician knows 
that diseases are fashionable with the Ward MacAllister 
classes, as are also remedies. 
Some individuals find it impossible to sleep upon 
feathers without suffering from an attack of asthma. 
Others are affected by the emanations from the horse or 
other animals, as the cat, rabbit, etc. Overloading the 
stomach is an exciting cause, as is indigestion or consti- 
pation. Many females suffer from asthma during the 
menstrual period, and at no other time. Climatic influe- 
ences are an important factor, not only as relates to 
the cause, but treatment of this affection. Asthma occurs 
at all ages. It is more frequent in males than females, 
the proportion being two to one. 
Treatment.—This should be directed first to relieving 
the patient’s suffering, and second to prevent a recurrence 348 
BRONCHITIS. 
of it. To accomplish the first, give a teaspoonful of No. 
72 as soon as the paroxysm is noticed, and repeat every 
three hours if necessary to give relief. If the paroxysm 
is already well commenced, give in teaspoonful doses every 
hour until three doses have been administered; then at 
longer intervals as may be required. 
No. 72. 
$ 
(tohlor. Pdaodync (A &. P 9Bol) fl. 3 ij. 
SI. Sx. Xily of the fyalley {P.Sj.P do o'.) “ 3 j. 
Sr. Sdobelia u 3 iv. 
Syrup Scillae “ 3 j. 
<§yrup Simp u 3 iv. 
M.-Sig.—3j every three hours or oftener, as directed, 
To prevent a recurrence use No. 73, which originated 
with Sir Morrell Mackenzie. 
No. 73. 
n 
Xinci Xalerianat grs. xxx. 
Pil. Sdsafoetidae comp 3 j. 
M.-et ft. pilulae No. xxx. Sig.—One pill three times a day. 
Alternating with these pills take two grains of quinine 
three times a day. Avoid the exciting causes as far as 
possible and pay due attention to all hygienic measures. 
If there is any locality in which the patient is free from 
attacks, it is advisable that such locality be made his or 
her home, even at a sacrifice. The life of an asthmatic 
sufferer is anything but pleasant. Paroxysms of asthma 
never prove fatal. 
BRONCHITIS. 
Bronchitis is an inflammation of the mucous membrane 
lining the bronchial tubes. It may be either acute or 
chronic. 
Ac2ite bronchitis is usually preceded by coryza, and is BRONCHITIS. 
349 
popularly known as “cold on the lungs.” At the be- 
ginning of the attack there is slight chilliness, a little fever 
and an increased frequency of the pulse ; the appetite is 
impaired; there is lassitude, and a general ill-feeling. 
The cough is at first painful, but not to a marked degree. 
The expectoration is at first small, but becomes abundant 
in the course of three or four days, and is then thick and 
yellowish. Respiration is not materially changed. The 
average duration of the disease is ten to twelve days. 
Ca?ises.—Exposure of a portion of the body to a cur- 
rent of air is the most common cause, while the whole 
body may be subject to much greater exposure without 
bronchitis following. The exact phenomenon of “taking 
cold” is not easily explained. The general theory ad- 
vanced is, that the surface of the body becoming chilled, 
the coats of the external bloodvessels are contracted, thus 
forcing the blood to the internal vessels situated in the 
membranes lining, the air passages, alimentary tract and 
abdominal cavity. This produces a congested condition 
of these membranes, which in many instances, terminates 
in a real inflammation. This theory is plausible, but does 
not explain why the same results do not always follow. 
It is a well known fact, that individuals are often exposed 
to the severest climatic changes without any ill effects 
following; again a person is obliged to sit for hours in a 
draught, expecting a “death cold” is being contracted, but 
to his great surprise no bad results follow; this, and the 
fact that a cold is always contracted when not expected, 
would seem to point to the nervous system as playing an 
important part. Just what this is, or its modus operandi, 
we are not prepared to state. That the system can be 
“nerved up” to withstand many influences which other- 
wise affect the health disastrously, is as important as true. 
Bronchitis is sometimes epidemic. It also occurs sec- 
ondarily to and forms an element of other disease; as such 
it belongs as a symptom of measles. It may be produced 350 
CHRONIC BRONCHITIS. 
by the inhalation of irritating gases and powders. The 
liability to this disease is less in proportion as persons are 
habituated to out-of-door life. Soldiers, hunters and ex- 
plorers, who are accustomed to sleeping in tents or in the 
open air, rarely take cold. 
Treatment.—The treatment for acute bronchitis is the 
same as that given for acute nasal catarrh. 
CHRONIC BRONCHITIS. 
A persisting inflammation of the bronchial mucous 
membrane, constitutes this disorder. It is generally a 
sequel of the acute form, and when such, is dependent 
upon the same causes. 
Chronic bronchitis occurs much oftener after than 
before middle life. It is unattended with pain, fever, or 
other marked symptoms of constitutional disturbances. 
Cough always exists, but varies much in frequency and 
severity in different cases. Expectoration varies also in 
quantity and appearance. As a rule it is composed of 
mucus and pus, occasionally streaked with blood. 
Treatment.—Every effort should be made to build up 
the general health by a generous diet, out-of-door life, etc. 
Change of climate is at times very beneficial. A mild 
and equitable climate is best. For the cough take No. 74 
four times a day. 
No. 74. 
1* 
Summon. cMuriat 3 j. 
Syrup Seneyae fl. 3 ss. 
3'inct. 0pii Voampli “ 3 j. 
Syrup S'olutanus “ 3 ss. 
rSdquae Saultheriae q. s. ad. u 3 ij. 
M.-Sig.—3j four times a day. 
In cases of chronic bronchitis occurring- before fifty 
years of age, we advise taking No. 75 in teaspoonful INFLUENZA—LA GRIPPE—EPIDEMIC BRONCHITIS. 
351 
doses three times a day after meals for three months at 
least, taking No. 74 as directed. 
No. 75. 
Syrup Srifolium comp. (P. if?. 'gf*?.) -ft. z iv. 
Potass, pfodidt. . 3 j. 
M.-Sisf. — Z] three t::n-s a day after meals. 
INFLUENZA, LA GRIPPE, EPIDEMIC 
BRONCHITIS. 
Epidemic bronchitis has extensively prevailed in this 
country during the past two winters (1889-90 and 
1890-91), under the French name La Grippe, or Amer- 
icanized, “the grip.” 
The disease has been known amongst medical writers 
for four or five centuries, under the name of influenza, an 
epidemic of it occurring in this country in 1832. As an 
epidemic it is remarkable for its extensiveness and rapid 
diffusion, attacking all ages and classes simultaneously. 
Of itself influenza is not a fatal disease, but it is liable 
to lead to the development of other affections, which are 
more apt to prove fatal, when so developed, than ordi- 
narily. This is especially true of pneumonia. 
Symptoms.—These are at first similar to an ordinary 
cold, with more or less sneezing, and a watery discharge 
from the nose. Frontal headache is a prominent symp- 
tom. The inflammation is apt to extend to the throat, 
eyes and ears. The cough varies in different cases. 
There are usually chills, fever and lassitude; the patient 
complains of feeling “sore all over, and aching.” Toward 
the end of the disease there is frequently a free perspi- 
ration and in some cases diarrhoea. 
Causes.—Influenza is without doubt, due to vegetable 
germs (bacteria) which are present in the atmosphere. 
Their origin is not well established. Climatic changes 
are generally supposed to have a direct influence upon the 352 
PLEURISY. 
prevalence of this disease. This no doubt is largely due 
to the fact, that the seasons above referred to have been 
unusually changeable, and the atmosphere overcharged 
with moisture. During the epidemic of influenza in 1832, 
the wards of the Massachusetts General Hospital were kept 
at a uniform temperature day and night, still nearly all 
the patients were affected; this we think goes far towards 
disproving the theory that the grip is due to the weather. 
Treatment.—As soon as symptoms of influenza are 
noticed, a sufficient amount of epsom or rochelle salts 
should be taken to freely evacuate the bowels, and as soon 
as this occurs take No. 76, a capsule every four hours, 
alternating with it two grain doses of quinine; the latter 
should be given at an hour midway between the hours for 
the former. 
No. 76. 
k 
The-nacetine 3 j. 
l)iv. and put into capsules No. xv. Sig.—One capsule every four hours as directed. 
During the attack, the patient should remain in- 
doors and abstain from all business or other cares. The 
diet should be light. Influenza ordinarily continues from 
four to eight days. 
PLEURISY. (.Pleuritis.) 
This is inflammation of the pleura, or sac surrounding 
the lungs. It will be learned from the description given 
in Part I that the pleura is a closed membrane, one layer 
lining the walls of the thorax, the other covering the 
lungs, the two serous surfaces facing each other. The 
inflammation is located in the inner surface, and the pain 
is caused by the two inflamed surfaces rubbing together 
by the movements incident to inspiration and expiration. 
One of the results of inflammation of serous membranes 
is the effusion (pouring out) of liquids. This takes place PLEURISY. 
353 
in pleuritis, and commences in a few hours after the 
attack, and may continue from two to five days. 
Symptoms.—As a rule, pleuritis comes on suddenly. 
Occasionally slight pain is felt for a day or two previous 
to the attack. There is a chilly sensation at first ; some- 
times a decided chill. Pain is soon felt in the affected 
side. It is intense, cutting or lancinating, and is increased 
by inspiration, coughing or sneezing. The pain is situ- 
ated between the sixth and ninth ribs at the side, and may 
extend forward or backward. The pulse is increased in 
frequency ; there is fever, headache, thirst, and muscular 
weakness, with pain in the loins. From the increased 
pain from coughing, the patient endeavors to suppress it. 
Expectoration is slight; respiration is increased. The 
patient lies upon the well side. As soon as the liquid is 
effused the pain is diminished, and may disappear alto- 
gether ; the fever subsides ; the acts of coughing are less 
painful ; the patient considers himself better, sits up, or 
perhaps walks about the room ; the patient sometimes 
feels so much improved that he resumes his occupation. 
Serious results are liable to follow if the patient overdoes 
at this stage. The fluid that is within the pleural sac 
distends it, and the inflamed surfaces are no longer in 
contact, which explains the subsidence of the pain. The 
respiration continues frequent. At this stage the patient 
prefers to lie upon the affected side. This is particularly 
true if the amount of liquid within the cavity is great. 
Causes.—In the majority of cases pleuritis seems to 
be due to the action of cold. It is sometimes the result 
of wounds. It occurs much more frequently in youth and 
middle age than in childhood or old age. 
Treatment.—The treatment of acute pleurisy should 
be left to the family physician. If a doctor cannot be 
obtained, give for the first thirty-four hours : 354 
chronic! pleurisy. 
No. 77. 
k 
Pulv. Jpecac et 0pvi . 3 ij. 
Syrup Simp fl. z j. 
<£4q,ua& cj, s. ad. u z ij. 
M.-Sig.—Z j every two, three or four hours as required to allay pain. 
The above should be given in teaspoonful doses every 
two, three or four hours, to quiet the pain, and in addition 
put five drops tincture aconite into a goblet of water, and 
give a teaspoonful every fifteen minutes. Apply mustard 
to the side, but do not blister. As soon as the pain has 
been quieted, give a tablespoonful of epsom salts, and 
repeat in four hours to procure a free movement of the 
bowels. After forty-eight hours, or as soon as the pain is 
better, No. 77 need not be given so often, and should be 
left off after taking the salts till an evacuation occurs, 
unless the pain returns. 
During the second stage (after forty-eight houis) the 
bowels should move every day freely. Salts may be 
given for this. The patient should be allowed very little 
liquid of -any kind, and means be employed to cause perspi- 
ration. The room should be kept at a temperature of 
about sixty-five degrees, the patient kept warmly covered 
and given a nutritious diet. 
CHRONIC PLEURISY. 
The fluid effused, as described under acute pleuritis, 
instead of being absorbed occasionally, remains within 
the pleural sac for an indefinite period. This condition 
constitutes chronic pleurisy. Fluid is sometimes accumu- 
lated within the chest without being preceded by the 
symptoms of acu'e pleurisy. 
Symptoms.—Unless it is an extreme case (when the 
affected side will be noticeably enlarged) it will require a 
skillful physician to diagnose the condition. If coughing HYDROTHORAX. 
355 
is produced when the patient lies down or gets up ; if 
there is shortness of breath, and cough ; if the patient lies 
constantly on one side, it is pretty good grounds for sus- 
pecting that th’s affection exists, and the family physician 
should be called. He will probably remove the fluid by 
an operation called thoracentesis. This consists in passing 
a trocar in through the chest wall and drawing the fluid 
off. The operation is attended with little pain or danger, 
and the surgeon should be given liberty to operate as 
soon as in his judgment it is necessary. 
The fluid, remember, is on the outside of the lung, not 
in it. This disease is sometimes double, that is, both 
sides are affected. 
HYDROTHORAX. 
This means, literally, water in the chest. It is not 
due to any disease of the pleura or lungs, but occurs in 
connection with dropsy in other locations, and arises from 
the same causes. It is always double, although one side 
of the chest may contain more liquid than the other. 
Treatment.—Is the same as for general dropsy. 
INFLAMMATION OF THE LUNG. 
(Pneumonia, Pneumonitis.) 
These terms are all used to denote the same condition, 
which is an inflammation of the lung- tissue. A part or 
the whole of one lung may be attacked, or even both 
lungs. 
Symptoms.—Ordinarily the symptoms of pneumonia 
are highly distinctive. The majority of cases begin after 
exposure to cold or wet, with a chill followed by febrile 
action, together with a sharp pain at or just below the 
nipple; more or less cough, and a temperature in the 
axilla ranging from 103 degrees to 105 degrees, in severe 
cases still higher. The thermometer will often show a 
rise of temperature while the patient is suffering from the 356 
INFLAMMATION OF THE LUNG. 
chill. The expectoration is at first scanty, transparent, 
and viscid, but soon becomes of a reddish color, resem- 
bling iron rust; to this characteristic expectoration has 
been given the name rusty sputa. It is very adhesive, 
and is positive evidence of pneumonia, as it is present in 
no other disease. The pulse is increased in frequency, 
ranging from 80 to 120 beats per minute; there is pain 
in the head, loss of appetite, thirst, prostration, heat of 
the skin, etc.; respiration is increased. If a large portion 
of the lung be involved, respiration will be increased to a 
greater degree than if the inflammation is limited to a 
single lobe. 
In some cases one or both cheeks are unnaturally red, 
the margin of the redness being abruptly defined. The 
urine is generally diminished in quantity. 
Causes.—Not infrequently the disease can be traced 
to unusual exposure, such as working in the cold and 
water, sleeping out-of-doors at night. It often follows 
after a debauch, which has led to the belief that intem- 
perance caused the disease ; it is more likely that the 
exposure incidental to the debauch gave rise to it. One 
thing, however, is well established in reference to this 
affection, viz., individuals addicted to the use of alcoholic 
stimulants, are less likely to recover from an attack of it 
than those of temperate habits; this is true of all disease, 
but more especially the one under consideration. Pneu- 
monia is frequently developed in the course of typhoid 
and typhus fever, and in measles. It occurs at all periods 
of life, but cases are most frequent between the ages of 
twenty and forty. It is rare before the age of five years, 
or after sixty. Pneumonia is seen oftener in males than 
in females, due doubtless to the former being more ex- 
posed to the vicissitudes of the weather. When pneu- 
monia is of a severe type attended with delirium of a low, 
muttering character, the term typhoid-pneumonia is given CONSUMPTION OF THE LUNG. 
357 
to it, and does not mean that the two diseases are both 
present. 
Treatment.—If an attack of pneumonia is early deter- 
mined, its severity can be very greatly lessened by using 
No. 78, taking it in two doses, two hours apart. 
No. 78. 
Quinine’ Sulph grs. xij. 
Pulv. fipium “ j. 
M. ard put into four capsules. Sig.—two capsules at one dose every two hours. 
Apply a mustard plaster to the painful side, but do not 
blister. It will not be advisable to attempt to treat this 
affection further than indicated above, without the family 
physician’s aid. If the patient has been exposed to cold 
or wet, and has headache, perhaps pain in the back, a chill 
with sharp pains in the side, and an increase of temper- 
ature to 102 degrees or 103 degrees or more, it will be 
good treatment to give No. 78 as directed. Even should 
the attack be something else than pneumonia—which is 
not probable—it will do no harm. The physician should 
be early called. The tendency of pneumonia is toward 
recovery. The average duration of the cases which re- 
cover, is about thirteen days ; in fatal cases it is three to 
four days less. 
CONSUMPTION OF THE LUNG. 
(Phthisis pulmonalis.) 
Flic term consumption is the one generally applied to 
this disease. It is also known as phthisis, and the decline, 
names which are significant, in view of the wasting of the 
body which attends its march, yet not sufficiently definite, 
inasmuch as many other affections are attended with pro- 
gressive emaciation. 
Of the diseases which afflict the human family, con- 
sumption, the great white plague, is the most important, 358 
CONSUMPTION OF THE LUNG. 
prevailing as it does in every quarter of the globe. Phy- 
sicians of all lands have vainly endeavored to check its 
ravages. Year after year, in utter disregard of science, it 
has continued its unholy sway, sweeping off millions of 
human beings, until every hamlet and village has learned 
to speak of it with bated breath. Of all deaths, one-sixth 
are caused by consumption of the lungs ; and in two-fifths 
of the cadavers examined, germs are found from which 
consumption proceeds. There is no subject at the present 
time receiving so great attention from medical writers as 
the prevention and cure of this affection. As to the final 
result we dare not predict, but hope that a remedy may be 
found which will prove effective. 
If one attack of consumption prevented a recurrence 
of the disease, as in small-pox, there would be greater 
reasons to expect Prof. Koch’s theory to eventually suc- 
ceed; there is, however, no evidence of this It may be 
expected that the disease will be arrested, in many in- 
stances, if an agent can be discovered, which, when intro- 
duced into the blood will destroy the bacilli, or even 
render them inactive, provided an early diagnosis is made. 
Until such time, we can only use the knowledge already 
furnished us by science to check the spread of the disease, 
and palliate the already existing cases. 
Symptoms.—The development of consumption is insid- 
ious, the patient or friends often not suspecting it until 
well advanced. A dry, hacking cough, continuing for 
some time, with a temperature in the axilla above normal, 
should always excite suspicion. If these be attended by 
pleuritic pain, or pain in the region of the clavicle, and 
slight fever toward evening, the grounds for apprehension 
will be greatly increased. If in addition to the above 
there is diarrhoea, not caused by indigestion, loss of weight, 
impaired appetite, increased expectoration or haemoptysis, 
suspicion becomes confirmed. 
These are symptoms which occur toward the com- CONSUMPTION OF THE LUNG. 
359 
mencement of the disease; as it advances the fever is 
greater and there is usually a chill, more or less severe at 
some period during the twenty-four hours ; “ night sweats” 
follow the fever, the expectoration is increased and is com- 
posed of mucus and pus ; diarrhoea is also increased, the 
dejections indicating ulceration; the stitch-like pains con- 
tinue in the sides ; muscular strength graduady diminishes ; 
emaciation becomes marked; the thermometer shows a 
temperature of from ioo degrees to 102 degrees; the feet 
and ankles are more or less swollen, denoting failure of 
the circulation. 
These symptoms, exhibiting different degrees of in- 
tensity, continue for a variable duration of time. Gen- 
erally the disease is chronic, but sometimes it runs a rapid 
course, destroying life in a few weeks. The name “gal- 
loping consumption” has been applied to the disease in 
such cases. Hoarseness, or huskiness of the voice, 
denoting chronic laryngitis, is strong evidence that con- 
sumption exists. 
To recapitulate, the symptoms pointing to this affec- 
tion are: 1st. Cough not due to other disease, at first dry 
and hacking, later, accompanied by expectoration which is 
at the commencement glossy, afterward becoming opaque, 
and more abundait. 2d. Increase of temperature, vary- 
ing from 99 degrees to 100 in the beginning, and afterward 
from 100 degrees to 102. 3d. Sharp, lancinating pain in 
the side and at the apex of the lung. 4th. Chills not 
caused by malaria. 5th. Haemoptysis; this is a valuable 
symptom but is not always present, and may occur inde- 
pendent of consumptom. 6th. Increased respiration. 
7th. Loss of weight, attended with pallor. 8th. Chronic 
inflammation of the larynx, indicated by hoarseness and 
huskiness of the voice. 9th. Suppression of the menses. 
10th. Buoyancy of mind instead of despondency. A 
knowledge as to whether or not consumption has pre- 
viously existed in either branch of the family, will help to 
a diagnosis of the case. 360 
CONSUMPTION OF TIIE LUNG. 
Causes.—It is now well established that consumption 
is caused by vegetable germs called bacilli (singular 
bacillus) a variety of bacterium. 
It is also well established, that a predisposition to this 
disease is hereditary, but why a peculiarity of constitution, 
rendering a person especially liable to the development of 
consumption, should be transmitted from parent to child, 
is not more easily explained than the fact, that traits of 
character, disposition, etc., are inherited. Neither is it 
easy to explain why some members of a family of the same 
parentage are exempt while others are attacked. These, 
however, are facts which come under the notice of every 
observant practitioner. 
Consumption is developed at all periods of life, and 
may affect the child previous to birth; twenty to thirty 
years of age is the period in which it is most likely to 
occur. Another point in reference to this disease, which 
is pretty generally accepted is, that it is transmissible. 
This takes p’ace by the expectoration, which contains the 
bacilli becoming dried, and the dust-like particles (bacilli) 
floating through the air, are carried into the lungs and 
stomachs of other individuals, and finding1 congenial soil, 
germinate and increase until the system is thoroughly im- 
pregnated with them, and disease becomes manifest. 
Another source of infection, which has not received the 
attention it should, is the use of milk from cows affected 
with consumption. The “Chicago Tribune” reports Dr. 
Bayard Holmes, of the Bacteriological Laboratory of the 
Chicago Medical College, as saying upon this point: 
“That the germs of disease have been implanted in the 
human body by impure milk, has been demonstrated in 
numberless instances. The bulk of tubercular affections 
is directly attributable to the use of milk in which the 
tuberculosis microbe has secured a lodgment. It is the 
same microbe that has been so generally known through 
the recent investigations of Prof. Koch. It is present in CONSUMPTION OF THE LUNG. 
361 
cows suffering from tuberculosis, and is transmitted 
directly through the milk. A large percentage of the 
cases of cholera infantum and so-called summer complaint 
are directly attributable to the use of milk taken from 
tubercular cows. This is proven by clinical evidence. 
Summer complaint, diarrhoea, and other intestinal diseases 
of children are also due to the use of milk which swarms 
with bacilli of various kinds. There are over fifty 
varieties of this sort of bacillus found in impure milk.” 
When the American people come to think more of 
health than money, the diseased animals will, by official 
direction, be sent to the soap or fertilizer manufactory, 
rather than to market to be sold for dairy purposes. 
Every animal used for supplying milk, should be rigidly 
examined by a competent veterinary surgeon, and if found 
diseased, ordered killed, and the owner compensated by 
the government. If this mode of disposing of discarded 
cows were adopted, the owners of such, instead of selling 
them t3 some one else, to save the loss, would report to 
the proper authorities whenever any animal showed symp- 
toms of disease. In time this would result in removing 
one source of this terrible malady. As long, however, as 
such reforms are dependent upon party politics, it cannot 
be expected that any very beneficial changes will occur. 
A few thousand deaths, annually, of the fair sons and 
daughters of the republic, are nothing compared to the 
ambition of some petty politician whose highest con- 
ception of statesmanship is intriguing for re-election and 
party supremacy. 
Treatment.—As before stated, it cannot be expected 
that consumption will be entirely prevented or cured, until 
such time as science shall produce an agent capable of des- 
troying the germs, which give rise to it. With our 
present knowledge, much, however, can be done to lessen 
the number of cases, and palliate the suffering of those 
who are so unfortunate as to be afflicted with the disease. 362 
CONSUMPTION OF THE LUNG. 
It is only when the vitality is lowered, that the con- 
ditions seem favorable for the germination of the bacilli, 
which have found lodgement within the body. This fact 
plainly indicates the line of treatment for those who are 
thrown into connection with consumption, or have reason 
to suspect that they have a hereditary predisposition. 
Every effort should be made to keep the system in the 
best possible tone, by employing such measures as tend to 
strengthen and invigorate. These relate to hygienic 
regulation in reference to diet, exercise in the open air, 
clothing, and climate. The diet should be generous as 
regards quantity, quality and variety; no rule can be laid 
down as to the kinds of food, as what agrees with one, 
does not with another. 
Pure milk, cream, butter, honey, sugar, lean meats, 
vegetables and fruits, in fact, any article which is nour- 
ishing and agrees with the patient’s stomach, can be eaten. 
Out-of-door life is of first importance to those with such 
tendencies as are mentioned above, and no person pre- 
disposed to consumption can afford, under any circum- 
stances, to choose or continue an occupation which neces- 
sitates remaining very much excluded from an abundance 
of pure air and sunshine. Exercise in the open air should 
be conjoined with either recreation or occupation which 
interests the mind. Exercise simply as a hygienic measure 
will rarely be persisted in. Over-exercise should be 
avoided, care being taken that it is not carried to the 
point of fatigue. Many patients get the idea that the 
benefit from muscular exercise is in proportion to its 
amount, and carry it to excess. 
The sleeping apartments should be well ventilated. 
Don’t fear the night air. If necessary, have a fire in the 
sleeping room, but the windows should be kept open, day 
and night. Endeavor to preserve the functions of the 
skin by means of the sponge bath, taken at a temperature 
pf from 65 to 70 degrees, and wearing next it either wool CONSUMPTION OF THE LUNG. 
363 
or silk. Care should be taken not to wear an over- 
abundance of clothing, as it tends to retain the moisture 
of the body, and defeats the object for which it is used. 
As regards change of climate, if done at all it should 
be early in the course of the disease. Do not wait till the 
strength is so far used up that the fatigue incident to the 
change distresses the patient. We have often seen 
patients with no hope of recovery advised by their physi- 
cians to try a change of climate. They were thus de- 
prived of the associations and comforts of home and 
friends, with no probability of improvement,—truly a 
cruel act. 
Hcemoptysis. This symptom often requires special 
treatment. Its occurrence usually frightens the patient 
and friends. There is, however, no occasion for alarm. 
It is often a question whether the blood coughed up 
comes from the lungs or throat. If from the lungs, it is 
usually bright red and frothy, from the little bubbles of 
air it contains ; if from the throat, these will be absent, 
and it will have a darker color. To arrest the bleeding 
nothing is better than spirits of turpentine, which should 
be inhaled, and for this a teapot filled to the internal 
opening of the spout with water warm enough so it gives 
off steam, can be used. Pour a half teaspoonful of the 
turpentine into the water, and then let the patient take 
the spout in the mouth and inhale the fumes. It should 
be commenced gradually. As an internal remedy use 
No. 79 every two hours : 
No. 79. 
31. S.c. &rgotci& (A. 3. rdo) fl. 3 iij. 
3inct. @pii “ 3 ij. 
Sdcid Gallic 3 jss. 
Syrup Simp | SS. 
Sdyua q. s. ad | ij. 
M.-Sig.—3 j every two hours. 364 
CONSUMPTION OF THE LUNG. 
In case of haemoptysis in a woman who is pregnant, 
the first named medicine in the above prescription had 
better be left out. The patient should be kept quiet, the 
shoulders well raised, and the room kept at a temperature 
not above 60 degrees. The feet should be kept warm by 
wrapping in llannel or placing hot irons, etc., to them. 
Swallowing pieces of ice is beneficial. For the cough 
attending the disease the following is most excellent in a 
large number of cases : 
No. 80. 
li 
Syrup Xolutani. . 
Syrup prune Wiry 
Xinct. Kyoscyami, 
aa.fi. 3 j. 
Potass. Bod. 3 ij. 
Sdo/ma q. s. ad. 11. 3 v. 
M.-Sig. —3j three to six times a day as required. 
If there is much pallor or supposed scrofula, it will be 
good treatment to take No. 81 at the same time as 
No. 82. Each can be taken three times a day, No. 81 
after meals, and the cough mixture (No. 80) two or three 
hours later. 
No. 81. 
Syrup Xrifoleum comp. . 
(P. D. & Co.) 
Syrup I6acma,tic hypophos 
(P. D. & Co ) 
aa. fl. 1 v. 
For the pleuritic pain which occurs in the course of 
consumption, apply a Belladonna Plaster to the side and 
leave it as long as it will remain. For the night sweats 
of consumption use No. 82. 
M.-Sig.—3 ij after meals. 
No. 82. 
n . 
Xinc. Sulph grs. vj. 
S.v. Kyoscyami “ xxiv. 
M, et div. in pilulae No. vj. Sig.—One pill every night, CONSUMPTION OF THE LUNG. 
365 
Bathing in equal parts of cider vinegar and water at a 
temperature of 80 degrees to 90 degrees will sometimes 
control the perspiration. The two can be used in bad 
cases. 
In concluding this very important subject we wish to 
impress upon all our readers the necessity of hearty coop- 
eration in an attempt to confine consumption within the 
narrowest possible limits. It must be remembered that 
the tuberculosis bacilli are spread : 1. Mostly by means 
of the discharge from the lungs of tuberculous persons. 
2. d'he dried and powdered discharge is particularly dan- 
gerous in this respect. 3. The ordinary means of disin- 
fection are quite insufficient to check their ravages. In 
consideration of these facts, care should be taken that the 
discharge from the lungs of consumptive patients is prop- 
erly cared for, not allowing it to become dried. 
Receptacles containing fluid should be used, and when 
necessary to dispose of the contents, it should be buried. 
Public buildings, schoolrooms, stores and factories should 
be supplied with cuspidores for the use of persons with 
lung trouble, and the accumulation cared for as above 
directed. 
Marriage of Consumptives.—The almost universal 
opinion of medical authorities is, that individuals with this 
affection should not marry. This conclusion is arrived at 
from the oft observed fact that marriage hastens the 
development of the disease. The principal objection to 
such marriages, however, is that children result from the 
issue, who in turn marry and become the parents of others. 
Thus the disease is perpetuated. Consumptive mothers 
should not nurse their offspring, not only on the child’s 
account, but their own. 366 
bright’s disease. 
CHAPTER X. 
DISEASES OF THE URINARY ORGANS. 
BRIGHT’S DISEASE. 
Bright’s disease is characterized by the urine containing 
albumen in greater or less quantity. This morbid con- 
dition was first pointed out by Dr. Bright of England, in 
the year 1827, and since that time has been known under 
the above name. It may be either acute or chronic. In 
the former it occurs usually as a sequel to other diseases. 
Symptoms.—The first thing usually which attracts 
attention, is “puffing of the face,” just below the eyes; 
very soon afterward the feet and ankles begin to swell. 
Coincident with the above is more or less febrile move- 
ment, preceded by chills, together with thirst; headache 
and pain in the loins; vomiting occurs in the majority of 
cases. The dropsy increases, becoming general, but 
varying as to quantity. The urine is dark colored, is 
scanty, and contains albumen which can be ascertained by 
the following process, requiring a test tube, an alcohol 
lamp, some chemically pure acetic acid, nitric acid and 
liquor potassa, in separate bottles. Put into the test tube 
about two teaspoonfuls of urine, add from two to four 
drops of the acetic acid, then heat over the lamp till it 
boils. If the urine becomes cloudy, it is due to either 
albumen or other substance ; now add three to seven drops 
of the nitric acid, and if the cloudiness does not disappear, 
it is evidence that it is due to albumen. If instead of the 
nitric acid liquor potassa be added, after boiling, the cloud- 
iness is removed, if due to albumen. bright’s disease. 
367 
Coma and convulsions occur in a certain proportion of 
cases, and is cause for alarm. 
Causes.—As stated above, this affection is most liable 
to follow after scarlet fever ; it also occurs after diphtheria, 
acute rheumatism, typhoid fever, measles and some other 
diseases. In a majority of instances, it seems to be 
brought about by influence of cold. Some authors claim 
it occurs without any chilling of the surface. 
Acute Bright1 s Disease occurs independent of the dis- 
ease named above. It is quite apt to follow debauch 
attended with bodily exposure. 
Treatment.—1 his should be with a view to relieving 
the system of the accumulated poison, urea, which causes 
the convulsions, and is the immediate source of danger. 
For this purpose, nothing equals the hot air bath. 
For helping to rid the system of the urea, give No. 83 
every two hours until the four powders are taken. 
No. 83. 
n 
Potass. Pitartras 3 ij. 
Pulv. gfa fapae, grs. X. 
a Xmgiber “ xx. 
M. et div. in pulv. No iv. Sig.— One powder every two hours. 
These will cause a free evacuation of liquid stools, and 
greatly relieve the kidneys. Medicines to act upon the 
kidneys should not be given, as they do more harm than 
good. 
Chronic Bright's Disease is a much more serious dis- 
order than the acute. It points to degenerative changes 
of the kidneys. 
The diagnosis and treatment of this affection should be 
left to a skilled practitioner. The appearance of dropsy, 
denoted by swelling of the lower eyelids, feet and ankles, 
with loss of strength, pallor of the countenance, dry, harsh 
skin, frequent passing of the urine, should always excite 368 
DIABETES. 
suspicion, and a physician be consulted. If you have 
chronic Bright’s disease, do not spend your money or time 
on patent “ cure-alls,’' or highly advertised specialists. 
Your family physician can do you more good than any one 
else, and we advise you to give him your confidence, ask 
for an honest opinion, and abide by it. 
Many of the so-called cures of this disease are nothing 
but cases of irritation of the bladder, but which are really 
more annoying and painful than true Bright’s disease. 
DIABETES. 
By the term diabetes, is meant simply increased How 
of urine. It is applied to two affections, which differ very 
materially from each other. The one, diabetes insipidus. 
consists in the discharge of an abnormal amount of urine 
containing little or no solid materials. In the other, 
diabetes mellitus, the urine is also very greatly increased, 
and contains sugar. The former affection is not so des- 
tructive to life as the latter. To distinguish one from the 
other requires a chemical analysis of the urine, which must 
be left to the family physician, as should also the treat- 
ment. He will be able to give directions as to what may 
or may not be eaten. Diet is an important factor in the 
treatment, and the patient should endeavor to carry out 
the directions in this respect. The advice given under 
Bright’s disease, as to taking other remedies than those 
prescribed by the medical attendant, is also applicable 
here. 
One of the most troublesome symptoms in this affec- 
tion, is the great thirst. The following, prescribed by Dr. 
Duchenne, No. 84, will relieve this : 
No. 84. 
Potass, phosph 3 j. 
Stfqua fl. 1 V 
M.-Sig,—3j to ij three to six times a day. GRAVEL. 
369 
GRAVEL. 
When a patient discharges gritty powder, or sand, or 
small calculi, with the urine, it is termed “a fit of the 
gravel.” These are usually reddish in color, and are 
formed from the combination of uric acid and lime. 
When grayish in color, they are composed of either phos- 
phate or carbonate of lime. In the former case the urine 
will be acid in reaction, in the latter alkaline. 
These deposits are first formed in the kidneys, and in 
order to reach the bladder have to pass through the 
ureters (see engraving No. 11); when small no attention 
is paid to them, but when their size is greater than the 
opening through the ureter, severe pain is caused by the 
pas age. This is in prop rtion to thi size and roughness 
of the calculus. The pain thus produced is known as 
nephritic colic. 
Symptoms.—The pain of nephritic colic is, as a rule, 
developed suddenly, becoming almost immediately intense. 
The pain is located at the side of the spinal column, just 
at the lower border of the ribs. From this point the pain 
radiates in different directions, but especially in the direc- 
tion of the bladder, sometimes passing to the groin and 
thigh. In males pain is usually felt in the testicle, which 
is drawn upward. A very important symptom, and one 
which is seldom absent, is the almost constant desire to 
pass urine, which is greatly diminished, only a few drops 
being voided at a time. The patient tries different 
positions, hoping to get relief. The countenance denotes 
suffering; is pale, and sometimes covered with perspi- 
ration. If the attack continues for a little time there is 
thirst, vomiting and coldness of the surface. After 
varying considerably in different cases, the pain suddenly 
ceases, followed by a free discharge of urine, which may 
contain blood. At the discontinuance of the pain, the 
calculus has reached the bladder, and is usually dis- 
charged with the urine. If it remains in the bladder and 370 
INCONTINENCE OF URINE. 
increases in size, it constitutes what is known as stone in 
the bladder. A person who has had one attack of ne- 
phritic colic is liable to others. It may recur at periods 
more or less remote. 
Treatment should be with a view to relieving the 
patient’s suffering. This will not be complete until the 
calculus reaches the bladder. Remedies to palliate should 
be employed. To the back apply No. 59, as directed for 
lead colic, and give internally twenty drops of tincture of 
opium (laudanum), which can be repeated in an hour if 
the pain does not subside. If this is not at hand twenty 
drops of chloroform in a teaspoonful of glycerine may be 
given, or the following prescription (No. 85) in table- 
spoonful doses every hour till pain is relieved : 
No. 85. 
ft 
Chloral My drat grs. xl. 
f'Syrup <S4cac fl. 3 ss. 
Syrup Chocolate “ j. 
Shx. Simp “ 3 ss. 
M. Sig.—1 iv every hour till pain is relieved. 
If at the end of the first hour the pain should be 
somewhat better, it may not be necessary to give more 
than a half dose. In giving medicine to relieve pain, it 
should always be borne in mind that only sufficient should 
he given to relieve, 
INCONTINENCE OF URINE. 
This condition is met with in both adults and children. 
In the former it is the result of over-distension; in the 
latter the neck of the bladder ceases to act as soon as the 
influence of the will is withdrawn, as during sleep, giving 
rise to nocturnal incontinence, or “bed-wetting.” The 
child is generally brought to the physician because of 
this, and too often the history reveals the painful fact that INCONTINENCE OF URINE. 
371 
punishment has been severely tried before professional 
advice was sought. No good can come from such a 
course. Moral suasion will accomplish infinitely more. 
Causes.—Incontinence in children may be due to pin 
worms in the rectum. These should be treated by 
injecting into the rectum night and morning about four 
ounces of warm infusion of quassia chips, made by pour- 
ing over one-quarter ounce of the chips a quart of boiling 
water and allow to stand twelve hours. The following 
may be used as an injection : 
No. 86. 
Calomel gj*s. iv. 
Jliia/age of Stfinseed fl. = i v. 
M. Sig. —Use half at night and balance in the morning as an injection. 
Sometimes the incontinence is caused by a too long 
foreskin, or from its being adhered to the gland. This 
condition requires the advice of a surgeon. If not arising 
from the causes named above, it is probably due to a 
morbid condition of the muscular coat of the neck of the 
bladder, and the following (Nos. 87 and 88) should be 
given in teaspoonful doses each three times a day : 
No. 87. 
n 
3met. Jem. 31ur fl. 3 j. 
Simp, filixir ([. s. ad. “ z ij. 
M. Sig.—~j three times a day before meals as directed. 
No. 88. 
3inct. fieMadotinae fl. 3 j. 
(Made from I’. D. & Co.'s normal liquid ) 
o%mp. Shxir u s ij. 
M. Sig.—Zj three times a day two hours after meals as direrted. 
Nos. 87 and 88 are for a child from six to twelve years 372 
RETENTION OF URINE. 
of age, above twelve give cne-fourth more, previous to six 
years diminish one-third. 
In addition to the above remedies, care should be 
exercised to see that the child empties the bladder the 
last thing before retiring, and once during the night, and 
should be taught to sleep on the side; sleeping on the back 
congests the spinal cord and leads to incontinence and 
other disorders. A large handkerchief with a knot in it, 
tied about the waist so the knot comes over the spine will 
tend to prevent the child sleeping on the back. 
Incontinence in a child during the daytime points to 
irritation of the bladder, and a surgeon should be con- 
sulted, as the irritation may be due to the presence of a 
stone. Incontinence in the adult will also require the 
advice of a surgeon. 
RETENTION OF URINE. 
This term denotes that the urine is retained within the 
bladder. It occurs in numerous instances, such as pa- 
ralysis, injuries to the brain, and in great prostration in 
acute disease. The introduction of a catheter is usually 
required to relieve it. A surgeon should be called for the 
operation the first time, and if there is no great amount 
of obstruction, the nurse can usually perform it afterward 
by following the instructions given by the surgeon. 
Suppression of the urine means that very little, or no 
urine is secreted by the kidney. If persistent it is always 
fatal. The hot air bath is the quickest and best remedy. 
HEMATURIA OR BLOODY URINE. 
This occurs as a symptom c f other diseases, and as 
such will be treated in its proper place. Its occurrence in 
connection with “a fit of the gravel” has already been 
noticed. It sometimes occurs after active muscular exer- 
cise, and usually causes great alarm; this is unnecessary, II/EMATURIA OR BLOODY URINE. 
373 
as it usually results in no harm. The following (No. 89) 
will correct the trouble, arising from such cause, in a few 
hours: 
No. 89. 
Strict. Se/rri Slur fl. I ss. 
SI. ix. fiellcidomiac (P. W. p Wo.). “ 3 ss. 
Simp. Slixir q. s. ad “ z ij. 
M. Sig—3 j every four hours. 374 
DELIRIUM TREMENS. 
CHAPTER XI. 
DISEASES OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 
DELIRIUM TREMENS. (.Alcoholism.) 
This disease is known, vulgarly, by numerous names, 
such as “snakes in the boots,” “tremors,” “horrors,” “jim- 
jams,” etc. 
Symptoms.—The first symptom 1 hat attracts attention 
is inability to sleep; this is followed by muscular tremor, 
especially of the tongue, and great mental depression; 
this latter often leads to suicide. These symptoms con- 
tinue for two or three days, and unless relief is obtained, 
are followed by complete development of the disease, in 
which the mental derangement is marked. The eyes 
become vacant and staring, and the countenance often 
indicates fear. It is impossible for the patient to remain 
quiet; the movements are noticeably quick; speech is in- 
coherent; the mind wanders; the beggar in his imagination 
becomes wealthy, and the millionaire, a tramp; wild and 
ferocious animals, and the most loathsome reptiles in turn 
creep over his body, or crouch ready to spring upon him; 
friends, long since dead, cluster around the bedside to 
upbraid him. At first the patient may appreciate the 
unreality of what he sees and hears, but in a short time 
they become real, and nothing can make it seem otherwise. 
Patients in this stage should not be left alone for a 
moment, as they not infrequently leap from windows or 
balconies, and are greatly injured, if not killed. They 
sometimes escape, imagining their attendants are their 
greatest enemies, Dr. Flint tells of a patient who escaped DELIRIUM TREMENS. 
375 
in his night clothes and ran barefooted over frozen ground 
fifteen miles before being overtaken by men on horseback. 
The writer learned his anatomy of the bones, from a 
portion of a skeleton of a poor unfortunate, who escaped 
from the watchers to a neighboring swamp, while suffering 
from this affection. The body was not found till nearly a 
year afterward; word was sent to the friends who refused 
to care for it, and the authorities turned it over for the 
above useful purpose. Two students have since used it for 
a similar purpose, and it is now doing duty in a Michigan 
high school. Certainly this was better than confining it 
to the potter’s field. 
Causes.—These are so well-known it is hardly neces- 
sary to repeat them. The continued use of alcoholic 
stimulants gives rise to the disease. No doubt the attack 
is hastened in many cases by the withdrawal of the 
habitual amount; this accounts for the frequent occurrence 
of the disease in inebriates who are thrown into prisons or 
hospitals. 
Treatment.—Upon appearance of the first symptoms, 
the following should be taken: 
Mosquera’s beef meal one tablespoonful, red pepper 
(capsicum) ten grains, mix and pour over it one-half tea- 
cupful of boiling water; as soon as cool enough, this 
should be taken at one draught, and repeated every three 
hours. If symptoms do not improve under this treatment 
and sleep ensue, take No. 90 every three hours, alter- 
nately with the beef. 
No. 90. 
$ 
Sodium Tromid 3 v. 
Chloral f£ydrat 3 ijss. 
Syrup Chocolate. 
Syrup Sdcaciae . 
Slixir Simp.... 
>• aa. fl. 1 ij. 
Sdqua dist. q. s. ad. fl. § viij. 
M. Sig.—3 iv every three hours as directed. 376 
HYDROPHOBIA. 
The object of No. 90 is to produce sleep, which is 
above all things most necessary in delirium tremens; with 
it comes relief, without it the symptoms described continue 
and multiply until death closes the scene. First and sec- 
ond attacks of the affection do not, as a rule, prove fatal; 
after this number the danger rapidly increases with each 
succeeding attack. 
HYDROPHOBIA. (Rabies.) 
“ The affection called rabies, and more commonly 
known as hydrophobia, is due to the action of a special 
poison, a virus, generally derived from the mouth of some 
animal of the canine or feline race, viz., the dog, cat, fox 
or wolf.” (Flint.) 
It is not our intention to enter into a description or 
treatment of this disease. It has been demonstrated that 
the poison can be counteracted by inoculation, and as this 
is the only treatment which offers anything like a reason- 
able hope for the patient suffering from this disease, we 
advise that it be resorted to. 
Hospitals are now established in nearly all cities for 
the treatment of these cases. It is known as the Pasteur 
Method, having been first successfully used by Prof. 
Pasteur of Paris. If bitten by an animal supposed to be 
“mad,” do not, as is often done, kill the animal imme- 
diately, but secure it where it can do no further harm, and 
wait until the character of the disease is established. 
Dogs and cats often have epilepsy or other diseases that 
cause convulsions. Rabies in a dog is to be suspected 
when the animal shows symptoms of disease by eating 
straw, paper, etc., and refusing his usual food. He is 
usually shy and irritable. After the disease is well estab- 
lished, there will be little trouble in deciding whether the 
dog is mad or not; the ears and tail drop, the eyes are 
watery, saliva runs from the mouth, the bark is very 
noticeably changed. As the disease advances, the dog ST. VITUS' DANCE. 
377 
becomes delirious, and snaps at invisible objects, or at 
anything that comes in his way. 
Convulsions are not always present. The prevailing 
idea that a dog, when mad, will not touch water is incor- 
rect; it is frequently lapped without difficulty. During 
the summer months, dogs should have an abundance of 
water, and always kept muzzled. Dogs die with rabies 
usually previous to the sixth day. 
ST. VITUS’ DANCE. (Chorea.) 
This disease is characterized by irregular contractions 
of the voluntary muscles. The irregular, “jerky” move- 
ment usually begins in one or both of the arms, and 
gradually extends to the muscles of the face, and fre- 
quently to the lower extremities. It is sometimes difficult 
to realize that the patient is not making the movements 
purposely. The condition, however, in severe cases is 
truly pitiful ; the patient is unable to walk, feed himself, 
or perform the voluntary acts which the wants of the body 
require ; speech may be impaired or lost. These move- 
ments are usually suspended during sleep. There is no 
fever in this affection ; the appetite is impaired, and the 
bowels constipated. The e is usually great irritability of 
temper. 
Causes.—This disorder seems defend nt upon several 
causes. Notably among them are anaemia, rheumatism, 
malaria, worms in the intestinal tract, fright. It occurs 
mostly between ten and fifteen years of age, and much 
oftener in girls than boys. The affection continues from 
a few weeks to several months. The tendency of the dis- 
ease is toward health. 
Treatment.— If the patient is pale, ind eating anaemia 
the remedies prescribed under that disease should be 
given. If there are worms in the intestinal tract, the 
following, No. 91, will be found very effective in removing 
them : 378 
APOPLEXY. 
No. 9 1 . 
I* 
Sourd Seed 3 ss. 
Sugar. ... 3 v. 
,ttilk fl. 3 i j. 
M. Triturate the seed with the sugar, addinga few drops of milk from time to time 
until a paste is formed; add the balance of the milk, rub up well and filter, lake at 
one dose early in the morning, and two hours later give a dose of castor oil.—Dupont 
Med. World. 
After this take No. 92, in teaspoonful doses, for four 
to six weeks, three times a day before or after meals as 
preferred. 
No. 92. 
Kematic fCypopJwspkites (P. &. & 9£o.) . tl. ? iv. 
Care should be taken that any constipation is corrected. 
Sig —3 j three times a day as directed. 
APOPLEXY. 
Apoplexy means literally “ to cripple by a stroke,” 
hence the incorrectness of the tautological phrase, an apop- 
lectic stroke, so generally used to denote an attack of this 
disease. 
The term apoplexy is commonly used to denote sudden 
loss of consciousness, sensation, and power of voluntary 
motion, together with more or less disturbances of the 
functions of respiration and circulation. 
Symptoms.—As a rule, the attack comes on suddenly; 
the patient, without warning, falls down insensible, 
and paralyzed; the skin is covered with cold perspi- 
ration ; the face is livid, the pupils dilated, the breathing 
laborious; this condition may terminate in death in a few 
minutes. These are the symptoms accompanying the 
worst cases. A less severe form is indicated by acute pain 
in the head, vomiting, and faintness, with pallor of the 
countenance; sometimes the patient only staggers, and 
does not fall; the consciousness is only temporarily lost, apoplexy. 
379 
and the patient appears better, though the headache con- 
tinues—to be followed in a few hours by “coma,” and 
paralysis of some part of the body. 
“Coma” may continue for a few hours or days, and 
then pass off, the patient so far recovering as to be 
around; or it may continue, becoming more pronounced, 
and after a variable period of time death occurs. If the 
patient survives a first attack, the paralysis may pass off, 
or it may continue for an indefinite period, in some 
instances becoming permanent. The mental faculties are 
more or less affected by an attack of apoplexy, depending 
upon the amount of injury to the brain. 
Another form, not so common as the preceding one, 
is the occurrence of paralysis without loss of conscious- 
ness. Apoplexy very often occurs in the night, the patient 
waking in the morning to find himself paralyzed. 
Causes.—Apoplexy is due to pressure upon the brain. 
I his is most frequently caused from hemorrhage within 
the cranium, and of course involves the rupture of the 
coats of a bloodvessel. The amount of blood which thus 
escapes differs much in different cases, varying from a 
few drops to several ounces. The severity of the attack, 
other things being equal, depends up n the amount of 
blood which escapes. Apoplexy is sometimes caused by 
congestion, and in such instances is preceded by symptoms 
which point to it, viz.: Impaired memory, a sense of 
fullness in the head, double vision, dizziness, disturbed 
hearing, numbness and pricking sensation in the extrem- 
ities. The prevailing idea is that persons of full habit 
with shortness of neck, are more liable to attacks of apo- 
plexy than those of spare or ordinary habit. The record 
of a large number of cases by different medical author- 
ities proves the incorrectness of this opinion. 
Treatment.—A physician should be sent for at once, 
and until he arrives the patient should be placed in a cool 
room ; the head and shoulders moderately raised ; cold 380 
SUNSTROKE. 
should be applied to the head, and heat to the extremities ; 
everything which tends to constrict the neck or chest 
should be removed, and a clyster of soap and water 
should be given. 
During the course of the disease, if it becomes neces- 
sary to give something to quiet the patient, dissolve fifteen 
grains of chloral hydrate in half a teacup of warm m lk, 
and inject into the rectum. 
Apoplexy arising from congestion does not prove fatal 
usually ; arising from hemorrhage, the result is quite oth- 
erwise. If the first attack does not prove fatal, others 
are liable to recur sooner or later, which terminate 
unfavorably. 
SUNSTROKE. (Insolation.) 
The term sunstroke is applied to an affection occa- 
sioned by great heat. The name would indicate that it 
was always due to the sun’s rays. This, however, is not 
correct, as it is sometimes caused by extreme heat, though 
the patient be excluded from the sun’s rays altogether. 
Symptoms.—The attack usually commences with pain 
in the head ; a sense of fullness in the region of the 
stomach ; nausea, and sometimes vomiting ; dizziness and 
blurring of the sight, all objects becoming of the same 
color. These symptoms are rapidly followed by insensi- 
bility, and in about one-half the cases, convulsions. 
The thermometer will indicate a temperature ranging 
from 103 degrees to 107 degrees. Frequent desire to 
void ur'ne, with slight alternating sensations of cold and 
heat, are the symptoms pointing to danger of an attack. 
Treatment.—This should consist of the application of 
cold to the head, neck and body. A bag of pounded ice 
should be placed to the head immediately. While this 
is being made ready hold a large piece to the head, and 
sponge the face, neck and chest with ice water. If ice is 
not at hand, pour cold water upon the head and over the MENINGITIS. 
381 
face and chest. Bear in mind that time is precious. As 
an internal remedy give No. 93 in tablespoonful doses 
every two hours : 
No. 93 
& 
Potassa fir omul. 3 vss. 
filqua fl. | viij. 
M. Sig.—3 iv every two hours as directed. 
As soon as the patient recovers consciousness, the 
dose c f the above can be reduced one-half. If the patient 
cannot swallow, this should be given by the rectum, 
increasing the dose to a tablespoonful and a half, and 
adding an equal amount of warm water. After con- 
sciousness is restored, No. 93 in teaspoonful doses should 
be continued for a week, four times a day. The patient 
should remain quiet in as cool a place as possible, and 
dismiss all business or other cares. The diet should be 
nourishing, and sleep sufficient and regular. 
The prevention of sunstroke is of great importance, 
and we believe, in the ordinary occupations of life, it can 
be accomplished by proper precautions. If you wish to 
escape sunstroke, don’t drink alcoholic stimulants of any 
kind. Ninety-nine per cent, of the cases of sunstroke 
occur in individuals addicted to this habit. Don’t drink 
ice water ; it interferes with digestion, and thus lowers 
vitality. Don’t expose yourself to extremes of heat if at 
all indisposed. Don’t wear a heavy, ill-ventilated hat 
Don’t fail to get at least seven hours’ sleep out of the 
twenty-four. Don’t wear more clothing than is necessary. 
Don’t eat meats or other heat-producing food. Don’t 
fail to eat plenty of fruit. Don’t get excited. Keep cool. 
MENINGITIS. 
By referring to Part First, a description will be found 
of the membranes of the brain and spinal cord, three in 
number, and named from without inward as, the dura 382 
HYDROCEPHALUS—PALSY. 
mater, archnoid and pia mater. Inflammation of these 
membranes is termed meningitis. If the inflammation is 
confined to the portion within the skull, it is called cerebral 
meningitis; if to the spinal portion, spinal meningitis; 
when both portions are affected at the same time, it is 
called cerebrospinal meningitis. 
The last rarely occurs excepting in epidemic form, and 
as such has sometimes been called spotted fever. 
HYDROCEPHALUS. 
By this is meant the accumulation of water within the 
cranium. It is sometimes present at birth, or it may occur 
in early infancy, leading in some cases to enormous en- 
largement of the cranium, and giving rise to a character- 
istic deformity known as water-head. 
PALSY. (Paralysis.) 
Denotes loss in part or whole of muscular action of 
sensation ; the former is termed motor paralysis, the latter 
sensory paralysis. Either may exist separately, or the two 
conjointly. 
Paralysis is said to be complete when there is total loss 
of motion or sensation ; incomplete when there is diminu- 
tion only. It is general when the whole body is affected; 
partial when limited to a portion of the same. When 
both sides of the body are affected, it is called paraplegia ; 
when only one, hemiplegia ; local paralysis is meant when 
only a small portion of the body is affected, as the face, a 
foot, a hand, etc. 
Paralysis, occurring in any of the forms as described 
above, is dependent upon some diseased condition of 
either brain or spinal cord, giving rise to an interrupted 
nerve supply. To illustrate: If a cord were tied tightly 
around the sciatic nerve (see engraving No. 18), the 
portion of the leg depending upon this particular branch 
for its nerve supply, would be paralyzed. VERTIGO LOCKJAW. 
383 
The same effects follow division of the nerve obstruc- 
tion from the pressure of a tumor, or disorganization from 
disease of the nerve. The same will occur in any portion 
of the body, provided the nerves distributed to such 
portion are similarly affected. So complete obstruction at 
any point of the spinal cord, cuts off sensation and volun- 
tary motion in all parts supplied by the nerves connected 
with the cord below the point of obstruction. In hanging, 
the spinal cord is broken high up in the neck and the 
nerve supply to the vital organs, as well as the body, is cut 
off, and heart and lungs cease to act—death being almost 
instantaneous. 
The nerves of special sense are also liable to be affected, 
producing loss of sight, taste, smell or hearing ; depending, 
of course, upon the nerve diseased. 
VERTIGO. 
This term is used to indicate a disorder which occurs 
in persons of apparently good health, and consists of gid- 
diness suddenly developed. Surrounding objects appear 
to be turning round, or the person seems himself to be in 
rapid rotary movement; the patient attacked may fall, but 
usually staggers and saves himself by grasping some ob- 
ject. Accompanying the giddiness is usually more or less 
nausea, sometimes vomiting. These attacks vary in 
duration and frequency of occurrence. Vertigo leads to 
no serious disease, nor is it a forerunner of such; conse- 
quently no apprehension need be felt from an attack. 
Usually the stomach or bowels are at fault, requiring a 
few doses of prescription No. 56 (cascara cordial) to reg- 
ulate them. Vertigo sometimes occurs from long con- 
tinued mental effort ; in such cases, a vacation is the best 
treatment. 
LOCKJAW. ( Tetanus.) 
Lockjaw is characterized by persistent rigidity of the 
muscles of the jaw, and frequently the voluntary muscles 384 
HYSTERIA. 
of the entire body. The persisting rigidity of the jaw has 
given rise to the name as above. The disease usually 
follows after wounds or local injuries of other kinds. It 
is an extremely rare affection, and we need not consider it 
further. 
HYSTERIA. 
This is a nervous affection occurring almost entirely 
in women. The emotional or reflex excitability is greatly 
exaggerated, with diminished will power, so the patient 
loses control over the emotions. “A person, whether male 
or female, is said to be hysterical, who weeps or laughs 
irrepressibly on inadequate occasions, and when the 
emotional acts are incongruous. Weeping and laughing 
are physiological acts when they represent emotions which 
are natural; that is, excited by adequate causes, and not 
exceedine the bounds which observation shows to be 
o 
consistent with health, T hese acts are pathological when 
they do not represent corresponding emotions, or when 
they proceed from emotions which are unnatural in view 
of the circumstances under which they occur.” (Flint). 
Immoderate laughing and crying are not the only 
symptoms pointing to this affection. The morbid con- 
dition of the mind often leads to exaggeration of the 
symptoms, and to efforts at deception. To puzzle the 
doctor seems to be a desideratum with many hysterical 
patients. 
Other symptoms of this disease, are a feeling in the 
throat as if it contained a foreign body, called thn globus 
hystericus, and has the appearance of rising from the 
stomach, which has led to the belief in many instances, 
that the malady was due to the stomach containing a 
living reptile, which crawled up into the throat and caus( d 
the convulsion. If the reader will remember the actions 
of the gastric juice upon animal tissue, he will see how 
absurd such suppositions are. If a snake or other living 
animal, were introduced into the stomach, it would be HYSTERIA. 
385 
digested in a few hours at the longest. Yawning, 
stretching, sighing, twitching of the muscles, cramps, are 
also symptoms entering into many cases. 
After one or two attacks, in which more or less of the 
symptoms as described above, are present, convulsions 
may occur. These are preceded by distress in the epi- 
gastrium; twitching of the upper eyelids and eyeballs, and 
excessive winking. The movements in convulsions of 
hysteria are distinctive of the affection; the limbs are 
thrown in various directions, often striking against solid 
objects with force; the patient rolls from side to side of 
the bed, and on the floor if not restrained, and sometimes 
shows a prodigious degree of strength. In this form of 
convulsions it is extremely rare for the tongue to be 
bitten, or foamy saliva to be ejected from the mouth, as in 
epilepsy. 
These movements continue for a few minutes, followed 
by a period of rest, and are then renewed. Between the 
active movement the muscles often remain rigid; con- 
sciousness seems to be lost, but generally the patient has 
cognizance of what is said and done. 
Causes.—Occurring in women, as it almost always 
does (some writers say there is no exception to the rule), 
it is presumable that the cause has its origin in the organs 
peculiar to their sex; and it is without doubt seated in the 
ovaries. In two cases which the writer saw in male 
patients, who had all the symptoms of hysteria, and were 
relieved by the usual remedies for the disease, investi- 
gation revealed the fact that both were in the habit of 
practicing self-pollution. This would seem to indicate 
that the sexual organs were involved in the causation. 
Overtasking of mind and body, mental anxiety or grief 
and the prostration incident to various diseases, tend to 
induce an attack of hysteria in persons prone to the 
disease. 
Treatment.—First attacks usually alarm the friends, 386 
EPILEPSY. 
and a physician is called. If he is honest, and tells the 
friends that the patient has hysteria, in all probability he 
gets his discharge, and another is called, who, being 
more discreet than honest, gives the disease a high sound- 
ing name, and after a variable period, the patient recovers, 
to the great satisfaction of the friends. The first called 
has a clear conscience, the last a larger bank account, and 
an increased—but fraudulent—reputation. 
At the beginning of the attack, it is advisable to 
exclude all visitors, aud the patient should be told what 
the probable disease is, and encouraged to make an effort 
to control the symptoms. To aid in this give two grains 
asafoetida pills and repeat every two hours till the symp- 
toms are relieved. If the bowels are constipated, they 
should be evacuated by means of a clyster; mustard 
should be applied over the ovaries. In case of con- 
vulsions, do not restrain the patient more than to prevent 
actual injury. The nurse should take care of the patient, 
and all others should be excluded from the sick room. 
Do not allow neighbors or friends to crowd into the room, 
or about the door. There is no danger in this affection. 
The attitude of the attendant toward the patient should 
be one of kindness but unswerving firmness. We think if 
this treatment is begun early, you will have no occasion 
to call a physician, but if you do and he informs you the 
affection is hysteria, do not feel offended, but thank him 
for his candor; follow his directions, and rest assured he 
will do you good; we feel positive of this, for moral 
courage and intelligence go together, and none but a 
morally courageous man would inform the friends or 
patient of the presence of hysteria. 
EPILEPSY. 
“ The leading symptoms are usually sudden loss of con- 
sciousness and sensibility, with clonic spasms of the vol- 
untary muscles, followed by exhaustion and coma; the epilepsy. 
387 
attack varying in intensity and duration, and having a ten- 
dency to recur at intervals. The paroxysmal loss of con- 
sciousness is, however, the prominent or important ele- 
ment present in every instance, while not infrequently it 
is the only one, there being no evident spasmodic move- 
ments of any kind. There are sometimes, though not in 
the majority of cases, premonitory symptoms sufficient to 
warn the patient of an approaching seizure. These 
warnings differ both in character and the length of time 
they last. In some cases they are too short to allow the 
sufferer to dismount from horseback, or to get away from 
the fire, or even to lie down ; while in other instances 
many minutes, or even hours elapse, between their occur- 
rence and the attack. Spectral illusions, headache, sick- 
ness, dimness of vision, tremor or twitching, confusion of 
thought, a vague sense of fear and terror, and especially 
that peculiar blowing sensation known as the aura epi- 
Icptica, constitute the most frequent premonitory symp- 
toms. The epileptic aura is differently compared by 
patients to a stream of cold water, or a current of cold 
or warm air, or the creeping of an insect, the sensation 
commencing at the extremity of a limb, and more or less 
rapidly ascending along the skin toward the head. Di- 
rectly the aura stops the paroxysm takes place. 
“Symptoms.—The commencement of a typical seizure is 
generally characterized by a cadaverous pallor of the 
countenance, and the utterance of a loud piercing shriek, 
or a kind of suppressed groan, immediately after which 
the individual falls to the ground senseless, and violently 
convulsed. Hence the disease has been called by the 
vulgar the falling sickness, or more vaguely fits. During 
the attack the convulsive movements continue violent. 
There is gnashing of the teeth, foaming at the mouth, 
and the tongue is thrust forward and often severely bitten ; 
the eyes are partly opened and suffused, the eyeballs 
roling, and the pupils dilated and insensible to light; the 388 
EPILEPSY. 
pulse becomes feeble, or it may remain natural, and the 
skin is generally cold and clammy. There may be invol- 
untary defecation and micturition, with or without vom- 
iting ; the breathing is laborious or almost suspended, 
while the face gets flushed and then livid and turgid. In 
fact, death seems about to take place from suffocation ; 
when gradually these alarming phenomena subside, the 
extremities of one side are jerked about, and shortly after 
all convulsive movements cease. 
“The paroxysm leaves the epileptic insensible and 
apparently in a sound sleep, from which he recovers 
exhausted and with a slight mental confusion or headache, 
but without any knowledge of what he has just gone 
through. An attack of vomiting will sometimes follow 
the attack, while generally there is a copious secretion of 
almost colorless urine, of low specific gravity, for many 
hours after the fit. 
“ The average duration of the fit is three or five or 
eight minutes. It may, however, last for half an hour or 
more. The periods at which the seizures recur are 
variable.” (Tanner.) 
Causes.—The cause of this disease is very obscure. 
In about one-third of the cases it has an hereditary origin. 
If the mother is epileptic, the offspring is more likely to 
be so than when the father is afflicted. In many cases a 
history of some previous injury to the brain exists. 
Violent mental emotions, sudden fear, the sight of an epi- 
leptic fit, are exciting causes. 
Treatment.—Bromine in the form of either bromide of 
potassium or sodium is perhaps the best remedy known at 
the present time for this affection. Most of the advertised 
“ cures ” are solutions of these medicines slightly colored. 
The following formula will be found a good one for the 
administration of this remedy : NERVOUS HEADACHE. 
389 
No. 94. 
Potassti /Jromid. 3 iiss. 
S'inct. dent fl. z ij. 
•Sdqua dist. q. s. ad “ z viij. 
M. Sig.—3iv as directed. 
Take of the above a tablespoonful twice a day for ten 
days ; then four times a day for a like period, and then 
increase to six times a day, and continue for thirty days. 
At the expiration of this time substitute bromide of sodium 
for the potassium, and commence with the same dose as at 
first, and increase in like manner, and continue for a like 
period. Do not attempt to hold a patient with an epi- 
leptic fit, only to the extent of preventing injury, nor 
should his thumbs be forcibly unclinched. Many people 
believe the attack will subside if this can be done. There 
is nothing in it. The patient will feel better after the 
attack, if allowed to struggle through it unmolested. A 
cork or piece of rubber can be placed between the teeth 
to protect the tongue. This will have to be done at the 
beginning of the attack. 
NERVOUS HEADACHE. 
Nervous headache, next to sick headache, is the most 
common of all forms of this disorder. It is not confined 
to any particular class of society, but is most frequently 
seen in persons of nervous temperament, and delicate 
organization. 
No temperament can, however, claim exemption from 
it, and no habit of body is proof against it. In the ma- 
jority of patients suffering from this form of headache, 
more or less anaemia exists. (See Anaemia.) It is properly 
the headache of exhaustion and overwork. Thus we see 
it occurring in women who are approaching the middle 
period of life, and who are exhausted by the strain of 
maternal duties; and in business and professional men, 390 
MERVOUS HEADACHE. 
who devote long hours to mental work, without any or 
very little physical exercise, and in those who think almost 
constantly upon one subject. It is now universally ad- 
mitted that thought exhausts the nervous substance, as 
surely as walking exhausts the muscles; nothing, however, 
so rapidly exhausts the brain as monotony of thought or 
study. 
Symptoms.—In the majority of cases, the attack begins 
with some disturbance of vision, such as a painful sensation 
on attempting to read or look at objects, and a misty or 
cloudy appearance before the eyes, flashes of light, daz- 
zling sparks, etc. It is preceded usually with some excite- 
ment of manner and irritability, which varies from a few 
hours to several days. 
The pain usually commences in the forehead and top 
of head, occasionally the back of it. After a little time it 
not infrequently seizes upon one temple or one eye, or 
one-half of the head ; there is usually some disturbance of 
the stomach, but not to so great an extent as in sick 
headache. The attack varies in duration and intensity, 
sometimes lasting a few hours to as many days. In some 
cases the pain only partially interferes with the usual 
occupation, and in others prostrates the patient from one 
to three days, the pain being so intense as to be almost 
unbearable. 
Treatment.—No rule can be laid down which will meet 
the indications in all cases. A change of occupation, 
scene and habits, will, in a large number of instances, 
lessen the frequency of the attacks. This is easily pre- 
scribed in headache, as in many other diseases, but unfor- 
tunately, the circumstances of life seldom admit of its 
being observed faithfully or conscientiously. A man is 
obliged to live in a large town, and from bad air and want 
of exercise he gets severe headaches; and if he resides in 
the country, he loses them. But he has no choice of res- 
idence; his lot has fallen among the noise and crowd, NERVOUS HEADACHE. 
391 
where all is hurry and excitement, and he is driven forward 
with the throng, as feeble to oppose it as the stream of a 
gentle rivulet is to reverse the course of the mountain 
torrent into which it falls. When nervous headache is 
threatening, the patient should lie down, and observe the 
strictest seclusion and rest; this, if done at an early stage, 
will often avert an attack altogether. A small mustard 
plaster may be placed upon the nape of the neck. 
No. 95, taken as soon as symptoms are first felt, will 
often give relief. 
No. 95. 
li 
Pdcid hydrobromic 
(Wade’s Formula) 
SI. £x. duaranae,. 
aa. fl. 3 ss. 
M. Sig.—3 j in a half tumblerful of water. To be repeated as required. 
—Coll, and Clin. Record 
Another excellent remedy for this form of headache is 
No. 96. 
I* 
Caffeine 
Salicylate of Sodium. 
aa. grs iv. 
SCydroclblorate of Cocaine “ jss. 
Syrup il. 3 vj. 
Sdyua a 3 ij- 
M. Sig.:—Take one half at the beginning of attack, and balance in 30 to 40 minutes. 
— Dujardin-Beaumetz. 
Another remedy of unusual merit is 
No. 97. 
titrate of Caffeine grs. iss. 
Phenacetine “ ij. 
Sugar of Jlilk “ iv. 
M. Sig.—Take at one dose. -La Medicine Moderne- 
This last prescription can be repeated in two hours if 
necessary. It is also an excellent remedy for sick head- 392 
HYPOCHONDRIASIS. 
ache, and if used for that affection, should be taken in the 
same dose as directed for nervous headache. Patients 
who are able to foretell an attack some little time previous 
to the pain in the head, will be able to ward it off by the 
following, by Dr. Win. Henry Day of London : 
No. 98. 
Potass. Promid. 3 lj. 
Spts. Sdrrv. Sdrorn fl. 3 iij. 
Sdtfuao ydampli “ § vj. 
Persons who find it inconvenient to take internal 
remedies, will get much benefit from rubbing the following, 
liniment No. 59, upon the nape of the neck and temples. 
It can be used in any form of headache with advantage. 
Hygienic measures must not be neglected, but everything 
that tends to tone up the system must be resorted to ; 
nutritious diet, regular and sufficient sleep, exercise in the 
open air, bathing, etc. 
M. Sig.—3 iv three times a day.—'■'■Dr. Day'' London. 
HYPOCHONDRIASIS. 
This is a mental disorder in which the patients are 
greatly depressed in reference to the state of their own 
health. They are constantly fearing either the existence 
of, or liability to, some serious malady. 
The mental suffering arising from these errors of 
belief often exceeds those which would ensue did the 
fancied disease actually exist. The disease is not confined 
to the uneducated, but is as liable to attack the intelligent 
as otherwise. Dr. Flint says on this point: “ It is a note- 
worthy fact, that hypochondriasis is not confined to the 
weak-minded. Persons of education and strong mental 
powers, are as liable to the affection as those who are 
ignorant, and of feeble intellectual capacity.” 
It is not uncommon for hypochondriacs to successively 
complain of suffering from various maladies, as consump- insomnia. 
393 
tion, cancer, diabetes, etc.; these imaginary ills are suffi- 
cient in many instances to keep the patient in bed. 
One doctor after another is called, but none of them, 
to use a common expression with these patients, seem “ to 
hit the case.” If these patients have a large bank account, 
they are not only bread and butter for the traveling doc- 
tor and advertising specialist, but “ honey ” as well. 
Causes.—This disease is no doubt due to defective 
nutrition of the brain, but just how the conditions leading 
to it are produced is not at present understood. Debili- 
tating influence, such as onanism and sexual excess, want 
of fresh air, and digestive disorder, give rise to hypochon- 
driasis. Persons who have led active lives, and suddenly 
relinquished them for the opposite, are very liable to this 
disorder. Business failure, disappointment in the pursuits 
of life, and severe affliction of any kind, enter into the 
causations in many instances. 
Treatment.—If the patient recognizes the existence of 
this malady, it is a near approach to cure. This, however, 
will seldom occur. It will be the friends that will notice 
its presence. Do not leave the patient to be victimized 
by unscrupulous charlatans, but seek treatment from an 
honorable practitioner, one who makes mental and 
nervous maladies a study, will be preferable. Remember 
that this is as truly a disease as any other in the list, and 
should be so treated. 
INSOMNIA. 
Inability to sleep becomes at times a most trying and 
serious affection with individuals who consider themselves 
otherwise well. In a common form of this complaint, 
the patient retires, and instead of going to sleep, almost 
immediately finds himself reviewing the day’s business 
cares, or planning for the future ; and in spite of every 
effort to rid the brain of these thoughts, and secure 
“Sleep, that sometimes shuts up sorrow’s eye,” wakeful- 394 
INSOMNIA. 
ness continues long into the night or early morning, when 
a few hours’ rest are obtained. This continues nioTt after 
O 
night, unfitting the patient for business, and making life 
anything but enjoyable. 
In another form of this complaint, when the patients 
have once awakened, even though they have slept but a 
few minutes or hours, they find it utterly impossible to go 
to sleep again. 
To a third class belong those patients who are able 
to sleep well upon retiring, but who wake up at an unrea- 
sonably early hour, and after that there is no sleep for 
them for the rest of the night. 
The first class includes cases occurring mostly in 
business and professional men, teachers, and those who 
have long hours of mental labor, without sufficient out-of- 
door exercise. During sleep the amount of blood within 
the cranium is very greatly lessened. This physiological 
fact indicates the treatment, namely, lessen the amount of 
blood in the brain. A sponge wet with cold water and 
bound upon the nape of the neck, close up to the hair, 
will often act like a charm. Rubbing the feet and lower 
extremities with a coarse towel or flesh brush will relieve 
many cases. Those who dine early or lightly will find a 
glass of milk with a piece of stale bread an excellent 
remedy, to be taken just before retiring. College 
students, who pursue their reading far into the night, 
often find they cannot sleep upon retiring. The bread 
and milk as above will be all that is required, in con- 
nection with the wet sponge, in the large majority of 
such cases. 
As bedtime approaches, endeavor to break the chain 
of thought by reading or conversing upon a different 
subject from that which has engaged the mind during 
the day. Many people fail to win the fickle goddess by 
being too anxious. A determination on the part of the 
patient to go to sleep often thwarts the object desired. NEURALGIA. 
395 
At the hour of retiring, it is much better that the mind 
be engaged with some subject other than sleep. 
Medicine should not be resorted to for relieving 
wakefulness, except in extreme cases. The following 
No. 99 will be found an excellent and safe remedy, but 
should not be used a great number of nights in suc- 
cession : 
No. 99. 
Chloral fCydrat.............. grs. xl. 
Potass. Promide u XL. 
Syrup Sdcac 11. 3 SS. 
Syrup Chocolate “ z j. 
Slix. Simp “ z ss. 
M. Sig.—3 iv fifteen minutes before getting into bed. 
Many cases of insomnia will be materially benefited 
by the administration of two grains of quinine three 
times a day for ten days. This is especially true of cases 
occurring as described under forms two and three above. 
Insomnia, following prostrating diseases, will require rem- 
edies to tone and strengthen the system. 
NEURALGIA. 
Pain, varying in character and intensity, occurring 
along the course of a sensory nerve, is termed neuralgia. 
The pain is peculiar, usually occurring in paroxysms, or 
if continued, it is more severe at certain periods than 
others. It is described by different patients as darting, 
lacerating, or tearing. Neuralgia is often named from the 
nerve affected, as trifacial neuralgia, sciatic neuralgia, 
etc. The trifacial nerve (fifth pair) makes its exit from 
within the skull, just in front of the ear, divides into 
three branches, and is distributed : hirst, to the forehead, 
eyelids, and side of the nose; second, to the temple, 
cheek, and upper teeth ; third, to the lower teeth, and 396 
NEURALGIA. 
integument of the chin and lower jaw. Any one of these 
branches may be affected, or all, and constitutes trifacial 
neuralgia. This is one of the most common forms of the 
disease. The pain is intense. 
Causes.—Trifacial neuralgia occurs much oftener in 
males than in females, and usually between the ages of 
twenty and forty. Anaemia, a decayed tooth, straining of 
the eyes, malaria, and syphilis are all active causes. 
Treatment.—If the attack occurs at about the same 
time every day, the treatment will be three grains of 
quinine every three hours for three or four days, then 
three times a day for a week, and follow this with No. 
100 known as the Hammond mixture. 
No. IOO. 
I* 
Strychaiae Sulph. (oryst.) gr. j. 
Sorri Pyrophosphates, 
(jjuinuie Sulph 
aa. 3 j. 
P/lcidphosphor, dil. 
Syr. SCingiheris. . . . 
aa. i ij. 
M. Sig.—3 j three times a day. 
As an external application, use No. 59, rubbing it in 
thoroughly in front of the ear and over the course of the 
nerve. No. 101 will be found an excellent pill for most 
any form of neuralgia of the head, face or neck: 
No. lOl. 
dodidi Sdrsenic gr. j. 
Sxt. Pedladomiax. . . 
\Valerianate Jlorph. 
aa. grs. viij. 
Pulv. Sxt. <9ent. (P. &. & %'o.). . . grs. v. 
SI. Sxt. Sdcomte 7loot (P. W. & To.) gtts. v. 
These pills should be taken, one to three times in 
twenty-four hours as required. 
For controlling the pain of neuralgia, we know of 
Ft. pill, mass et div. into lx pills. Sig.—A pill one to three times in twenty-four hours. SCIATIC NEURALGIA. 
397 
nothing better than the following No. 102 which may 
be given every one to three or five hours; many cases 
being entirely cured by its use. 
No. 102. 
Phenacetine 3 jss. 
Paffeine grs. xv. 
Pulv. Sxt. fanned). Jnd. (P. Sd. P 
Pulv. Sxt. Sdconite (P. &. P Po.). . 
aa. grs. ijss. 
Kyoscin. hydrobrom gr. i. 
M. Capsules No. xv. Sig.—One as directed every one to three to five hours. 
Where anaemia exists, the remedies prescribed for that 
disease should be used in connection with some of the 
above. If caused by bad teeth, they should be treated; 
it is not always necessary to have them removed. 
SCIATIC NEURALGIA. 
Sciatic neuralgia, improperly called sciatic rheumatism, 
is neuralgia of the sciatic nerve (see engraving No. 18, 
Part I, page 145). 
I he affection is characterized by paroxysmal pain 
extending along this nerve and its branches. The pain is 
usually intense; sometimes described as burning, and 
sometimes as a sensation of coldness. 
Symptoms.—If the pressure be made over the course 
of the nerve, tender points will be discovered. Move- 
ments of the affected limbs increase the pain, in some 
cases to such an extent, that the patient remains in bed, 
keeping the limbs as immovable as possible. In mild 
cases, the patient is able to walk about, experiencing pain 
only when the weight of the body falls upon the affected 
limb. In some cases, from disuse the muscles of the 
diseased limb become flaccid and diminished in size, but 
regain their natural conditions as soon as the pain sub- 
sides and movements be resumed. 398 
CONVULSIONS IN CHILDREN. 
Treatment.—The hot air or water bath, twice or three 
times a week—depending upon the strength of the 
patient—in connection with the application of blisters as 
directed for muscular rheumatism, will relieve most cases. 
The bath should be given hot enough to cause a free 
perspiration; the patient being kept warm for some little 
time after, and thoroughly rubbed dry. 
As an internal remedy, take No. ioo three times a day 
till two bottlefuls have been taken, then twice a day for 
ten days. 
CONVULSIONS IN CHILDREN. 
There is, perhaps, nothing in the list of diseases to 
which children are subjected, which so greatly appals the 
nurse and parents, as convulsions. Many diseases which 
in adults begin with a chill, commence in children with a 
convulsion. Amongst these are, scarlet fever, measles, 
small-pox, pneumonia. The most frequent cases, however, 
occur from irritation of some portion of the intestinal 
tract, as in teething, intestinal worms, and indigestible 
articles of diet. The symptoms pointing to a probable 
attack are, restlessness during sleep for a day or two; the 
eyes are partly open during sleep; there is more or less 
grating of the teeth, with sudden starting if touched; the 
child is cross, and changes color often. Children are more 
liable to convulsions during the period previous to, and 
during the first dentition. The convulsions resemble 
those of epilepsy, and may continue from one-fourth to an 
hour. A long-drawn, deep inspiration indicates the ter- 
mination of the spasm, and if the child sleeps naturally 
for some time after this, he will not be as likely to have a 
return as if the sleep is broken, accompanied by twitching 
of the limbs. 
Treatment.—This is a condition that the mother or 
nurse can treat about as well as a medical man. 
We advise as the first thing, to give an enema of warm STAMMERING AND STUTTERING. 
399 
water, to which has been added a little salt or vinegar. 
While this is being done, some water should be made hot, 
and a cotton sheet wrung from it, and wrapped next to 
the child’s skin, and outside of this, wrap a woolen blanket. 
Apply cold to the head in the form of pounded ice, or 
cold compresses; plain mustard drafts upon the nape of 
the neck and calves of the legs. If the bowels do not 
move in a little time, the enema should be repeated; the 
object being to get a free evacuation. Continue the cold 
to the head, and change the sheet every half hour for a 
couple of hours, and then wipe the skin dry and put on 
warmed clothing. As soon as the child is able to take 
medicine give No. 103 every fifteen minutes, in tea- 
spoonful doses. 
No. 103. 
k 
Potass. Prom grs. xvj. 
S€qua H.riv 
M. Sig.—Z every fifteen minutes as directed. 
I he dose of No. 103 is for a child from eight to 
twenty-four months old. Previous to eight months give 
one-half teaspoonful. If the child has fever, in addition 
to the above treatment, put five drops of tincture of 
aconite into a glass of water, and give teaspoonful doses 
every fifteen minutes, alternating with No. 103. In chil- 
dren subject to convulsions, No. 103 can be given as a 
preventive whenever it is deemed necessary. It should 
be given every half hour, or hour, or at longer intervals, 
according to the severity of the symptoms. 
STAMMERING AND STUTTERING. 
In reference to the above terms which are usually— 
though incorrectly—used as synonyms, we copy from the 
British Medical Journal some remarks by Dr. J. D’Orsey: 
I. “ Speech, or articulated voice, depends for its perfect 400 
STAMMERING AND STUTTERING. 
production on vigor of mind, and on due training of the 
vocal or articulating apparatus. 
2. “Stammering is inability to articulate, marked by 
slowness, stoppage, hesitation and indistinctness, but not 
with repetition ; whereas, stuttering consists in a painful 
repetition of the same consonants, often attended by 
flushing and facial contortions. 
3. “ Stammering and stuttering may sometimes be 
caused by organicvdefects, such as cleft palate, harelip, 
enlarged uvula, inflamed tonsils, etc.; but these impedi- 
ments are far more frequently due to functional causes, 
that is, habit, imitation, heredity, etc. Nervousness is 
often the consequence or concomitant of stammering, 
rather than its cause. Organic defects must, of course, be 
treated surgically, but the subsequent cure belongs to the 
elocutionist, while functional derangements (wrong action 
of the voice apparatus) are peculiarly his province. 
4. “ Fhe sooner the curative process begins, the greater 
is the prospect of success. What is easily eradicated at 
an early age becomes hard to remove at a later period ; 
though at any time of life alleviation, if not cure can be 
assured as a result of perseverance. “He will grow out 
of it,” is a fatal saying. A fair time ought to be given, 
according to the nature of the case; for “ a few lessons ” 
cannot reasonably be expected to undo the mischief of 
many years; and the teacher is often accused of failure, 
when the blame is solely attributable to the patient or the 
parent” ACUTE ARTICULAR RHEUMATISM. 
401 
CHAPTER XII. 
GENERAL DISEASES. 
ACUTE ARTICULAR RHEUMATISM. 
Properly, this form of rheumatism should be classed 
amongst the blood disorders ; the morbid elements giving 
rise to pain and swelling of the joints being contained in 
that fluid. 
Symptoms.—The disease usually begins suddenly with 
chilly sensations, followed by slight febrile action, head- 
ache, and general ill-feeling. In from six to forty-eight hours, 
pain more or less severe attended with swelling, commences 
in one or more of the joints; the knees, ankles and wrists 
are the ones most likely to be attacked first, and the rule 
is that the joint on each side is affected, that is both knees, 
both ankles, etc. There are exceptions to this rule. In 
addition to the pain and swelling, there is great tenderness 
and increased heat and redness of the skin in the vicinity 
of the joints involved. Pain is produced by movements 
of the affected joints. In severe cases the slightest motion 
is insupportable ; even jarring the bed or room occasions 
suffering. It is not an uncommon thing for the disease to 
abruptly disappear from one or more joints, and within a 
few hours make its appearance just as abruptly in another. 
Occasionally the affection is limited to a single joint for a 
greater or less period. 
I he temperature in acute rheumatism will vary from 
102 degrees to 107 degrees; pulse is increased in fre- 
quency, though not greatly. The appetite is lost; tongue 402 
ACUTE ARTICULAR RHEUMATISM, 
coated ; the bowels are constipated ; the urine diminished 
and dark in color. A reddish deposit is usually noticed if 
the urine is allowed to stand until cool. There is sweating, 
which is increased during the night and the sweat emits a 
sour odor. 
Causes.—In the majority of cases, the patients attrib- 
ute the attack to action of cold or exposure. 
The disease does not, however, arise from such causes. 
In some families there is a predisposition to the affection, 
and there is no doubt as to the hereditary transmission of 
the disease. An attack is rare before the age of five years 
or after fifty ; the majority of cases occur between fifteen 
and thirty years of age. The disease occurs at all seasons 
of the year, and in all climates. Malaria is often an im- 
portant factor entering into the causation. 
Treatment.—The patient should be put in bed and 
kept warm. The following capsules, No. 104, given one 
every hour until a free action of the bowels is produced. 
No. 104. 
Kydrarg. hlor. 'Mite, grs. v. 
Sodas Bicarb “ xx. 
Sugar of 'Milk “ xx. 
M. et div. put into capsules No. xx. Sig.—One capsule every hour as directed. 
As soon as the bowels act give of No. 105, two tea- 
spoonfuls at a time, three hours apart. 
No. 105. 
0lei Saidtheri tt[ clx. 
Jducitag. Sdcac fl. 3 ij. 
Slycerina, 
Sdquae. . 
aa.tl. l j. 
M. Sig.—1 ij every three hours. 
As an application to the affected joints, take equal 
parts of oil of wintergreen and olive oil, shake well together DIPHTHERIA. 
403 
and apply every three hours, gently but thoroughly rub- 
bing the parts for fifteen minutes. If any medicine is 
required to allay pain, give from three to five grains of 
Dover’s powder as required. The patient can be allowed 
to drink as much water as he may wish. 
Lemonade, not very sweet, can be given freely; the 
diet should be light for the first week, and afterward more 
nourishing. The average duration of the disease is about 
three weeks. It seldom proves fatal, except when the 
pericardium is involved, and this is not frequent. 
DIPHTHERIA. 
“ Diphtheria is a specific communicable disease, occur- 
ring epidemically, endemically and solitarily, and charac- 
terized by more or less inflammation of the mucous 
membrane of the pharynx, larynx or air passages, and by 
the formation on the surface of those parts—especially on 
the mucous membrane of the fauces and windpipe—of a 
layer or layers of lymph or false membrane.” (Mackenzie.) 
Symptoms.—These vary in different cases, fron a slight 
sore throat to the most serious and malignant blood 
poisoning; between these two extremes we meet with 
every gradation of intensity. The period of incubation is 
from two to five days, in which there is general ill-feeling. 
In children this is not easily noticed, and the first that 
attracts attention is the indications of a chill, which is 
rapidly followed by fever. The thermometer in the axilla 
will show a temperature from ioi to 103 degrees. 
If the child be observed closely, there will be signs 
indicating stiffness of the neck, with slight difficulty in 
swallowing. If the throat be examined it will be found 
swollen and red ; in a few hours a viscid, yellowish se- 
cretion will be seen accumulating in the depression of one 
or both tonsils ; after a few hours longer these patches 
enlarge and change to a grayish-white, and in severe cases 
run together, forming a continuous membrane over the 404 
DIPHTHERIA. 
tonsils and throat generally. This membrane is sometimes 
so thick as to resemble wash leather, and can be removed 
in strips. 
In this stage the parotid, sub-maxillary and lymphatic 
glands enlarge and become tender. Care should be taken 
to examine the neck at the back, about half way between 
the ear and median line, to see if any “kernels” can be 
found. If present they furnish pretty good evidence that 
the disease is diphtheria, as they do not appear in the sore 
throat accompanying scarlet fever or tonsillitis. The tem- 
perature at this stage of the disease will be somewhat less, 
as a rule, than at the beginning. The breath is usually 
offensive; the appetite is lost; the urine is scanty and 
highly colored ; the pulse is frequent and weak. At the 
end of seven or eight days these symptoms begin to 
abate, if the disease terminates favorably. Care must be 
exercised, however, as there is danger of a relapse. 
If the disease is progressing, the symptoms as given 
above continue, the membrane extends to the posterior 
nares, larynx and Eustachian tubes, the patient may 
either sink from secondary blood-poisoning, with typhoid 
symptoms, or gradually deepening coma. Cardiac em- 
bolism is often formed in this affection, causing death. 
In extremely malignant cases, death sometimes occurs 
within forty-eight hours from the first symptoms, which 
may be a convulsion. 
Causes.—Diphtheria is due to bacteria which may be 
taken into the system either by direct inoculation through 
the air, or through the water or milk (see Consumption) 
that is drank, or the food that is eaten. The bacteria of 
diphtheria may be carried from one locality to another by 
a person not affected by it. The infection, however, is 
not carried through the atmosphere to so great a distance 
as small-pox. A distance of thirty feet is sufficient to 
preclude all danger of the disease being contracted. The 
disease attacks persons of all ages, but is most frequent MEASLES. 
405 
between the ages of one and ten years. After the latter 
the liability to an attack and the danger therefrom is 
diminished in proportion as the age increases. 
Treatment.—This should be left in the hands of the 
family physician. The patient should be excluded from 
other members of the family by being put into a large, 
cheerful and well ventilated room ; the air be kept warm 
and moist; a temperature of 60 to 65 degrees should be 
maintained day and night. A nutritious diet is of greatest 
importance. Mosquera’s beef-meal tea, beef jelly, milk, 
eggs, etc., are appropriate. 
MEASLES. (Rubeola.) 
Measles belong to a class of diseases known as 
eruptive fevers. These are characterized by fever at- 
tended with an eruption. In this class belong smctll-pox, 
scarlet fever, chicken-pox, rose rash and German measles. 
These fevers are divided into stages occurring in the 
following order : Incubation, invasion, eruption and des- 
quamation. By the stage of incubation is meant the 
period elapsing between the time of exposure and the 
beginning of the disease ; by invasion, from the time of 
the first symptom to the appearance of the rash; the 
stage of eruption includes the time intervening between 
the first appearance of the rash and its beginning to fade ; 
and desquamation, from the ending of the stage of erup- 
tion until convalescence is established. The different 
stages vary in each disease, and we advise the reader to 
study the table given on page 414. Measles is an in- 
fectious disease occurring epidemically. 
Symptoms. — In from six to ten days after exposure, 
the disease commences with symptoms resembling a cold. 
There is coryza and frequent sneezing, and a watery dis- 
charge from the nostrils. The eyes are reddened and 
watery, and there is intolerance of light ; more or less 
cough is present; chilly sensations are felt; the appetite 406 
MEASI.ES. 
is impaired or lost, and sometimes nausea and vomiting 
occur; pain in the head and limbs, with lassitude, are 
complained of. This is the stage of invasion, and usually 
lasts about four days, when the eruption appears, first 
upon the temple and forehead ; in a few hours it extends 
to the head and neck, and in a day or two to the body 
and extremities. This stage (eruptive) occupies thirty- 
six to forty-eight hours. I he rash at first appears in the 
form of minute red dots or specks, slightly elevated, 
which soon enlarge, and tend to arrange themselves in 
circular or crescentic form. The papule resembles flea- 
bites, and enlarges, uniting to form blotches. During 
this stage the symptoms denoting coryza and bronchitis 
continue. The temperature at the beginning of the stage 
of eruption may reach as high as 103 to 105 degrees, 
but diminishes rapidly after about the second day. The 
tongue is coated, the throat slightlv reddened, but not 
sore. About the fourth day from the first appearance the 
rash begins to fade, and in two to four days more is gone. 
Causes.—Measles is no doubt caused by a vegetable 
germ hitherto spoken of as infectious miasm which may be 
transmitted through the medium of the atmosphere. The 
infection may be carried in the clothing. The disease 
occnrs at all periods of life, but the liability diminishes 
after fifteen years of age. The disease, as a rule, increases 
in severity after the period of youth is passed. 
Treatment.—In the majority of cases, hygienic meas- 
ures only are necessary. The patient should be put in a 
well-ventilated room, at a temperature that insures com- 
fort; the room should be moderately darkened. Drinks 
may be given, either warm or cold, and whichever is pre- 
ferred should be strictly adhered to; it is not advisable to 
alternate from cold to warm, or vice versa. A sponge 
bath given daily, at the temperature of 8o° to 90°, the 
feet being placed in water somewhat warmer, will help to 
preserve the functions of the skin, and add much to the SCARLET FEVER. 
407 
comfort of the patient. Do not give cathartic medicine 
in measles. If it is known that a child has been exposed 
to the disease, it will be good treatment to give a com- 
pound cathartic pill, and follow it with a grain of quinine 
four times a day for a few days, but during the course of 
the disease use either an enema or suppository to move 
the bowels. (See directions for nursing). 
The following, No. 106, given in teaspoonful doses 
every four hours from the start until convalescence is 
established, will allay the cough and help to bring out the 
rash: 
No. 106. 
Pulv. Jpecac et 0pii grs. x. 
Syrup Simp. 
Sdcpiui dist. . 
aa. fl. § ij. 
No. 106 is for a child from six to eight years of age; 
from eight to twelve the dose can be increased by one- 
fourth if required; below six it should be diminished in 
like ratio; at the age of i to 3, one-fourth to one-half of a 
teaspoonful will be sufficient. 
The disease extends from twelve to sixteen days. 
Any complication, such as pneumonia, will require the 
attendance of the family physician. 
Sig —3 j every four hours as directed. 
SCARLET FEVER. (Scarlatina). 
Scarlet fever is so named from the color of the 
eruption. Like measles, it is essentially a disease of child- 
hood, but is more to be dreaded. There is no known 
affection presenting such diversity as regards symptoms 
and fatality, as this. In its mildest form it is a trivial 
disorder; in its severest, it is appropriately styled malig- 
nant. However widely different cases may appear in 
respect to symptoms and gravity, they are essentially 
identical. 408 
SCARLET FEVER. 
The stage of incubation in scarlatina, is from one to 
six days. 
Symptoms.—The affection may commence with or 
without a chill, vomiting is an early and frequent symptom, 
and high fever; severe cases show a temperature of 103° 
to 105°. Bleeding at the nose is not uncommon; there is 
redness of the throat in this stage (invasion) and some- 
times soreness. 
In about twenty-four hours the eruption makes its 
appearance generally, first upon the neck and face, and 
rapidly spreads, covering more or less of the entire body 
in twenty-four hours. Redness is most vivid, and remains 
longest in situations where the skin is delicate, as the 
inner surface of the arms and thighs and joints. The 
redness, if closely examined will be found to be studded 
by little points. The redness disappears if a hard 
substance—as a pencil—be drawn across it, leaving a 
white line, which soon fades. There is burning and 
itching. The eruption reaches its greatest intensity on 
the third day from its commencement. The eruption is 
likely to be less in proportion as the throat affection is 
greater. The tongue is coated from the beginning, but 
often in this stage it becomes thinner, and the swollen 
papillae raised and red like a strawberry. This is known 
as “the strawberry tongue,” and is seen in no other 
disease. During the stage of eruption, the fever con- 
tinues, and may reach to 105° or 107°. The pulse is very 
frequent and quick, often reaching 120 to 150; anything 
less than the former would be considered favorable. The 
bowels are usually constipated; the urine scanty and high- 
colored. 
The eruption continues from four to six days, and 
when it begins to fade, the stage of desquamation may be 
said to have commenced. This stage continues from six 
to twelve days, and sometimes longer. The cuticle peels 
off either in the form of minute branny scales, or in pieces SCARLET FEVER. 
409 
of epidermis of greater or less size. As desquamation 
begins, the fever subsides. Itching is sometimes intense 
during this stage. Occasionally a recurrence of the rash 
takes place during desquamation. 
Causes.—Like diphtheria and measles, scarlet fever 
depends for its origin upon the introduction into the body 
of bacteria. This may take place either by the lungs or 
stomach. The germs retain their vitality for an indefinite 
time, and may be transmitted by means of the atmosphere, 
or by clothing, hair, beard, etc. 
An example showing the remarkable vitality of the 
germs of this disease, at one time came under the writer’s 
notice: A lady was called a distance of over two hundred 
miles to help care for a sister’s child, sick with malignant 
scarlet fever. Soon after her return, children of her own 
had the disease, but in a very mild form. They were 
allowed (not by the writer’s consent) to return to the 
public school during the stage of desquamation, and 
several cases resulted from this inadvertency, one of which 
proved fatal. These cases occurred early in March. 
The following October the writer was called to attend a 
little girl, and diagnosed scarlet fever. Upon investigating 
the origin of it, found that the doll of the patient had 
been loaned to the little girl who died during the spring 
epidemic; she had been allowed to have it in bed with her, 
and after her death it had been returned and placed away 
in the garret, where it remained till a few days previous 
to the commencement of the disease. Here in one in- 
stance the germs was carried over two hundred miles, 
and in the other lay dormant in the clothing of the 
doll for over six months. No stronger proof is neces- 
sary of the transmissibility of the disease than the above, 
nor more conclusive reasons for thoroughly disinfecting 
every article which has been near a patient suffering 
from this affection. 
Treatment.—Scarlet fever, like the others of its class, 410 
SCARLET FEVER. 
runs a definite course, and there are no known remedies 
by which it can be arrested or controlled. 
Mild cases require little in addition to free ven- 
tilation, cooling drink, and light nourishment. Perhaps 
the most important point in treatment, either of mild 
or severe cases, is that pertaining toward preserving 
the functions of the skin. The complication, or sequel, 
most likely to occur is dropsy, which depends upon the 
kidneys performing their office. If the skin is kept 
acting, these organs are less likely to become affected, 
hence, the importance of maintaining the functions of 
the skin. 
For this purpose there is nothing better than the tepid 
bath given two or three times in twenty-four hours. If 
this is not at hand, the sponge bath should be used, and 
repeated several times during the day, or a wet sheet may 
be used wrung from water at the temperature of about 90 
degrees. Exposure to cold must be avoided, but fresh air 
must not be excluded from the patient’s room. 
The patient should be closely watched, and if there is 
any swelling of the face beneath the lower lids, or of the 
ankles, the hot air bath should be resorted to at once, and 
continued until free perspiration is produced. 
For sore throat of scarlet fever, we know of nothing 
better than No. 40, applied as described under Quinsy, 
page 300. 
To reduce the fever, give No. 107, a teaspoonful every 
hour until three doses have been taken, and then wait six 
to eight hours, and again give as at first. 
No. 107. 
Sdntipyrvrie grs. xvj. 
ffl. Sxt. S£ily of the alley rrtts. x. 
(P. D. & Co.) 
Syrup Simp. y. s. ad fl. s ij. 
M. Sig.—3j as directed. SMALL-POX. 
411 
No. 107 is for a child five to eight years old; from one 
to four, one-half the amount can be given; from nine to 
twelve, it can be increased by one-quarter. 
The temperature should be taken at the time of be- 
ginning to give the remedy, and noticed from hour to hour 
to see how much the fever is reduced ; the nearer the 
temperature comes to normal the better, and the remedy 
should not be given until it begins to rise again. 
As a remedy for preventing scarlet fever, No. 108 will, 
we believe, be more efficacious than any other ; and at 
least seven out of ten of those exposed will be prevented 
from having it, and the other cases will be very much 
lessened in severity if it be given promptly, a teaspoonful 
four times a day for two days, and then three times a day 
for a like period, and then twice a day until three or four 
days after the time for the disease to commence. 
No. 108. 
u 
Mad Salicylic grs. XLviij. 
-Sdqua dist. 
dlycerina. . 
aa. | j. 
No. 108 is intended for a child five to seven years old. 
For a child eight to twelve, increase by one-quarter ; from 
one to three, give one-third the amount named in pre- 
scription ; three to five, two-thirds. If a child is attacked 
with scarlet fever, it should be at once excluded from all 
others, and any child who may have been exposed should 
be given the above as directed. To allay the itching of 
scarlet fever, the surface of the body may be rubbed with 
cosmoline or vaseline ; this is better than the old-fashioned 
bacon rind. 
M. Stand in the hot bath until the acid is all dissolved. Sig.—3 j as directed. 
SMALL-POX. ( Variola.) 
This disease is of so infrequent occurrence, that we 
shall only give an outline of it without entering into the 412 
SMALL-POX. 
details. The stage of incubation is longer than the other 
fevers of this class, being from ten to fourteen days. 
The stage of invasion is usually two days, the disease 
commencing with a chill, which in most cases is marked. 
This is followed by fever, nausea and vomiting; the 
tongue is coated ; the bowels constipated ; headache, pain 
in the limbs and back and general debility are prominent 
symptoms. The pain in the back is usually great. On 
the third day the eruption begins to appear, as a rule. If 
it appears later, mildness of the disease may be expected. 
Stage of Eruption.—The eruption appears first on the 
face about the lips and chin, and nearly at the same time 
upon the wrist and neck, and next upon the chest and 
arms; then over the body, and lastly the lower extremities. 
The eruption is at first in small red spots, which harden 
and become elevated. In twenty-four hours from their 
first appearance, they will be found filled with a watery 
fluid, and in twenty-four hours more they will have en- 
larged to considerable size, and by the fifth day will 
measure from one-fifth to two-thirds of an inch in diameter, 
and are raised to nearly one-quarter inch above the skin. 
At this stage of the eruption, a slight depression will be 
noticed in the center of the vesicle. This characteristic 
is peculiar to the eruption of small-pox. The sixth day 
the eruption changes; the watery fluid becomes thick, 
yellowish, having more of the characteristics of pus. At 
the beginning of the eruption the fever very much abates, 
as does the pain in the head, loins, limbs, etc. At the 
time the eruption changes to pustules—fifth to seventh 
day—the fever returns and continues three to four days ; 
at about the twelfth day the swelling and redness of the 
skin begins to lessen; the pustules break and form a scab. 
During this stage (dessiccation) the skin exhales a sickening 
odor, which is characteristic of the disease, and once met 
with will always after be recognized. 
Treatment.—“Prevention is better than cure.” See 
that you are revaccinated every seven to ten years. CHICKEN-POX VARIOLOID. 
413 
CHICKEN-POX. (Varicella.) 
This is a disease of children. After fever of a few 
hours, or not more than twenty-four, the eruption of vari- 
cella appears, often on the back first of all as distinct, red 
papulae, which become vesicular in a few hours; the 
eruption is successive during three or four days. The 
same kind of changes in the eruption occur as in small-pox, 
but the disease is more superficial, and the vesicle is 
unilocular ; it is not umbilicated ; the contents are serus. 
On the first day the vesicles are transparent, opalescent 
on the second and third day, on the fourth they shrink and 
dessiccate, and on the sixth the scabs fall off. The general 
symptoms are slight, and there is no secondary fever. 
Treatment.—This should consist simply of hygienic 
measures. 
VARIOLOID. 
By varioloid is meant small-pox occurring in a patient 
who has been previously vaccinated or inoculated. Inoc- 
ulation was practiced for many years in France and Great 
Britain as a means of rendering this disease so mild as to 
be nearly devoid of danger. This custom was introduced 
from China, where it has been practiced from time 
immemorial. 
The discovery by Jenner, in 1798, that small-pox was 
very much modified, and in a majority of cases prevented, 
by vaccination, has entirely done away with inoculation. 
Edward Jenner’s transcendently important discovery has 
been the means of saving innumerable lives and untold 
and immeasurable suffering. 
Between the second and third month of infancy every 
child should be successfully vaccinated with animal lymph, 
and revaccination should be practiced every seven to ten 
years. 
If this were thoroughly practiced by every parent and 
individual, it would in time put an end to continuously 414 
FEVER. 
returning small-pox epidemics. A successful vaccination 
will present the following changes : On the third day 
after vaccination red points slightly raised are noticed at 
the location where the virus was inserted ; on the fifth 
day vesicles are discernible, and by the eighth day the 
full size is attained, measuring about one-third of an inch 
across, and about the ninth to tenth day the contents 
become purulent. At this time slight febrile movement 
occurs, which subsides in two or three days. By the 
fifteenth day the pustules are converted into a hard black 
scab, which usually falls off by the twenty-fifth day from 
date of vaccination. 
TABLE SHOWING THE DISTINGUISHING FEATURES OF 
ERUPTIVE FEVERS. 
NAME. 
PERIOD 
OF 
INCUBATION. 
DAY OF RASH. 
CHARACTER 
OF 
RASH. 
DURATION 
OF 
ILLNESS. 
REMARKS. 
Measles. 
6 to io days. 
4th day of fe- 
ver. 
Small red dots 
like flea bites. 
6 to 10 days. 
Accompanied 
with cough and 
running at eyes 
and nose. 
German measles 
12 to 20 days. 
1st to 2d day. 
Like measles 
with a tendency 
to spread. 
5 to 10 days. 
Sore throat, 
but not so severe 
as in scarlet fe- 
ver. 
Scarlet fever. 
i to 6 days. 
ist to 2d day. 
Bright scarlet, 
and spreads rap- 
idly. 
8 to 15 days. 
Very infec- 
tious, often ac- 
companied b y 
sore throat, fol- 
lowed by falling 
off of the skin 
Small-pox. 
12 days. 
3d day. 
Small red pim- 
ples, which fill 
with water and 
afterward with 
pus. 
17 to 24 days. 
Great pain in 
back and head: 
about eleventh 
day secondary 
fever sets in 
Chicken-pox. 
21 days. 
io to 24 hours. 
Small rose red; 
becoming vesi- 
cles. 
6 to 7 days. 
Not serious, 
but apt to leave 
scars. 
FEVER. 
The term fever is used to denote a diseased condition 
of the system, shown by increased temperature of the 
body, acceleration of the pulse, and a general derange- 
ment of the functions, including, usually, more or less 
headache, thirst, impaired appetite, pain in the loins and 
limbs, lassitude, muscular debility, restlessness, imperfect 
sleep, and diminished secretions; in short, in the language 
of Fordyce, “A fever is a disease which affects the whole 
system.” MALARIA. 
415 
Fevers are called continued when they pursue their 
course without any well-marked remissions. In remittent 
fevers certain intervals occur daily in the course of the 
disease, in which intervals there is no cessation of the 
fever, but simply an abatement or diminution. The re- 
missions usually occur toward the morning, and continue 
for six, ten, twelve or fourteen hours. They are followed 
generally by increased feverish excitement or exacerbation 
toward night, continuing for some hours. In remittent 
fevers there is an interval of almost perfect health. The 
three common species of intermittent fevers or ague are 
the quotidian, tertian and quartan. When the paroxysm 
occurs at the same hour every day, it is called quotidian 
ague ; when every other day, tertian, though secundam 
would be more appropriate ; and when it is absent for 
two whole days and then recurs, quartan. In the first 
species the interval is twenty-four hours, in the second 
forty-eight, in the third seventy-two. The time between 
the commencement of one paroxysm and the beginning 
of the next is termed the interval; that between the 
termination of one paroxysm and the commencement of 
the next, intermission. 
In relapsing fevers, during convalescence, the disease, 
which appears to have gone, returns. Fevers of unusually 
long duration are called slow; if attended by great de- 
pression, low; when the symptoms are intense, the fever 
is said to be high. 
Symptomatic fever is one indicating some other dis- 
eases, such as wounds, injuries, inflammations, etc., and is 
mostly a symptom, as indicated by the term. 
An essential fever is one that is not dependent upon 
any other disease, hence is the primary affection. 
MALARIA. 
The term malaria is used to denote the presence of 
germs in the atmosphere, which when introduced within 416 
MALARIA. 
the human body give rise to a series of morbid symptoms 
that are produced by no other known causes. These 
germs thrive best in low and moist localities; require a 
temperature above 6o° Fahr. for their development, and 
are checked by a temperature of 32° Fahr. 
Malaria is the cause of the class of fevers known as 
periodical. They are also known as malarial fevers, and 
include remittent and intermittent. Remittent fever is 
also known as bilious fever. Intermittent fever is popu- 
larly known as “fever and ague,” “chill fever,” “the 
shakes,’’ “chills,” “swamp fever,” etc. The different types 
of this affection have already been defined. The attack 
is divided into three stages, viz.: Cold, hot, and sweating 
stage. These stages may all vary in duration and in- 
tensity; the first and third may be absent. 
Treatment.—The bowels should be first freely moved 
by taking from one to three compound cathartic pills, 
following this with two to three grains of quinine every 
three hours day and night, stopping for neither chill, fever 
nor anything else. Three to six days of this usually 
controls the worst cases. The quinine should be continued 
for a week or ten days after the fever is “broken,” but 
need not be taken more than four times in twenty-four 
hours. In some localities,—as the South and Southwest 
—it may be necessary for more active measures, and for 
this we advise No. 104, taking one capsule every hour till 
a free movement of the bowels is produced, then take 
No. 109. 
5 
Sulph grs. c. 
Oleum Piper, nig gtts. L. 
Oleum Sassafras “ l. 
Sdeid Sdrsenious grs. iv. 
Stryeh. Sulph. (crysi.) “ ij. 
M. Ft. pil. No. l. Sig.—One pill at meal time.—"'Dr. WatkinsMed. Summary. BREAKBONE FEVER—TYPHOID FEVER 
417 
and after it is gone take quinine four times a day, two to 
four grain doses. 
Many people say they cannot take quinine on account 
of its making their bones “ache.” To such we wish to 
say, it is not the quinine that causes the “aching,” but the 
disease, malaria. The writer has known scores of people 
to say that they could not take quinine for various reasons, 
but when it was colored with some inert drug, and given 
under the name of “fever powder,” to take it for days in 
succession with impunity. 
The treatment for remittent fever is the same as given 
for intermittent. 
BREAKBONE FEVER. {Dengue). 
This fever occurs in the Southern and Southwestern 
States. The symptoms are chilly sensations, languor, gen- 
eral ill-feeling, for twenty-four to forty-eight hours, when 
fever begins; and continues for twelve hours to three or 
four days. During the time of fever there is great pain 
in the head, eyes, muscles of the neck, loins, and ex- 
tremities; hence the name, brcakbone fever. 
In the majority of cases, there is an eruption which 
has no definite form. The disease is liable to return, and 
run a second course even after the patient has resumed 
his usual avocation. This affection, although extremely 
distressing, is rarely, if ever, fatal. 
Treatment — Dover’s powders in three to seven grain 
doses every four hours may be taken to alleviate the pain 
and restlessness. During convalescence, remedies to tone 
up the system should be taken. No. 11 can be used for 
this. 
TYPHOID FEVER. 
Typhoid literally means typhus like, or we might say, 
a fever like typhus. It is also called continued fever. The 
peculiarity of this fever is, that it is always attended with 
morbid changes in Peyer’s patches and the solitary glands 418 
TYrilOlD FEVER. 
(See Part I, page 112), these special lesions are always 
present. 
Symptoms.—As a rule, typhoid fever is developed 
gradually, the patient often experiencing difficulty in 
fixing the commencement of the attack. 
There is usually chilly sensations, frontal headache, 
pain in the back and limbs, loss of appetite, broken sleep, 
lassitude, nosebleed, and looseness of the bowels. These 
symptoms usually increase in severity till the patient feels 
obliged to take to the bed. Looseness of the bowels and 
nosebleed are the symptoms of the greatest importance. 
These two in addition to a temperature in the axilla in 
the morning of ioo° to 101 , which increases during the 
day so the evening temperature is 102° to 103°, are pretty 
strong evidence of the presence of this affection. 
During the first few days after the patient takes to the 
bed, the above symptoms continue, or may increase in 
severity; the face will likely be Hushed, and wakefulness is 
complained of. Thirst is a prominent symptom in this 
stage of the disease. After about the first week in bed, 
it is not uncommon for the patient to complain of nothing, 
sleeping most of the time, the countenance becoming 
extremely inexpressive. Delirium is present in the ma- 
jority of cases, and is always increased during the night. 
It may exist only during this period. In some cases the 
patient appears perfectly rational, but after recovering is 
unable to remember anything that occurred during his 
illness. Coma coming on during the second or third 
week, is an unfavorable symptom. 
The tongue in typhoid fever is distinctive only in its 
varying appearance. It may be simply furred, or it may 
be covered with a tlfick brown coating, or even black, or 
the coating may be whitish or yellowish, or the tongue 
may be free of either fur or coating, presenting a red, 
shining appearance. Diarrhoea or looseness of the bowels 
usually continues through the entire course of the disease. TYPHOID FEVER, 
419 
There is usually tenderness in the right iliac region. The 
abdomen is almost invariably distended. Hcemorrhage 
from the bowels occurs in a certain proportion of cases, 
but unless profuse, is not a serious symptom. The 
haemorrhage is caused by the ulceration in the intestines; 
this is sometimes so deep that the coat of the intestines is 
destroyed, allowing its contents to escape into the 
peritoneal cavity, causing peritonitis. This accident is 
known as perforation of the bowel. 
Typhoid fever is accompanied in nearly all instances 
with an eruption, rose colored, and found principally on 
the anterior portion of the body. The papules are about 
the size of lentils. They number from a half dozen to 
twenty-five or thirty, and appear between the seventh and 
fourteenth days. There is more or less perspiration. The 
pulse in this disease is more or less accelerated, the 
danger, as a rule, being in proportion to the acceleration ; 
120 per minute is a dangerous point, and the gravity 
greatly increases as the frequency exceeds this number; 
90 to 110 per minute would be considered a favorable 
number for this affection. The temperature in typhoid 
fever is a valuable guide, both as to diagnosis and prog- 
nosis. There is always an increase in the temperature 
from morning till evening, this increase varying from one to 
two and a half degrees; thus a temperature at 6 a. m. of 
100 degrees would mean 101 degrees to 102.5 at 6 p. m. 
If 102 or 103 in the morning, an increase of one to two 
and a half degrees is certain to follow. This daily increase 
in temperature is characteristic of this disease, and in 
taking the temperature, one morning should be compared 
with another. The same is true as regards evening tem- 
perature. If there is no increase from morning to morning, 
the disease, it may safely be said, is doing well. If an 
increase is observed, the disease is progressing, while on 
the other hand, any decrease, however slight, is favorable. 
A temperature of 104 degrees to 106 degrees, may be 420 
TYPHOID FEVER. 
present in the evening without denoting positive danger. 
This temperature, however, in the morning would indicate 
great gravity, the latter figure approaching dissolution. 
The urine is high colored and scanty. It is voided in 
many cases with difficulty, owing to the blunted perception ; 
on the other hand, it is not uncommon for the urine to be 
passed in the bed, either from indifference or incontinence. 
The duration of this affection varies from seven to forty- 
two days, the average being twenty-one days ; this includes 
the time previous to taking to the bed. 
Typhoid fever runs in periods of seven days. Allowing 
that the average time of taking to the bed is the fifth day, 
the average duration of the disease would be sixteen days 
from time of taking to the bed. This would mean until 
improvement began. The average duration of fatal cases 
will be from one to three days longer. This disease is 
one of those which are very rarely experienced twice, one 
attack usually preventing a second. 
Causes.—It is now well established that typhoid fever 
is caused by a specific poison in the form of a germ. 
These germs are elaborated within the intestinal canal of 
individuals sufferiug with this fever, are passed from the 
body with the dejections, and being transmitted to those 
who are susceptible, give rise to the disease. Typhoid 
germs produce typhoid fever with as much certainty when 
brought under proper conditions, as corn produces corn, 
or potatoes produce their kind. There is little doubt 
that these germs may be carried for a limited distance 
through the air, and in this way get into the alimentary 
canal. Drinking water, however, is the chief medium of 
transmission. I he terrible epidemic which occurred in 
Plymouth, Pa., during April and May, 1885, affords the 
most positive proof of this, and also the urgent necessity 
for popular education in reference to the cause and preven- 
tion of disease. In this instance, the ignorant disposal of 
the excreta of one patient gave rise to over twelve hundred TYPHOID FEVER. 
421 
cases, and upward of one hundred and thirty deaths. Drs. 
French and Shakespeare of Philadelphia, investigated this 
epidemic, and from their report we make the following 
extract: 
“ Now, let us turn to the facts concerning the contamination of 
that mountain stream. It may be well, however, to state here that 
it has been shown that the three lower reservoirs on the mountain 
stream, which nine months of the year supply Plymouth with water, 
were on the 20th of March nearly empty; that in a dwelling on the 
sloping bank of the stream a little distance above the third reservoir, 
and within seventy feet of the bed of the brook, there was a case of 
typhoid fever, running its course through January, February and 
March; that during most of this period the ground was frozen and 
covered with snow; that during the illness of this patient the evac- 
uations passed in the night were habitually carried out and thrown 
upon the snow toward the stream, no attempt at disinfection having been 
made; that about the 25th of March a thaw began, and was followed 
by slight rains; that on the 26th of March the superintendent of the 
Plymouth Water Company inspected the reservoirs, and finding the 
two upper ones full, that same evening caused the water of the third 
reservoir to be let down directly to the lowest reservoir; that on the 
evening of this day pumping from the Susquehanna River ceased, 
and the town was again entirely supplied from the mountain stream; 
that thus nearly three months’ accumulation of infectious typhoid 
fever dejecta was suddenly washed with the melting snow into the 
brook, and rapidly reached the lower reservoir, and was thence dis- 
tributed through the pipes and hydrants of the Plymouth Water 
Company; that fifteen days after this date the epidemic began; that 
no other source of unusual pollution of the mountain water was 
discovered. 
“ In the first two or three weeks of the epidemic, those who ex- 
clusively used well water and those who exclusively used river water 
escaped the infection. Of children living in houses supplied with 
well water, only those who attended the public schools and drank 
the hydrant water of the Plymouth Water Company took the disease, 
while those kept at home went unharmed. It was also noted that 
those who habitually used beverages other than water, were safe 
from the attack. 
“On Welsh Hill, a suburb of the town having a population of 
four or five hundred, mainly supplied with well water, not one per- 
son has been sick of the fever, except a few who frequented the town, 
and drank of the hvdrant water there. 422 
TYPHOID FEVER. 
“Epidemics of typhoid fever are a reproach to the communities 
which they afflict. They are absolutely preventable and controllable, 
and from the standpoint of modern experience, neglect to employ 
proper means to those ends should be regarded as inexcusable.” 
Typhoid fever is rare in infancy, or after the age of 
fifty years. It most frequently appears between the ages 
of fifteen and twenty-five. Both sexes are about equally 
liable to the disease. It occurs most frequently during 
the autumn, though it may occur at all seasons of the year 
Treatment.—Typhoid fever is very likely to get well 
if the patient does not get too much medicine, and enough 
care and nourishment. It must be remembered that there 
arc 7io means of breaking the fever.* Some writer has 
likened the disease to a storm at sea; the storm cannot be 
stopped, but if the ship is seaworthy, and captain and 
pilot competent, the storm is usually weathered. Many 
persons, during the time previous to taking to the bed, 
very much injure their chance of recovery by taking large 
doses of cathartic medicine with a view to breaking the 
fever. This leaves the bowels in an irritated condition 
and increases the ulceration. No. 104 will be a most excel- 
lent remedy for putting the liver and bowels in condition 
to endure the inevitable attack, One capsule every hour 
should be taken until an evacuation is produced, and then 
discontinued. After this take one grain of quinine every 
four hours dissolved in a little water, and the following 
pill every four hours alternating with the quinine: 
No. 1 IO. 
k/Vitras (cryst) grs. x. 
Sugar of Jlillc 3 j. 
jfragacantha q. s. ad. pit. mass. 
Divide into pil. No. i.x. Sig.—One pill every four hours as directed. 
*You should look with suspicion upon the doctor who claims to “break-’ typhoid 
fever, or who calls every minor ailment by this name. He must belong to one of two 
classes which we decline to name in this connection. ASIATIC CHOLERA. 
The temperature should be kept below 102° if possible 
by frequent sponge baths with water at a temperature of 
70° to 90°; these may be given every hour if necessary. 
Bathing the surface with tepid water, and allowing it to 
dry without the use of the towel, is an effectual way of 
reducing temperature. Give the patient fresh air without 
limit; don’t fear his taking cold. Make the room cheerful. 
Exclude visitors. Don’t worry the patient with anything. 
When the patient begins to recover care should be exer- 
cised or he will over-eat. He will want to get out of bed 
and have his clothes on a week or ten days before he 
ought to. 
The disinfecting lotion given in miscellaneous receipts 
should be kept standing in all vessels used to receive the 
evacuations from the bowels. Use enough of the lotion 
to cover the excreta; this will not only destroy the odor, 
but also the germs, and prevent the spread of the disease. 
We have given our treatment for this disease for the 
benefit of those who are so located that it is not con- 
venient to call a physician. When it is otherwise we advise 
that the case be put under the care of your family 
physician. 
423 
ASIATIC CHOLERA. 
So little is known in this country, even amongst 
medical men, of Astatic cholera, and in view of the fact 
that it may visit America at any time, we give in full an 
article written to the Deutsche Medicinische Wochen- 
schrift, by Dr. Paul Sachse, Sanitary Councillor of Berlin. 
It should be well studied in time of cholera: 
“Cholera is caused by infection with the microscopic organism 
called the coma bacillus on account of its peculiar form in cholera. 
These get into the human intestine, increase rapidly under favorable 
circumstances, and cause the peculiar symptoms of cholera. This 
begins always with an apparently harmless diarrhoea, which con- 
tinues for several hours before the disease breaks out with force and 
becomes dangerous to life. 424 
ASIATIC CHOLERA. 
The possibility of infecting one’s self in time of cholera with the 
bacillus is increased a thousand fold by assemblages and inter-com- 
munication of people. The outbreak of the disease is favorably 
influenced by everything that causes any stomach or intestinal 
affection. 
Since we have no absolutely certain means of controlling the 
disease after it is broken out, we should especially beware of 
becoming infected, and should take all precautions to kill, or at 
least render as harmless as possible, the cholera germ before it gets 
into our bodies, and by a regular mode of living and prudent deport- 
ment, avoid anything that disorders the digestive apparatus. 
Since the cholera germs get into the stomach through the mouth, 
and from the stomach into the intestines, we should take care: 
1. To take only cooked food and drink. This is the most 
important rule. Even the washing, rinsing and bathing water 
should be free from germs, and the water from the wells should 
never be used, but only that from the city pipes. 
2. To keep the body clean, and especially the hands, by frequent 
washing, especially before meals, and this should be done with dis- 
infecting solutions, such as five per cent, solution of carbolic acid, 
(or a one-third per cent, solution of sublimate), and of this, in time 
of cholera, at least a quart should be used for washing the hands. 
3. To live judiciously and carefully in time of cholera, and 
(a) Not run away! 
(b) Not to harbor people from cholera places. 
(c) Not to visit a house in which there is cholera. 
(d) Still less, eat or drink anything in such a house. 
(e) Especially, to take nothing, food, linen, laundry, play- 
things, or anything else, from a house in which there is cholera. 
(f) To avoid in every way anything that may disturb digestion ; 
therefore: 
Avoid taking cold, and sudden cooling off after being heated. 
Do not sit up late at night with friends (drinking beer, for 
example). 
Do not wear clothing that is very thin, and do not take off 
under clothing suddenly. 
On no account bathe in running water. Water courses often 
bear the germs of cholera. 
Avoid collections of people, fairs, festivals, etc., of every kind. 
4. All kinds of food are to be avoided that may cause catarrh 
of the stomach and intestines; so also over-eating and over-drinking 
are to be avoided. ASIATIC CHOLERA. 
425 
Every one should take the greatest precaution with regard to 
what comes into the house. 
What may one eat and drink? What is forbidden? What is 
allowed? 
FORBIDDEN. 
Unboiled water. 
Raw milk and raw cream, and 
sour milk and whipped cream. 
Butter and buttermilk. 
Freshly baked bread. 
All cold soups. 
Raw meat. 
Cold, cut meat that has stood for 
a long time. 
Salads of every kind. 
Mayonnaise and Cremes. 
Raw fruit and unfermented fruit 
juices. 
Cheese. 
Cookies. 
Ice. 
ALLOWED. 
Boiled water with cogniac, arrac, 
or red wine. 
Good soda or seltzer water, and 
natural mineral waters. 
Red wine. 
Good lager beer. 
Coffee, tea, and cocoa. 
Baked bread must be heated for 
at least half an hour before it 
is used. 
All hot, well cooked soups. 
All hot (boiled, stewed, roast) 
meat. 
All cooked vegetables (potatoes, 
rice, maccaroni, asparagus, 
green peas, cauliflower, etc.,) 
Freshly cooked, warm compotes. 
Eggs, and food made of eggs. 
Puddings. 
Good Daily Diet.—Morning, ist. Breakfast: Coffee, tea, or cocoa 
(with or without boiled milk), eggs, bread (that has been well- 
heated and dried in an oven or stove for half an hour—in other 
words, bread that has been cooked a second time) without butter. 
2d. Breakfast: Bouillon with egg, bread as above, warm meat, 
wine. 
Noon meal: Hot soup, boiled or stewed meat, roast meat, veg- 
etables, fresh cooked compote, red wine or good beer. 
Tea: Coffee or tea. 
Supper: Tea, or soup made from the meat left over from the 
noon meal, with the morning’s bread, or warm meat. Wine or beer 
as above. 
5. Every irregularity of the body should be strictly guarded 
against in time of cholera. Apparently slight diarrhoea should not 
be neglected, but a physician should be consulted immediately.” 
In case of threatened invasion of cholera, these rules 
should be given the greatest possible publicity. 426 
CHOLERA INFANTUM. 
CHOLERA INFANTUM. 
As the name implies, this is a disease peculiar to 
infancy, occurring under two years of age. 
Symptoms.—The symptoms given by Dr. Flint are as 
follows : 
“A child is seized with vomiting and purging, the 
latter usually occurring first; the acts of vomiting and 
purging are violent, and frequently repeated ; after the 
contents of the stomach and bowels are expelled, the 
evacuations consist of secreted or transuded liquid in more 
or less abundance. The attack may cease or be arrested, 
and recovery speedily ensue, as in cases of the sporadic 
cholera of adults; but this favorable course does not 
obtain so generally in children as in adults. If the course 
be unfavorable, the vomiting and purging continue ; the 
child is tormented with thirst, but everything is rejected 
from the stomach; great prostration ensues; collapse 
follows, and death takes place in one, two or three days. 
The fatal results may be preceded by convulsions and 
coma. In some cases the violent symptoms of cholera 
cease, and the attack eventuates in a chronic affection, 
accompanied by diarrhoea and occasional vomiting. 
“ In other cases the affection is gastro-intestinal indi- 
gestion. These are characterized by diarrhoea, the de- 
jections being lienteric and watery. Vomiting occurs 
only occasionally, and is an accidental symptom. It may 
even not occur at all. The diarrhoea is more or less per- 
sisting, the discharges being often green in color, an 
appearance which Golding Bird, and, more recently, Dr. 
J. Lewis Smith, have shown not to depend on vitiated 
bile ; the appetite is impaired or lost; colic pains are apt 
to be troublesome; the child progressively wastes, and 
death may take place from inanition. ’ 
Causes.—Late discoveries have shown that nearly all 
the stomach and bowel complaints of infants are due to 
poisonous substances developed in the food supplied to CANCER. 
427 
artificially fed infants, and these poisonous substances are 
caused by atmospheric germs. High temperature and 
vitiated air are the conditions favorable for the develop- 
ment of bacteria, and when the latter gain access to the 
alimentary canal they interfere with normal digestion, and 
by their action cause acute poisoning. The watery move- 
ments from the bowel are the result of the effort on the 
part of the system to get rid of the poison, and little is to 
be gained by locking up these irritating products in the 
intestine. The rational treatment consists in removing 
the contaminated contents of the bowel, arresting the 
further development of bacteria, and securing a pure food 
supply for the future. It is clear, then, that with proper 
precautions regarding the purity of the food supplied for 
young infants, all these troubles may be avoided. 
Treatment.—This should be left to the family physi- 
cian, but much can be done to prevent an attack. If a 
child has to be artificially fed, care should be exercised 
that it has the purest of prepared food. During the warm 
weather, when this affction is most liable to be developed, 
endeavor to keep the little ones cool by proper clothing. 
Do not put them to bed for a single night without a 
tepid bath. This will reduce the temperature temporarily, 
and insure a night’s good sleep. Much can be done to 
prevent this disease by a plentiful supply of pure cold 
water at all times, and on all occasions, night or day, 
whenever the little one desires it. And further, we would 
like to impress it upon the minds of all who have the care 
of children, to lay aside any scruples of reserve they have 
in regard to giving cold water, and to give it freely. 
Children not able to let their wants be known shonld 
have it placed to their lips, and be allowed to drink to 
their satisfaction. 
CANCER. (Carcinoma.) 
A Cancel'- is an ulcerating tumor of a malignant nature. 428 
CANCER. 
It may happen in almost any part of the body, and pos- 
sesses the following peculiarities : 
“ i. It has the peculiar power of infiltrating every 
tissue as it encroaches upon it. 
“2. It is prone to recur after removal. 
“3. It generally affects the lymphatic glands of the 
neighborhood. 
“4. It usually destroys by secondary deposits, that is 
to say, by the development of similar growths in the vis- 
cera or remote parts, the lungs and liver being particu- 
larly prone to its attack.” 
There are different kinds of cancers, the most com- 
mon being the hard or scirrhous carcinoma. This class 
is the one usually found on female breasts. It is also 
seen in the testicles, tonsil, skin, bone, eye, rectum or any 
tissue. 
The soft or medullary cancer possesses all the cancerous 
peculiarities It is not distinct from the hard cancer, for 
both often co-exist, and the hardest primary cancer is 
often followed by the soft in its secondary growth. It is 
rarely found in the breast, but more frequently about the 
periosteum and the bones. It is the usual form in the 
eye, uterus, tonsil, testes and ovary. Also the cavities 
of the head and face appear to be particularly favorable 
places for its attack. 
Another kind is the black or melanoid cancer, which 
contains pigment having its origin in a natural tissue, as 
in the choroid of the eye, or in a mole, in which pigment 
exists. 
These black cancers have the peculiar tendency to 
multiply to such an extent that the skin and under skin 
tissues become studded with these melanoid growths of 
various sizes and colors. 
These cancers always grow from places having much 
pigment, and a mole is unquestionably the commonest seat. 
The skin or epithelial cancer is usually found in the WORMS. 
429 
mucous membranes and the skin, and never originates in 
any other tissue, but has the tendency to infiltrate the 
parts with which they come in contact. This is the 
common form found in the lip, tongue, oesophagus, 
rectum, scrotum, penis, clitoris, mouth of the womb, 
vulva, etc. 
Causes.—These are of the most obscure nature. Local 
injury is supposed to have a marked influence. That this 
malignant disease is in many cases due to heredity is 
perhaps beyond a doubt. 
Cancer in the beginning is considered a local disease, 
but becomes general by disseminating its elements. If 
detected in its earliest growth, the surgeon may be able 
to extirpate it, and thus a respite may be secured. 
Treatment.—All that can be done is to improve the 
general health, by nutrition of the body and hygienic 
means ; good, nutritious diet, and such tonics as the family 
physician may deem best to prescribe, are essential. 
There is so far no medicine in existence which pos- 
sesses any curative qualities for cancer. 
WORMS. 
The intestinal worms of frequent occurrence in the 
human body are the round worm, ascaris lumbricoides, and 
seat or pin worm, ascaris vermicularis. The former in- 
habit the small intestines and may get into the stomach 
by the acts of vomiting; the latter are found in the large 
intestine, principally the rectum. The round worm varies 
in length from five to fifteen inches. It resembles the 
common earth worm. It is of a whitish-yellow color; the 
body is round and tapering toward each extremity. It is 
most common between the ages of three and twelve years 
of age, and it is extremely rare previous to two years, or 
past adult life. 
Symptoms.—About the only reliable symptom of these 
worms is the presence of one or more in the stools. Colic 430 
WORMS. 
pains, impaired appetite, itching of the nose, offensive 
odor of the breath, disturbed, dreamy sleep, and grinding 
of the teeth during sleep, are symptoms usually ascribed 
to the presence of worms. 
Worm fever is of extremely questionable existence. 
Children have fever and pass worms from the bowels 
during such attacks, which has given rise to the idea that 
the fever was caused by the presence of the worms; 
nothing, however, is more common than the passage of 
worms from the stomach or bowels when there has been 
no symptoms of any disorder. 
Causes.—The ova from which the worms hatch, are 
introduced into the alimentary canal by means of water in 
which they are contained, and finding in the small intes- 
tines favorable conditions, the production of the worms 
takes place. 
Treatment.—Let the patient have a light dinner and a 
still lighter supper, and at bedtime give one powder of 
No. hi, and at midnight give the other. If the bowels 
do not move freely by 7 a. m., give a dose of castor oil. 
No. 111. 
n 
Pitlv. Santonin grs. ij. 
Sugar of Jiilh “ x. 
M. et div. into pulv No. ij Sig.—One powder as directed. 
No. in is for a child from four to ten years of age. 
From two to four one-half a powder will be a dose, which 
should be given as described above. 
Pin, or seat worms, as before stated, are chiefly found 
in the rectum, where they exist frequently in immense 
numbers. They are small in size, measuring from two to 
five lines in length. This form of worms occurs usually in 
children, but are not uncommon at all periods of life. 
They occasion pain in the rectum, tenesmus and itching at 
the anus. The itching is particularly troublesome at tapeworms. 
431 
night. By examination of the stools, it is easy to deter- 
mine whether they are present or not. 
Treatment.—Internal treatment is the same as for 
round worms, followed night and morning for ten days, 
with an anaema made from quassia chips, one ounce to a 
gallon of boiling water, and using about a teacupful of this 
at one time. It should be warmed, and injected well up 
into the bowels. For the itching and soreness around the 
anus, use either a little carbolized or camphorated oil. 
TAPEWORMS. (Tania solium.) 
Tapeworm usually occurs singly, but not always so, as 
its name would imply. It exists in the small intestines, 
and it varies in length from five to ten or even thirty feet, 
and in breadth from one line—at its narrowest part—to 
four or five at its central or broadest portion. The head 
of this parasite is small and flattened, about the size of a 
pin’s head, having in its center a projecting papilla or pro- 
boscis, and is characteristically armed with a double circle 
of hooks, about twenty-four or twenty-eight in all, around 
which are four suckers or discs. The worm, in conse- 
quence of the presence of hooks, is often described as the 
armed tapeworm. There is a neck joining head and body, 
and it is about half an inch long. The joints are capable 
of an independent existence when well formed. Their 
number is often from 800 to 1,200 in all, including perfect 
and imperfect. 
Symptoms of its presence are not very striking, its 
existence being generally unsuspected until single joints 
are passed in the stools; in many cases, however, there is 
a continual craving for food, debility, pain in the stomach, 
emaciation, and itching about the nose and anus. 
Treatment.—The patient should eat a light meal at 
noon, and go to bed without anything more for the day. 
At 7 a. m. the next morning take one-third of No. 112, at 
9 a. m. the second third, at 11 a. m. the balance. 432 
TAPEWORMS. 
No. 1 12. 
n 
Chloroform (best} fl. 3 j. 
Ahum Siglii j. 
Slycerina fl-3X 
M. Sig.—One third at a dose two hours apart. DISEASES OF THE EVE. 
433 
CHAPTER XIII. 
MISCELLANEOUS DISEASES. 
DISEASES OF THE EYE 
It is not within the province of this work to describe, 
and much less treat the many ailments which afflict the 
eyes, it being solely the business of an oculist. We shall, 
therefore, notice only such as can be treated without the 
aid of professional skill. 
BLACK EYE. 
This affection is usually caused by contusion and con- 
sequent rupture of the smaller bloodvessels in the eyelids 
and adjacent parts. 
Treatment.—Take of prescription No. 113 and paint 
the bruised parts with it, using a camel’s hair brush, being 
careful that no part of the mixture gets between the eye- 
lids, and allow it to dry, a second or third coat being 
applied as soon as those previously made are dry. 
No. 1 13. 
n 
S'inct. Capsid 3 j. 
Jiucilage Sum Mcacias 3 j. 
Slycerina gtts. x. 
M. Sig.—Apply with a camel’s hair brush as directed. 
If this preparation is applied immediately after the 
injury is inflicted, the treatment will invariably prevent the 
blackening of the bruised parts. 434 
stye—Bloodshot eves. 
The application of a fresh piece of lean beef or raw 
oyster to the injured parts is also good, and should be 
resorted to when the above prescribed remedy is not im- 
mediately obtainable. 
No. 113 is also an excellent remedy against bruises, 
without abrasion of the skin of other parts of the body, 
and to prevent the formation of darkened spots or patches 
—usually spoken of as “ black and blue spots.” 
STYE. 
This affection occurs frequently in the earlier years of 
life. It is caused through the inflammation of the small 
glands in the lids, and comes to a suppurating point at the 
edges of the lid, forming small abscesses. It is not unusual 
that after one stye has healed another forms at the same 
place, or in close proximity. 
Treatment.—As soon as the swelling is noticed on any 
part of the edges of the lid, procure from your druggist 
five cents worth of compound tincture of iodine, and a smalt 
glass rod. Dip the latter into the tincture of iodine, so 
that only a very small amount adheres to the rod, and 
touch the stye with the same, exercising the utmost care 
that none of the liquid gets into the eye. The applicat'on 
of this remedy will arrest the growth of the stye. 
Care should be taken that the bowels are not consti- 
pated, and if they are, we advise taking a dose of rochelle 
or epsom salts. Washing of the affected eye with hot 
water is also recommended. It will have a tendency to 
soothe the sore places. 
BLOODSHOT EYES. 
This unsightly affection is usually caused by contracting 
a cold. It is not particularly painful, but if not cared for 
at the beginning, may lead to an inflammation. The 
habitual use of strong drinks gives the eyes an appearanec 
of being “bloodshot.” In the latter case nature effects a 
cure, if the drinking habit is discontinued. FOREIGN BODIES IN THE EYE. 
435 
Treatment.—Keep in a room where the light is sub- 
dued, and apply to the eyes triple folds of clean cotton or 
linen cloth saturated in cold chamomile tea. If this is not 
obtainable, use common black tea instead. This disease 
looks more dangerous than it really is. 
FOREIGN BODIES IN THE EYE. 
This accident is of common occurrence, and causes 
considerable pain, and if the irritating substance which has 
lodged between the lid and eyeball is not speedily removed, 
inflammation or paralysis of the lid may be the consequence. 
Treatment.—As soon as any object “gets into the 
eye,” immediately begin to rub the well eye. Don’t touch 
the other. If this does not succeed in removing the sub- 
stance, turn back the lid and with the point of a cambric or 
silk handkerchief remove the object, if it can be seen; if 
not, take a small syringe and gently inject tepid water under 
the lid; this will wash out the foreign body. It often 
happens that the pain continues after the object is removed, 
the feeling being the same as if it were still beneath the 
lid. This is due to injury to the delicate membrane lining 
the eye. Cold water should be applied during the day to 
relieve this, and at night a tablespoonful of tea thoroughly 
wet with cold water should be put into a little bag, and 
lightly bound over the eye. 
INFLAMMATION OF THE CONJUNCTIVA. 
( Conjunctivitis.) 
This affection is an inflammation of the mucous 
membrane of the eyelids. The symptoms of the disease 
are first manifested by a burning, and then pricking sen- 
sation in the eye. After this, discharge of mucus takes 
place; in aggravated cases pus forms, and is discharged. 
By turning the lids down, it will be noticed that the 
mucous membrane is very red, and dotted with little white 
nodules, called ‘‘granulations.” 436 
COT,OR BLINDNESS. 
In this affection the eyeball also suffers, inasmuch as 
the glands of the inner lid, owing to their inflammation, do 
not give off sufficient fluid to properly moisten the eyeball. 
Individuals suffering with this disease have a constant 
inclination to rub the eyelids; this is especially true of 
children. It should be avoided under all circumstances, 
as it heightens the inflammation. 
Treatment.—The application of pure cold water 
should be first resorted to, as it will subdue the inflam- 
mation. Avoid, above all other things, smoke, dust and 
wind. Keep in a darkened room ; do not use your eyes 
at all. and exercise care that no additional “cold” is 
contracted. 
If the above treatment prove of no avail, we advise 
that an oculist be consulted, but should such practitioner 
be beyond reach, the following, No. 114, will prove to be 
an excellent wash for inflamed and granulated lids : 
No. 1 14. 
i* 
Sulphate of /hydrast gr. j. 
S4g,ua dist z j. 
Make solution. Sig.—Apply as an eye wash. 
In applying the above, No. 114, care should be exer- 
cised that the solution gets well into every part of the 
inner lids. 
COLOR BLINDNESS. 
This affection consists of the inability to distinguish 
colors. Thus, some take red and green for yellow, blue, 
black, white, or gray. Others again, take red for yellow 
or green, and still others cannot distinguish blue and yel- 
low, and perceive these colors as red, green, or gray. This 
condition is due more to early impressions than any defect 
of the eye. If a child be told that the sky is green, and 
grass blue, he will so think, and it will be hard to change 
this impression in after life. A careful methodical training SQUINTING OVERFLOW OF TEARS. 
437 
in reference to colors during early life, will prevent this 
difficulty. 
SQUINTING. 
Squinting occurs in children about the time they begin 
learning to read. By a prompt adoption of the use of 
glasses most cases can be remedied. If squinting (stra- 
bismus) becomes permanent, an operation will be neces- 
sary. This is neither dangerous nor painful. 
OVERFLOW OF TEARS. 
Overflow of tears is caused by the lachrymal canals or 
nasal duct becoming obstructed. This is remedied by the 
surgeon removing the obstruction. It is sometimes nec- 
essary to introduce, permanently, a silver tube into the 
duct for the tears to pass through to the nose. 
WILD HAIRS. 
These are hairs which have grown on the inner side of 
the lid, and scratch against the eyeball. They should be 
extracted with forceps, and the lids thoroughly washed. 
CATARACT. 
This is a disease in which the crystalline lens or its 
capsule becomes opaque, thus interfering with vision. It 
can be removed by a skillful operator. 
CARE OF THE EYES. 
'The care of the eyes is of utmost importance, as it is 
the principal agent through which intelligence is obtained. 
Every child, before being put to school, should be exam- 
ined by a competent oculist to see that no defects of the 
eye exist, as many of the mental as well as bodily 
attributes of a growing child are influenced, if not created, 
by the condition of the eye alone. 
The eye should be protected from sudden changes 438 
DISEASES OF THE EAR. 
between light and darkness. They should never be used 
by light so scant that an effort is required to discriminate. 
Never use the eyes at any close work while directly in 
front of a light. The best light is from above or obliquely 
over the left shoulder. 
Too much light is as bad as too little. It is time to 
*_> 
stop when an effort is required to distinguish. Glasses 
should be used as soon as there is the least indication 
that they are needed. Many minor non-inflammatory af- 
fections of the eye are benefited by bathing in water as 
hot as it can be borne. 
The eyesight, as a rule, begins to fail about the 
fortieth year. Having to hold things at a distance, as in 
reading, is the first indication of it. 
DISEASES OE THE EAR. 
It would be impracticable to treat in a work of this 
kind the more complicated diseases of this important 
organ. They should only be attended by an experienced 
specialist. There are, however, several minor ailments 
and accidents to the organs of hearing which do not 
require the services of the aurist. 
It is hoped that a few words about the care of the 
organs of hearing will be welcome, and those who follow 
them will surely appreciate the hints. 
As described in Part I of this work (see page 183), a 
wax is secreted in the auditory canal, surely for a purpose. 
Many persons seem to think that this should be removed 
about as fast as it is secreted. This is an erroneous im- 
pression, and the wax should not be interfered with. It 
happens, however, that it occasionally hardens, causing, in 
consequence, an itching sensation. This is easily rem- 
edied by dropping into the auditory canal two or three 
drops of sweet oil, twice a day for a week. FOREIGN BODIES IN THE EAR EARACHE. 
439 
FOREIGN BODIES IN THE EAR. 
Insects sometimes enter the auditory canal, and are 
not easily dislodged. An effectual way of inducing these 
little pests to come out of the ear of their own accord, is 
to place the patient within a dark room, and then hold 
right in front of the ear a bright light. The insect will 
be attracted by it and leave the cavity. Should this, how- 
ever, fail, take an ear syringe and inject tepid water into 
the cavity. This should be done gently. 
Children often place kernels of corn, beans, peas, etc., 
in their ears. Through the moisture given off by the 
body these kernels swell, and if not attended to in time, 
serious results follow. 
A doctor should be called to attend to this, and until 
he arrives the patient’s head should be placed upon a 
pillow, the affected ear downward. 
EARACHE. 
For this very painful affection No. 115 will be found 
much superior to the old mixture of sweet oil and lau- 
danum. Saturate a piece of cotton and introduce well 
into the ear. It should also be rubbed behind and in 
front of the ear: 
No. 1 15. 
'Wamy Iterated Chloral 3 SS. 
Mycerina fl. 3 lij. 
0il Sweet Sdlmonds “ 3 j. 
M. Sig.—Apply to ear as directed. 
FOREIGN BODIES IN THE NOSE. 
These can be removed with a pair of forceps, if you 
have them ; if not, make a loop of clean smooth wire, and 
pass up and around the object and draw it down. A little 
snuff to produce sneezing will sometimes discharge the 440 
BOIL CARBUNCLE. 
substance. Blowing forcibly into the mouth will some- 
times effect a removal. In order that this is effected, the 
mouth of the operator must be applied directly to the 
patient’s. If a child get any object into the nose beyond 
your reach or sight, don’t get nervous thinking it may 
“ work up into the brain.” By studying engraving No. 
14, it will be seen that the posterior opening of the nose 
is into the throat. 
BOIL. 
A boil is a hard, painful tumor, accompanied by in- 
flammation. Suppuration usually occurs when pus is dis- 
charged, mixed with blood and discloses a small, fibrous 
mass of dead tissues, called the core. 
Causes.—Boils are probably due to sudden changes in 
the nature of the diet, or to the influence of fetid animal 
exhalations. They also follow debilitating diseases. Boils 
appear upon any part of the body excepting the soles of 
the feet and palms of the hands. 
Treatment.—Internally, take No. 92 for four to six 
weeks. Locally, apply water dressing. Poultices may be 
applied for a limited time, but, if continued much beyond 
the time of suppuration, they will cause other boils to ap- 
pear in the adjacent tissues. 
Unless very painful it is better to let the boil discharge 
than to lance it. 
CARBUNCLE. 
This is an acute local inflammation of the tissue just 
beneath the skin; is very painful, and especially apt to 
attack the nape of the neck or back. It is characterized 
by hardness of the parts, more or less sloughing of the 
skin and deeper tissues, and marked constitutional de- 
pression. It differs from a boil in its tendency to spread 
its size, and the absence of the central core. It is fre- 
quently fatal. 
Treatment.—The treatment should be placed in the CHOKING—riLES. 
441 
hands of a competent practitioner (See article on blood- 
poisoning, page 289). 
CHOKING. 
P'ish bones and other articles are occasionally lodged 
in the throat and oesophagus. To facilitate their removal 
swallow the white of a raw egg; if one is not sufficient 
try another. 
If any substance is drawn into the trachea (windpipe) 
it is a matter of more seriousness. The patient should be 
placed, head downward, over a chair or lounge, and sharp 
raps given him upon the back, between the shoulders. 
Alternating with this, press suddenly, and with con- 
siderable force, at the pit of the stomach. 
Children should be taught not to hold pins, coins, 
buttons, etc., in the mouth. Pins when swallowed, some- 
times lead to serious results; oftener, however, they are 
never heard of again. The swallowing of coins and but- 
tons usually give rise to no bad results. 
PILES. (.Hemorrhoids). 
These are small tumors occurring about the anus and 
within the rectum, caused by the distension of the small 
veins in the locality from coagulation of blood within the 
same. 
Piles are divided into two varieties: External — without 
the rectum, and internal—within the rectum. Pile tumors 
vary much in size, and also differ greatly in the amount of 
pain they cause. The majority of cases are very painful 
and exceedingly annoying. 
Treatment.—The only positive cure for piles is an 
operation. They can be greatly relieved by attention to 
the diet, and using when necessary, No. 116 to keep the 
evacuations from the bowels in semi-liquid condition. 
The following suppositories will be found excellent for 442 
CHAFING — RUPTURE. 
relieving the pain and tenderness; use night and morning 
after bathing, and replacing the hemorrhoids: 
No. 1 1 6. 
fllumbv Jodidi. 3 ij. 
Sir. Jodidi comp gtt. xx. 
flulv. doll grs. xx. 
dxt. TGyoscy “ xx. 
Voococb flutter, 3 ij. 
M. Ft. supposit. No. xx. Sic:.—Apply one night and morning as directed. 
Much relief will be obtained by bathing the protruding 
tumors with cold water, to which has been added extract 
of witch hazel,—a teaspoonful to a cup of water. 
CHAFING. 
During warm weather many persons suffer from 
chafing. This can be effectually prevented by thoroughly 
dusting the irritated parts with either sub-nitrate of 
bismuth or calomel. 
RUPTURE. (Hernia). 
Hernia is a protrusion of a part of the bowels through 
a natural or unnatural opening. It occurs oftenest in the 
region of the groin, and is then called inguinal. Next in 
frequency is upon the inside of the thigh, close up to the 
body, this form is named femoral. The third form occurs 
near the umbilicus, and is termed umbilical hernia. 
Inguinal hernia is much more common than either of the 
other two forms. 
Symptoms.—A lump or tumor, appearing in the local- 
ities named, and which increases when the patient stands, 
or coughs, should excite suspicion that a hernia exists, 
and a physician should be consulted. 
Ca?cses.—ddie causes of hernia are a hereditary ten. 
dency, lifting of heavy weights, jumping, coughing, FAINTING TURNS AND SCALDS. 
443 
straining at stool, etc. Hernia is more common in male 
than female, the proportion being as four to one. 
Treatment.—Always wear a well-fitting truss. If for 
any reason the truss becomes disarranged, and the hernia 
“come down,” do not handle it. Lie down, with the hips 
much higher than the shoulders, and the knees drawn up. 
Very likely the hernia will return of itself in the course of 
a half hour, if not, a physician should be called. A 
hernia that protrudes and cannot be returned, is said to 
be strangulated. This requires an operation, and delay 
in having it done only increases the danger. 
FAINTING. (Syncope). 
Fainting is loss of consciousness, caused by a sudden 
arrest of the blood supplying the brain, attended with 
pallor of the face, feeble respiration, and weakened action 
of the heart. 
Treatment.—The head should be placed as low or a 
little lower than the body, the clothes loosened about the 
neck and throat, and the air allowed free access to the 
patient. If at hand, a little spirits camphor or a(jna 
ammonia may be poured upon a handkerchief, and held 
to the nostrils. 
BURNS AND SCALDS. 
Slight burns or scalds are best treated by the imme- 
diate application of cold water, and afterwards bathing 
w th white liniment made after directions given in Do- 
mestic Recipes. 
Burns or scalds of larger extent can be treated by the 
application of vaseline or cosmoline. In these accidents 
the principle of treatment is to exclude the air. Where 
any extent of surface is injured, we advise covering it 
with double thick cotton batting, on which has been sifted 
freely wheat flour. The batting should be spread upon 
the table and the flour sifted over it, and then applied 444 
WOUNDS. 
(flour side) immediately to the burned or scalded surface 
and bound firmly in place. If the batting, as it rests 
upon the table, is two inches thick, it will be about right. 
This excludes the air and makes a soft, easy dressing. 
Upon the third day this covering can generally be re- 
moved. If it is not easily done, leave it until loosened. 
As an application to follow the removal of this first 
dressing, take equal parts of limewater and linseed oil, 
shake and thoroughly wet a soft linen cloth, and lay upon 
the injured surface, and again cover with the cotton 
without the Hour. The dressing of oil should be changed 
every day. 
If the patient shivers after being burned, or does not 
seem to mind the pain, it is an indication for the adminis- 
tration of stimulants. For this give fifteen to thirty 
drops aromatic spirits of ammonia in two tablespoonsful 
of water. Milk, as hot as the patient can drink it, is also 
excellent. If the pain is severe Dover’s powder may be 
given in three to five grain doses to alleviate it. We 
have employed, with the best results, this treatment in 
numerous instances, when the surface burned was ex- 
tensive. The sooner after the accident the batting and 
flour are applied, the better. 
WOUNDS. 
“ When the soft parts of the body are divided by any 
mechanical force applied externally, they are said to be 
wounded ; when the injury is produced by a sharp-edged 
instrument, the wound is called * incised;' when with a 
pointed one that stabs or pricks, ‘punctured;' when with 
a blunt instrument that tears, ‘ lacerated;' when with an 
implement that bruises, ‘contused.' " (Bryant.) 
Wounds of any extent will require the services of a 
surgeon. Minor wounds, when the skin is ruptured, 
should be washed clean by bathing in tepid or cold water, 
to which has been added pure carbolic acid, in the pro- FROST-BITES. 
445 
portion of five drops to the quart, and then covered with 
a linen cloth saturated with carbolized oil (see Domestic 
Recipes), and a bandage applied. Contused wounds, 
when the skin is not broken, should be treated with water 
dressing, followed by a thorough application of white 
liniment. 
FROST-BITES. 
When any part of the body has been frost-bitten, as 
the toes, fingers, nose, ears, etc., Dr. Lapatin of Russia, 
who has had a large experience treating these accidents, 
recommends the following (No. i i 7) to allay the burning, 
itching and pricking : 
No. 1 1 7. 
•Sdcicl dVitric dil. fl. c j. 
r9lq/ucw cMenih. Pip u c j. 
M. Rig.—Use externally as directed. 
Fhe affected parts should be painted with this solution, 
at first once and afterward twice a day. After this appli- 
cation has been made three or four days, the skin be- 
comes darkened, and the epidermis is shed, healthy skin 
appearing under it. A complete cure by means of this 
remedy is effected in from ten to fourteen days. 
If a foot or hand be frozen to stiffness, and already 
insensible or nearly so, submerge the affected member 
in water, so warm that the hand at a normal temperature 
could not tolerate the heat. Or if an ear be frozen to 
stiffness, apply cloths wrung out in hot water. The 
feeling to the patient, after these hot applications or im- 
mersions, is one of intense gratification, and is only tem- 
porarily interrupted by an acute stinging pain. 
Statistics prove that this method of restoration is by 
far the most preferable, and should be resorted to under 
all circumstances. 446 
DIARRHOEA OF CHILDREN. 
DIARRHCEA OF CHILDREN. 
Children are subjected through the summer months to 
looseness of the bowels, more or less severe. It must be 
remembered that two to four movements in a child less 
than six months old is not abnormal, unless the dejections 
are unnatural in quantity or quality. 
A large majority of the diarrhoeas of children can be 
arrested by giving Turkish rhubarb, as directed for 
Aphtha, on page 296. After acting upon the bowels with 
the rhubarb, if a remedy is wished to check and regulate 
the bowels, use No. 118: 
No. 1 18. 
I* 
PismutJbi Subnit grs. xvj. 
Sinct. 0pii deed gtts. xij. 
PPinct. dlhei. . . 
Sssence 9$inna 
- aa. fl. 3 ij. 
S4cicl Carbolic, (pure) gtt. j 
Pepsin Cordial (P.W.P 9?o.).. . 11. z ss. 
Mycerina q. s. ad. “ ij. 
No. 118 is for a child six to twelve months old; from 
one to two years, increase the dose one-fourth ; previous 
to six months, give one to three-fourths the amount 
named in the directions. 
Another excellent remedy for stomach and bowel 
troubles of children is the following, which can be pre- 
pared at home, and should be given the same as Castoria: 
Fluid extract of wormseed, one and one-half ounces; 
fluid extract of pumpkin seed, fluid extract of senna, each 
one ounce; fluid extract of rhubarb, four ounces; bicar- 
bonate of potash, one drachm; rochelle salts, one and one- 
half ounces; oil of peppermint, one drop; oil of anise, two 
drops ; oil of wintergreen, five drops ; alcohol, one ounce ; 
granulated sugar, eleven ounces. Mix according to the 
following directions : 
M. Sig.—3 j every two, four or six hours as required. SPICE PLASTER. 
447 
Put the alcohol in a pint bottle and add the pepper- 
mint, anise and wintergreen oils, shake, and add next the 
fluid extracts, then the bicarbonate of potash and rochelle 
salts, shake until the two are dissolved, and then add the 
sugar and fill the bottle with water. As soon as the sugar 
is dissolved the mixture is ready for use. 
As an external remedy for stomach and bowel trouble 
in children, the following spice plaster will be found of 
great service. It can remain on for hours, or even days 
without blistering, and can be used whenever a warming 
application is required. It makes excellent “drafts” for 
the feet, calves of the legs, nape of the neck, etc.: 
SPICE PLASTER. 
Take of powdered cinnamon, cloves, nutmeg, ginger 
and allspice, each two teapoonfuls; honey and glycerine, 
one tablespoonful; white of one egg. Mix thoroughly, 
and apply between layers of cheese cloth. A bandage 
should be applied over it to keep it in place. If the baby 
has “colic” pains, indicated by a sharp cry and drawing- 
up of the knees, apply one of these plasters over the ab- 
domen and see what you think of it. 
Mothers should be very careful in giving soothing 
syrups to their babies ; they nearly all contain opium in 
some form. This drug is extremely harmful to children, 
unless given in very small doses. Cases are on record of 
children dying from the use of these syrups. 
If it is positively necessary to give anything to quiet a 
child, No. 119 will prove effective and harmless. Dose, 
from one-half to a teaspoonful once or twice in twenty- 
four hours. 
No. 1 19. 
B r 
Voctmph. cMvnobrom grs. ij. 
SVormal Stfiquid Kyoscyami gtts. viii. 
Syrup Sdactucarii (-Sdubergieds). . = ij. 
M. Sig.—One-half to 3 j once or twice in twenty-four hours. 448 
TOOTHACHE. 
TOOTHACHE. 
When the tooth feels sore to the touch, or gives the 
sensation of being longer than its fellows, or “grumbles,” 
apply with a swab to both sides of the gum, equal parts 
of compound tincture of iodine and alcohol, using it every 
hour or two till the soreness disappears. If the tooth is 
hollow, and aches, use No. 120. 
No. 120. 
I* 
Plumbi Pdcetcis grs. X. 
Sdc/uae dist fl. 3 ss. 
Skluid Opium . “ 3 j. 
M. Sig.—Apply to the hollow tooth with absorbent cotton. 
CHOLERA MIXTURE. 
The following is an excellent mixture for pains in the 
bowels,, and has been referred to on numerous occasions 
throughout this work. If the reader so wishes, it can be 
prepared at home, but for those who prefer to have it done 
at the drugstore, we append in Vol. Ill a regular pre- 
scription. It is known as il Thielemann’s Cholera 
Mixture.” 
For patients less than twenty-one years of age, the 
dose should be in accordance with dose table, page 215. 
No. 121. 
h 
Oil of Peppermint fluid drachms 2 
Chloroform “ u 2 
Skluid Sxt. of Jpecac {P.W.P Co.) “ u 2 
dkluid Sxt. of Valerian {P. IB. 0 Co.) ‘' - “ 5 
3'inct. of (fjpium; deodorized. ... “ “ 6 
Other 11 u 8 
mcoiwi a u 3 
Sherri/ Wine, sufficient to make fluid ounces 8 
Mix according to art. Adult dose 25 to 30 drops. FAT AND ANTI-FAT. 
449 
FAT AND ANTI-FAT. 
Any of our readers who may wish to reduce their amount of 
adipose tissue should live largely upon the articles named in the left 
hand column, eschewing those of the right, while any who wish to 
increase their weight should partake principally of those in the right 
hand column. 
FOR THOSE WHO WISH TO F.E LEAN. 
1. Soups. 
2. Beef, mutton and chicken 
broths. 
3. Fish—all kinds except cat 
and salmon. 
4. Lean beef, lean mutton, 
chicken. 
5. Game. 
6. Lean ham and dried beef. 
7. Eggs (one at each meal). 
8. Veal. 
9. Buttermilk. 
10. Vegetables—asparagus, caul- 
iflower, onions, spinach, celery, 
cabbage (cooked in water 
with lean meat), tomatoes, 
radishes, lettuce and greens. 
11. Bread—white, graham or 
corn (sparingly), gluten bis- 
cuits (not more than four ounces 
per diem). 
12. Fruits — grapes, oranges, 
cherries, berries, peaches, sour 
apples and lemons. 
13. Drinks—water, tea or coffee 
(without sugar or cream) in 
moderation. 
FOR THOSE WHO WISH TO BE FAT. 
1. Fats in any form. 
2. Thick soups. 
3. Sauces and spices. 
4. Hominy. 
5. Oatmeal. 
6. Sweet and Irish potatoes. 
7. Rice. 
8. Beets. 
9. Carrots. 
iq. Parsnips. 
11. Starches. 
12. Pies, puddings and cakes. 
13. Much water. 450 
POISON. 
CHAPTER XIV. 
POISON. 
Any substance which can injure the health or destroy 
life is regarded as a poison, if given or taken with intent 
to do mischief. 
Most medicines are poisonous in improper doses, and 
even common salt has caused death in more than one 
instance. 
Dr. Guy of London, defines a poison to be “any sub- 
stance which, when applied to the body externally, or 
in any way introduced into the system without acting 
mechanically, but by its own inherent qualities, is capable 
of destroying life.” 
In the majority of poison cases they are either acci- 
dentally administered or taken with suicidal intent. 
In this article we do not propose to give specific treat- 
ment for all the different accidents which may come under 
the general term of poisoning, but to advise as soon 
as it is known that poison has been taken, to first find out 
of what nature the poison is, and at once send for a first- 
class physician. In the following paragraph the different 
poisons have been grouped in eight classes, each class 
requiring the same treatment. The antidotes therein pre- 
scribed should be administered at once, as soon as it is 
known that poison has been taken. Under no circum- 
stances await the arrival of the physician before you 
commence to give antidotes. The majority of poisons act 
quickly, and if you do not resort to the remedies imme- 
diately, the doctor may not be able to rescue the patient. POISON. 
451 
Too much importance cannot be placed on the neces- 
sity to determine the class of poison taken, and as soon as 
the kind is positively known, examine the group to which 
it belongs, and give the corresponding antidote. 
The antidotes are given in the order of their values. Give the one 
named first if at hand, and if not, the one that is. 
NAME OF POISON. 
GROUP I. 
ANTIDOTE. 
Carbolic acid. 
Muriatic acid or (spirits of salt). 
Nitric acid (aqua fortis). 
Nitro-muriatic acid. 
Sulphuric acid (oil of vitriol). 
Cobalt (fly poison). 
Creosote. 
Iodine. 
Croton oil. 
Pennyroyal oil. 
Tansy oil. 
Savin oil. 
Rue oil. 
Phosphorus. 
Muriate of tin. 
Treatment.—Give white of egg, 
or flour mixed with water; then 
cause vomiting by giving a tea- 
spoonful of ground mustard and 
abundant draughts of warm 
water; give strong soapsuds, 
chalk or baking soda with milk, 
demulcent drinks of flaxseed or 
slippery elm. 
GROUP 2. 
Chromic acid. 
Antimony. 
Tartar emetic. 
Cantharides. 
Blue vitriol. 
Verdigris. 
Mineral green. 
Elaterium. 
Mercury. 
Corrosive sublimate. 
Calomel. 
White precipitate. 
Red precipitate. 
Vermillion. 
Chloride of zinc. 
Sulphate of zinc. 
Treatjnent.—Give white of egg 
or flour mixed with water; then 
cause vomiting by giving a tea- 
spoonful of ground mustard in a 
glassful of lukewarm water, and 
after it abundant draughts of 
warm water; give strong tea or 
coffee, baking soda with milk, 
demulcent drinks of flaxseed and 
slippery elm. 452 
POISONS. 
group 3. 
Caustic ammonia. 
Caustic potash. 
Caustic soda. 
Ash lye. 
Concentrated lye. 
Treatment.—Give sweet oil, 
melted lard and milk. 
group 4. 
Treatment.—Apply cold effu- 
sions to the head; give of 
brandy or whiskey in table- 
spoonful doses every fifteen or 
thirty minutes according to the 
state of depression of patient 
and the amount of these poisons 
taken. Apply mustard plaster 
to stomach, wash patient with 
spirits of camphor or vinegar; 
arouse the patient; give plenty 
of fresh air; artificial respiration. 
Prussic acid. 
Cyanide of potassium. 
Oil of bitter almonds. 
Chloral hydrate. 
Chloroform. 
group 5. 
Treatment.—Cause vomiting by 
giving a teaspoonful of ground 
mustard in warm water followed 
by abundant draughts of warm 
water; apply cold effusions; wash 
with spirits of camphor; arouse 
the patient and give plenty of 
fresh air. Artificial respiration. 
Cotton root bark and its ex- 
tracts. 
Ether. 
Compound spirits of ether. 
group 6 
Cocculus Indie us.—This poison is 
often used by disreputable dram- 
shopkeepers in drugging their 
victims when about to rob them. 
Colchicum. 
Calabar beans. 
Indian hemp. 
Gel semi urn. 
Hemlock. 
Opium. 
Laudanum. 
Morphine. 
Santonin (worm remedy). 
Treatment.—Cause vomiting by 
giving teaspoonful doses of 
ground mustard in lukewarm 
water followed by abundant 
draughts of warm water; give 
strong cold tea or coffee; apply 
cold effusions; keep the patient 
inconstant motion; give demul- 
cent drinks of flaxseed meal or 
slippery elm. POISONS. 
453 
group 7. 
Aconite. 
Belladonna. 
Foxglove or Digitalis. 
Ergot. 
Hyoscyamus. (Henbane.) 
Lobelia. 
Nux Vomica. 
Nicotine. 
Strychnine. 
Stramonium. (Jimson). 
Veratrum viride (Am. hellebore). 
Veratrum album (white helle- 
bore). 
Veratrine. 
Treatment. — Cause vomiting 
by giving teaspoonful doses of 
ground mustard in lukewarm 
water, and abundant draughts of 
warm water; give strong cold 
tea or coffee and powdered char- 
coal ; give whiskey or brandy in 
tablespoonful doses every fifteen 
to thirty minutes according to 
circumstances; give demulcent 
drinks of flaxseed meal or slip- 
pery elm. Apply warmth to the 
extremities. Recumbent position 
should be maintained. 
GROUP 8. 
Nitrate of potash. 
Cream of Tartar. 
Saltpetre. 
Sulphate of potash. 
Chloride of Barium. 
Carbonate of Barium. 
Lead. 
Sugar of lead. 
Acetate of lead. 
White lead. 
Treatment.—Give Epsom salt 
freely, dissolved in water, then 
cause vomiting by giving a tea- 
spoonful of mustard in warm 
water, followed by an abundance 
of warm water. Give sweet 
milk or demulcent drink. 
SPECIALS. 
Treatment.—Cause vomiting by 
giving a teaspoonful of mustard 
in warm water and abundance 
of warm water; then give hy- 
drated oxide of iron, dialyzed 
iron or magnesia, in large doses. 
Follow this up by giving raw 
beaten eggs with milk, or a mix- 
ture of white of egg, milk and 
limewater. Between times give 
tablespoonful doses of sweet oil 
or melted lard. 
Arsenic. 
Rough on Rats. 454 
SNAKE 
:-bii es. 
Treatment. — Chalk, whiting, 
magnesia, whitewash from the 
wall, or powdered wall plaster 
in water must be given imme- 
diately, and vomiting should be 
excited by tickling the fauces. 
Follow this by giving one ounce 
of castor oil in one dose. In 
case of symptoms of collapse 
administer whiskey or brandy in 
tablespoonful doses, at intervals 
of fifteen minutes. 
Oxalic Acid.— From its close 
resemblance to Epsom salts it has 
on several occasions been taken 
by mistake for that medicine. 
Treatment.—Give strong solu- 
tion of common salt; cause vom- 
iting by giving a teaspoonful of 
ground mustard in a glassful of 
warm water, followed by an 
abundance of warm water; give 
white of egg or flour mixed with 
water. 
Nitrate of silver. 
Lunar caustic. 
In purchasing poison, either for dyeing or bleaching pur- 
poses or for the extermination of rats, mice, cockroaches, 
bedbugs or other vermin, see to it that it is properly 
labeled, and when not in use, that it be kept out of the 
reach of children, or, what is still better, under lock 
and key. 
SNAKE BITES. 
As civilization advances, these accidents become rarer 
every day. It happens, however, occasionally. The 
serpents most dangerous are the following : Rattlesnake, 
water moccasin, viper and adder. 
Treatment.-—As soon as bitten, the blood current 
should be at once shut off as much as possible between 
the wound and the heart. Thus, when bitten about the 
lower extremity, tie a rope or handkerchief about four 
inches above the wound, twisting it with force sufficient to 
stop the circulation of the blood. Suck the wound and 
spit the matter out. There is no danger in sucking snake INSECT BITES. 
455 
wounds, provided there is no abrasion on, in, or about the 
mouth. Give of any kind of spirituous liquor, it makes no 
difference whether it is whisky, brandy, rum, gin or 
bitters, half gill doses every ten minutes, or till complete 
intoxication ensues. Keep the wound covered with com- 
mon baking soda until it commences to heal. If alcohol 
is used instead of liquor, dilute with water, about half 
and half. 
INSECT BITES. 
Gnats.—The disagreeable itching can be removed by 
touching the injured places with spirits of ammonia, or 
rubbing and washing the parts with salt water. 
Spider Bites.—Apply carbolic acid, ten per cent., to 
wound, and if the patient shows depression, use whisky or 
brandy in tablespoonful doses every fifteen to twenty 
minutes. 
Mosquitoes.—Take a teaspoonful of the tincture of 
wild rosemary to one half tumblerful of water, and apply 
this lotion where the insect has stung. 
Bedbugs.—Apply rags saturated with ammonia, or rub 
the affected parts with a little white liniment. 
Bee, Hornet or Wasp Stings.—Apply to affected parts 
a little oil of cinnamon. Less than a drop will suffice. 
Larger quantities have a tendency to blister. If oil of 
cinnamon cannot be obtained, use strong liquid ammonia ; 
or, if the sting happens in the field or in the woods, take 
a handful of black mud, fairly moist, and apply. 
POISONOUS PLANTS. 
Stings of Nettles.—Rub the parts with a little salt water 
or carbolized oil. 
Poison Sumach {Rhus Venenata) is a plant of the shrub 
order, six to twelve feet in height, with compound leaves, 
and found nearly everywhere in swampy places. The 
plant is quite poisonous, and the effect from contact there- 456 
POISONOUS PLANTS. 
with is often seen during spring and summer. It is com- 
monly known as poison oak. 
Treatment.—\\le following remedy, if properly ap- 
plied, will form a coating over the skin, and allay the irri- 
tation and itching : 
No. 122. 
B 
Borax pulv ? ij. 
Mold Carbolic 3 j, 
Morphia Sulph grs. x. 
Pulv. Sdcacia 3 iv. 
Sdyua q,. s. ad fl. = viij. 
M. Agitate till solution is formed. Sig.—Apply with camel’s hair brush. External us. 
only.—Dr. L. D., in Med. and Surgical Reporter. 
Poison Ivy. {Rhus Toxicodendron.) This plant be- 
longs to the creepers, has trifoliate leaves, and greenish 
white berries. It is exceedingly poisonous to the touch 
for most persons. 
Treatment.—Make a strong infusion of red sassafras, 
applying it when cold, and drink of it warm in teaspoonful 
doses till relieved. The sassafras tea can be taken with 
sugar and milk if so desired. 
1 his sassafras remedy is also good for poison sumach, 
described in preceding paragraph. CHOOSING A PHYSICIAN. 
457 
CHOOSING A PHYSICIAN. 
We have had occasion many times, when giving the 
treatment of the diseases noticed in these pages, to advise 
the calling of a doctor, and it seems appropriate that a 
few words as to choosing a family physician should follow. 
In the first place, we advise that in making a selection 
you do not take into consideration the “ school ” or 
“ pathy ” to which he belongs. One school has no rem- 
edies that the other cannot procure. The questions, how- 
ever, that should be satisfactorily settled in reference to 
the physician you choose, are: ist. Is he qualified? 2d. 
Is he honest? Unless you are perfectly satisfied upon 
these points, don’t call him. 
You should choose your physician when in health, 
otherwise it may be done in a hurry, and not done well. 
If you reside in a small hamlet, or the country, do not 
get the idea that the wisdom is all in the city. “Country” 
doctors, on an average, are better qualified than those of 
the city. 
Do not estimate a physician’s qualifications by the 
kind or number of horses he drives, or quality of clothes 
he wears. Don’t think because a doctor has a foreign 
accent that it adds any to his knowledge. Remember 
that a six months’ trip sight-seeing in Europe will not 
add very greatly to one’s knowledge of diseases. 
When you have made your choice it will not be out 
of place to say as much to the physician, and invite him 
to your home. Give him your confidence and encour- 
agement. Don’t expect him to be infallible. If, for any 
reason, you decide to change to some other, don't fail to 
pay him his bill. You have no right to change until you 
do so. Some people are always saying a good word for 
their doctor until he wants his pay, and then they say 
everything against him they know, and sometimes more. 458 
CHOOSING A PHYSICIAN. 
I hese arc robbers of both purse and reputation. For- 
tunately this class is not numerous. 
The following rules for selecting a doctor are taken 
from a medical exchange. They are worth pondering, 
and in connection with what has been written upon the 
subject, any reader should be able to select a suitable 
medical attendant: 
Avoid a mean man, for you may be sure he will be a mean doc- 
tor, just as certain as he would make a mean husband. 
Avoid a dishonest man; he will riot be honest with you as your 
physician. 
Shun the doctor that you can buy to help you out of a scrape—a 
good doctor cannot be bought. 
Avoid the untidy, coarse, blundering fellow, for the man who is 
clumsy in hitching his horse you may be sure is not handy at 
midwifery or surgery. 
Avoid the doctor who flatters you and humors your appetites. 
Avoid the empty blow-horn who boasts of his numerous cases 
and tells you of seeing forty or fifty patients a day, while he spends 
two hours to convince you of the fact. Put him down as a fool. 
To be a good doctor, one must first be a man in the true sense of 
the word. 
He should be a moral man, honest in his dealings. 
He must have good sense, or he cannot be a good doctor. 
He should be strictly temperate. No one should trust his life in 
the hands of an intemperate doctor. 
It it a good sign if he tells you how to keep well. 
It is a good sign if the members of his own family respect him. 
It is a good sign if the chiidren like him. 
It is a good sign if he is neat and handy in making pills and 
folding powrders. 
It is a good sign if he is still a student, and keeps posted in all 
the latest improvements known to the profession for alleviating 
human suffering. 
We wish to add that it is a good sign if he admits 
occasionally that he don't know. THE NURSE AND NURSING. 
459 
CHAPTER XV. 
THE NURSE AND NURSING. 
It is not the purpose of the following advice and hints to instruct 
professional nurses in their duties, but to give such practical infor- 
mation to any person who carefully reads, as will enable him or her 
to take charge of a patient for a few days or longer, and render 
intelligent services. Many ladies who have not had the time or 
means to allow of their having a course at the training school, will, 
we trust,be able to ffnd some practical hints that will be of material 
aid to them in becoming self-made nurses. 
Above all, we wish to instruct our readers in such a practical way, 
that they may be able to care for those who are near and dear to 
them. Affection does much to soften the touch, and make palatable 
unsavory potions, and for the patient whose mind is clear, no one 
can prepare quite so savory gruel or broth, or lay a sheet so free 
from wrinkles, or shape a pillow so it will give so great ease to an 
aching head, as wife or mother; and of these we ask a careful study 
of what follows in reference to this subject. 
The nurse should be always neatly and quietly dressed. Orna- 
ments of every kind should be avoided, but when absolutely necessary, 
should be of as simple a character as is possible. A nice bouquet is 
very appropriate, and helps to cheer the patient. 
A nurse should always have clean hands and nails, taking 
especial care to cleanse them thoroughly after dressing any wound; 
and while carefully avoiding wasting too much time in adjusting 
and readjusting her dress, should always endeavor, in her person, to 
set before her patients an example of neatness and cleanliness. 
A nurse should always take her regular meals, and never enter 
the sick room with an empty stomach. Non-observance of this rule 
often lays the foundation of a headache or disinclination for work 
during the rest of the day, which is seldom traced to the true cause. 460 
THE NURSE AND NURSING. 
POINTS FOR OBSERVATION OR INQUIRY. 
Present Appearance.—Notice, as opportunity occurs, whether there 
be any wounds, scars or eruptions (partial or general), on the skin; 
whether there be any unnatural swelling or tumor in the groins, 
upper part of thigh or elsewhere, such as is likely to be caused by a 
rupture, aneurism, etc. 
Action of the Bowels.—Whether regular, confined, relaxed or 
painful; whether evacuations be watery, colored or containing blood 
or mucus; if blood be passed, whether it precede, accompany or 
follow the same. 
Urine. —Quantity, under or over two pints; light, dark, red, 
brown or yellowish; consistency, thick or clear; sediments, gravel, pus, 
etc. ; smell, normal or offensive; frequency of micturition by day and 
night; painful or not. It should be remembered that patients, 
especially those suffering from paralysis, are liable to a condition in 
which the bladder becomes over-distended, and although there is a 
constant dribbling away of water, this is not to be considered as a 
sufficient relief for the bladder, and should not be considered as 
passing water freely. 
Expectoration.—Quantity, character, whether following violent 
fits of coughing, etc. 
Appetite.—Good, failing, or voracious. 
Sleep.—By day and night. 
Menstruation.—Frequency, duration, if painful, character of dis- 
charge, profuse or scanty. 
VENTILATION. 
The air is composed mainly of two gases—oxygen and nitrogen— 
with a very minute quantity of carbonic acid gas. With every inspi- 
ration we require to take in with the air a certain amount of the gas 
called oxygen, and with every expiration to get rid of a certain 
quantity of that called carbonic acid, in order that the purity of the 
blood may be maintained. 
If the atmosphere in which we live were limited, and not acted 
on by any other agent than ourselves, a time would come when there 
would be no more oxygen left, and when the air would contain a 
poisonous amount of carbonic acid, the result being that we should 
die, just as a candle would go out for want of oxygen when placed 
under an inverted glass. There are, however, of course, different 
stages of this gradual poisoning, which, although not actually causing 
death, are productive of serious injury and disease, and it therefore 
becomes the duty of every nurse to see that a constant supply of fresh THE NURSE AND NURSING. 
461 
air is always provided for her patients, taking care that there are 
no draughts, and that the room is not made unnecessarily cold. The 
principal agents for ventilating a room are the windows, the door, 
the chimney, and any special apparatus that may be provided for the 
purpose. 
The Windows can, in most cases, be always kept open to the 
extent of an inch at the top, and it is no substitute for this to throw 
open the whole of the windows in the morning, and set the patient 
sneezing and complaining of the cold. 
The Door is being constantly opened during the day, and it is, 
therefore, a valuable source of fresh air during that time; but it 
should not be left open at the same time as the windows, and never 
longer than is absolutely necessary. 
The Chimney.—When there is a fire in the grate, the chimney is 
the best possible ventilator, for as the current of warm air is con- 
stantly ascending the chimney, a fresh supply of air is constantly 
being drawn in to supply its place. There is only one word to be 
said regarding special ventilators, and that is, use them. Over and 
over again, in private houses, you may see these safety-valves of 
health blocked up with paper or rags, and every possible attempt 
made to render them useless. The nurse should take care that 
nothing of this sort is done, and remember that while pure air is 
often the most effective restorer of health, so the want of it is the 
cause of half the diseases in the world. 
The nurse should make it a rule to see every morning that the 
closets are perfectly clean, kept constantly flushed, and that there is 
no accumulation; that the sinks and wash-up tanks are also thor- 
oughly clean and flushed; and that there is a free current of air 
admitted into the water-closet. 
THE MANAGEMENT OF THE FIRE. 
Here, perhaps, it is not out of place to say a few words con- 
cerning the management of the fire. An even temperature should, 
as far as possible, be maintained, and for this purpose it is safer to 
watch the thermometer than to be guided by mere sensation. Be- 
tween sixty and sixty-five degrees Fahrenheit will be found most 
suitable. 
The fire should never be let too low, and opportunity should be 
taken of the moments of wakefulness, and if the sleep continues 
sound, small, separate knobs of coals previously put in readiness and 
wrapped in thin paper, should be placed on the fire with the fingers; 
in case no previous preparation has been made, it is a good plan to 462 
THE NURSE AND NURSING. 
be provided with an old glove to protect the fingers in this work, 
and all unnecessary poking and raking of the grate avoided; for any 
slight rearrangement of the embers, a small stick does equally well 
as a poker, and is less noisy. 
BED. 
In the case of fractured limbs, the arrangement of the bed is of 
the utmost importance, but in all cases the comfort of the patient 
largely depends on the attention that is paid to .this point. The 
greatest attention should be paid in order to keep the under sheet, 
on which the patient lies, smooth and free from crumbs or other 
irritating particles, as there is nothing more wearying to the patient 
or more likely to give rise to troublesome sores, than wrinkles in the 
sheet, or the neglected crumbs of successive meals. 
A nurse should endeavor to provide the patient with bed covering 
adapted for the season of the year; otherwise it is more than probable 
that a visit to the room at night would discover it in an untidy con- 
dition, through the patient’s wearing apparel being heaped on the bed 
in winter, or the floor strewn with superfluous blankets in summer. 
The bed should be tidied and put straight every day, and in ordinary 
cases the bedclothes should at the same time be stripped off and 
allowed the benefit of a free access of air; the patient meantime 
being covered with a couple of spare blankets; but where the pa- 
tient’s ailment renders this undesirable, it should be done as often 
as possible consistently with the welfare of the patient. When re- 
making a bed, never allow the bedclothes to lie about on the floor, 
but always arrange to have a chair or other resting place for them. 
It is a great comfort to a patient, when it is possible, for the mat- 
tress to be changed once or twice a week. 
DRAW SHEET. 
The draw sheet is a spare sheet or half sheet, folded lengthwise 
two or three times, and placed under the patient in cases of help- 
lessness, or where a long stay in bed may be expected. In width it 
should reach from the waist to just above the knees; any extra 
length should be kept rolled up on one side of the bed. The draw 
sheet may be shifted a little frequently during the day, and should 
be entirely removed, smoothed and freed from wrinkles and crumbs, 
night and morning. When soiled it should, of course, be at once 
changed. 
CHANGING SHEETS. 
The two points at which to aim in changing sheets for helpless or 
infirm patients, are first, the avoidance of chill and unnecessary THE NURSE AND NURSING. 
463 
exposure, and second, to disturb the patient as little as possible. 
It is desired in all cases to have two persons work together. 
To Change the Upper Sheet.—First loosen the bedclothes all 
round, then let a person stand at the head of the bed on each side, 
with the clean sheet gathered loosely together, then each taking hold 
of a corner of the soiled sheet, draw the clean sheet down over the 
patient, at the same time withdraw the soiled sheet down over the pa- 
tient and out at the foot of the bed. Or, loosen all the bedclothes as 
before, and remove the upper blanket and counterpane, leaving only 
the sheet to be changed with a blanket over it ; then spread the clean 
sheet on the bed, and while one person on one side holds the clean 
sheet firmly, let the nurse on the other side rapidly withdraw the 
soiled sheet and blanket. 
To Change the Under Sheet.—The clean under sheet may be in- 
troduced at the head of the patient, and the soiled sheet removed at 
the same time, as explained in changing the upper sheet. Or, if the 
patient may be safely rolled on his side, do this; then roll the soiled 
sheet close up under the patient to the middle of the bed; introduce 
the clean sheet with one-half rolled up close to the rolled-up sheet, 
then turn the patient first on his back and then on the other side, 
when the soiled sheet may be readily removed and the clean sheet 
smoothly spread. 
A nurse should make a point of seeing that her patient has the 
face and hands washed every morning, the feet at least twice a week 
and that in addition, the patient, if possible, has a warm bath at 
least once a week. A good wash at night in addition, will often 
help to secure a night’s rest. Many patients are able to do this for 
themselves; but in every case it should be the nurse’s duty to take 
care that it is done efficiently, as there is little hope of progress in a 
case where disease is assisted by the presence of dirt. Slops of every 
kind should be carried out of the room and thrown away as soon as 
possible, and should on no account be allowed to remain in the room 
longer than is absolutely necessary. 
WASHING PATIENTS 
DRESSING PATIENTS. 
The body linen of bed-lying patients should be changed at least 
once a week, and if possible more frequently. This changing re- 
quires some little care on the part of the nurse, and especial attention 
should be paid to the following points: 
1. Never begin to change until you have all you are likely to 
require ready. 464 
THE NURSE AND NURSING. 
2. Be careful that there is no draught on the patient from some 
open door or window. 
3. Let the fresh linen be properly aired and warmed beforehand. 
4. Do not move or uncover the patient more than is absolutely 
necessary, 
5. Do not let the patient help too much, and, on the other hand, 
take care that they (male patients especially) do such things as they 
can and ought to do for themselves. 
This is generally allowed to be the special province of the nurse, 
and in many cases the recovery of a patient from a dangerous illness 
is due to the steady regularity with which the nurse has attended to 
each turn of a capricious appetite, and administered food in the form 
most palatable at the moment. Ordinarily, the nurse should see 
that her patient has what is necessary for him, and that they do not 
make themselves ill with unsuitable food introduced in ill-judged 
kindness by mistaken friends. 
It is worth remembering that in many cases where it seems im- 
possible for a patient to take in a moderate quantity of food without 
vomiting, he can often take it in very small quantities at frequent 
intervals without any unpleasant symptoms. Let everything that is 
used be perfectly clean, and arrange that the food of the patient is 
hot. When the patfent is taking milk, beef tea or such, the nurse 
should take care that some is put by for the night, as the most urgent 
need for its use may arise during that time. 
FEEDING PATIENTS. 
Wounds should never be uncovered for the purpose of being 
dressed until everything that is likely to be required during the 
process is close at hand. Old dressings that have become adherent 
to the surface of the wound should never he pulled off sharply, but 
should be previously loosened by bathing with warm water, or by the 
application of a bread poultice. 
Discharges may be cleaned away from the edges of a wound, and 
from the surrounding parts, but the surface of the wound itself 
should be left undisturbed. Cottonwool soaked in water should be 
used for this rather than sponges, which are liable to carry infection 
from one patient to another unless very carefully cleansed after use. 
To prepare cottonwool fort his purpose, place a portion of a layer 
in a flat dish or plate, and pour boiling water on it; the wool will 
afterward more readily soak up cold water or the lotion that is used. 
THE DRESSING OF WOUNDS. THE NURSE AND NURSING. 
465 
The ordinary India-rubber enema syringe is very useful in dressing 
foul wounds, enabling the nurse to keep a constant stream of fluid 
over the part to wash away discharges or loosen dressings without 
actual contact. The fluid which has traversed the affected part 
should be received in a basin previously placed in a convenient 
position. 
Nurses should be careful not to touch their eyes with their fingers 
while engaged in dressing a wound, as in some cases loss of eyesight, 
or other serious injury, may be caused by the irritation set up by 
the presence of a drop of matter on the surface of the eye. This 
caution also applies with regard to the use of towels soiled with dis- 
charges for wiping the faces of others. They should carefully cover 
any wound or scratch on their fingers with a plaster before dressing 
any wound. The following list comprises nearly everything likely 
to be required in the dressing of wounds: 
A pair of forceps, scissors, pins, lint, cottonwool, tow, bandages, 
sticking plaster, sponges, some soft rag, a clean half-sheet, warm 
water, hot water in a tin for heating the plaster, a dust-pan, 
for the soiled dressing, simple dressing, or a saucer containing the 
special ointment or lotion for application to the wound. In the case 
of a patient who is extensively burnt over a large surface of the 
body, the nurse should be careful not to expose the whole at once to 
the air when dressing it, but should dress it in small portions 
successively. 
When ice has to be kept near a patient so as to be available for 
constant use, and a refrigerator is not within reach a large lump 
should be obtained and wrapped in two or three layers of thick 
flannel. If any is required for use, a small piece should be split up 
into smaller bits and placed in a saucer within reach of the patient. 
If the patient has to be left long alone, the ice must be put on a 
drainer so as to allow the water resulting from its melting to flow 
away. The drainer of a soap dish well washed, or a clean piece of 
linen rag or muslin tied over a glass or cup, will answer the 
purpose. 
When ice is to be applied to the head or any part of the body it 
should be split up as before, and applied in India rubber bag, or a 
bladder or a sponge bag will sometimes answer the purpose, but 
whatever is used should be large enough to completely encircle the 
part affected. The bag should be opened at intervals, the water 
removed, and fresh ice added. A freezing mixture is made by 
pounding together equal parts of ice and common salt. 
THE USE OF ICE. 466 
THE NURSE AND NURSING. 
Medicines should be given at regular hours, and careful attention 
should be paid to the direction as to the time when they 
are ordered to be given, as, for instance, before or after meals. 
The exact quantity of medicine ordered should be given, as 
even a slight error may cause serious illness if often repeated. Any 
mistake should be at once reported, as prompt use of remedies gives 
the only hope of saving the patient in case of poisoning. 
It is a good plan to keep a separate spoon for oily or strong 
smelling medicines, such as castor-oil, cod-liver oil, valerian or 
asafoetida, since it is not easy to get rid of the smell at a moment’s 
notice. Powders are conveniently given either mixed with a little 
water or milk, or made into a paste with jam or honey. If a 
patient be unable to take pills, they should be mashed up in a little 
jam, and washed down; but if, when administered by the nurse they 
are placed well back in the throat, the patient is almost certainly 
compelled to swallow them. In capsules now so easily obtained, 
some patients can take capsules when they cannot take pills; the 
former can therefore be used for macerated pills. 
When a person absolutely refuses to take medicine the nurse is 
obliged to administer it by force. In that case, she should close 
the nostrils of the patient with one hand, and when the mouth is 
opened, should pour the medicine well back in the throat with the 
other. This, however, is a proceeding which is seldom necessary, 
and which may generally be taken as a sign that either firmness or 
kindness of manner is wanting on the part of the nurse. If medicine 
appears to the nurse to be producing any marked symptoms in a 
patient, such as vomiting, diarrhoea, pain in the stomach, head- 
ache, drowsiness, convulsive movements or twitchings of the 
muscles, faintness, running at the eyes, nose, or mouth, or if a nurse 
discovers that by some mischance a patient has had an over dose, or 
that any mistake has occurred, she should at once inform a medical 
practitioner. 
THE ADMINISTRATION OF MEDICINE. 
SUPPOSITORIES. 
Suppositories are generally used for one or two purposes, either 
as astringents or to relieve pain. If the patient be unable to apply 
the remedy himself, the nurse must do as follows: 
The patient should lie on the left side, with his knees drawn up 
and the nurse standing behind him, should pass her right hand 
under the clothes, and telling the patient to make an effort to bear 
down, she should at the same moment introduce the suppository THE NURSE AND NURSING. 
467 
inside the anus, pushing it on the tip of the finger well into the 
interior of the bowel. 
ADMINISTRATION OF ENEMATA. 
Enemata are used for very many purposes, and may be either 
purgative, stimulant, or nourishing; formulae for their preparation 
are given elsewhere. The method of administration is as follows: 
The patient should lie on his left side close to the edge of the 
bed, with his knees drawn up, the basin containing the substance to 
be injected being placed on a chair or stool by the side of the bed; 
the nurse then standing behind the patient, should pass the tube of 
the syringe (previously well oiled and softened, if necessary, by 
immersion in hot water) through the anus for about four or five 
inches along the bowel, in a direction first backward and then a 
little forward, but on no account whatever is force to be used in 
order to overcome any obstruction that may exist. 
The injection should be done slowly, with a moderate amount of 
pressure, and should be stopped at once if the patient asserts that 
he cannot bear any more. For nutrient enema, from four to six 
ounces at a time are sufficient; for cleansing purposes, from one to 
two pints, and even more may be used. Before giving a nutrient 
enema, the bowel should be cleared by a simple injection of warm 
water. Injections of glycerine are sometimes used in cases of 
constipation; the quantity used is commonly from one to three 
teaspoonfuls, and for the purpose of these injections a small syringe 
having a long metal, bone or India-rubber nozzle, is required. 
BLISTERS. 
Blisters are of different shape according to the part to which they 
are applied; the time required for the action varies, but it is usually 
from six to eight hours. By gently raising the edge on one side, 
the question as to the appearance of the blister may be settled. 
When the skin is properly raised by the effused liquid, it should be 
carefully removed by cutting with a pair of scissors, and the raw 
surface dressed with the ointment prescribed, which is either 
irritating or soothing, according to whether it is desired to keep 
open or to heal the wound produced by the blister. 
FOMENTATIONS. 
Fomentations are generally used for the purpose of allaying pain, 
but they may be also ordered in other cases as for encouraging the 
bleeding from leech bites to prevent inflammation after acupuncture, 
etc. Simple fomentations are most easily prepared by inclosing the 468 
TIIE NURSE AND NURSING. 
flannels to be applied within a double layer of toweling, with a suffi- 
cient excess of length left to allow of wringing; this should be laid 
in a flat basin or tin, and the boiling water poured over it; the ends 
of the toweling may then be twisted and the greater part of the 
excess of water may be squeezed out without scalding the nurse’s 
hands; but it must be remembered that if the flannels be applied too 
hot, the patient may suffer pain instead of obtaining relief. The 
whole should be covered with a piece of mackintosh or oiled silk, for 
without this precaution fomentations are worse than useless, as a few 
minutes serve to convert the warm, comforting flannels into cold, 
clammy wet ones, and what was intended to be a comfort becomes a 
source of annoyance to the patient. 
Tincture of opium or spirits of turpentine are sometimes sprinkled 
over the surface of the flannel to relieve pain, but this should never 
be done without special directions. Poppy fomentations are made 
by boiling crushed poppy heads in water, straining and saturating 
the flannels in the decoction. 
Lotions are usually applied on lint or a rag which has been pre- 
viously soaked in the lotion required. When it is desired to produce 
a cooling effect by the evaporation of the lotion, only one layer of 
material should be applied, no oiled silk or gutta percha being used, 
and the application should be repeated at very frequent intervals. 
LOTIONS. 
LINIMENTS. 
When any remedy in a liquid form is applied to a part by rub- 
bing, it is called a liniment, and may be soothing, as belladonna; 
stimulating, as compound camphor; counter irritant, as croton oil 
liniment. Liniments and lotions must be regarded as poisonous, and 
great care should be taken that there is no chance of their being 
administered internally. 
It is obviously the nurse’s duty to administer all medicines, and 
apply all lotions, liniments, etc. ; but it may occasionally happen 
that the frequency with which this is required renders it necessary 
that the patient should renew the application himself. Especial 
care should be taken that no saucer, cup or basin should be within 
reach but the one containing the required remedy. Serious acci- 
dents might follow if the patient were unwittingly to mistake a ves- 
sel containing lotion for that in which he had been accustomed to 
find his toast and water, or other drink. This caution is especially 
needed in cases where the room is darkened for the benefit of the 
patient with injuries or diseases of the eyes. THE NURSE AND NURSING. 
469 
SYRINGES AND DOUCHES. 
It is sometimes the duty of the nurse to syringe, or superintend 
the syringing of passages or cavities. The external ear passage may 
require to be syringed for the removal of solidified accumulations of 
wax or foreign bodies, such as peas, beads or insects. A little olive 
oil or glycerine dropped in on the previous night will make the 
removal of wax easier. The water used should be of moderate 
warmth, and care should be taken not to touch the ear with the 
point of the syringe, and not to use undue force, as the drum of the 
ear, and especially in children, is not very far from the opening, and 
it might be easily damaged by violent syringing. 
The Nose.— For syringing the nostrils, either a syringe or douche 
may be used. In either case the patient would escape a great deal 
of discomfort if he could be persuaded to breathe steadily through 
the open mouth during the operation, as in that case the fluid forced 
into one nostril will readily escape by the other. For the douche 
all that is required is a piece of small sized India rubber tubing 
about two yards long, to reach from the bottom of a jug of water or 
lotion placed above the level of the patient’s head. The water is 
started flowing through this by sucking the free end until it is full; 
then when the stream is flowing freely the end of the tube is inserted 
into one nostril, while bending over a basin and breathing in the 
manner indicated above. 
HOT BOTTLES ANT) TINS. 
When it is desired to lessen shock, to revive a patient after an 
operation, or simply to lessen a feeling of cold, dry heat may be 
applied by means of hot water contained in tins, earthenware jars, 
gutta percha bags, etc. Care should be taken not to place these 
immediately next the skin, but to interpose a layer of flannel or 
blanket. 
The local effect should also be noticed from time to time, especially 
if the patient be asleep or otherwise unconscious, as troublesome burns 
are likely to be caused by prolonged application of a heat that may 
be bearable for a short time. A convenient way of applying dry 
heat is by the use of salt made hot in a frying pan and inclosed 
between layers of flannel. 
TREATMENT OF BEDSORES. 
In some very long cases, especially when patients are suffering 
from paralysis, bedsores cannot be altogether avoided, even with 
constant care and watchfulness; but it is to be feared that they 470 
THE NURSE AND NURSING. 
occur more frequently than they need, owing to neglect on the part 
of nurses. Bedsores vary in degree from a slight abrasion of the 
skin, with a diffused redness around to large deep sores, involving 
all the tissues down to the bones. They occur over the prominent 
points of the patient’s body, upon which the weight especially falls 
as he lies in bed—as over the lower part of the back, the buttocks, 
the projecting points of the shoulders, etc. To guard against their 
occurrence— 
1. The under sheet should be kept smooth and free from 
wrinkles or crumbs. 
2. The patient should be kept as dry as possible, all discharges 
being cleared away frequently. 
3. The position of the patient should be varied as frequently as 
possible. 
4. The back should be examined daily and washed with a strong 
solution of alcohol, and after having been thoroughly dried, should 
be dusted with corn starch. 
5. When any indication of redness appears the patient should be 
supplied with water or air cushion, or the part should be covered 
with some thick felt, having a circular hole corresponding to the 
inflamed spot. When the skin has once broken the sores must be 
treated on the same principle as other similar wounds. 
NIGHT STOOLS, BED PANS, ETC. 
Although it is well to discourage as much as possible the use of 
the above named in patients who are wanting in resolution to go to 
the closet, it is most important that when assistance is wanted in this 
respect, the patients should be attended to at once, however often 
they may require it, without delay, or a fresh display of grumbling 
on the part of the nurse on each occasion. 
Many cases are undoubtedly lost, or very much injured, on 
account of the mock modesty of an inefficient nurse, who would 
often rather run the risk of allowing a patient to die from the effort 
of getting out of bed than take the trouble of attending to his wants 
herself. The following cases are among those that should not be 
allowed out of .bed on any consideration: Recent amputations, all 
fractures (except upper extremity), typhoid fever, rheumatic fever, 
ovariotomy, hernia, etc. Night stools and bedpans before use 
should always contain a clean water or disinfecting fluid, and should 
be cleansed immediately after use, and should never be carried about 
without being covered. For the sake of decency screens should 
always be placed around the bed of any patient making use of the 
bedpan or night stool. THE NURSE AND NURSING. 
471 
DISINFECTANTS. 
Disinfectants are used for two purposes: First, to destroy germs 
or seeds of disease, and for this purpose require to be of such form 
and applied in such manner as to reach the possible sources of 
infection. For instance, a solution of “ Disinfectant lotion” (Useful 
Recipes) may be useful for washing the hands, or for bedpans, etc. ; 
but it is not so diffused through the air of the sick room as a solution 
of carbolic acid would be. Disinfectants are also commonly used to 
mask or hide unpleasant smells, but it must not be supposed because 
one smell is overpowered by another that therefore all strong smell- 
*ng things are disinfectants. 
During the progress of a case of infectious disease care should 
be taken that no linen or clothes should pass out of the sick 
room unless disinfected, and for this purpose it is well to be pro- 
vided with a pail of water containing some disinfecting solution, 
into which the articles may be dipped! To assist in keeping the air 
of the sick room pure, it is desirable to have about the room some 
shallow dishes containing the disinfectant; but it must be remem- 
bered that many of the most valuable disinfectants, and especially 
carbolic acid, are poisons, and the nurse should be careful to avoid 
the risk of children drinking the solution. For washing the hands, 
a few drops of carbolic acid may be added to an ordinary basin of 
water. For sprinkling a room the same strength of each may be 
used. For dipping wearing apparel and bed linen a tablespoonful 
of either of the first named may be added to a bucket of water. 
UNDRESSING THE PATIENT. 
If possible a patient should always be undressed before being 
put into bed; and, except where he is able to walk, he should not be 
allowed to move himself from the stretcher. All tight clothing about 
the neck should be at once loosened or altogether removed. 
Boots should be removed with great care, and while withdrawing 
a boot with one hand, the other should be employed to steady the 
limb at the ankle. If the leg be broken, it is better at once to cut 
the boot down the side than to run the risk of doing further injury 
to the limb. 
When the garters are removed stockings may be drawn off 
without any U'Tculty, but a nurse should always make a point of 
seeing that the garters or straps confining the stockings are loosened 
or removed before any attempt is made. This is often forgotten, 
and the consequence is considerable discomfort to the patient and 
annoyance to the nurse. The braces which keep up the trousers 472 
T1IE NURSE AND NURSING. 
should also be entirely removed. It does not suffice merely to 
unbutton them in front, as the straggling'ends are only in the way 
and inevitably cause confusion. 
Trousers need not be injured except in the case of patients suf- 
fering from a fracture of the lower extremity, when the outside seam 
of the trousers should always be ripped up, as the damage thus done 
is easily repaired, and the patient will gain largely in comfort. 
Before attempting to remove the trousers the patient should be 
slightly raised from the stretcher, and while one person steadies the 
limb another should draw away the clothes, previously taking care 
that the under linen of the patient is so arranged as to avoid any 
indecent or unnecessary exposure. 
On taking off the coat or waistcoat it is better to remove one 
sleeve at a time, always commencing with the sound limb. The 
other will then follow without difficulty. Although it is quite 
right to care less for the clothing than for the comfort of the 
patient, a nurse should not necessarily injure anything by acting in 
a hurry. There is always time to look out for a suitable place to 
cut open, and very little is gained by tearing first in one direction 
and then in another, when a little steadiness and forethought would 
have warded off the damage. 
When the patient is unable to walk the stretcher should be 
placed on the floor with its head close to the foot of the bed and 
lying in the same direction, this position being that in which there 
is least difficulty in lifting the patient into bed. In lifting a 
helpless or injured patient the weight should be evenly distributed, 
and the duty of taking care of an injured limb should always be 
allotted to some one person. Three people are necessary to prop- 
erly lift an adult patient. Of these one should support the head 
and chest, the second and strongest should lift from the hips, the 
third should take the thighs and legs. 
In some cases the size or arrangement of the room will not 
permit this. The stretcher must then be laid alongside the bed, 
three assistants lifting the patient into the air, while the fourth 
rapidly withdraws the stretcher to allow the bearers to closely 
approach the side of the bed. All should commence to lift to- 
gether, and set down the patient at a given signal, special attention 
being always given to the injured limb. The bedclothes should be 
folded back, for the whole length of the bed on one side, leaving 
one-half uncovered to receive the patient. They are then easily 
replaced with the addition of a cradle when required. THE NURSE AND NURSING. 
473 
HEMORRHAGE. 
There are three methods of stopping bleeding which in the 
nurse’s power, and with which she should be familiar: 
Pressure at the Bleeding Point.—Blood may often be seen to flow 
from one small point only of a wound. Slight pressure with one 
finger over the spot will usually stop it as long as the pressure is kept 
up, and often altogether even after the pressure is removed. 
PRESSURE ON THE MAIN ARTERY SUPPLYING THE 
WOUND. 
With a little patience and instruction from some qualified person, 
a nurse may soon learn the exact spot on which the pressure should 
be made; but if this is not to be had, in the case of wounds of the 
arm or leg, the nurse should apply a roller bandage as tightly as 
possible around the limb above the wound; this pressure must not be 
kept up very long, as mortification may be produced by it. 
THE APPLICATION OF COLI). 
This plan answers best when the bleeding is from several points 
scattered over a large surface; it is conveniently applied by letting 
cold water drip from a sponge onto the bleeding points, or by the 
application of ice in a mackintosh bag. The part from which the 
blood comes should be raised above the rest of the body, and if the 
patient becomes faint he should not be roused immediately, since 
faintness acts as Nature’s remedy by lessening the force and activity 
of the flow of blood. Blood from the arteries is of a bright red 
color, and bursts out in spurts, while venous blood is purple red, and 
flows in a steady stream. 
One of the most common sources of sudden bleeding is that 
which proceeds from the rupture of a varicose vein in the leg; the 
treatment in this case will consist in laying the patient down, raising 
the limb, and applying a steady pressure by a pad and bandage to 
the bleeding point. The surgeon should be informed in all cases of 
bleeding, even although the bleeding be quickly controlled, as a 
nurse cannot judge as to the best treatment to be followed to pre- 
vent a recurrence of the symptoms. 
When left in charge of a patient who is insensible, do not use any 
violent measures in order to arouse him; lay him in bed, or on the 
floor, loosen whatever is round his neck, and let him have free access 
to air. 
INSENSIBLE PATIENTS. 474 
THE NURSE AND NURSING. 
Notice whether the breathing is quiet or noisy, regular or irregu- 
lar, whether there are any convulsive movements of the limbs, 
whether the urine or faeces be passed involuntarily, whether the 
pupils of both eyes are alike, or larger or smaller than natural, 
whether the patient will bear to have his eyes touched, and whether 
he can be roused at all. 
Avoid any roughness in dealing with delirious patients, but 
always be firm, and never let them see you are afraid of them, or 
inclined to let them have their own way. Do not attempt to argue 
with them or to contradict any of their assertions, but at the same time 
it is well to appear as interested in their conversation as possible. 
See that the lower part of the windows are carefully fastened down, 
and that there are no knives or dangerous weapons within reach of 
the patient. A nurse should never be left alone with a patient in a 
delirium, unless immediate assistance is available at a moment's notice. 
DELIRIOUS PATIENTS. 
FAINTNESS. 
In any case of faintness, the patient should be at once placed in 
a recumbent position, all tight clothing about the neck and chest be 
loosened, and a supply of fresh, cold air secured. Water dashed on 
the face, or applied by means of a wet towel, is the best restorative. 
If it is impossible or inconvenient to let a patient lie down flat, 
oonsiderable relief may be obtained by the patient remaining in a 
sitting posture and bending the head downward and forward to the 
knees. If smelling salts or any preparation of ammonia be used, 
care must be taken that they are not used too persistently, as serious 
injury may be thereby caused to the lining membrane of the 
respiratory .passages. 
BATHS. 
For administering a bath for anything but cleansing purposes, it 
should be remembered that the benefit to be derived from a bath is 
usually dependent upon the maintenance of healthy reaction after 
it. For instance, a cold sponge bath may be well borne and have 
an excellent tonic effect upon the patient if allowed to stand either 
in warm water or on a hot, dry surface, and provided with hot, dry 
towels or loose wrappers afterward. 
The temperature of all baths must be ascertained by using a 
thermometer, and during all the time of the patient’s immersion the 
same heat should be maintained. In preparing a bath always turn 
on the cold water before the hot. THE NURSE AND NURSING. 
475 
TEMPERATURE OF SIMPLE BATHS. 
Cold 33 deg. ... 65 deg. Fahrenheit. 
Cool 65 “ 75 “ 
Temperate. 7S “ .... 8s “ 
Tepid 85 “ 92 “ 
Warm 92 “ 98 “ 
Hot 98 “ 112 “ 
Soda Bath.—One pound of common soda to the bath. 
Sulphur Bath.—Sulphurated potash, 1-4 pound to the bath. 
Salt Water Bath. —1-2 pound to 4 gallons. 
Mustard Foot Bath.—Powdered mustard, 2 to 4 ounces; hot water, 
4 gallons. 
SICK ROOM COOKERY. 
Scrupulous cleanliness is always necessary in a kitchen, but in a 
sick room it is indispensable. Always be sure that everything you 
use, whether sauce pan, spoon, or feeding cup, is absolutely free 
from any taint of what has previously been contained in it. All 
cups or basins, especially those which have contained milk, should 
be thoroughly cleansed with hot water before using again. 
The next thing to be remembered is that the manner in which the 
food is served has a marked effect on the manner in which it is accepted 
by a sick person. Rather offer always less than more of anything; 
there is nothing so nauseating or disheartening to a patient as to be 
offered what would be oftentimes more than enough for a person in 
health. An ounce or two of meat, nicely minced and served up hot 
with a sprinkling of salt, with a potato mashed, will generally be 
accepted where a slice of meat which involves the trouble of cutting 
up, would be rejected. 
Mutton Broth.—The lean part of necks and loins should be 
cut up into small pieces, and all superfluous fat removed; about one 
pound of neck of mutton thus prepared should be placed in a sauce- 
pan containing a pint of cold water, and placed on the fire, and as 
the scum rises to the top it should be carefully removed; when this 
ceases, let the broth boil for about two hours, strain, and flavor. A 
teaspoonful of pearl barley is often acceptable, added when the 
broth begins to boil. 
Chicken Broth is prepared by immersing the parts in cold water 
in a saucepan, and letting it boil for two hours, skimming off the 
superfluous fat. 
Chicken Panada is made by rubbing together in a mortar the meat 
from the breast and wing of a roast or boiled chicken, with an equal 
quantity of stale bread, then add gradually the water in which the 476 
THE NURSE AND NURSING. 
chicken was boiled, or other broth. Boil for a few moments, and rub 
through a fine sieve. 
Meat Jelly.—'Fake one pound each of rump steak and lean mutton, 
put all finely cut up into a jar, cover over or tie down tightly, place 
the jar in a saucepan half full of water, and let it stand for three 
hours on the fire; then press the meat through a sieve, and add to 
the essence half an ounce of isinglass dissolved in a quarter of a pint 
of water; when cold, take off the fat. 
Another Way.—Take one pound each of beef and veal, boil in a 
close jar as above for four hours; if too strong add a little water, then 
strain into a mould. 
Barley Cream.—Soak an ounce of pearl barley in cold water for 
two or three hours, take half a pound of veal cutlet pounded to a 
pulp, and rub through a sieve with the barley, then boil with two or 
three tablespoonfuls of cream. 
Calf's Foot Jelly.—Thoroughly clean two calves’ feet, cut into 
pieces and stew in two quarts of water till reduced to one quart; when 
cold take off the fat, and separate the jelly from the sediment. Then 
put the jelly into a saucepan with white wine and brandy and 
flavoring to taste; with the shells and whites of four eggs well-mixed 
together, boil for a quarter of an hour, cover it and let it stand for 
a short time, and strain while hot into a mould through a flannel 
bag. 
Bread Jelly is made of stale bread steeped in boiling water and 
then rubbed through a sieve or piece of muslin, flavored with sugar 
or salt according to taste, and set aside to cool. 
SIX WAYS OF COOKING AN EGG. 
1. Simple Boiling.—Set a saucepan nearly full of water on 
the fire, and when the water boils put the egg in with a spoon and 
leave it from two to three minutes. 
2. Poached.—Put a tablespoonful of salt into a saucepan of boiling 
water, then break the egg carefully into it and let it boil gently for 
three minutes, then take it out with a large spoon or slice, set it on 
a plate to drain, then serve on toast. 
3. Another Way. Break the egg into a cup, then stir the boiling 
water in the saucepan rapidly round with a stick, and as it is 
whirling drop in the egg, and let it revolve for three minutes, then 
serve on toast. 
4. 5. An Omelette may be either sweet or savory according to the 
flavoring which is added, otherwise the preparation is the same in 
both cases. Place a good-sized piece of butter or lard in a clean TUB NURSE AND NURSING. 
477 
frying-pan, and while it is dissolving break the egg into a teacup 
containing two dessertspoonfuls of milk, ahd mix it together 
with a fork, adding the flavoring, sugar or salt, pepper, parsley, etc., 
as required, and when the fat is hot enough, then pour the egg into 
the middle of the pan and keep up a constant though gentle 
agitation of the pan all the time, about five minutes, to prevent the 
egg sticking to the bottom, roll it together like a pancake, and 
serve. 
6. Snow -Eggs. Take a small teacup of new milk qnd boil it in 
a small shallow saucepan with a little sugar; while it is boiling 
break the egg, putting the yolk and white in separate cups, whip up 
the white to a fine light froth, and when the milk is quite boiling, 
take a large spoonful at a time of the white, place it on the top of 
the milk for a moment or two, then turn it and when sufficiently 
solid lift it out on a slice, then mix up the yolk with some sugar, 
add the boiling milk, mix and boil again for a few minutes, then 
pour around the white and serve. 
Gruel.—Mix two tablespoonfuls of oatmeal very smooth in a 
little cold water, then add it gently to half a pint of water, put it on 
a fire, and boil fora quarter of an hour, stirring constantly; then 
flavor with lemon peel, sugar, nutmeg, etc., according to taste, and 
strain through muslin while hot. 
Sago requires to be soaked a little while before using; an ounce 
should be placed in a pint of water and stood on the hob or in the 
oven for two hours; then boil for a quarter of an hour, and flavor to 
taste. 
Custard Pudding. Break an egg into a teacup, and mix 
thoroughly with sugar to taste; then add milk to nearly fill the cup, 
mix again, and tie over with a small piece of linen; place the cup 
in a shallow saucepan half full of water, and boil for ten minutes. 
If it is desired to make a Light Batter Pudding a teaspoonful of 
flour should be mixed in with the milk before tying up. 
Rice Blancmange.—Simmer half a pint of milk with a table- 
spoonful of pounded white sugar until near boiling, then stir in two 
ounces or one large tablespoonful of ground rice previously mixed 
with half a pint of milk till smooth, boi'l for ten minutes, stirring 
all the while, and pour into a moistened mould, and serve it cold. 
Cornstarch Pudding.—Take a pint of milk and boil it, then stir 
two tablespoonfuls of cornstarch previously dissolved in milk or 
water into the boiling milk, flavor to taste, then boil the whole 
two minutes; allow it to cool in a mould, and serve up with or with- 
out jam. 478 
TIIE NURSE AND NURStNU. 
Barley Water.—Take two ounces of pearl barley, and having 
washed it twice in cold water, boil for twenty minutes in a pint and 
a half of water; strain, and flavor with lemon peel, sugar, etc., to 
taste. 
Toast Water. Take a slice of stale bread or bottom crust of loaf, 
toast it carefully without burning, put it in a jug, and pour over it 
boiling water; let it stand to cool. 
Linseed Tea.—To half an ounce of unbruised linseed, with a 
drachm of liquorice, in a covered jar, add a pint of boiling water; 
let the infusion stand on the hob or near the fire for three or four 
hours; strain and flavor to taste. 
Rice Water.—Wash an ounce of rice in a strainer with cold water, 
then put the washed rice with an inch of cinnamon stick into 
a stewpan with a pint of boiling water, boil for an hour, then strain, 
and sweeten to taste. 
Apple Water.—Take six peeled apples, quarter them, take out 
cores and pips, and cut into thin slices; put them, with the rind of 
half a lemon cut very thin and an ounce of loaf sugar, into a jug, 
pour on a quart of boiling water and let stand to cool. 
Tamarind Water.—A very refreshing drink may be made by 
adding a pint of hot water to a tablespoonful of preserved tamarinds, 
and setting aside to cool. 
PEPTONIZED FOODS. 
Many advantages are to be obtained in sickness and con- 
valescence by the use of these articles. 
Peptonized foods must not, however, be confounded with the 
numerous so-called beef extracts, meat extracts, fluid beef, and sun- 
dry other preparations. These are of little value, as nutrients, for 
they contain only the expressed juice (water) of lean meat, which is 
boiled down to a sort of jelly. Lean beef or mutton, according to 
the latest and best authorities, contains 75 per cent, of water, hold- 
ing in suspense some of the salts and solid particles of blood, and 
these only can be extracted. When the manufacturers of these so 
called beef extracts, claim that these ingredients constitute the 
nutritive principles of lean meat, they simply assert what every 
physiologist knows is not so. In order to receive the benefits of 
beef, the latter itself must be given, and not some of the substances 
it contains. 
The object of resorting to “ peptonized foods” is mainly to relieve 
the stomach and other digestive organs of a labor they would other- 
MOSQUERA’S BEEF MEAL. THE NURSE AND NURSING. 
479 
wise have to perform, and of all the various articles now upon the 
market, we know of none which merits the high praise it has 
secured from the medical profession, and trained nurses, as the 
peptonized food, known as “ Mosquera’s Beef Meal.” This is not a 
ready prepared food, but requires the addition of boiling water and 
seasoning, in the shape of salt, etc. The quantity of water is 
immaterial, and common sense must be exercised, as the exigencies 
may call for. It can be used, however, in many other forms, and be 
incorporated in numerous dishes, such as soups, broths, stews, etc. 
By adding it to bean, tomato, or chicken soup, these articles of 
diet become of extreme nutritive value. Stirred in oatmeal, cracked 
wheat, pearl barley, and such like, it makes a valuable dish for the 
first meal of the day. Another way of preparing it, is to cook the 
beef meal in the form of mush, seasoning according to taste, 
spreading it upon nicely browned toast; serve hot 
This peptonized food is not only for the sick and convalescent, 
but the following can be recommended to all who appreciate some- 
thing toothsome: 
Take of “ Mosquera’s Beef Meal” and bread crumbs equal 
quantities, beat up one egg and add to meal and crumbs, forming a 
fairly solid mass; season with salt, add a very little cayenne pepper 
a sprig of parsley, and a little onion, both chopped fine; form into 
balls, and steam or boil in water (the water should boil before the 
balls are placed therein). Serve hot with cream sauce. 
Another IVay.—Take of “Mosquera’s Beef Meal” such quantity 
as may be required, and add to it just enough boiling water to form 
a medium solid dough, season with salt, cayenne peppe1*, finely 
chopped parsley, and onion, and make into balls about the size of 
English walnuts; turn these in egg and cracker meal, and fry in very 
hot unsalted butter, to a nice light brown; place them upon slices 
of dry bread, which will absorb nearly all the grease. Serve hot. 
Served in this form, “ Mosquera’s Beef Meal” will never be 
forgotten, and be always received with welcome by the palate, and 
with thanks by the digestive organs, because the latter have hardly 
any labor in transforming it into blood. In fact, in all its forms, it 
is not only a relish, in which the highest nutritive principles have 
been incorporated, but also a luxury which can be purchased at com- 
paratively little cost. 
MOSQUERA’S BEEF CACAO. 
This is a mixture of beef meal, cacao and sugar. The taste of 
the former is disguised by the two latter. While a patient may have 480 
TIIE NURSE AND NURSING. 
a craving for cacao, this preparation should be given, as it contains 
the highly nutritive beef. 
It is prepared like other cocoa or chocolate, with water or milk, 
or half and half. It is very nourishing, and easily assimilable. 
In concluding this subject of nursing, we wish to recapitulate a 
few of the important suggestions to the nurse, and will say first, 
above all things, don’t fail in being cheerful under all circumstances 
possible. 
Don’t speak of the symptoms of your patient in his presence. 
Don’t contradict your patient. 
Don’t let your patient see you are annoyed. 
Don’t whisper in the sick room. 
Don’t allow others to do it. 
Don’t fail to keep the room bright, unless it is necessary that it 
should be otherwise. 
Don’t fail to let in the pure air and sunshine. 
Don’t fail in keeping everything in order. 
Don’t bustle. Don’t be fussy. 
Don’t dust with a dry cloth; use a damp one. 
Don’t fail to empty all vessels immediately; wash and return to 
their proper place. 
Don’t leave the patient’s food by his side hoping that he will 
eat it by and by; the longer it remains the less likely he is to 
taste it. 
Don’t keep medicine standing where the patient can see it. 
Don’t mix the medicine in the patient’s sight. 
Don’t use your finger to stir medicine with. 
Don’t taste either medicine or nourishment in the patient’s 
presence. 
Don’t forget, “That we have no power of ourselves, to help our- 
selves,” but that the Heavenly Father is ever willing to grant us 
strength to perform our duties, if we ask it of Him in the name of 
the Blessed Saviour. DOMESTIC RECIPES. 
481 
CHAPTER XVI. 
DOMESTIC RECIPES. 
KOUMISS. 
The late Professor Gross, after advising the class of the utility of 
Koumiss as a nutriment during inflammatory processes, gave the fol- 
lowing directions for preparing it: 
Dissolve a half ounce of grape sugar in four ounces of water. 
Dissolve twenty grains of yeast cake in four ounces of milk. Pour 
both into a quart bottle and fill nearly to the top with milk. Cork 
tightly, fasten the cork with wire. Put in a cool place and shake 
two or three times daily for three days. Keep for use no longer than 
six days.—C. and C. Record. 
Koumiss is usually sold at fifty cents per quart bottle in drugstores. 
By following above directions and making it yourself, it will cost 
less than five cents. 
LIME WATER. 
Lime water has many virtues as a remedy being antacid, tonic 
and astringent. It is prepared as follows: 
Take of unslacked lime two ounces and put it into a bottle con- 
taining one quart of pure water, allow the lime to slack and after 
cooled down add one more quart of pure water; shake well for 
two or three minutes. After ten or twelve hours the insoluble part 
will all have precipitated and the clear liquid may be drawn off by 
means of a siphon or by tilting the bottle, which may then be put 
away for use when needed. 
CARBOLIZED WATER. 
A very useful preparation which every family should have in the 
house. It serves its purpose in cleansing wounds, either upon the 
human or animal body, hollow teeth, etc. It also allays the pain in- 
cident to bites from mosquitoes, wasps, bees, and other insects. A 482 
DOMESTIC RECIPES. 
cloth moistened with carbolized water and placed on sores, boils, 
carbuncles, gives much relief. It is made as follows: 
Take of 
Carbolic Acid oz. 
Glycerine 4 fl. ozs. 
Mix these well together in a cup or bowl till the acid is entirely 
dissolved, then add to it three pints distilled water; shake and keep 
in well stoppered bottles. 
CARBOLIZED OIL. 
There is no better remedy than the application of carbolized oil 
to healing sores, cuts, wounds and abrasions of all kinds. It will 
disinfect the wound and assist in healing. It is prepared by adding 
one ounce of carbolic acid, chemically pure, to fifteen ounces of sweet 
oil. Shake, and when acid is dissolved it is ready for use. Keep 
in well stoppered bottle. 
CAMPHORATED OIL. 
Take of 
Camphor i oz. 
Olive Oil 4 ozs. 
Dissolve the camphor in the oil. This preparation is also called 
“camphorated liniment.” 
By adding to the above substances }{ ounce of chloroform, an 
excellent liniment is produced, which will allay almost any kind of 
pain. 
MUCILAGE OF SLIPPERY ELM BARK. 
A very useful preparation, which is used as a demulcent or nutri- 
tious drink, in catarrh, kidney and intestinal troubles. It is also 
used as a local demulcent in inflammation of the skin. Prepare as 
follows: 
Slippery elm bark, sliced and dried, 6 parts; boiling water ioo 
parts. Macerate for two hours in a covered vessel and strain. 
EXTRACT OF GINGER. 
Take of ground ginger one pound, and mix with it one pint of 
alcohol. After leaving this mass in a closed vessel for a few days, 
strain through filtering paper, after having added another pint of 
alcohol to the mixture. If you have a mortar or a fine coffee mill, 
and grind the ginger roots yourself, you will have a better 
extract. DOMESTIC RECIPES. 
483 
ESSENCE OF PEPPERMINT. 
Take oil of peppermint, n fluid drachms; peppermint in coarse 
powder, 40 grains; alcohol in sufficient quantity to make one pint 
in all. First dissolve the oil of peppermint in 90 parts of the 
alcohol. Then add the peppermint powder. Let it stand for twenty- 
four hours, then filter it through paper, and add sufficient alcohol 
to make one pint. 
SPIRIT OF CAMPHOR. 
To make a pint of this useful household remedy, take of gum 
camphor, \ l/2 ounces; alcohol, y pint, and water, 1 gill. Dissolve 
the camphor in the alcohol, add the water and filter through paper. 
ESSENCE OF LEMON. 
To make this delicious flavoring extract, take fluid ounce of 
oil of lemon; freshly grated lemon peel, y2 ounce, and alcohol to 
make y2 pint in all. Dissolve the lemon oil in nine-tenths of the 
alcohol. Add the lemon peel, macerate for twenty-four hours; then 
filter through paper, adding through the filter enough alcohol to 
make one-half pint in all. Keep in well stoppered bottle. 
In making one-half pint of this useful article, take of pure gum 
Arabic, two ounces. Wash it in cold water and add to it not quite 
a half pint of pure water. Agitate occasionally till completely dis- 
solved. Then strain through muslin if not clean. If glycerine is 
used in proportion of one to eight of the water, and added to the 
gum when dissolved, shaking it well, the mucilage will not spoil. 
MUCILAGE. 
SALVES AND OINTMENTS. 
RESIN SALVE. 
Take of resin ounces, yellow wax % ounce, lard 2ounces. 
Melt them together at a moderate heat, strain the mixture through 
muslin and allow it to cool without stirring. 
This salve is an excellent remedy for blistered surfaces, indolent 
ulcers, burns, scalds and chilblains. 
CARBOLIC OINTMENT. 
Take pure lard, two ounces; of yellow wax one-half ounce. Melt 
the wax and add the lard gradually; then stir the mixture constantly 
until cool. Add to this seventy-two grains of carbolic acid, C. P. 
Mix thoroughly with the base. 484 
DOMESTIC RECIPES. 
This is a preparation, when once tried, will recommend itself in 
the healing of all sorts of wounds, bruises, etc. 
Take of tar one ounce, and of suet one ounce. Mix the tar 
with the suet previously melted at a moderate heat; strain the 
mixture through muslin while hot. Stir constantly until cool. 
This ointment is highly useful as a stimulant application in 
various scaly and scabby eruptions, particularly in psoriasis and 
“scald head.” In the last named affection it should be applied 
night and morning, and in bad cases the patient should constantly 
wear a cap thickly coated internally with the ointment. 
TAR OINTMENT. 
FOMENTATIONS. 
POPPY. 
Take two poppy heads, break them up and boil in two pints 
cold water until the quantity is nearly reduced to one pint, then 
strain; soak the flannel in the decoction, wring out superfluous mois- 
ture and apply hot, covering all with a piece of water proof. 
TURPENTINE. 
The flannels should be wrung out in hot water and then the 
surface of them should be sprinkled with about half an ounce of 
turpentine. 
OPIUM. 
The same as turpentine, with the substitution of laudanum for 
turpentine. 
WHITE LINIMENT. 
The ingredients of this most excellent liniment are: 
3 eggs. 
i pint good vinegar. 
3 fluid ounces turpentine. 
3 fluid ounces spirits of camphor. 
Beat the eggs (both white and yolk) until smooth. Add slowly, 
first the turpentine, secondly the vinegar, and lastly the camphor, 
stirring all the while. Put them in well corked bottle, shaking it 
twice or three times a day for two days, after which it will be ready 
for use. 
This is an excellent liniment for sores, burns, cuts, etc. It will 
cure scratches upon the horse. The cost of the substances used need DOMESTIC RECIPES. 
485 
not exceed fifteen or twenty cents, and will go farther and effect 
more cures than five dollars worth of patent liniments. 
POULTICES. 
Poultices or cataplasms as the medical fraternity are wont to call 
them, are moist substances intended for external application of such 
a consistence as to accommodate themselves accurately to the surface 
to which they are applied, without being so liquid as to spread over 
the neighboring parts, or so tenacious as to adhere firmly to the 
skin. 
CHARCOAL POULTICE. 
Take of powdered wood charcoal one-half ounce. Crumbs of 
bread two ounces. Linseed meal one ounce and a half. Boiling 
water ten fluid ounces (a little more than half a pint). Soften the 
bread in the water for ten minutes near the fire, then mix in the lin- 
seed meal gradually, stirring it constantly, that a soft poultice may 
be formed. Mix this with half the charcoal and sprinkle the 
remainder on the surface. 
YEAST POULTICE. 
Take of beer yeast six fluid ounces, wheaten flour fourteen 
ounces, water heated to ioo degrees Fahrenheit six fluid ounces. 
Mix the yeast with the water and stir in the flour. Place the mass 
near the fire till it rises, and apply. 
LINSEED POULTICE. 
Take of linseed meal four ounces. Boiling water, ten fluid 
ounces. Mix the linseed meal gradually with the water and apply. 
Dip the knife or spoon with which you spread the poultice in boiling 
water; it will prevent the mass from sticking to it. 
MUSTARD POULTICE, 
Take of mustard in powder two ounces and mix it with the white 
of two eggs to a proper consistency. By using the white of an egg, 
mustard plaster will not draw blisters. 
When the exhibition of this remedy is necessary, we would advise 
our readers to use the prepared mustard plasters, procurable in all 
drugstores, and so much more ready for use. 
CORNMEAL POULTICE. 
Take of cornmeal six ounces; boiling water, half a pint. Mix the 
meal into water while boiling. 486 
DOMESTIC RECIPES. 
BREAD AND SOAP POULTICE. 
Take two ounces of dry wheat bread and moisten it in as little 
hot water as possible; add to it one teaspoonful of brown sugar, and 
one ounce of finely shaved castile soap. Mix well and apply warm. 
BREAD POULTICE. 
This poultice should be made by first grating a sufficient quantity 
of stale bread crumbs; this should be added to boiling water in a 
basin, carefully stirring all the while until a proper consistency is 
obtained; the resulting mass should be poured onto the muslin or 
other material prepared to receive it, and should not be spread or 
pressed in any way. 
ENEMATA OR CLYSTERS. 
Under these terms is meant the injection of liquid into the lower 
intestine, the rectum, for different purposes. 
1. To evacuate the bowels, as in case of constipation. 
2. To alleviate pain, as in case of diarrhoea. 
3. To administer nourishment or medicines in cases where the 
stomach rejects these. 
To aid a passage of the bowels, the following may be used: 
Water of a temperature of 90 degrees Fahrenheit. 
Water to which a teaspoonful of salt has been added. 
Water in which a small quantity of castile soap has been 
dissolved. 
Water to which a tablespoonful of olive oil has been added. 
Water to which two tablespoonfuls of vinegar have been added. 
All these should be used at a temperature of about 90 degrees 
Fahrenheit, not higher. The quantity must be regulated according 
to circumstances. But it is safe to follow the following rules: 
For babies, a small teacupful 
For children, to 2 cupsful. 
For adults, 3 to 5 cupsful. 
To alleviate pain, as in case of colic, diarrhoea, the following are 
applicable: 
Take a handful of the flowers, steep them in the requisite quan- 
tity of water, strain and administer. 
CHAMOMILE CLYSTERS. 
VALERIAN CLYSTERS. 
'Fake two drachms of the tincture of valerian for the adult dose; 
for children, in accordance with the dose table. DOMESTIC RECIPES. 
487 
CLYSTER OF OPIUM. 
Take of corn starch sufficient quantity boiled in hot water to the 
consistency of mucilage and add for an adult dose one-half fluid 
drachm of laudanum. This is equal to thirty drops. Children in 
proportion according to dose table. 
If the chamomile and valerian cylsters are designed to stop diar- 
rhoea, it is well to prepare them with mucilage of starch. 488 
MISCELLANEOUS TOILET RECIPES. 
CHAPTER XVII. 
MISCELLANEOUS TOILET RECIPES. 
ANTISEPTIC TOOTH POWDER. 
Boric Acid (finely powdered) 40 grs. 
Chlorate of Potassium 30 grs. 
Powdered Guaiacum 20 grs. 
Prepared Chalk 60 grs. 
Powdered Carbonate of Magnesia 1 oz. 
Attar of Roses y2 drop. 
The above ingredients, in the quantities as given, make an 
excellent tooth po der. It will sweeten the breath, it detaches the 
particles of tartar which may be present, and polishes the enamel of 
the teeth without doing harm to it. The ingredients should be well 
mixed before being used. 
SHAMPOOING. 
Nothing is perhaps so refreshing as a good shampoo. It will 
open the pores of the skin, remove all dirt, and give to the hair a 
peculiar beautiful luster. 
The following two recipes for sea foam, when prepared at home, 
cost but a trifle, and almost everybody can enjoy the luxury of a 
scalp wash, without paying to the barber or hair dresser fifty cents. 
Glycerine i oz. 
Aqua Ammonia 2 ozs. 
Alcohol, 95 per cent 16 ozs. 
Water enough to make 32 ozs. 
Mix thoroughly, and if you wish add such perfume as you may like. 
The following will do the same as the last, but is slightly more 
complicated, and costs a trifle more. 
Alcohol 8 ozs. 
Water 8 ozs. 
Soap, Castile 2 ozs. 
Carbonate of Potassa oz. 
Oil of Lavender 20 drops. 
Tincture of Soap Bark 2 ozs. MISCELLANEOUS TOILET RECIPES. 
489 
Mix the alcohol and tincture, in which dissolve the oil. Dis- 
solve carbonate of potassa in the water and the soap. Mix the two 
solutions. 
ROUGH SKIN, CHAPPED HANDS, ETC. 
Ladies as a rule, and gentlemen with but few exceptions, are 
proud of the possession of a fair and smooth skin, and those who are 
not so favored wish for it. 
In a majority of cases rough skin, chapped hands, and such like 
are the result of exposure, inferior soap, hard water, insufficient 
drying, and many other causes. 
When so afflicted the application of some cold cream will readily 
remedy the ailment. When this article, however, has to be pur- 
chased from your druggist it is rather expensive, and for this reason 
we give detailed descriptions how to prepare several of these creams. 
The substances can be purchased from almost any druggist for a 
mere trifle, and should the quantity be too large we would advise 
that one, two or three families join together and thus divide the 
expense and also the cold cream. 
Any of tbe following preparations will preserve the skin and pre- 
vent “ chapping” 
White Wax 6)4 drachms. 
Spermaceti. 6)4 drachms. 
Oil of Almonds, expressed 6)4 ounces. 
Melt the above articles, and when the mixture is upon the point 
of congealing add the following under constant stirring with a patent 
egg beater: 
Borax (previously dissolved in 3 fl. drachms. 
distilled water) 25 grs. 
Then add: 
Cumarin gr 
Oil of Rose. 10 drops. 
Oil Neroli 3 drops. 
Oil Geranium 2 drops. 
Oil Ylang Ylang 1 drop. 
Oil Orris )4 drop. 
Tincture Ambergris 1 drop. 
The above makes 12 ounces of cream. It is best preserved in 
well closed jars, and should be kept in a cool place. 
COLD CREAM. 
GLYCERINE COLD CREAM. 
White Wax 7 drachms. 
Spermaceti 7 drachms. 
Oil of Almonds 7 ounces. 
Glycerine 7 drachms. 490 
MISCELLANEOUS TOILET RECIPES. 
Melt the above and proceed as in the foregoing, then add under 
constant stirring ten (10) fluid drachms of distilled water in which 
(25) grains borax have been dissolved, and add all the other articles 
of the foregoing, commencing with cumarin, etc. If you desire 
this cream to be of a red color, dissolve three grains alcanin in the 
almond oil which will give it a beautiful healthy flesh tint. 
CAMPHOR COLD CREAM 
Is prepared like the ordinary cold cream as given in previous 
directions, but adding to white wax and spermaceti when on the fire 
to melt, four drachms of camphor. 
Of the numerous toilet waters we can recommend the following 
not only on account of their cheapness when prepared at home, 
but also for their beauty of odor, without containing deleterious 
substances. 
FLORIDA WATER. 
Oil of Lavender i fi. oz. 
Oil of Bergamot i fl. oz. 
Oil of Neroli y2 drachm 
Oil of Orange. i “ 
Oil of Clove y “ 
Pure Musk i gr. 
Cologne Spirit, 96 per cent 1 qt. 
Tincture of Tonka sufficient to color. 
Macerate fifteen days and filter through paper. 
GLYCERINE TOILET WATER. 
Borax 150 grs. 
Oleo Saccharate Cumarin 15 grs. 
Glycerine 2 ozs. 
Rose Water 1 qt. 
Tincture of Amber 2 drops. 
Oil of Rose 5 drops. 
Oil of Neroli 1 drop. 
Add a sufficient quantity of solution of carmine to give it such color 
as may be desired. 
Dissolve the borax and oleosaccharate of cumarin in the water, 
to which add the glycerine and other ingredients with sufficient car- 
mine solution to give the mixture a faint red color; then filter. 
Either rose or orange flower water are grateful perquisites to the 
toilet table. They are prepared as follows: MISCELLANEOUS TOILET RECIPES. 
491 
ROSE WATER. 
Oil of Rose 8 drops. 
Carbonate of Magnesium 20 grs. 
Water, sufficient to make 1 pt. 
Rub the oil of rose with the carbonate of magnesium in a mortar 
and gradually add the water; then filter. 
ORANGE FLOWER WATER. 
Oil Neroli 32 drops. 
Carbonate of Magnesium. 60 grs. 
Water, sufficient to make 2 pts. 
Rub the oil with the carbonate of magnesium in a mortar, grad- 
ually add the water, and filter. 
This delicious and fragrant toilet water would be more used 
were it not for the exorbitant charges made therefor at druggists 
and other stores. By preparing it yourself it costs but a trifle. 
Cologne water is often useful in the sick room as a refreshing 
perfume. Take of 
Alcohol. xgallon. 
Oil Bergamot 1 ounce. 
Oil Lemon 1 ounce. 
Oil Neroli ounce. 
Oil Sandal Wood ounce. 
Camphor 30 grains. 
Mix thoroughly and let it stand for fourteen days, when it will 
be ready for use. It should be kept in well stoppered glass bottles. 
GERMAN COLOGNE 
Many a gentleman would prefer to shave himself, if he had the 
requisites to give to his moustache or beard that glossy appearance 
which his tonsorial artist so dexterously applies. 
The following is a formula for a 
BRILLIANTINE, 
Which will impart to the beard a glossy appearance, and is also a 
good tonic for the hair, making it soft and strong. 
Castor Oil 1 ounce. 
Glycerine ounce. 
Alcohol 5 ounces. 
Add such perfume as may be agreeable. Oil of Jasmine or 
Neroli, one or two drops of each or singly, is considered by many as 
an exquisite odor. 492 
USEFUL RECIPES. 
USEFUL RECIPES. 
By preparing the following household articles yourself, you will 
save in one year more money than this work has cost you. 
A STRICTLY PURE BAKING POWDER 
Is made as follows: 
Cream of Tartar 22 oz. 
Bicarbonate of Sodium 10 oz. 
Tartaric Acid 150 grs. 
Wheat Flour 8 oz. 
Rub the ingredients, which should be perfectly dry, together in a 
mortar and pass them through a sieve. Keep in well closed bottles 
or tin boxes. 
The above will make about pounds at a cost of sixty cents. 
LAUNDRY BLUEING. 
Take of Prussian blue three ounces and of oxalic acid one-half 
ounce. Dissolve the oxalic acid in a little water, add the Prussian 
blue, and finally sufficient water to make it the desired strength. 
FURNITURE POLISH. 
The following “recipe” has been used quite extensively, and we 
can personally vouch for its efficacy in “ making old furniture look 
like new.” Take of 
Linseed oil, boiled 3 oz- 
Alcohol 5 oz- 
Hydrochloric acid „ 2 dr. 
Mix the oil with the alcohol, then add the acid. Add some red 
saunders to color if desired. Shake well before using, apply lightly 
and rub with a piece of flannel until dry. The small proportion of 
acid helps to cut the dirt. 
DISINFECTANT LOTION. 
Take of chloride of zinc 400 grains and dissolve it in two ounces 
of water. 
When you want to use this preparation add one ounce of this 
solution to two pints of water, or less in proportion. To disinfect a 
sick room, a piece of flannel foot square is to be moistened with 
the diluted solution, and frequently waved through the air. Some 
of it can be advantageously placed in the stools and bed pan. USEFUL RECIPES. 
493 
COPPERAS. 
This article is also known as sulphate of iron, and possesses de- 
cided disinfecting properties, and is recommended for purifying 
water closets, outhouses, night stools, and such like. In order to 
get full value it must be dissolved by one pound of copperas in four 
gallons of water, using the solution as may be required. 
GERMAN PUTZ POMADE. 
This is an excellent article to polish door plates, brass or nickel 
faucets, or any metal goods about the house. Take of 
Pumice Stone Powder 2 ounces. 
Rotten Stone 2 ounces. 
Iron Subcarbonate 4 ounces. 
Olive oil in sufficient quantity to make a paste. Perfume with a 
few drops of nitro benzole. 
Care should be taken that the dry ingredients are reduced to an 
impalpable powder, otherwise scratches will ensue. 
This useful article is made as follows: 
Curd of milk, dried and powdered 5 oz. 
Quick lime oz. 
Camphor 1 dr. 
Mix and keep in closely stoppered bottles. When wanted for use 
a portion is to be mixed with a little water into a paste. 
CEMENT FOR MENDING CHINA. 
Dissolve gum shellac in alcohol, apply the solution, and bind the 
parts firmly together until the cement is dry. 
CEMENT FOR EARTHEN AND GLASSWARE. 
TO MEND IRONWARE. 
Sulphur 2 oz. 
Black lead i oz. 
Put the sulphur in an iron pan over a fire until it melts; then add 
the lead; stir well, then pour out. When cool break into small 
pieces. A sufficient quantity of this compound being placed upon 
the crack of the ware to be mended, can be soldered by a hot iron. 
INDELIBLE INK FOR MARKING. 
Nitrate of Silver x/z oz. 
Water 3 oz. 
Gum Arabic Yz oz. 
Dissolve and keep in dark bottle. Apply with goose quill or 
gold pen. Steel pens are liable to be ruined. GLOSSARY. 
Abdomen.—The lower half of the body, from the chest to the groins. 
Abscess.—A collection of matter. 
Acupuncture.—The insertion of needles into the living tissues for 
remedial purposes. 
Ammoniacal.— Smelling like ammonia. 
Anesthesia.—Insensibility to pain. 
Anasarca.—A collection of serum in the connective tissues. 
Anatomy.—The knowledge of the different parts of the body which is 
gained by dissection. 
Aneurism.—A tumor containing blood—caused by some defect in the 
coats of an artery with which it communicates. 
Anodynes.—Remedies used to procure relief from pain. 
Anthelmintic.— Antagonistic to worms, worm-expelling medicine. 
Antipyretic.—Opposed to fever—cooling medicine. 
Antiseptic. —Able to prevent putrefaction. 
Anorexia.—Loss of appetite for food. 
Antrum.—A cave—a name usually applied to part of the upper jaw. 
Aorta.—The large artery arising from the left side of the heart to 
supply all the body with blood. 
Aphonia.—Loss of voice. 
Apoplexy.—Sudden insensibility caused by disease within the brain. 
Aqua.—Water. 
Arteries.—Tubes through which purified blood flows from the heart 
to the body generally. 
Ascaris.—A worm; ascaris lumbricoides, long round worm; ascaris 
vermicularis, thread-worm. 
Ascites. —Dropsy. 
Asphyxia.—Suffocation. 
Asthma.—A disease marked by spasms of difficult breathing. 
Astragalus—One of the bones of the foot 
Atresia.—Absence of natural opening or passage. 
A trophy. —W ast i ng. 
A uscultation. —L i sten i n g. 
Autopsy.—A post-mortem examination. 
Axilla.—The armpit. 
Balneum.—A bath: tepidum, warm; calidum, hot; frigidum, cold. 
Battery.—An apparatus for producing electricity. 
Bile.—A yellow fluid formed in the liver. 
Bistoury.—A curved knife (sharp or probe-pointed.) 
Bougie.—An instrument for dilating contracted passages GLOSSARY. 
495 
Bronchitis.—Inflammation of the bronchial tubes. 
Bubo.—A suppurating gland in the groin. 
Ccecum.—The name of part of the large intestine. 
Calculus.—A pebble—usually applied to stone in the kidney or urinary 
bladder, or to concretions of bile in the gall-bladder. 
Cantharides.—Spanish fly, from which blisters are made. 
Canula.—A funnel-shaped tube, acting as a sheath for a trocar. 
Caoutchouc. —India-rubber. 
Capillary.—Like a hair in size—the small bloodvessels which inter- 
vene between the arteries and the veins. 
Caries—'Decay—usually applied to bones and teeth. 
Cardiac.—Belonging to the heart. 
Carpus.—The wrist. 
Cartilage. —Gristle. 
Catalepsy.—A disease in which (during the attack) the limbs remain 
in any position in which they may be placed. 
Cataract.—A cloudiness or opacity of the lens of the eye. 
Catarrh.—A watery discharge. 
Cataplasm. —A pou 11 ice. 
Catheter.—An instrument for drawing water from the bladder. 
Catamenia.—The menses. 
Caustic.—Any substance which destroys animal textures by chemical 
action. 
Cautery.—An instrument for applying heat. 
Cerebrum. —The brain. 
Cerebellum.—The little brain. 
Cervical.—Belonging to the neck. 
Chyle.—The material into which food is transformed before it is ab- 
sorbed into the blood. 
Clavicle.—The collar-bone. 
Clinical.—Belonging to a bed; clinical lectures, bedside lectures. 
Clonic.—Spasmodic contractions are called clonic when they are of 
short duration and recur frequently. See Tonic. 
Cluneluvium.—A hip bath. 
Clyster.—An enema. 
Coagulation.—The process by which the solid elements of a liquid 
join and separate from the watery elements; as when milk 
curdles. 
Collyrium.—An eye wash. 
Coma. — Insensibility. 
Condyle.—A round projection at the ends of some bones. 
Congenital.—Beginning at birth. 
Contusion.—A bruise. 
Convulsion.—Involuntary jerking movements of the limbs and fea- 
tures. 
Cornea.—The clear projection, like a watch-glass, on the front of 
the eye. 
Coryza.—Nasal catarrh. 
Cranium.—The skull. 
Crepitus.—A sensation produced by rubbing together the ends of a 
broken bone. 496 
GLOSSARY. 
Crisis.—A deciding point. 
Cuticle.—See Epidermis. 
Cutaneous.—On the surface of the skin. 
Cutis anserina.—Goose skin. 
Cyst.—A tumor containing fluid or half-solid material, inclosed 
within an investing membrane. 
Diaphoresis. —Persp i rat i on. 
Diagnosis.—The decision as to the nature of the patient‘s ailment. 
Digitus.—A finger or toe. 
Diuresis.—An increased flow of urine. 
Dorsum. -'-The back. 
Dyspnoea.—Difficulty of breathing. 
Ecchymosis.—An effusion of blood under the skin, a bruise. 
Eclampsia.-—-A condition of the body in which there are epileptiform 
convulsions. 
Emetic.—Any means used to produce vomiting. 
Empyetna.—A collection of pus in the pleural cavity. 
Emphysema.—A puffing up or distension by air or gas in the tissues 
of the body. 
Enema.—An injection thrown up into the rectum. 
Eneuresia.—Involuntary passage of urine during sleep. 
Entozoon.—Any animal living inside another. 
Epidermis.—The outermost layer of the skin or cuticle. 
Epigastrium.—The region of the stomach 
Epiglottis.—The cartilage guarding the entrance to the windpipe. 
Epiphysis.—The separate centers at the ends of bones from which 
growth takes place. 
Epistaxis.—Bleeding from the nose. 
Erythema.—Any circumscribed reddening of the skin. 
Ethmoid.—One of the bones of the skull which helps to form the 
nose. 
Excrement.—Any refuse material excreted from the body. 
Expectorate.—To cough up from the chest. 
Fceces.—The dregs, the refuse material expelled from the bowels by 
the anus. 
Fascia.—The membrane which incloses the muscles. 
Fauces.—The jaws, the back of the mouth. 
Femur.—The thigh bone. 
Ferrum.—Iron or steel. 
Fibula.—The small bone on the outer side of the leg. 
Fistula.—A little pipe: a name given to any unnatural passage by 
which an internal organ communicates with any other or with 
the external air. 
Flatulence.—Wind in the stomach or bowels. 
Eomites.—Articles of clothing or bedding which have been in close 
contact with a patient, and by which infection might be con- 
veyed. 
Foetus.—An unborn child. 
Forattien.—A hole. 
Forceps.—An instrument for taking hold where the fingers are un- 
• suitable or undesirable. GLOSSARY 
497 
Galvanism.—Electricity generated by chemical means; a word de- 
rived from the name of a discoverer in electric science called 
Galvani. 
Ganglion.—A small swelling in the sheath of a tendon, or an en- 
largement in the course of a nerve. 
Gangrene.—Mortification or death of a part. 
Gastric.—Concerning or belonging to the stomach. 
Glottis.—The opening into the windpipe. 
Globus hystericus.—A feeling peculiar to hysterical people, as of a ball 
rising in the throat. 
Granulation.—The process of healing by several centers,with copious 
secretion of healthy pus. 
Hcematemesis.—Vomiting of blood. 
Hcematuria.—Blood in the urine. 
Hcemoptysis.—Coughing of blood. 
Hcemorrhage.—Bleeding, a flow of blood. 
Hcemorrhoid.—A pile. 
Haustus.—A draught. 
Hectic.—A feverish state of the system, attacking patients exhausted 
by discharges. 
Hepatic.—Belonging to the liver. 
Humerus.—The bone of the arm. 
Hyperasthesia.—Increased sensibility. 
Hyperidrosis.—Excessive perspiration—usually used in connection 
with that condition of the hands or soles of the feet. 
Hypertrophy. —Overgrowth. 
Hypnotic.—Sleep-producing. 
Hypnotism.—Sometimes used to express the condition induced by 
mesmerism or suggestion. 
Hypodermic Injection.—Injection under the skin. 
Hypogastrium.—The part of the abdomen between the navel and the 
pubes. 
Inanition.—Wasting from want of food. 
Incubation. —H atch i ng. 
Inguinal.—Belonging to the groin. 
Intussusception.—An accident by which one part of the gut slips into 
another, as the finger of a glove when pushed in at the end. 
Iris.—The membrane of the eye which regulates the size of the 
pupil, and whose color is taken as the color of the eye. 
Irrigate.—To keep a part moist by causing water or some lotion to 
constantly drop on it. 
labium.—The lip. 
Lachrymal Gland.—The gland in which tears are formed. 
Lachrymal Duct.—The tube through which the tears pass from the eye 
to the nose. 
Larynx.—The upper part of the windpipe. 
Laryngoscope.—An instrument for examining the interior of the 
larynx. 
Lesion.—An injury accompanied by loss of substance. 
Ligaments.—Bands of connective tissue. 498 
GLOSSARY. 
Ligature.—A string or cord for tying. 
Lingual.—Belonging to the tongue. 
Lithotomy.—The removal of a stone from the bladder by a cutting 
operation. 
Lithotrity.—The operation of crushing a stone in the bladder. 
Malleolus.—The ankle. 
Mamma.—The breast. 
Macerate.—To soften by steeping in a liquid, with or without heat. 
Maxilla.—The jaw. 
Meatus.-—A passage or opening. 
Menses.—The monthly discharge from the womb. 
Menstrual.—Belonging to the above. 
Mesenteric.—Belonging to the mesentery—the fold of peritoneum that 
keeps the bowel in place. 
Metacarpus.—The bony floor of the palm of the hand. 
Micturition.—The act of making water. Urinating. 
Midivife.—A woman who assists at the delivery of women in child- 
birth. 
Narcotic.—Producing sleep. 
Nares.—The nostrils. 
Nasal.—Belonging to the nose. 
Necrosis.—Death of any part of the body—usually applied to bones. 
Normal.—Natural, ordinary. 
Nucleus.—A central point. 
Obesity. —Corpu 1 ence. 
Obstetric.—Relating to childbirth. 
Occiput.—The back of the head. 
(Edema.—Watery swelling. 
Esophagus.—The gullet. 
Olfactory.—Relating to the organ of smell. 
Omentum.—The apron of fat in front of the intestines. 
Ophthalmic.—Concerning the eye. 
Ophthalmoscope.—An instrument for examining the eye. 
Opisthotonos.—A bending backward of the whole body caused by a 
simultaneous muscular contraction. 
Optic.—Concerning the sight. 
Orthopcedic Surgery.—The branch which treats distortions. 
Orthopnoca.—A state of the body in which the patient can only 
breathe when the body is upright. 
Otorrhace.—A discharge from the ears. 
Otoscope.—An instrument for examining the ears. 
Ovariotomy.—Removal of the ovary by a cutting operation. 
Parasite.— Any plant or animal living on another. 
Paresis—A slight or imperfect paralysis of motion. 
Paroxysm.—A fit. 
Patella.—The knee-cap. 
Pathology.—The study of the nature of disease. 
Pelvis.—The lower part of the abdomen. 
Perineum.—The part of the body just in front of the anus. 
Phagedcena.—Sloughing ulceration. 
Pharmacopoeia.—A list of remedies and their mode of preparation. GLOSSARY. 
499 
Pharynx.—The beginning of the gullet or food passage. 
Phlebitis.—Inflammation of a vein. 
Phlebotomy.—The act of bleeding by opening a vein. 
Photophobia.—Intolerance of light. 
Physiognomy.—The expression of the features and face generally. 
Placenta.—The after-birth. 
Plethora.—Fullness—an excess of blood. 
Pleura.—The bags which inclose the lungs. 
Pleurodynia.—Pains in the side. 
Plexus.—A network. 
Probang.—An instrument for removing obstructions in the throat. 
Probe.—A small instrument like a bodkin for trying the direction of 
a wound, etc. 
Prognosis.—The opinion as to the result of an illness. 
Prolapsus.—A slipping down. 
Ptosis.—A dropping of the upper eyelid. 
Ptyalism.—Excessive secretion of saliva. 
Pulmonary.—Belonging to the lungs. 
Pulse.—The rise and fall of the arteries with each beat of the heart. 
Purgative.—Producing an action of the bowels. 
Purulent.—Containing pus. 
Pus.—A yellow creamy fluid present in abscesses and on the surface 
of healthy granulating wounds (matter.) 
Pustule.—A small circumscribed collection of matter between the two 
layers of the skin. 
Pycemia.—A disease in which the blood is poisoned. 
Pylorus.—The opening of the stomach into the intestine. 
Pyrosis.—An eructation of watery fluids into the mouth (water-brash.) 
Quartan Ague.—An ague in which the attack recurs every third day. 
Quiescent.—At rest. 
Ranula.—A small watery tumor under the tongue. 
Ricini oleum.—Castor oil. 
Rugce.—Wrinkles. 
Saccharine. —Containing sugar. 
Saliva.—The spittle. 
Sal volatile.—Aromatic spirits of ammonia. 
Scalpel.—A knife. 
Scybala.—Small lumps of hardened faeces. 
Sebaceous.—Like suet. 
Secretion.—A natural function by which various fluids are separated 
from the blood—also the fluid separated or secreted. 
Septum.—A partition. 
Sequestrum.—A piece of dead bone. 
Serum.—The watery part of the blood. 
Serous Membrane.—A membrane which secretes or gives out serum. 
Shingles.—An eruption of the skin (herpes) due to nerve irritation. 
Sinapism.—A mustard plaster. 
Spatula.—A blunt knife for spreading plasters or poultices, and also 
an instrument for keeping soft parts out of the way during an 
operation or examination. 500 
GLOSSARY. 
Spasm.—A temporary contraction of a muscle. 
Specific Gravity.—The measure of the density of a fluid in comparison 
with that of water. 
Speculum.—An instrument for facilitating the examination of cavities. 
Sphacelus.—Mortification or gangrene of soft parts. 
Sphincter.—A muscle for closing. 
Sphygmograph.—An instrument for taking traces of the pulse. 
Spiculum.—A splinter or small piece of bone. 
Stethoscope.—An instrument for listening to the sounds of the heart and 
lungs. 
Stricture.—A contraction or narrowing of a passage. 
Styptic.—Anything useful for stopping bleeding. * 
Suture.—A stitch. Also applied to the interlocking of the bones of 
the head. 
Synovia.—The lubricating fluid found in all joints. 
Syncope. —Faintness. 
Tarsus.—The bones which form the heel and back part of the foot. 
Tenaculum.—A small hook for passing under arteries previous to se- 
curing them. 
Tendon.—A sinew. 
Tenotomy.—The operation of dividing tendons. 
Thorax.—The chest. 
Thyroid Cartilage.—The prominence in the upper part of the neck in 
front, called commonly Adam’s Apple. 
Thyroid Gland.—A gland in front of the neck, frequently enlarged in 
young women. 
Tibia.—The shin-bone. 
Tonic.—Medicine to increase the appetite for food; also involuntary 
contractions of the muscles, which are of long duration, are said 
to be tonic. (See clonic.) 
Trachea.—The windpipe. 
Tracheotomy.—The operation of making an artificial opening into the 
windpipe. 
Transfusion.—The injection of blood from the veins of one person 
into those of another. 
Trephine.—A small saw for removing a circular portion of bone. 
Trocar.—A stiletto used for tapping. 
Tubercle.—A small projection. 
Tumor.—A swelling. 
Ulna.—The bone on the inner side of the fore-arm. 
Umbilicus.—The navel. 
Urethra.—The passage through which the urine escapes from the 
bladder. 
Uvula.—The small body which hangs down at the back of the mouth. 
Vise us.—(sing.), Viscera (plural), The entrails. GENERAL INDEX. 
A PAGE. 
Absorption 122 
Acid, Carbonic 137 
Ague 219 
Air 135 
Alimentation 87 
Amusements 196 
Anatomy, Minute The, of bone 18 
Alcohol 2C2, 222 
Aorta, The 74 
Arm Bone 28 
Arteries, Carotid 74 
Arteries, F'emoral 75 
Arteries, Innominate 74 
Arteries, Pulmonary or Lung 73 
Arteries, Subclavian. 74 
Artery, Gastric 75 
Artery, The Great 74 
Artery, Hepatic 75 
Artery, Mesenteric 75 
Artery, Renal 75 
Artery, Splenic 75 
Articulations 33 
Articulations, Immovable 34 
Articulations, Mixed 34 
Articulations, Movable 34 
Auricles, Fleart 66 
B 
Bathing and Washing.... 195 
Beauty 194 
Bile 115 
Bladder, Gall 114 
Bladder, Urinary 139 
Blood, Composition of 62 
Blood, Corpuscles in 61 
Blood 60 
Blood, The, and its Vessels 59 
Bloodvessels of Bone 18 
Bone 17 
Bone, Periosteum of 17 
Bones, flat 24 
Bones, irregular 24 
Bones, long 23 
Bones, short 23 
Bone, Structure and physical prop- 
erties of , 17 
Brain . . 150 
Brain. Membranes of the 150 
Breast Bone 26 
Brilliantine 491 
Bronchi 130 
c 
Camphor, Spirits of 483 
Capillaries 76 
Cartilage 33 
Coughing 134 
Cerebellum 154 
Cerebellum, Functions of the 155 
Cerebrum 150 
Cerebrum, Functions of the 151 
Chapped Hands 489 
PAGE. 
Chest 26 
Chewing 94 
Chymification. - • 100 
Circulation, Mechanism of 81 
Circulation, Portal .... 81 
Clavicle 27 
Clothing, Errors from change of... . 232 
Clysters 486 
Collar Bone 27 
Composition, Chemical of Bone 18 
Cord, Spinal 159 
Cornea . 176 
Corpuscles, Red 61 
Cream, Cold (different formulae). .. . 489 
D 
Death 207 
Deglutition 99 
Digestion 94 
Digestion in Stomach 100 
Digestion, Intestinal 108 
Digestion, Stomachical, duration of. 106 
Digestive System, The 83 
Disease, Definition of 216 
Disease, Cause of 221 
Disinfection 189 
Dose Table 215 
Dreams 198 
Dress, Errors in 230 
Duct, Pancreatic 112 
Ducts, Bile 115 
Duct, Thoracic 124 
E 
Ear 181 
Encephalon 150 
Enemata 486 
Epidermis 38 
Expiration 133 
Eye 174 
Eyebrows 179 
Eyelashes 179 
Eyelids.... • 179 
Eye, Muscles of the 179 
F 
Fasciae 47 
Femur 29 
Fever, Signs of 237 
Fibula 31 
Fomentations 484 
Fontanels of Skull. 26 
Food, Quantity Necessary for Nutri- 
tion ....'. go 
Foods, Table showing different com- 
positions of 92 
Foot, The Bones of 31 
Forearm, The Bones of 28 
G 
Gastric Juice 102 
Ginger, Extract of 482 
Glands, Sebaceous 41 
Gymnastics 195 
501 502 
GENERAL INDEX. 
H PAGE. 
Habits 199 
Hairs 40 
Hair, Uses of the 41 
Hand, Bones of the 28 
Hearing 180 
Heart 65 
Heart, Left Auricle of the 66 
Heart, Right Auricle of the 66 
Heart, Action of the Auricles of the. 67 
Heart’s Action, Frequency of 68 
Heart, Sounds of the 68 
Heart, Left Ventricle of the 66 
Heart, Right Ventricle of the 66 
Heart, Action of the Ventricles 68 
Hiccoughs 135 
Horseback Riding 195 
Houses 187 
Humerus, The 28 
Hunger and Thirst ....... 84 
Hygienic Topics 187 
Hyoid Bone 26 
I 
Innominate Bone 28 
Inspiration 133 
Intestine, Large 118 
Intestine, Small, description of 109 
Introduction... XV. 211 
Iris I7y 
Iron in Blood 9o 
J 
Judgment. 153 
K 
Kidneys 139 
Koumiss 481 
L 
Lacteals 124 
Larynx 128 
Laughing ! 134 
Lemon, Essence of 483 
Lens, Crystalline 178 
Life 207 
Ligaments .... 33 
Light 199 
Lingual Bone 26 
Liniment, White 484 
Liver .. 114 
Lungs 13° 
Lungs, Capacity of 135 
Lymphatics 125 
M 
Malt Beverages 204 
Marrow of Bone 18 
Mastication ’.... 94 
Medulla Oblongata .. 156 
Memory 153 
Miscellaneous Topics 194 
Mucilage of Elm Bark 482 
Muscles, Actions of 55 
Muscles, Contractility of.. ■ 58 
Muscles, Elasticity ot 57 
Muscles, Involuntary 46 
Muscles, Irritability of 58 
PAGE. 
Muscles, Names of (on engraving).. 55 
Muscles, Non-striated 46 
Muscles of the Abdomen 49 
Muscles of the Back 49 
Muscles of the Breast 49 
Muscles of the Diaphragm 49 
Muscles of the Face and Cranium... 47 
Muscles of the Lower Extremities.. 51 
Muscles of the Neck 49 
Muscles of the Trunk 49 
Muscles of the Upper Extremity ... 50 
Muscles, Pectoral 5° 
Muscles, Sensibility of 58 
Muscles, Striated 46 
Muscles, The 46 
Muscles, Tonicity of 57 
Muscles, Voluntary ' 46 
N 
Nails 39 
Nameless Bone 28 
Nerve Cells 148 
Nerve Fibers 148 
Nerve Force 149 
Nerves, Cranial 158 
Nerves, Spinal 161 
Nerves, Sympathetic 164 
Nerves, Vaso Motor 167 
Nervous System 147 
Nurse and Nursing 459 
Bath 474 
Bed 462 
Bed Pans 47° 
Bed Sores 489 
Beef Cacao, Mosquera’s 479 
Beef Meal, Mosquera’s........ 478 
Blisters 4^7 
Blood, How to Stop Flow of. •. 473 
Application of Cold 473 
Changing Sheets 462 
Delirious Patients 474 
Disinfectants 471 
Douches 469 
Drawsheets 462 
Dressing Patients 463 
Dressing Wounds 464 
Enemata 4^7 
Faintness 474 
Feeding Patient 464 
Fire, Management of 461 
Fomentation 467 
Food, Peptonized 47$ 
Hemorrhages 473 
Hot Bottles and Tins 469 
Ice, Use of 4^5 
Insensible Patients 473 
Liniments 468 
Lotions 468 
Medicine, Administration of ... 466 
Night Stools-... 47° 
Observation and Inquiry 4^° 
Recipes for Sick Diet 475~478 
Sick Room Cookery 475 
Syringes • • 4^9 GENERAL INDEX. 
503 
PAGE. 
Nurse and Nursing—Suppositories.. 466 
Undressing Patient 471 
Ventilation 460 
Washing Patient 463 
o 
Occupation 196 
(Esophagus 100 
Oil, Camphorated 482 
Oil, Carbolized 482 
Opium 200 
Ointment 483 
Organs, Urinary 139 
Out Houses 188 
Oxygen 136 
P 
Pancreas 112 
Pancreatic Juice 112 
Patella 29 
Pelvis 29 
Peppermint, Essence of 483 
Peritoneum 17 
Perspiration 42 
Peyer’s Glands 1x2 
Physical Training 194 
Physician, Choosing a 457 
Pons Varolii. 157 
Poultices 485 
Prehension of Food 94 
Prescriptions 212 
Pulsation at Different Ages 69 
Pulse 69 
Pulse, Various Influences on 70, 235 
R 
Reason 153 
Recipes, Domestic 481 
Respiration 127 
Respiration, Changes Affected by... 135 
Respiration, Types of 134 
Retina 178 
Ribs 27 
Rough Skin 489 
s 
Saliva 97 
Salves and Ointments. 483 
Scapula, The 27 
Seams of Skull 26 
Senses .. 169 
Shampooing 488 
Sheaths, The 47 
Shin Bone, The 31 
Shoulder Blade, The 27 
Sight 174 
Skeleton, Bones of the 23 
Skeleton, The Human, explanation 
of numbers on engraving 20 
Skin, The, and its Appendages 36 
Skull, The Bones of. 25 
Sleep 197 
Sleep, Broken 229 
Smell 173 
Sneezing J 34 
PAGE. 
Sobbing 134 
Spinal Cord, Functions of the 160 
Spine, The 24 
Spleen 117 
Spots, Soft of Skull 26 
Sternum 26 
Stomach 102 
Stomach, Digestion in 100 
Stomach, Hole in the 103 
Sutures of Skull 26 
Swallowing 99 
Swimming 195 
Symptoms of Disease 234 
Synovial Membrane 34 
Synovia 34 
Swallowing 99 
Sweat, Quantity of 44 
T 
Taste 171 
Tear Glands 179 
Teeth 95 
Temperature of Body 236 
Temperature, How to Take 238 
Tendons 57 
Thigh Bone 29 
Thirst ..... 86 
Thorax 26 
Thymus Gland 132 
Thyroid Glands 132 
Tibia, The 31 
Tobacco 201, 226 
Toilet Recipes 488 
Tongue, Signs of Disease on 238 
Tooth Powder.... 488 
Touch 169 
Trachea 129 
Training, Physical 194 
Treating 200 
U 
Urine 141 
Urine, Composition of 142 
Useful Recipes 492 
V 
Veins, The 77 
Ventricles, Heart 60 
Villi, Intestinal 109 
VocalChords 128 
Voice 137 
W 
Washing and Bathing 195 
Water 191 
Water, Carbolized 481 
Water Closets 188 
Water Lime .481 
Water, Florida .... 490 
Water, Glycerine Toilet 490 
Water, Rose 491 
Water, Orange Flower ... 491 
Water, German Cologne 491 
Windpipe 129 
Yawning 134 INDEX OF DISEASES 
A PAGE. 
Alcoholism 374 
Ansemia 279 
Anti-Fat 449 
Aphthae 296 
Apoplexy 378 
Asthma.. 346 
B 
Baccilli (consumption) 360 
Ealdness 250 
Barber’s Itch 260 
Bilious Attack 308 
Black Eye 433 
Blood, Diseases of the 277 
Blood Poisoning .... 289 
Bloodshot Eyes 434 
Bloodvessels, Diseases of the 277 
Boils 440 
Bow Legs 248 
Breakbone Fever 417 
Bright, Dr. 366 
Bright’s Disease 366, 367 
Bronchitis 348 
Bronchitis, Chronic 350 
Bronchitis, Epidemic 351 
Bunions 253 
Burning of the Feet 258 
Burns and Scalds 443 
c 
Canker Sore. 293 
Carbuncle 440 
Cardialgia 310 
Care of the Eyes 437 
Care of the Feet 258 
Cancer 427 
Cataract 437 
Catarrh, Chronic 338 
Catarrh, Nasal 337 
Chafing 442 
Chicken-Pox. 413 
Chilblains.. 255 
Chlorosis 281 
Choking 441 
Cholera, Asiatic 423 
Cholera Infantum 426 
Cholera Mixture 448 
Cholera Morbus 324 
Chorea 377 
Chronic Bronchitis 350 
l'AGE. 
Chronic Dyspepsia 309 
Clergyman’s Sore Throat 298 
Clubfoot 248 
Cold Feet 256 
Cold in the Head 337 
Colic, Hepatic 323 
Colic, Intestinal 322 
Colic, Lead 325 
Color Blindness 436 
Coma 379 
Constipation 319 
Consumption of the Lung 357 
Convulsions in Children 398 
Corns 252 
Coryza 337 
Coughing Blood from the Lungs... 363 
Cough, Whooping 343 
Cough, Winter 342 
Cramps, Muscular— 275 
Cramps, Writer’s 275 
Croup 340 
Curvature of Spine 248 
D 
Dandruff 257 
Delirium Tremens ... 374 
Diabetes 368 
Diarrhoea 313 
Diarrhoea in Children 446 
Digestive Organs, Diseases of the. . 293 
Diphtheria 403 
Diseases of the Ear., 438 
Diseases of the Eye .... 433 
Diseases, General. . 401 
Diseases of the Nervous System.... 374 
Diseases of the Respiratory Organs. 337 
Diseases of the Urinary Organs.... 366 
Dislocations 245 
Dropsy of the Peritoreum 329 
Dysentery 315 
Dysentery, Epidemic 317 
Dyspepsia 308 
Dyspepsia, Acute 308 
Dyspepsia, Chronic 309 
E 
Earache 439 
Epilepsy . 386 
Erysipelas 270 
Bunions. 
504 INDEX OF DISEASES. 
505 
F PAGE. 
Fainting 443 
Fat and Anti-Fat 449 
Feet, Care of the 258 
Felon 242 
Fever 415 
Fever, Breakbone 417 
Fever, Eruptive 414 
Fever, Gastric 304 
Fever, Intermittent 416 
Fever. Malarial 416 
Fever, Remittent 416 
Fever, Typhoid 417 
Fever, Worm 430 
Flat Foot 248 
Foreign Bodies in the Ear 439 
Foreign Bodies in the Eye 435 
Foreign Bodies in the Nose 439 
Freckles 265 
Frost Bites 445 
G 
Galloping Consumption 359 
Gas in Stomach 311 
Gin Liver 332 
Goitre Exophthalmic 287 
Gravel 369 
Grip 351 
H 
Hsematuria 372 
Haemoptysis 363 
Hay Fever 347 
Headache, Nervous 389 
Headache, Sick 305 
Heartburn 310 
Heart, Functional Diseases of the... 285 
Heart, Neuralgia or Spasms of the.. 286 
Heart, Rupture of the 289 
Heart Sac, Inflammation of the 288 
Heart, Valvular Disease of the 283 
Hemorrhoids 441 
Hiccough 345 
Hip-Joint Disease 247 
Hives.. 267 
Hobnailed Liver 332 
Hydrocephalus 382 
Hydrophobia 376 
Hydrothorax 355 
Hypochondriasis 392 
Hysteria 384 
I 
Incontinence of Urine 370 
Indigestion ,...308, 309 
Inflammation of the Conjunctiva... 435 
Inflammation of the Lung 355 
Inflammation of the Stomach 303 
Influenza 351 
Insect Bites 455 
Insolation 380 
Insomnia 393 
Itch 269 
J 
Jaundice .... 332 
K PAGE. 
Knock-Knee 248 
L 
La Grippe 351 
Lice 249 
Liver Disease 331 
Liver, Functional Affections of the... 333 
Lock Jaw 382 
Lungs, Inflammation of the 355 
M 
Malaria 415 
Marriage of Consumptives 365 
Measles 405 
Measles, False 268 
Meningitis 381 
Mercurial Sore Mouth 294 
Moth Patches 263 
Mumps 302 
Muscular Rheumatism 273 
N 
Nettle Rash 267 
Neuralgia 395 
Neuralgia, Sciatic 3^7 
Nose Bleed 277 
o 
Overflow of Tears 437 
P 
Palsy 382 
Palsy, Shaking 276 
Paralysis 382 
Parasites 249 
Peritonitis 327 
Pharyngitis 298 
Phthisis Pulmonalis 357 
Piles 441 
Pimples (Acne) 26 c 
Pleurisy 352 
Pleurisy, Chronic 354 
Pleurodynia 273 
Pneumonia 355 
Poison and its Antidotes 450 
Poisonous Plants 455 
Q 
Quinsy 300 
R 
Rabies 376 
Regurgitation 310 
Rheumatism, Articular .. 401 
Rheumatism, Muscular 273 
Rickets .. 241 
RingWorm 268 
Rose Rash 268 
Rupture 442 
S 
Salt Rheum 266 
Scabies 269 
Scalds and Burns 443 
Scarlet Fever 407 506 
INDEX OF DISEASES. 
PAGE. 
Scarlatina 407 
Sciatic Neuralgia 397 
Scrofula 278 
Scurvy 282 
Sea Sickness .... 331 
Shaking Palsy 276 
Small-Pox 41 x 
Snake Bites 454 
Soothing Syrup 447 
Sore Mouth 296 
Sore Mouth, Mercurial 294 
Sore Throat 297 
Sore Throat, Clergyman’s 298 
Spice Plaster 447 
Spleen, Enlargement of the 330 
Sprains.... 244 
Squinting 437 
Stammering 399 
St. Anthony’s Fire 270 
Stiff Neck 273 
Stomach, Inflammation of the...... 303 
Stut'ering 349 
St. Vitus’ Dance 377 
Stye 434 
Sunburn 264 
Sunstroke . 380 
Sweating of the Feet 258 
T 
I ape Worm 431 
Tetanus.... 382 
Tetter 266 
PAGE. 
Throat, Sore 297 
Thrush 295 
Toe-Nail, Ingrown 254 
Tonsilitis * 300 
Tonsilitis, Chronic 301 
Toothache 448 
Tympanitis 311 
Typhoid Fever 417 
u 
Ulcer of the Mouth. 293 
Urine, Bloody 372 
Urine, Incontinence of 370 
Urine, Retention of 372 
V 
Variola 41c 
Varioloid 413 
Veins, Varicose 289 
Vertigo 383 
w 
Warts 259 
Whitlow. ... 242 
Whooping Cough 343 
Wild Hairs (Eye) 437 
Winter Cough 342 
Worm Fever 430 
Worms 429 
Wounds 444 
Writer’s Cramp 275 
Wry Neck 248